rec 561 - abb group · 2018. 5. 10. · 2.1 rec 561 types. three types of control terminal rec 561...

ABB Network Partner AB

ABB Network Partner ABS-721 71Västerås, SwedenPhone +46 21 321300Fax +46 21 146918

User’s Guide

REC 561Bay levelcontrol terminal

1MRK 511 009-UEN

Version 1.0-00October 1996

1 User’s Guide contents

2 Introduction

3 Installation

4 General functions

5 Protection functions

6 Control functions

7 Monitoring functions

8 Index

9 Diagrams

How to use this manual

This manual should be used as follows: The bookmarks in the left frame shows the contents, and are also links to respectively headers. To see the following or previous page, or to reach the first or last page, use the arrows in the toolbar. Bolded headers are linked.

ABB Network Partner AB- 1Page

Function:

1User´s Guide contents - REC 561 1MRK 580 144-XEN

Version 1.0-00October 1996 Basic

1 Schematic structure of the User’s Guide

Section Document Document number Basic/Optional

1. User’s Guide contents User’s Guide contents, REC 561 1MRK 580 144-XEN Basic

Revisions, REC 561 1MRK 580 145-XEN Basic

2. Introduction, REC 561 Introduction, REC 561 1MRK 580 146-XEN Basic

Ordering data sheet 1MRK 580 149-XEN —

Requirements and basic technical data, REC 561 1MRK 580 147-XEN Basic

Construction and hardware characteristics, REC 561 1MRK 580 148-XEN Basic

3. Installation Installation and commissioning 1MRK 580 166-XEN Basic

Local man machine communication 1MRK 580 156-XEN Basic

Menu tree, REC 561 1MRK 580 189-XEN Basic

Menu tree, appendix 1MRK 580 158-XEN Basic

4. General functions Terminal identification 1MRK 580 160-XEN Basic

Activation of setting group 1MRK 580 162-XEN Basic

Restricted settings via man machine interface 1MRK 580 163-XEN Basic

I/O-system configuration 1MRK 580 190-XEN Basic

Configurable logic 1MRK 580 161-XEN Basic

5. Protection functions Tripping logic 1MRK 580 120-XEN Basic

Synchronism and energizing check with voltage selec-tion single CB

1MRK 580 152-XEN Optional

Synchronism and energizing check with voltage selec-tion doubleCB


Synchronism and energizing check with voltage selec-tion 1½ CB


Fuse failure supervision function 1MRK 580 169-XEN Optional

Autoreclosing, single and/or three phase 1MRK 580 170-XEN Optional

Breaker failure protection 1MRK 580 171-XEN Optional

Loss of power system voltage 1MRK 580 153-XEN Optional

6. Control functions Apparatus control 1MRK 580 150-XEN Basic

Interlocking 1MRK 580 151-XEN Basic

Command function 1MRK 580 165-XEN Basic

Event function 1MRK 580 140-XEN Basic

7. Monitoring functions Service report 1MRK 580 137-XEN Basic

Direct current measurement quantities 1MRK 580 154-XEN Basic

Measurement of alternating quantities 1MRK 580 159-XEN Optional

Pulse counter 1MRK 580 187-XEN Optional

Time synchronization 1MRK 580 135-XEN Basic

Remote communication 1MRK 580 142-XEN Basic

Internal events 1MRK 580 134-XEN Basic

Disturbance report - Introduction 1MRK 580 132-XEN Basic

Disturbance report - Settings 1MRK 580 133-XEN Basic

Event recorder - Station Monitoring System 1MRK 580 139-XEN Basic

Indications 1MRK 580 136-XEN Basic

Disturbance recorder 1MRK 580 141-XEN Optional

8. Index Index, REC 561 1MRK 580 xxx-XEN Basic

9. Diagrams Terminal diagrams, REC 561 1MRK 580 155-XEN Basic

Default configuration, REC 561 1MRK 580 188-XEN Basic

ABB Network Partner ABUser´s Guide contents - REC 561

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 144-XENPage 1 - 2

2 List of documents

Section Document Document number Version Date of edition

1. User’s Guide contents, REC 561 1MRK 580 144-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Revisions, REC 561 1MRK 580 145-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

2. Introduction, REC 561 1MRK 580 146-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Requirements and basic technical data, REC 561 1MRK 580 147-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Construction and hardware characteristics, REC 561 1MRK 580 148-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

3. Installation and commissioning 1MRK 580 166-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Local man machine communication 1MRK 580 156-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Menu tree, REC 561 1MRK 580 189-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Menu tree, appendix 1MRK 580 158-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

4. Terminal identification 1MRK 580 160-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Activation of setting group 1MRK 580 162-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Restricted settings via man machine interface 1MRK 580 163-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

I/O-system configuration 1MRK 580 190-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Configurable logic 1MRK 580 161-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

5. Tripping logic 1MRK 580 120-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Synchronism and energizing check with voltage selection single CB

1MRK 580 152-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Synchronism and energizing check with voltage selection doubleCB

1MRK 580 167-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Synchronism and energizing check with voltage selection 1½ CB

1MRK 580 168-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Fuse failure supervision function 1MRK 580 169-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Autoreclosing, single and/or three phase 1MRK 580 170-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Breaker failure protection 1MRK 580 171-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Loss of power system voltage 1MRK 580 153-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

6. Apparatus control 1MRK 580 150-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Interlocking 1MRK 580 151-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Command function 1MRK 580 165-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Event function 1MRK 580 140-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

7. Service report 1MRK 580 137-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Direct current measurement quantities 1MRK 580 154-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Measurement of alternating quantities 1MRK 580 159-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Pulse counter 1MRK 580 187-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Time synchronization 1MRK 580 135-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Remote communication 1MRK 580 142-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Internal events 1MRK 580 134-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Disturbance report - Introduction 1MRK 580 132-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Disturbance report - Settings 1MRK 580 133-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Event recorder - Station Monitoring System 1MRK 580 139-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Indications 1MRK 580 136-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

Disturbance recorder 1MRK 580 141-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

8. Index, REC 561 1MRK 580 xxx-XEN 1.0-00 August 1996

9. Terminal diagrams, REC 561 1MRK 580 155-XEN

Default configuration, REC 561 1MRK 580 188-XEN

ABB Network Partner AB Page I

Contents Page

Application.............................................................................................. 2-1General................................................................................................... 2-1

REC 561 types ............................................................................... 2-2Application examples ..................................................................... 2-2

Basic features......................................................................................... 2-8Apparatus control ........................................................................... 2-8Interlocking ..................................................................................... 2-8Time tagged events........................................................................ 2-9Configurable logic........................................................................... 2-9Remote serial communication - LON ............................................. 2-9

Optional features .................................................................................. 2-10Additional apparatus control......................................................... 2-10Additional interlocking .................................................................. 2-10Measurements.............................................................................. 2-10Pulse counter ............................................................................... 2-11Synchronism and energizing check.............................................. 2-11Fuse failure supervision ............................................................... 2-11Multibreaker autoreclosing ........................................................... 2-11Breaker-failure protection ............................................................. 2-12Loss-of-power system voltage...................................................... 2-12Disturbance recorder.................................................................... 2-12Remote serial communication - SPA............................................ 2-12Input/output facilities..................................................................... 2-13

Ordering................................................................................................ 2-15General................................................................................................. 2-19Requirements on voltage instrument transformers............................... 2-19Requirements on current instrument transformers ............................... 2-19

Choice of current transformers..................................................... 2-19Conditions for the CT requirements ............................................. 2-19Fault current ................................................................................. 2-20REC 561 current transformer requirements ................................. 2-20

Requirements for the LON communication link for remote communication.................................................................... 2-21Requirements for the SPA communication link for remote communication.................................................................... 2-21Technical data ...................................................................................... 2-22Hardware design .................................................................................. 2-27Hardware modules ............................................................................... 2-28

ABB Network Partner ABPage II

Main processing module (MPM)...................................................2-30Signal processing module (SPM) .................................................2-30Serial communication module (SCM) ...........................................2-31Power supply module (PSM) ........................................................2-32Man-machine interface (MMI).......................................................2-32Input/output modules ....................................................................2-33

Binary in/out module (IOM) ..................................................2-33Binary input module (BIM) ...................................................2-33Binary output module (BOM) ...............................................2-34mA input module (MIM)........................................................2-35

Transformer input module (TRM) .................................................2-35A/D-conversion module (ADM).....................................................2-35

Mounting system...................................................................................2-36Mechanical mounting....................................................................2-36Rack mounting..............................................................................2-36Flush mounting .............................................................................2-37Wall mounting...............................................................................2-38Electrical connections...................................................................2-39


Function:

)

d)

ntrol,efulhard-te

ory,

561,pro-uleshigh

oneyn-aila-

used

2Introduction - REC 561 1MRK 580 146-XEN


1 ApplicationThe control terminal REC 561 is used at bay level in a substation to con-trol and supervise circuit breakers, disconnectors, and earthing switches inany kind of switchgear/busbar arrangement. These features are availablein the REC 561 control terminal:

Basic features:

• Apparatus control for 1 bay (pole discordance protection included• Interlocking for 1 bay• Time-tagged events• Configurable logic• Remote-serial communication - LON• One binary input module• One command output module

Optional features:

• Additional apparatus control (pole discordance protection include• Additional interlocking• Measurements• Pulse counters for metering• Synchronism and energizing check • Fuse failure supervision• Multibreaker autoreclosing• Breaker-failure protection • Loss-of-power system voltage • Disturbance recorder• Remote serial communication - SPA• Additional input/output facilities

2 GeneralStandardized, pre-tested software functions such as apparatus cointerlocking, synchro-check, automatic reclosing are examples of usfunctions in a bay. These functions can be implemented in the same ware or control terminal with retained high availability of the complesystem.

The control terminal includes plug-in units, such as processor, meminput and output modules, all mounted in a 19-inch rack.

Binary and analogue process signals are connected directly to RECwhich fulfils the same EMC standards as applicable for high-voltage tections. The terminal is also provided with command output modwith double-pole outputs and supervision functions to ensure a degree of security against unwanted operations.

Two serial communication ports are available within the REC 561, LON port (based on the LonWorks Network) and one port for an aschronous link, type SPA. They are independent of each other and avble on the rear side of the terminal. This enables the REC 561 to be

ABB Network Partner ABIntroduction - REC 561

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 146-XENPage 2 - 2

ter.

o 12kings on andig-

ble- sev-nal

owsge-ertain

ples.able

ion,ltage,ther

in a Substation Monitoring System (SMS) and in a complete SubstationAutomation system. The communication with REC 561 uses optical fibresto eliminate the influence of the electromagnetic interference.

2.1 REC 561 types Three types of control terminal REC 561 are available. These types con-tain control functions and interlocking functions that are applicable fordifferent switchyard/busbar arrangements and different number of bays.All the types include as basic pole discordance protection, configurablelogic, one LON communication port, one binary input module and onecommand output module. For all three types of REC 561, a suitablenumber of binary input/output modules must be added.

Type 1 (basic):

The basic version of REC 561 contains apparatus control modules for 1bay and 14 high-voltage apparatuses and also interlocking modules forsingle or double-breaker arrangement. This version is used when highsecurity, dependability, and fault tolerance are required for a substation.

Type 2 (basic + option 1):

This type of REC 561 contains apparatus control modules for up to 3 baysand 24 high-voltage apparatuses and also interlocking modules for threesingle or two double-breaker arrangements or one 1½ breaker diame


This type of REC 561 is intended to be used for arrangements up tbays with up to 24 high-voltage apparatuses. It also contains interlocmodules for two 1½ breaker diameters. The normal use of this type imedium-voltage level with a small number of apparatuses per baywith simple interlocking conditions, which can be solved by the confurable logic, that is, without standard interlocking modules.

2.2 Application examples The control terminal is basically used for one bay, single or doubreaker arrangement. Optionally, the control terminal can be used foreral bays. See “REC 561 types” on page 2. Table 1, “Applicable optiofunctions for different typical switchyard arrangements,” on page 3 shthe applicable optional functions for different typical switchyard arranments. The cross (x) indicates that the options can be used for a carrangement.

The figures of the switchyard arrangements below are shown as examThe number of disconnectors and earthing switches are configurwithin the maximum number of apparatuses.

Note that the optional-functions, fuse failure, breaker-failure protectand loss-of-power system voltage require three-phase current and vowhich are applicable only for one bay. One transformer module for ei

Introduction - REC 561ABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 146-XENPage 2 - 3

Version 1.0-00

1½-
1 A or 5 A is available in a REC 561. Only one alternative of the autore-closing functions can be selected. The synchro-check function for theCB arrangement is available for one diameter in REC 561.
Table 1: Applicable optional functions for different typical switchyard arrangements

Functions

Arrangements

1 bay 2-3 bays singleCB

2 bays double CB

One 1½- CB diam

Two 1½- CB diam

12 baysSingle

CBDouble CB

One type of three is always selected.

Type 1 (Basic) x x

Type 2 (Basic + option 1) x x x

Type 3 (Basic + option 2) x x

Options

Pulse counters for meter-ing (12 in total)

x x x x x x x

Autoreclosing for 1 CB x x x

Autoreclosing for 3 CB x x x x x x

Autoreclosing for 6 CB x x x

Transformer and A/D-con-version for 5U and 5I,1 A or 5 A

x x x x x x x

The functions below require the Transformer and A/D-conversion module.

Increased measuring accuracy for U and I (factory calibration)

x x x x x x x

Synchro-check, 1 bay,single CB

x x

Synchro-check, 1 bay, double CB

x

Synchro-check, 3 bays, single CB

x

Synchro-check, 2 bays, double CB

x

Synchro-check for one 1½-CB diameter

x

Fuse failure for 1 bay x x

Breaker-failure protection for 1 single CB bay

x

Loss-of-power systemvoltage for 1 bay

x x

Disturbance recorder x x x x x x x


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 146-XENPage 2 - 4

heckalso are

and I

Single/double busbar, single breaker

This is the basic configuration with one, single-breaker bay per REC 561and up to 14 high-voltage apparatuses. This configuration can have fullfunctionality for all options. REC 561 type 1 is used.

Fig. 1 Double busbar, single-breaker arrangement

Double busbar, double breaker

This configuration with one, double-breaker bay per REC 561 and up to14 high-voltage apparatuses can also have full functionality for all optionsexcept the breaker-failure protection, which can handle only one circuitbreaker and thus is not applicable in this configuration. To get the linecurrent, the currents through the circuit breakers are summed externally.REC 561 type 1 is used.

Fig. 2 Double busbar, double-breaker arrangement

Breaker-and-a-half

In REC 561 type 2, control and interlocking functions for one diameter ofa 1½-breaker arrangement are included. As an option, the synchro-cfunction for each circuit breaker, including the voltage selection, can be included. The voltages to be used for the synchro-check functionbased on one-phase values. If P, Q, f, and three-phase values of U

1 U1 U

3 I

3 U

REC561

(X80146-1)

1 U1 U

3 I

3 U

REC561

(X80146-2)


Version 1.0-00

are needed, then external transducers connected to mA inputs in REC 561can be used. To get the line current, the currents through the circuit break-ers are summed externally.

The synchro-check function is applicable only for one diameter. By usingREC 561 type 3, one more diameter can be added including control andinterlocking functions, but then external synchro-check functions areneeded. Control of all earthing switches within the two diameters are lim-ited, because the upper limit of the number of apparatuses to be controlledis still 24.

Fig. 3 Breaker-and-a-half arrangement

Three single-breaker bays

REC 561 type 2 is normally used for this application. The maximumnumber of single-breaker bays including synchro-check functions arethree. Of course one of the bays can be a bus-coupler bay. The voltages tobe used for the synchro-check function are based on one-phase values. IfP, Q, f, and three-phase values of U and I are needed, then external trans-ducers connected to mA inputs in REC 561 can be used.

Fig. 4 Three, single-breaker arrangement

REC561

1 U

1 U

1 U

1 U

1 I

1 I

(X80146-3)

1 U1 U

1 U

REC561

1 U1 U

(X80146-4)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 146-XENPage 2 - 6

The fuse failure function associated with the energizing check function issolved by an external device and connected to the binary inputs in REC561.

Two double-breaker bays

REC 561 type 2 is normally used for this application. The maximumnumber of double-breaker bays including synchro-check functions aretwo. The voltages to be used for the synchro-check function are based onone-phase values. If P, Q, f and three-phase values of U and I must be pre-sented for the operator, then external transducers connected to mA inputsin REC 561 can be used. To get the line current, the currents through thecircuit breakers are summed externally.

Fig. 5 Two, double-breaker arrangement

The fuse failure function associated with the energizing check function issolved by external detection of the fuse failure and connected to thebinary inputs in REC 561.

Up to 12 bays

REC 561 type 3 must be used for this application. The normal use of thistype is on medium-voltage level with a small number of apparatuses perbay and with simple interlocking conditions, which can be solved by theconfigurable logic, that is, without standard interlocking modules. Theupper limit of the number of apparatuses to be controlled is still 24. Thesynchro-check function for several bays (> 3 bays) can be solved by usingthe synchro-check function for one bay and by connecting the requiredline voltages via an external voltage selection to the control terminal.

The fuse failure function associated with the energizing check function issolved by an external device and connected to the binary inputs in REC561.

1 U1 U

1 I

1 U

REC561

1 I

1 U (X80146-5)


Version 1.0-00

Fig. 6 Arrangement for up to 12 bays

( ) . . .REC561 ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

1 U

(X80146-6)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 146-XENPage 2 - 8

ualitions

poleforhase

ed toitch. In

thetch.Theringtionsing,

s inry toble-

achontion

3 Basic features

3.1 Apparatus control The apparatus control function performs open and close commands ofhigh-voltage apparatuses in one bay and indicates the status. The functionhandles commands coming from different operator places, that is, fromthe station MMI, control centre, or local panel. Permission to operate isgiven after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as inter-locking, synchro-check, operator mode, or external conditions.

Other apparatus control functions include:

• Selection and reservation function to prevent double operation• Command supervision• Selection of operator place• Block/deblock of operation• Block/deblock of updating of position indications• Manual setting of position indications• Overriding of the reservation and interlocking functions• Pole discordance protection.

The pole discordance protection applies to circuit breakers with individoperation gears per pole or phase and is based on checking the posof the auxiliary contacts of the breaker. A discordance caused by onefailing to close or to open can be tolerated only for a limited time, instance, as a single-phase open time in connection with single-preclosing.

The apparatus control function in REC 561 is prepared to be connecta dedicated control panel for local control. This panel can have a swfor selection of the operators’ mode; station/remote, local, or back-upstation/remote mode, the station is controlled from the station MMI orcontrol centre, depending on the selection from a VDU or station swiControl from the local panel can only occur in local or back-up mode. local mode ensures that the interlocking requirements are fulfilled duall operations, while the back-up mode is used in emergency situawithout interlocking. Hence the back-up mode bypasses the interlockthat is, the REC 561.

3.2 Interlocking Interlocking means inhibiting the operation of high-voltage apparatusea switchgear to prevent damage of the switchgear and personal injuoperators. The basic interlocking functions are made for single or doubreaker arrangement for one bay.

The interlocking function consists of software modules located in econtrol terminal. For the station-wide interlocking, communicatibetween modules in different bays is performed via the communicabus or hard-wired via the binary inputs/outputs.


Version 1.0-00

The positions of the high-voltage apparatuses are inputs to the softwaremodules distributed in the control terminals. Each module contains theinterlocking logic for a bay. The interlocking logic in a module is differ-ent, depending on the bay function and the switchyard arrangements, thatis, single-breaker or double-breaker bays have different modules.

3.3 Time tagged events Events are time tagged at the source, so REC 561 provides high accuracywith a resolution of 1 ms with minute pulse for synchronization. The time-tagged events are transferred over the LON bus to the station level forrecording and storing. Thirty-six event function blocks are available in abasic REC 561 for time tagging or data exchange between control termi-nals. That means that up to 576 (16 * 36) events and signals for dataexchange can be handled in a basic control terminal. Eight more eventfunction blocks (up to 704 events and signals for data exchange) are avail-able in REC 561 type 3 (basic + option 2).

Forty-eight binary signals can be selected to the event recorder function inthe control terminal. An event list for up to 150 time-tagged events,selected from these 48 signals, are available for each of the last 10recorded disturbances. These lists are available via the PC connection onthe front, via the SMS port, or via the complete Substation Automationsystem.

3.4 Configurable logic Many configuration logic circuits are built into the REC 561 terminal andare thus available to the user. The configuration logic contains these func-tional blocks: 249 AND, 199 OR, 79 inverters, 39 exclusive OR, 5 Set-Reset, 10 timers delayed at pick-up and drop-out, and 50 pulse-timers.The configuration is performed from the CAP 531 configuration tool.

3.5 Remote serial communication - LON

A serial communication port based on the LonWorks Network (herecalled the LON bus) is available within the REC 561. This port is used totransfer data between different control terminals and PC-based operatorstations. The communication with REC 561 uses optical fibres (glass orplastic) to eliminate influence of electromagnetic interferences.

The REC 561 can communicate with the HV/Control software libraryinstalled in a PC-based operator station, type MicroSCADA under Win-dows NT. That gives the operator, in a standardized way, possibilities tocontrol high-voltage apparatuses and receive information from the substa-tion.

The benefits achieved by use of the LON bus in protection and controlsystems include direct communication among all control terminals in thesystem and support for multi-master implementations. Further the LONbus has an open concept, so that REC 561 can communicate with externaldevices using same standard of networks variables.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 146-XENPage 2 - 10

1½-

ans-entunc-ed

ctivecur-

andhase

s are

luesand

the for

4 Optional features

4.1 Additional apparatus control

Additional apparatus control functions are available as options. They areapplicable for several bays, that is, up to 12 bays and 24 high-voltageapparatuses in total.

4.2 Additional interlocking Additional interlocking modules for more bays are available as options. Intotal three single-breaker bays or two double-breaker bays or two breaker diameters.

4.3 Measurements A total of 10 analogue input quantities can be connected to the trformer module consisting of five voltage transformers and five currtransformers. These direct inputs are normally used for measuring ftions according to the following, when the control terminal is designonly for one bay:

• Three-phase currents• Residual current of the protected line• One-phase current, used for disturbance recorder• Three-phase voltages• One-phase voltage for reference voltage from busbar 1• One-phase voltage for reference voltage from busbar 2

At three-phase measurement, the values of active power (W), reapower (var), frequency (Hz), and the mean value for voltage (U) and rent (I) can be calculated.

To reach a high accuracy in the measurements (≤ 0.25% of full scale for Uand I), a factory calibration can be made. Here, full scale is 1.3 x Ur and2.0 x Ir.

When the control terminal is designed for several bays, the voltagecurrent inputs can be galvanically separated and used for single-pmeasuring.

Besides the mentioned inputs above, analogue inputs for mA signalalso available.

For both categories of inputs (direct via transformer and mA), the vacan be updated cyclically and be presented both on the local MMI remotely.

In the application software, alarm limits to be used as conditions inconfiguration logic can be specified. Dead-band handling is usedtransfer over the LON bus.


Version 1.0-00

aker,

l andosing firsted to

nalscon-

4.4 Pulse counter The normal use for this function is the counting of energy pulses for kWhand kvarh in both directions from external energy meters. Up to 12 binaryinputs in a REC 561 can be used for this purpose with a frequency of up to40 Hz. The number of pulses in the counter is then reported via the LONbus to the station MMI or read via SPA as a service value.

4.5 Synchronism and energizing check

The synchro-check function is used for controlled interconnection of a line inan interconnected network. When used, the function gives an enable signal atpreset satisfactory conditions. The synchro-check function measures the dif-ference between the line and busbar voltages, for the voltage (UDiff), phaseangle (PhaseDiff), and frequency (FreqDiff). It operates and permits clos-ing of the circuit breaker when the set conditions are met.

The function can be used at manual closing and with the autoreclosingfunction as a condition to be fulfilled before the breaker is closed.

4.6 Fuse failure supervision

The operation of the built-in fuse failure supervision function is based onthe detection of a zero-sequence voltage without the presence of a zerosequence current. The selection of operation, based on the presence of anegative sequence voltage without the negative sequence current, is possi-ble by means of settings. Its effect on the operation of the REC 561 is pro-grammable in two ways: either by blocking the energizing function or theloss of voltage protection, or by giving information on the fuse failureonly.

4.7 Multibreaker autoreclosing

The reclosing function can be selected to perform single-phase and three-phase reclosing from eight single-shot or multi-shot reclosing programs.The three-phase autoreclose open time can be selected to give either high-speed autoreclosing or delayed autoreclosing. Three-phase autoreclosingcan be performed with or without the use of the synchronism check orenergizing function.

Provision is included for co-operation between autoreclosing functionmodules in the same terminal or between REC 561 terminals to achievesequential reclosing of the two breakers at a line end in a 1½-bredouble-breaker, or ring-bus arrangement.

One unit is defined as master; it recloses first. Should it be successfuno trip occurs, the second module is released to complete the reclsequence. For persistent faults, the breaker reclosing is limited to thebreaker. Some connections between the function modules are requirsend signals and to release the autorecloser with low priority.

Up to six autoreclosing functions can be used in REC 561. Trip sigfrom external protections start the autoreclosing functions and are nected via binary inputs of the terminal.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 146-XENPage 2 - 12

or-inal.flu-art of

t the

4.8 Breaker-failure protection

The breaker-failure protection in the REC 561 operates on the basis of thephase currents that flow through a corresponding line circuit breaker. Thisoptional function is intended to be used only for a single-breaker bay.

Two timers are available, one independent of the other: timer T1 for arepeated tripping of its own circuit breaker and timer T2, which operatesthe corresponding output relays connected into the breaker-failure trip-ping logic that is built up for the whole substation.

External tripping functions start the operation of the breaker-failure pro-tection and are connected to corresponding binary inputs for this purpose.

4.9 Loss-of-power system voltage

This function provides a delayed three-phase trip in case of loss-of-powersystem voltage in all three phases. The trip and alarm are issued when allthree voltage phases have been low for more than seven seconds. It can beused as a preparative step for power-system restoration.

4.10Disturbance recorder The disturbance recording function is an important part of a substationmonitoring system, which enables the evaluation of different eventswithin the power system.

The optional disturbance recorder, with high performance, is one of thebuilding blocks within REC 561. It can memorize up to 10 analogue and48 binary signals (input binary signals or internal signals) that are availa-ble within the terminal. At maximum configuration the recording time is10 seconds.

All the recorded analogue and binary signals are programmable to start arecording. Analogue signals are also programmable for overfunctions andunderfunctions, and binary signals can start recording with a transitionfrom a logical 0 to a logical 1 and vice versa.

The time base is synchronized with an internal clock and via the synchro-nizing facilities further on to the system. Pre-fault time, post-fault time,and limit time can be set in wide ranges.

Disturbance records can be collected locally by means of a PC that is usedfor local man-machine communication, as well as remotely within theSMS and the Substation Automation system. REVAL, the disturbanceevaluating PC-based program that operates in MS Windows, is also avail-able.

4.11 Remote serial communication - SPA

Optionally, one SPA communication port is available with REC 561´s cresponding software. This is installed on the rear side of the termRemote communication with REC 561 uses optical fibres to eliminate inence of electromagnetic interferences. This enables REC 561 to be a pan independent Station Monitoring System (SMS). This means tha


Version 1.0-00

relay engineer in the office can read information from the terminal or evenchange an active setting group and different values of the setting parameterswithin the setting groups.

The SMS-BASE software program with SM/REC 561, installed in a per-sonal computer, enables the relay engineer to establish communicationwith the terminal (either direct communication or communication througha telephone network), read information from the terminal on a PC screen,and store it in PC files.

Disturbance records can be collected remotely within the SMS by usingthe SMS-BASE with RECOM. An evaluation of the disturbance recordsis feasible by means of the REVAL evaluating PC-based program.

4.12Input/output facilities The basic version of REC 561 includes input/output (I/O) modules thatconsist of 16 binary inputs, 12 command/24 single outputs and oneswitch-over contact used for the signaling a continuous self-supervisionfunction. Up to 11 additional I/O modules, each of them consisting of 16binary inputs or 12 command/24 single outputs, or mixed modules witheight inputs and 12 single outputs, are available as options. Totally sixmodules (five optional modules) of any combination of the command out-put modules and the mixed modules can be included. All the binary inputsand outputs are freely programmable for any of the built-in functions toassure the greatest possible flexibility.

Also up to six analogue input modules, each of them consisting of sixchannels for mA signals, can be included in these additional I/O modules.The inputs can be used for connection to external transducers.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 146-XENPage 2 - 14


ct the

REC 561 Ordering data sheet 1MRK 580 149-XEN


2

1 OrderingThe basic version of REC 561 is a control terminal with software modulesfor apparatus control for one bay and 14 high-voltage apparatuses andinterlocking modules for single or double breaker arrangements. Thebasic version includes: pole discordance protection, configurable logic,one LON communication port, one binary input module, and one binaryoutput module.

Quantity: Includes basic and the selected options below.

Basic data:DC voltage, EL 48/60/110/125/220/250 V

Control function options:1. Apparatus control modules for two additional bays and 10 additional

high-voltage apparatuses. Additional interlocking modules for two single breaker or one double breaker arrangements or one 11/2- breakerdiameter are included.

2. Apparatus control modules for 11 additional bays without interlocking and 10additional high-voltage apparatuses. Interlocking modules for two 11/2-breaker diameters are included.

In the table below, first select the bay arrangement at the “Basic” row. Then seledesired optional functions from that column only.

= Not applicable.

Basic data to specify:

Transmitter Receiver

LON port Plastic Plastic 1MRK 000 168-EA

Glass Glass 1MRK 000 168-DA

Functions Typical switchyard arrangements Ordering number

One bay 2-3 bays sin-gle CB

Two bays dou-ble CB

One 1½CB diam

12 baysortwo 1½CB diam

Sin-gle CB

Dou-ble CB

Basic 1MRK 000 598-AA

Control function, option 1 1MRK 000 597-AA

Control function, option 2 1MRK 000 597-BA

Pulse counters for metering (12) 1MRK 000 597-TA

Autoreclosing for

(Only one alternative can be selected)

1 CB 1MRK 000 597-GA

3 CB 1MRK 000 597-HA

6 CB 1MRK 000 597-XA

German MMI(English version is replaced)

1MRK 000 597-NA

ABB Network Partner ABREC 561 Ordering data sheet


1MRK 580 149-XENPage 2 - 16

.1) One-phase values without calculation of P and Q2) To be used for external voltage selection.

Basic in/out modules:

Transformer and A/D-conversion module for 5 U and 5 I

1 A 1) 1) 1) 1) 1MRK 000 597-UA

5 A 1) 1) 1) 1) 1MRK 000 597-VA

The functions below require the transformer and A/D-conversion module.

Increased measuring accuracy for U, I, P, Q (factory calibration)

1MRK 000 597-PA

Synchro-check

1 bay, single CB 2) 1MRK 000 597-CA

1 bay, double CB 1MRK 000 597-RA

2-3 bays, single CB 1MRK 000 597-DA

2 bays, double CB 1MRK 000 597-SA

One 1½-breaker diameter

1MRK 000 597-EA

Fuse failure 1MRK 000 597-FA

Breaker failure protection 1MRK 000 597-KA

Loss-of-power system voltage 1MRK 000 597-LA

Disturbance recorder 1MRK 000 597-MA

Functions Typical switchyard arrangements Ordering number

One bay 2-3 bays sin-gle CB

Two bays dou-ble CB

One 1½CB diam

12 baysortwo 1½CB diam

Sin-gle CB

Dou-ble CB

InterfaceDC voltage

Quantity(totally 2)

Ordering number

Binary input module

(Only one typecan be selected)

24/30 V 1MRK 000 508-DA

48/60 V 1MRK 000 508-AA

110/125 V 1MRK 000 508-BA

220/250 V 1MRK 000 508-CA

Binary output module 1 1MRK 000 614-AA

REC 561 Ordering data sheetABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 149-XENPage 2 - 17


Additional in/out modules:(Totally 11 additional modules can be selected.)

1) Totally up to 6 modules of any combination of binary in/out and binary outputmodules can be used in REC 561.

Remote communication (SMS/SCS):Additional port (SPA)

Transmitter ReceiverPlastic Plastic 1MRK 000 168-FA

Glass Glass 1MRK 000 168-HA

Mounting details with IP40 degree of protection from the front:19-inch rack 1MRK 000 020-CA

Wall mounting 1MRK 000 020-DA

Flush mounting (IP40) 1MRK 000 020-Y

additional for IP54 1MKC 980 001-2

No mounting details

Accessories:User’s Guide for REC 561 Quantity: 1MRK 511 009-UEN

Front connection cable for PC (Opto/9-pol D-sub) Quantity: 1MKC 950 001-1

SMS-BASE, Basic program forSMS and PC front connection Quantity: RS 881 007-AA

SM/REC 561, SMS Programmodule for REC 561 Quantity: 1MRK 000 314-HA

CAP 531, Graphical configurationtool IEC 1131-3 (requires SMS-BASE and SM/REC 561) Quantity: 1MRK 000 876-KA

CAP/REC 561, CAP programmodule for REC 561 Quantity: 1MRK 000 876-HA

InterfaceDC voltage

Quantity(totally 11)

Ordering number

Binary input modules(16 inputs)

24/30 V 1MRK 000 508-DA

48/60 V 1MRK 000 508-AA

110/125 V 1MRK 000 508-BA

220/250 V 1MRK 000 508-CA

Binary in/out modules 1)

(8 inputs and 12 outputs with limited functionality)

24/30 V 1MRK 000 173-GB

48/60 V 1MRK 000 173-AB

110/125 V 1MRK 000 173-BB

220/250 V 1MRK 000 173-CB

Binary output modules 1)

(24 single outputs or 12 command outputs)1MRK 000 614-AA

mA input modules with 6 channels (up to 6 modules can be selected)

1MRK 000 284-AA

ABB Network Partner ABREC 561 Ordering data sheet


1MRK 580 149-XENPage 2 - 18

For our reference and statistics, please send us this data:

Country:End user:Station name:Voltage level: kV


Function:

f 5Ptypeontact

ctionaretion

per- cur-r gap,rans-ers.

2Requirements and basic technical data - REC 561

1MRK 580 147-XEN


1 GeneralAs an option, the REC 561 control terminal can include protection func-tions, for example, breaker failure protection. The operation of a protec-tion measuring function is influenced by distortion, so you must takemeasures in the protection function to handle this phenomenon. Onesource of distortion is current transformer saturation. In this control termi-nal, take measures to allow for a certain amount of CT saturation withmaintained correct operation. This terminal can allow relatively heavycurrent transformer saturation.

Protection functions are also affected by transients caused by capacitivevoltage transformers (CVTs). But because this terminal has a very effec-tive filter for these transients, the operation is hardly affected.

2 Requirements on voltage instrument transformersYou can use magnetic or capacitive voltage transformers.

Capacitive voltage transformers should fulfil the requirements accordingto IEC 186A, Section 20, regarding transients. According to the standard,the secondary voltage should drop to less than 10% of the peak valuebefore the short circuit within one cycle.

The terminal has an effective filter for this transient, which gives secureand correct operation with CVTs.

3 Requirements on current instrument transformers

3.1 Choice of current transformers

Use the TPX or TPY current transformer — with an accuracy class oor better. The characteristic of the linearized TPZ current transformer is not well defined as far as the phase angle error is concerned. So cABB Network Partner for confirmation that you can use the type.

Select the current transformer ratio so that the current to the protefunction is higher than the minimum operating value for all faults that to be detected. The minimum operating current for the protection funcis 20% of the nominal current.

3.2 Conditions for the CT requirements

The requirements for the protection functions are a result of tests formed in a network simulator. The tests were made with an analoguerent transformer model with a settable core area, a core length, an aiand several primary and secondary turns. The setting of the current tformer model was representative for TPX and TPY current transformThe results are not valid for TPZ.

ABB Network Partner ABRequirements and basic technical data - REC 561

Version 1.0-00Page 2 - 20

All testing was made without any remanence flux in the current trans-former core. So the requirements below are fully valid for a core with noremanence flux. General recommendations for additional margins forremanence flux cannot be provided. They depend on the reliability andeconomy requirements.

When TPY current transformers are used, practically no additional marginis needed due to the anti-remanence air gap.

For TPX current transformers, remember that the small probability of afully asymmetrical fault, together with maximum remanence flux in thesame direction as the flux generated by the fault can influence decisionswhen about additional margin. Fully asymmetrical fault current isachieved when the fault occurs at zero voltage (0°). Tests showed that95% of the faults in the network occurs when the voltage is between 40°and 90°.

3.3 Fault current The current transformer requirements are based on the maximum faultcurrent for faults in different positions. Maximum fault current occurs forthree-phase faults or single-phase-to-earth faults. The current for a singlephase-to-earth fault exceeds the current for a three-phase fault when thezero sequence impedance in the total fault loop is less than the positivesequence impedance.

When calculating the current transformer requirements, use maximumfault current and consider both fault types.

3.4 REC 561 current transformer requirements

The current transformer secondary limiting emf (E2max) should meet thetwo requirements below:

Ikmax Maximum primary fundamental frequency current for forwardand reverse fault

Ipn Primary nominal CT currentIsn Secondary nominal CT currentIR Protection terminal nominal currentRCT CT secondary winding resistanceRL CT secondary cable resistance and additional loada This factor is a function of the network frequency and the time con-

stant for the dc component in the fault current

E2max

Ikmax Isn⋅

Ipn----------------------------- a RCT RL

0 5,

IR2

----------+ +

⋅ ⋅>

Requirements and basic technical data - REC 561

ABB Network Partner ABPage 2 - 21

Version 1.0-00

4 Requirements for the LON communication link for remote communicationThe control terminal is normally always used in a Substation Automationsystem. For that purpose, the LON communication link is connected to aLON Star Coupler via optical fibres. The optical fibres are either glass orplastic with the following specification:

Connect a PC as an MMI to this LON network. Windows NT runs on thePC, which is equipped with a communication card for the LON (EchelonPCLTA card). Control functions in the MMI (to be used with REC 561)are available in the HV/Control software package, a library of standardapplication functions, and pictures for the application engineering inS.P.I.D.E.R. MicroSCADA ver. 8.4 or later.

To configure the nodes in a Substation Automation system you need theLON Network Tool. This is a software package that runs under MicrosoftWindows 3.1 or higher or Windows NT. You can load the tool into a PC,which is equipped with an Echelon PCLTA card or connected to an Eche-lon SLTA card in the star coupler, with corresponding drivers.

5 Requirements for the SPA communication link for remote communicationThe optical fibres that are supplied by ABB Network Partner AB fulfil allthe requirements for the communication in the station. You can use bothplastic fibres and glass fibres. For distances up to 30 m, use plastic fibresand for distances up to 500 m, use glass fibres. You can mix glass andplastic fibres in the same loop.

For communication on longer distances, use telephone modems. Themodems must be Hayes-compatible, which use AT commands with auto-matic answering (AA) capability. The telephone network must complywith the CCITT standards.

For connection of the optical fibre loop to a PC or a telephone modem youneed an opto/electrical converter. The converter uses RS232, and it has aD25 connector on the electrical side. The converter is supplied by ABBNetwork Partner AB.

The PC must comply with the requirements according to Buyer’s Guide1MRK 511 014-BEN for SMS 010. For the CAP 531 configuration tool,see User’s Guide 1MRK 511 034-UEN.

Glass fibre Plastic fibre

Cable connector ST connector Snap-in connector

Cable diameter 62.5/125 µm 1 mm

Max. cable length 1000 m 20 m



6 Technical dataTable 1: Energizing quantities, rated values and limits

Quantity Rated value Nominal range

CurrentOperative range

Burden

Ir = 1 or 5 A(0,2-4) × Ir cont.(0,2-100) × Ir for 1 s *)

< 0,25 VA at Ir

(0,2-30) x Ir

Ac voltage Ph-PhOperative range

Burden

Ur = 100/110/115/120 V1,5 × Ur cont.2,5 × Ur for 1 s< 0,2 VA at Ur

(80-120) % of Ur

Frequency fr = 50/60 Hz ± 5 %

Auxiliary dc voltage EL

power consumptionbasic terminal

Ur = (48-250) V

≤ 16 W

± 20 %

Binary input(8)/output(12) moduledc voltage RL

power consumptioneach I/O-boardeach output relayRL24 = (24/30)VRL48 = (48/60)VRL110 = (110/125)VRL220 = (220/250)V

RL24 = (24/30)VRL48 = (48/60)VRL110 = (110/125)VRL220 = (220/250)V

≤ 1 W≤ 0,15 Wmax. 0,05 W/inputmax. 0,1 W/inputmax. 0,2 W/inputmax. 0,4 W/input

± 20 %± 20 %± 20 %± 20 %

Binary input moduledc voltage RL

power consumptioneach input-boardRL24 = (24/30)VRL48 = (48/60)VRL110 = (110/125)VRL220 = (220/250)V

RL24 = (24/30)VRL48 = (48/60)VRL110 = (110/125)VRL220 = (220/250)V

≤ 0,5 Wmax. 0,05 W/inputmax. 0,1 W/inputmax. 0,2 W/inputmax. 0,4 W/input

± 20 %± 20 %± 20 %± 20 %

Binary output modulepower consumption

each output-boardeach output relay

≤ 1,0 W≤ 0,25 W

mA input moduleinput range

input resistance

power consumptioneach mA-boardeach mA input

± 5, ± 10, ± 20 mA0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20 mA

Rin = 194 Ohm

≤ 4 W≤ 0,1 W

± 10 %

Ambient temperature 20° C -5° C to +55° C

Ripple in dc auxiliary voltage max. 2 % max. 12 %

Relative humidity (10-90) % (10-90) %

*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBIFLEX test switch included together with the product



Version 1.0-00

Table 2: Influencing factors, permissible influence

Dependence on Within nominal range Within operative range

Ambient temperature 0,01 % / °C Correct function

Ripple in auxiliary dc voltage Negligible Correct function

Interruption in auxiliary dc voltagewithout resettingcorrect functionrestart time

< 50 ms0 - ∞< 100 s

< 50 ms0 - ∞< 100 s

Table 3: Electromagnetic compatibility tests

Test Type test values Reference standards

1 MHz burst disturbance 2,5 kV IEC 255-22-1, Class III

Electrostatic discharge 8 kV IEC 255-22-2, Class III

Fast transient disturbance 4 kV IEC 255-22-4, Class IV

Radiated electromagnetic field dis-turbance

10 V/m, (25-1000) MHz IEC 255-22-3, Class IIIDraft IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2

Table 4: Insulation tests (reference standard: IEC 255-5)

Test Type test values

Dielectric test 2,0 kV ac, 1 min

Impulse voltage test 5 kV, 1,2/50 µs, 0,5 J

Insulation resistance >100 MΩ at 500 V dc

Table 5: Mechanical tests

Test Type test values Reference standards

Vibration Class I IEC 255-21-1

Shock and bump Class I IEC 255-21-2

Seismic Class I IEC 255-21-3



Table 6: Contact data (reference standard: IEC 255)

Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Fast signal relays

Max system voltage 250 V ac, dc 250 V ac, dc

Test voltage across open contact, 1 min

1000 V rms 800 V dc

Current carrying capacitycontinuous1 s

8 A 10 A

8 A10 A

Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms

0,2 s1,0 s

30 A10 A

0,4 A0,4 A

Breaking capacity for ac, cos ϕ>0,4 250 V/8,0 A 250 V/8,0 A

Breaking capacity for dc with L/R<40 ms

48 V/1 A110 V/0,4 A220 V/0,2 A250 V/0,15 A

48 V/1 A110 V/0,4 A220 V/0,2 A250 V/0,15 A

Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF

Table 7: Additional general data

Weight approx. basicmax

7 kg14 kg

Dimensionswidthheightdepth

448 mm (full width)267 mm245 mm

Storage temperature -40° C to +70° C

Table 8: Mean values

Function Nominal range Accuracy

frequencyvoltage

(0,95-1,05) x fr(0,1-1,5) x Ur

± 0,2 Hz± 2,5 % of Ur at U ≤ Ur ± 2,5 % of U at U > Ur

current (0,2-4) x Ir ± 2,5 % of Ir at I ≤ Ir± 2,5 % of I at I > Ir

active powerreactive power

at |cos ϕ| > 0,9at |cos ϕ| ≤ 0,8

± 5 %± 7,5 %



Version 1.0-00

Table 9: Option: Increased Measuring Accuracy

Function Nominal range Accuracy

frequency (0,95-1,05) x fr ± 0,2 Hz

voltage (0,8-1,2) x Ur, fr = 50 Hz ± 0,25 % of Ur at U ≤ Ur± 0,25 % of U at U > Ur

current (0,2-1,2) x Ir, fr = 50 Hz ± 0,25 % of Ir at I ≤ Ir± 0,25 % of I at I > Ir

active power at |cos ϕ| > 0,9, fr = 50 Hz0,8* Ur < U < 1,2*Ur0,2*Ir < I < 1,2*Ir

± 0,5 % of Pr at P ≤ Pr*)

± 0,5 % of P at P > Pr*)

*) Pr active power at U = Ur , I = Ir and |cos ϕ| = 1


Function:

rack

ro-st andents

l hasexter-nalsardom-ica-

ni-fibreodinal

in.

ustryern-011.tial,use

2Construction and hardware characteristics - REC 561

1MRK 580 148-XEN


1 Hardware designThe terminal is supplied in a closed case that is a standard 19” wideand 6U high.

This terminal is made with a technology that fulfils all modern electmagnetic interference requirements. Tests, such as fast transient teradio frequency sensitivity test, are new requirements. These requiremare fulfilled by having a closed and welded steel case. The terminavery good separation between the internal, sensitive signals, and the nal, polluted process signals. This is done by keeping all process sigin the back of the case, (for convenient wiring) and a mother-bo(behind the front cover made in one piece), where all sensitive bus cmunication runs (both analogue parallel and binary serial communtion).

All external serial buses for Substation Automation (SA), Station Motoring System (SMS), and the front-connected PC are isolated with optical links to avoid disturbances. This, in combination with a godesign of transformers, power supply and binary inputs provide a termthat can withstand the electromagnetic interference tests with a marg

The product is based on harmonized standards. Refer to the indstandards EN 50 081-2 (emission) and EN 50 082-2 (immunity) concing the EMC directive. EN 50 081-2 refers to basic standard EN 55 The product is a class A product according to EN 55 011. In residencommercial and light-industry environments, this product may caradio interference; so users might need to take adequate measures.

ABB Network Partner ABConstruction and hardware characteristics - REC 561

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 148-XENPage 2 - 28

le

re ear

-

.

a

2 Hardware modules

Fig. 1 Hardware structure

The basic configuration of the terminal consists of these modules:

• Main processing module. All information is processed or passed through this module before it is sent from the terminal. The moduis used for configuration of the terminal and storage of all its set-tings. It is also used for communication (position S10).

• Signal processing module with up to 12 digital signal processors used for all measuring functions (position S10SPM).

• One optical serial communication module, intended for remote fiboptic LON communication. The module is placed in a slot at the rof the Main processing module.

• One Binary input module with 16 binary inputs (position S12).

• One Binary output module with 24 single output relays or 12 command output relays (programmable) (position S14).

• Power supply which contains a DC/DC converter, which providesfull isolation between the terminal and the external battery systemThe power supply consists of a two stage converter which gives very wide input-voltage range, from 36 V up to 300 V (position S40).

(X80148-1)

Construction and hardware characteristics - REC 561

ABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 148-XENPage 2 - 29

Version 1.0-00

-ed

-

t-

ry

uts ts.

r

ion ar

• Man machine interface (MMI) is built-in to the front cover and contains LEDs, an LCD and an optical connector for a front-connectPC. For this front communication, you need an optional special cable, with an opto-to-RS232, built-in converter.

Optionally these hardware modules are available:

• Transformer module with five voltage and five current input transformers (position S2).

• A/D-conversion (AD) module for up to 10 analogue inputs, operaing with a sampling frequency of 2000 Hz. It has a bandwidth of 250 Hz, and a dynamic range for currents, from 0,01 to 100 ⋅ Ir , and for voltages, from 0,01 to 2 ⋅ Ur , (position S8).

• Up to 11 additional input/output modules, that can be of type Binainput module (16 inputs), Binary output module (24 relays or 12 command relays), a combined Binary input/output module (8 inpand 12 output relays) and a mA input module for transducer inpu(all modules in positions S16 to S36).

• One additional optical serial communication module, intended foremote fibre optic SPA communication. Having two modules will enable the terminal to be a part of SMS in parallel with a SubstatAutomation System (SA). The module is placed in a slot at the reof the Main processing module.

Fig. 2 Basic block diagrams(X80148-2)

I

U

A/D

SP 1SP 2SP 3SP 4SP 5SP 6SP 7SP 8SP 9SP 10

32 b

it m

icro

cont

role

r

Com

mun

icat

ion

in

out

in

out

MMI unitMMI PC/SMSSCS


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 148-XENPage 2 - 30

nal the

sent the

2.1 Main processing module (MPM)

The terminal is based on a pipelined multi-processor design. The 32-bitmain controller receives the result from the Signal processing moduleevery millisecond. The controller also serves four serial links: one high-speed CAN bus for Input/Output modules and three serial links for thedifferent types of MMI communication explained below.

The main controller makes all decisions, based on the information fromthe Signal processing module and from the binary inputs. The decisionsare sent to the different output modules and to these communication ports:

• Built-in MMI module including a front-connected PC, if any, for local man-machine communication

• LON communication port at the rear

• SPA communication port at the rear (option)

2.2 Signal processing module (SPM)

All analogue data is received in all of the up to 12 (16 bits) digital sigprocessors (DSP). In these DSPs, the main part of the filtering andcalculations occur. The result from the calculations in the DSPs is every millisecond on a parallel bus to the (32 bit) main controller onMain processing module.



Version 1.0-00

Fig. 3 Internal hardware structure

2.3 Serial communication module (SCM)

The serial communication modules are placed in slots at the rear part ofthe Main processing module. One or two modules can be applied on theMain processing module (see Fig. 9). One slot is intended for LON com-munication and the other for SPA communication. The serial communica-tion modules enable the terminal to be a part of a Substation Automationsystem (LON or SPA), and/or a Station Monitoring System (SPA).

There are four different types of SCM:s

The modules can be identified with a number on the label on the module.The number can be found in Order data sheet REC 561 (1MRK 580 149-XEN). The modules are mounted on position X13 (SPA) and X15 (LON)(see Fig. 9).

SPM

TRM (S2)

BOM(S14)

E

C


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 148-XENPage 2 - 32

n),ons

elec-ithSM/thenc-ce.m-

The serial communication module can have connectors for two plasticfibre cables or two glass fibre cables. The incoming optical fibre is con-nected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fibre to the TXtransmitter output. When the fibre optic cables are laid out, pay specialattention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, and suchof the optical fibres. Refer to Installation and commissioning(1MRK 580 166-XEN).

2.4 Power supply module (PSM)

The Power supply contains a built-in, self-regulated DC/DC converter thatprovides full isolation between the terminal and the external battery sys-tem. The power supply can provide up to 40W. The wide-input voltagerange of the DC/DC converter covers an input voltage range from 48 to250V, including a ±20% tolerance on the EL voltage.

2.5 Man-machine interface (MMI)

The built-in MMI module consists of three LEDs (red, yellow, and greean LCD display with four lines, each contain 16 characters, six buttand an optical connector for PC communication.

Fig. 4 Built-in MMI

The PC is connected via a special cable, that has a built-in optical to trical interface. Thus, disturbance-free local serial communication wthe personal computer is achieved. You need the SMS-BASE and REC 561 software for this communication. A PC greatly simplifies communication with the terminal. It also gives the user additional futionality which is unavailable on the MMI because of insufficient spaFor further information, refer to “Setting and communication, Front comunication” in Installation and commissioning (1MRK 580 166-XEN).

The LEDs on the MMI display this information:

E

C

Ready Start TripRE. 5.. VER 1.0C = Clear LEDsE = Enter menu

green yellow red

LEDs

optical connectorfor local PC

liquid crystal displayfour rows16 characters/row

push buttons

(X80148-4)



Version 1.0-00

.

-

ndtputn be

d alls is or

ule

and withwo are

r I/or a

helogi-stur-nsive

Green:

• Steady In service.

• Flashing Internal failure, that is the internal signal INT--FAILis high.

• Dark No power supply.

Yellow:

• Steady Disturbance Report triggered.

• Flashing Terminal in test mode or configuration mode.

Red:

• Steady Trip command issued from a protection function

• Flashing Blocked terminal, that is the internal signal INT-TERMBLCK is high.

2.6 Input/output modules In the basic configuration of the terminal, one Binary input module aone Binary output module are included. Up to 11 additional input/oumodules can be added. These additional input/ouput modules caplaced freely in position S16 to S36 with these restrictions:

• Up to 5 Binary ouput modules and/or Binary in/out modules

• Up to 6 mA input modules.

Many signals are available for signalling purposes in the terminal, anare freely programmable. The voltage level of the input/output moduleselectable at order RL48, 110, or 220 (48/60 V ±20%, 110/125 V ±20%220/250 V ±20%). The binary in/out module and the binary input modare also available in an RL24 version (24/30 V +20%).

2.6.1 Binary in/out module (IOM)

The binary in/out module contains eight opto-isolated binary inputs twelve binary output contacts. Ten of the output relays have contactsa high-switching capacity (Trip and signal relays). The remaining trelays are of reed type and for signalling purpose only. The relaysgrouped together as can be seen in the terminal diagram.

Note that the IOM can not be placed in slot 12, which is the first slot foO modules next to the MPM module. This depends lack of space fcontact on the rear of the IOM.

2.6.2 Binary input module (BIM)

The Binary input module contains 16 opto-isolated binary inputs. Tbinary inputs are freely programmable and can be used for the input cal signals to any of the functions. They can also be included in the dibance recording and event-recording functions. This enables the exte


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 148-XENPage 2 - 34

monitoring and evaluation of operation for the terminal and for all associ-ated electrical circuits. You can select the voltage level of the Binary inputmodules (RL24, 48, 110, or 220) at order.

The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of therelay contact connected to the input, despite the low, steady-state powerconsumption, which is shown in Fig. 5.

Fig. 5 Current through the relay contact.

2.6.3 Binary output module (BOM)

The Binary output module has either 24 single-output relays or 12 com-mand-output relays (programmable). The relays are grouped together ascan be seen in the terminal diagram. The output relays have contacts witha high switching capacity (Trip and signal relays).

Two single-output relays can be connected in series (which gives a com-mand-output relay), in order to get a high security at operation of high-voltage apparatuses.

The output relays are provided with a supervision function to ensure ahigh degree of security against unwanted operation. The status of the out-put contacts (on/off) is continuously read back and compared with theexpected status. If any discrepancy occurs, an error is reported. This func-tion covers:

• Interrupt or short-cirucuit in an output relay coil.

• Failure of an output relay driver.

For more information about IOM, BIM and BOM, see: Requirements andbasic technical data - REC 561, (1MRK 000 147-XEN).

Approx. current

30

1

in mA

20 msTime

Incoming pulse

(X80148-5)10 ms



Version 1.0-00

r

areanged forbits

theid

al (5

singz in

of

thetype.for-

2.6.4 mA input module (MIM)

Up to six mA input modules that measure analogue current can beincluded in a REC terminal. Each mA input module has six input chan-nels, the channels are isolated from each other and have a separate A/Dconverter. The transducer signals can be directly connected to the rear ter-minals of the module.

2.7 Transformer input module (TRM)

Current and voltage input transformers form an isolating barrier betweenthe external wiring and the internal circuits of the terminal. They adapt thevalues of the measuring quantities to the static circuitry and prevent thedisturbances to enter the terminal

You can connect 10 analogue input quantities to the transformer modulethat consists of:

• Five voltage transformers that cover a rated range from 100 to 125 V.

• Five current transformers in two versions - one for 1 A and one fo5 A rated current.

2.8 A/D-conversion module (ADM)

The incoming signals from the intermediate current transformers adapted to the electronic voltage level with shunts. To gain dynamic rfor the current inputs, two shunts with separate A/D channels are useeach input current. So a 16-bit dynamic range is obtained with a 12A/D converter.

The next step in the signal flow (see Fig. 2) is the analogue filter offirst order, with a cut-off frequency of 500 Hz. This filter is used to avoaliasing problems.

The A/D converter has a 12-bit resolution. It samples each input signvoltages and 2. 5 currents) with a sampling frequency of 2 kHz.

Before the A/D-converted signals are transmitted to the main procesmodule, the signals are band-pass filtered and down-sampled to 1 kHa digital signal processor (DSP).

The filter in the DSP is a numerical filter with a cut-off frequency 250 Hz.

The transmission of data between the A/D-conversion module andMain processing module is done on a supervised serial link of RS485This transmission is performed once every millisecond and contains inmation about all incoming analogue signals.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 148-XENPage 2 - 36

en

(gas-ced

f the side

per-

All

are

d-

3 Mounting systemThe REx 5xx series terminals can be flush, rack, or wall mounted with theuse of different mounting kits. Semi-flush mounting cannot be applied forthis type of terminal, because the ventilation holes will be covered.

All connections are done on the rear side of the case with a screw-com-pression type of terminal blocks for electrical connections and snap-inports for optical connections.

The protection level of the terminal’s top and bottom is IP 30. Whapplying flush mounting, the protection level on the front side only ofthe terminal is IP 40, and can be increased to IP 54 if a sealing strip ket) is used (to be specified when ordering). This sealing strip is plabetween the front cover and the box. This is done during production orelay, which means that it must be specified when ordering. The rearfulfils IP 20.

A protective cover for the rear side of the unit is available to increase sonal security.

3.1 Mechanical mounting For different types of mountings, special mounting kits are available.mounting kits contain assembly instructions.

3.2 Rack mounting For mounting the protection terminal in a 19” rack, mounting anglesneeded. All necessary screw holes in the box are already prepared.

One set of mounting angles for 6U, 19” rack (1MRK 000 020-CA) incluing eight screws (TORX T20) are needed for the rack mounting.

Fig. 6 One REC 561 in a 19” rack

(X80148-6)



Version 1.0-00

s.

3.3 Flush mounting A mounting kit is available for flush mounting. It includes:

• Four side holders

• Four small screws (grip type TORX T10)

• Four big screws (grip type TORX T25)

• Assembly drawing.

Fig. 7 Flush mounting

See the Buyer’s Guide Series REx 500 Mechanical design and mountingaccessories (1MRK 514 003-BEN) for ordering details and cut-out size

(X80148-7)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 148-XENPage 2 - 38

and thethe

3.4 Wall mounting A mounting kit is available for wall mounting. It includes:

• Two side plates

• Screws (grip types TORX T20, T25 and T30)

• Two mounting bars to be mounted on the wall

Fig. 8 Wall mounting

See the Buyer’s Guide Series REx 500 Mechanical design and mountingaccessories (1MRK 514 003-BEN) for ordering details.

Two bars of screw terminals can be applied (one above the protectionone below), which yield about 50-70 connection points, depending onwidth. The screw terminals and their supports are not included in mounting kit.

(X80148-8)



Version 1.0-00

n

rmi-e.

rkedwith

3.5 Electrical connections There are two types of electrical terminals:

• Current-carrying, which is for conductors that have a cross sectioof up to 4 mm2.

• Voltage connector, which is for conductors up to 2,5 mm2, which are intended for all voltage signals.

The current-carrying terminals are located on position X11. These tenals are feed-through terminal blocks with flat tabs on the internal sid

The voltage connector terminals are divided into two parts:

• A female part for conductor connections.

• A male part mounted inside the case on a circuit board.

All external connectors located on the back side of the case are mawith designation labels. The female part of the connector is marked the same designation label as the male part.

Apply these rules when connecting:

For more information, refer to:

• Installation and commissioning (1MRK 580 166-XEN)

• Buyer’s Guide Series REx 5xx Mechanical design and mounting accessories (1MRK 514 003-BEN)

If you insert in a socket..... Then...

One conductor It can be 0,2-2,5 mm2

Two conductors They can be 0,2-1 mm2

Two 1,5 mm2 conductors Use a ferrule


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 148-XENPage 2 - 40

Fig. 9 Rear view of REC 561

Fig. 10 Voltage connector

The terminals are numbered from 1 to 18 from top to bottom. The markedterminal in Fig. 10 above is called X20:5.

(X80148-9)

(X80148-10)


Contents Page

Receiving and storage............................................................................ 3-1Installation .............................................................................................. 3-1

Mechanical installation ................................................................... 3-119” rack installation................................................................ 3-1Flush mounting ...................................................................... 3-4Wall mounting ........................................................................ 3-5

Electrical connections..................................................................... 3-6Signal connectors........................................................................... 3-7Fibre optic connections .................................................................. 3-8

Setting and configuration........................................................................ 3-9Built-in man machine interface (MMI)............................................. 3-9Front Communication ..................................................................... 3-9Remote Communication, SMS or SCS ........................................ 3-10Configuration of inputs and outputs.............................................. 3-11

Commissioning ..................................................................................... 3-12Test of internal circuits ................................................................. 3-13Secondary injection test ............................................................... 3-13Check of external connections ..................................................... 3-13Functional test .............................................................................. 3-14Test termination............................................................................ 3-14

Fault tracing.......................................................................................... 3-15Using information on the built-in MMI........................................... 3-15Using front-connected PC or SMS ............................................... 3-15

Repair instruction.................................................................................. 3-17Maintenance......................................................................................... 3-17 Introduction.......................................................................................... 3-19Man-machine interface module - design .............................................. 3-19

LEDs............................................................................................. 3-19LCD display .................................................................................. 3-20Buttons ......................................................................................... 3-20

Unattended MMI ................................................................................... 3-22Idle mode...................................................................................... 3-22Reporting mode............................................................................ 3-22Configuration mode ...................................................................... 3-22

Menu window........................................................................................ 3-23Dialogue window .................................................................................. 3-24

Starting the dialogue .................................................................... 3-24Confirming a command ................................................................ 3-25


Selecting a command...................................................................3-25Cancelling a command .................................................................3-26Selecting and cancelling a command ...........................................3-26

Data window .........................................................................................3-27Reading and setting values ..........................................................3-28Reading and setting of non-numerical parameters.......................3-29Reading and setting strings ..........................................................3-29Configuration of the binary inputs.................................................3-30Configuration of the binary outputs...............................................3-30Configuration of the functional inputs ...........................................3-32Setting internal time......................................................................3-33Additional information ...................................................................3-33Saving the settings in a setting group...........................................3-34

General .................................................................................................3-37Disturbance report ................................................................................3-38

Information on recorded disturbances ..........................................3-38Manual triggering of a disturbance recording ...............................3-38Clearing of the disturbance report memory ..................................3-38

Service report .......................................................................................3-38Mean values .................................................................................3-39Phasors ........................................................................................3-39Synchronizing values....................................................................3-39Logical signals ..............................................................................3-39I/O modules ..................................................................................3-39Counters within the autoreclosing function...................................3-39Disturbance report ........................................................................3-39Active group..................................................................................3-39Internal time..................................................................................3-39

Settings.................................................................................................3-40Functions ......................................................................................3-40Changing of an active setting group .............................................3-40Disturbance report ........................................................................3-40Internal time..................................................................................3-40

Terminal status .....................................................................................3-40Self supervision - report................................................................3-40Terminal ID ...................................................................................3-41

Configuration ........................................................................................3-41Identifiers ......................................................................................3-41Analogue inputs............................................................................3-41I/O modules ..................................................................................3-41Time synchronization source........................................................3-41Built-in man machine interface (MMI)...........................................3-42

ABB Network Partner AB Page III

SPA communication ..................................................................... 3-42LON communication..................................................................... 3-42

Command............................................................................................. 3-42Test....................................................................................................... 3-42 Introduction.......................................................................................... 3-43Menu tree structure .............................................................................. 3-44

Display for Disturbance Report menu .......................................... 3-44Display for Service Report menu.................................................. 3-45Display for Settings menu ............................................................ 3-49Display for Terminal Status menu ................................................ 3-58Display for Configuration menu .................................................... 3-59Display for Command menu......................................................... 3-68Display for Test menu .................................................................. 3-69Signal lists .................................................................................... 3-70

Object addresses for indications in REC 561 ....................................... 3-73SPA addresses for commands in REC 561.......................................... 3-79

ABB Network Partner ABPage IV


Function:

g kiting,unt-

vari-

3Installation and commissioning 1MRK 580 166-XEN


1 Receiving and storageRemove the terminal from its transport case and perform a visual inspec-tion of any possible transport damages. Check that the delivered terminalhas the correct data on the rating plate at the front of the terminal, that is,rated current, rated voltage, and rated dc voltage.

If the terminal is to be stored before installation, this must be done in adry, dust-free place, preferably in its original transport case.

2 Installation

2.1 Mechanical installation This terminal is built in the mechanical packaging system described inthe Buyer’s Guide Series REx 500 Mechanical design and mountingaccessories (1MRK 514 003-BEN).

Depending on how the terminal is to be mounted, a suitable mountinis used. For 19-inch rack mounting, flush mounting, and wall mountyou can order mounting kits that contain all parts needed for the moing, including screws and an assembly instruction.

Avoid dusty, damp places or conditions that cause rapid temperatureations, powerful vibrations, or shocks.

2.1.1 19” rack installation For mounting the terminal in a 19-inch rack, you need mounting angles.The type of mounting angles depends on the size of the terminal.

You can mount each mounting angle on either side of the terminal. Mountthe angles on the terminal with the included screws according to Fig. 1.All included screws have TORX T20 type grips.

ABB Network Partner ABInstallation and commissioning

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 166-XENPage 3 - 2

the

Fig. 1 19” rack mounting

If more than one terminal is to be placed side-by-side, you need a specialside-by-side mounting kit. It consists of two plates and screws withTORX T20 type grips.

1. Fasten the mounting angles—one on each terminal—with the includes screws.

2. Fasten the terminals together with the two plates—one on top oftwo terminals and one on the bottom. See Fig. 2.

(X80166-1)

Installation and commissioningABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 166-XENPage 3 - 3

Version 1.0-00

Fig. 2 Side-by-side mounting

(X80166-2)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 166-XENPage 3 - 4

2.1.2 Flush mounting For flush mounting:

1. Cut and affix the sealing strip, if IP 54 is required (option).

2. Put the terminal in the cut-out.

3. Fasten the side holders to the back part of the terminal with the small screws (TORX T10 type grip).

4. Fasten the terminal with the big screws (TORX T25 type grip).

Fig. 3 Flush mounting

(X80166-3)


Version 1.0-00

2.1.3 Wall mounting

Fig. 4 Wall mounting

The included screws have TORX type grips:

Grip type To attach the mounting...

T20 Angles to the case

T25 Angles to the mounting bars

T30 Bars to the wall (M6)

(X80166-4)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 166-XENPage 3 - 6

2.2 Electrical connections Make the external connections on the screw terminals according to theterminal diagram.

All connectors have an identification number, for example X11. You canmark the female connectors the same way. The individual terminals arenumbered from top to bottom: 1, 2, 3,... (see a signal connector in Fig. 6).At installation, all wiring on the female part of the connector can be per-formed before plugging it into the male part, on the relay.

Identify the cables from the current and voltage transformers regardingphases and connect the cables to the proper terminal, according to the ter-minal diagram.

Fig. 5 Rear view of REC 561

Fig. 5 shows a typical rear view of a product (REC 561).

Note: The use of terminals for external connections is product specific.The terminal diagram for each product describes terminal usage. Here is alist of designations for different connectors, valid for most products:

(X80166-5)


Version 1.0-00

(Note that the maximum number of optional I/O modules depends on thetype of terminal.)

The current carrying connector X11 can have cables of an area of up to4 mm2.

Connect a separate earthing wire from the earthing screw (TORX T20grip type) on the rear of the terminal, to the panel earthing bar with a sep-arate earthing wire of an area of 2,5 mm2.

2.3 Signal connectors

Fig. 6 Signal connector

The terminals are numbered from 1 to 18, from top to bottom. The markedconnection point in Fig. 6 is designated X20:5.

Connector: Designation:

X11 Current transformer inputs

X12 Voltage transformer inputs

X13 Optical fibre connectors for serial communication SPA

X15 Optical fibre connectors for serial communication LON

X16, X17... Input/output connectors for I/O modules

X42 Connector for the power supply, (in Fig.5)

(X80166-6)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 166-XENPage 3 - 8

e-

ibreith a

for col-arkstic,

The conductors can be either of rigid type (solid, stranded) or of flexibletype.

Apply these rules when connecting:

The ferrule (ABB Network Partner’s order no. 1MKC 840 003-4 or Phonix type AI-TWIN 2 ⋅ 1,5 - 8 BK) is applied with ZA3 crimping plierstype from Phoenix, (see Fig. 7).

No soldering is needed.

If a COMBITEST test switch is added, COMBIFLEX wires are used.

Fig. 7 Connected cables with ferrules

2.4 Fibre optic connections

On each terminal, one or two optical ports can be equipped with foptic bus connection module. The fibres connected can be plastic, wsnap-in connection, or glass, with a bayonet connection.

Each channel consists of a pair of fibres, where one fibre is usedreceiving and one for transmitting data. They are distinguished by theour of their fibre contact. Receiver fibre contacts (blue for plastic, dgrey for glass) must be plugged into receiver sockets (blue for pla

If you insert in a socket... Then...

One conductor It can be 0,2-2,5 mm2

Two conductors They can be 0,2-1 mm2

Two 1,5 mm2 conductors Use a ferrule

(X80166-7)


Version 1.0-00

tion,

, thepace

ainstic

on-canslot,ame for

puttill

ASE ofse alln,

rmi-o. of

dark grey for glass). Transmitter fibre contacts (grey or black) must beplugged likewise into transmitter sockets (grey or black). Note: Plug the correct fibre contact into the correct socket.

Fibre optical cables are sensitive to mechanical damages. Never bendthem. As for the curvature radius, these minimum values are valid:

• 5 cm radius for plastic fibre• 15 cm radius for glass fibre

When the optical fibre is to be connected or disconnected, the terminaand not the optical fibre must be used for pulling.

In case the optical fibre is too long and cable straps must be usedcable strap must not be applied too hard. Always leave some sbetween the optical fibre and the cable strap.

The Serial communication modules are inserted into slots on the Mprocessing module. There are four different types of cards — with placonnections for SPA, with plastic connections for LON, with glass cnection for SPA, with glass connection for LON. SPA communication only be applied with a module intended for SPA inserted in the SPA which is the upper slot (X13) on the Main processing module. In the sway, LON communication can only be applied with a module intendedLON, inserted in the lower slot (X15).

3 Setting and configurationAll settings and configuration can be made in these ways:

• Locally, via the built-in, man-machine interface (MMI) module

• Locally, on a PC via the optical front connector, using SMS (and possibly CAP 531) in the PC

• Locally or remotely, via one of the ports on the rear (using SMS, CAP 531 or SCS).

Note that in REC 561, all configuration is performed with CAP 531.

3.1 Built-in man machine interface (MMI)

The setting access on the built-in MMI can be blocked by the binary insignal MMI--BLOCKSET. When this signal is active, the LEDs can sbe cleared from the front.

3.2 Front Communication When a PC is used for connection to the front, you need the SMS-Band SM/REx 5xx, (SM/REL 531 for REL 531 etc.). (For the collectiondisturbances to a front connected PC, RECOM is not required becaunecessary functionality is built in to SM/REx 5xx.) For configuratioCAP 531 can be used with SMS.

You use a special cable for connecting your PC to the front of the tenal. This can be ordered from ABB Network Partner, order N1MKC 950 001-1. It is plugged into the optical contact on the left side


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 166-XENPage 3 - 10

the built-in MMI. The other end of the cable is plugged directly into theCOM-port of the PC. The cable includes an optical contact, an opto/elec-trical converter and an electrical cable with a standard 9-pole D-sub con-tact. This gives you a disturbance-free and safe communication with theterminal.

When communicating with a PC, the setting of the slave number and baudrate (communication speed) must be equal in the program and in the ter-minal. For further instructions on how to set these parameters in the PCprogram, see the User’s Guide of SMS-BASE and of the SM/REx 5xx.

The setting of the slave number and baud rate of the front port of the ter-minal is done on the built-in MMI at:

ConfigurationSPA Comm

Front

3.3 Remote Communication, SMS or SCS

Setting can be performed via either of the optical ports at the rear of theterminal. When a PC is connected to the SMS system, SMS-BASE andthe appropriate SM/REx 5xx modules are used. For configuration,CAP 531 can be used with SMS. For the collection of analogue data to aPC, RECOM is also required in the PC. Setting can also be done via theSCS system based on MicroLIBRARY.

For all setting and configuration via the optical ports on the rear, set theSetting Restrictions to Open. Otherwise, no setting is allowed via the rearcommunication ports. This setting applies for both the SPA port and theLON port. This parameter can only be set on the local MMI, and islocated at:

ConfigurationSPAComm

RearSettingRestrict

You can also permit changes between active setting groups withActGrpRestrict in the same menu section.

When communicating with SMS or SCS via the SPA port, the setting ofthe slave number and baud rate (communication speed) must be equal inthe computer program and in the terminal. For further instructions on howto set these parameters in the SMS, see the User’s Guide of SMS-BASEand of the SM/REx 5xx.

The setting of the slave number and baud rate of the rear SPA port of theterminal is done on the built-in MMI at:

ConfigurationSPA Comm

Rear


Version 1.0-00

o the

is are

S,in

on-

arefined

on-de.ed.

the

mal

When communicating via the LON port, the settings are made with theLNT, LON Network Tool. The settings are shown on the built-in MMI at:

ConfigurationLON Comm

From this menu, it is also possible to send the “ServicePinMessage” tLNT. For further instructions, see Remote communication(1MRK 580 142-XEN).

3.4 Configuration of inputs and outputs

The terminal has a default configuration for all functions, that is, theredefault internal wiring of the terminal. All input and output contacts aalso wired to functions in the terminal.

You can change the configuration on the built-in MMI or via PC/SMeither with or without the CAP 531 configuration tool. On the built-MMI, the configuration is done at:

ConfigurationFunction Inputs, Slotnn-XXXyy

For REC 561, all configuration is performed with CAP 531, and no cfiguration can be changed on the built-in MMI.

You can select the binary outputs from a signal list where the signalsgrouped under their function names. You can also specify a user-dename for each input and output signal.

When downloading a configuration to the terminal with the CAP 531 cfiguration tool, the terminal is automatically set in configuration moWhen the terminal is set in configuration mode, all functions are blockThe yellow LED of the terminal flashes, and the green LED is lit while terminal is in configuration mode.

When downloading ends, the terminal is automatically set in normode.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 166-XENPage 3 - 12

4 CommissioningBefore any test occurs, set the terminal to test mode. This can be done onthe built-in MMI at:

TestTest Mode

Operation

Test/Mode/Operation = On sets the terminal in test mode, but this is notactivated until this setting has been saved and the yellow LED starts toflash. The test mode can also be activated via a binary input connectedto TEST-INPUT. So select the Operation above to BinInput in that case.

When TestMode is set to On (Test/Mode/Operation = On), the yellowLED flashes and the setting of the Disturbance report parameters have thiseffect:

Test

/Mo

de

Op

erat

ion

Test

/Mo

de

Dis

turb

Rep

ort

Test

/Mo

de

Dis

turb

Su

mm

ary

Then the results are...

On Off Off • Disturbances are not stored.• LED information is not displayed on the

MMI and not stored.• No disturbance summary is scrolled on the

MMI.

On Off On • Disturbances are not stored.• LED information (yellow - start, red - trip)

are displayed on the built-in MMI but not stored in the terminal.

• Disturbance summary is scrolled automati-cally on the built-in MMI for the two latest recorded disturbances, until cleared. The information is not stored in the terminal.

On On On or Off

• The disturbance report works as in normal mode.

• Disturbances are stored. Data can be read from the built-in MMI, a front-connected PC, or SMS.

• LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) is stored.

• The disturbance summary is scrolled auto-matically on the built-in MMI for the two lat-est recorded disturbances, until cleared.

• All disturbance data that is stored during test mode remains in the terminal when changing back to normal mode.


Version 1.0-00

ess- areOK, on an

r if the

k ofnc- volt-phased cur- theyicate

atinge can

hasent cir-

testf the

Events occurring while the terminal is set in test mode can reported to theSCS system in these ways:

• All event are reported.

• No events are reported.

• Events are reported according to the event mask.

This selection is made in SMS or in SCS.

4.1 Test of internal circuits The A/D conversion module, the power supply module, the main procing module, the signal processing module, and the In/Out modulescontinuously supervised and internal signals present the result (Warning, or Failure). If an internal fault is detected, this is indicatedthe built-in MMI. In the front-connected PC or SMS, the fault createsevent in the internal event list.

The power supply is supervised continuously and if a failure occur, othe internal signal INT--FAIL is activated, a special output contact onpower supply module is activated (Internal fail).

4.2 Secondary injection test

Secondary injection testing is a normal part of the commissioning wora terminal with analogue inputs. Check the operating value of all futions. The test set should be able to provide a three-phase supply ofages and currents. The magnitude of voltage and current, and the angle between voltage and current must be variable. The voltages anrents from the test set must be obtained from the same source, andmust have a very small harmonic contents. If the test set cannot indthe phase angle, you need a separate phase-angle meter.

The time-lag elements need not be switched off to record the opercharacteristic for the different zones, because operation for each zonbe read as indications on the MMI.

Note that this terminal is designed for a maximum continuous cur-rent of four times the nominal current.

4.3 Check of external connections

When a line terminal will go into service, you must check that theintended voltages and currents reach the relay. Also check the psequence and identify each phase in both the voltage and the currecuits.

Firmly tighten all screw terminals.

COMBITEST test switch RTXP 24The terminal can be equipped with a test switch of type RTXP 24. Theswitch and its associated test plug handle (RTXH 24) are a part oCOMBITEST system, which is described in Buyer’s Guide COMBITESTTest system (1MRK 512 001-BEN).


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 166-XENPage 3 - 14

When the test handle is inserted into the test switch, all current circuits onthe transformer side are short-circuited and all voltage circuits are opened,except for terminal 1 and 12, which are used for dc supply of the terminal.The testing equipment connected to the test handle is automatically con-nected to the terminal.

You can plug the test handle into the test switch or withdraw it from thetest switch to the intermediate position. In this position, the trip circuitsare blocked, but the voltage and current circuits are connected to the relay.You can plug the test handle into the test switch or remove it from the testswitch completely by releasing the top and bottom latches.

4.4 Functional test All included functions are tested according to the test instructions in eachfunction description. You can block functions individually during the test,so that only the function that is to be tested is active. In this way, you cantest slower back-up measuring functions without the interference of fastermeasuring functions. You can also test the terminal without changing theconfiguration and the setting of the terminal.

The functions are blocked on the built-in MMI at:

TestTestMode

BlockFunctions

The setting is only valid at test mode. If the functions are blocked in thismenu, they are blocked only while the terminal is in test mode. Whenusing this blocking feature, remember that for testing a function, you mustactivate not only the function, but the whole sequence of functions that areinterconnected in a sequence (from measuring inputs to binary outputcontacts) including logic, and so on.

4.5 Test termination When the whole test is finished, reconfigure the terminal into normaloperating mode on the built-in MMI at:

TestTest Mode

Operation

Set Test/Mode/Operation = Off, and save the test mode setting. The yel-low LED goes out.


Version 1.0-00

5 Fault tracing

5.1 Using information on the built-in MMI

If an internal fault has occurred, the built-in MMI displays informationunder:

Terminal StatusSelf Superv

Here, there are indications of internal failure (serious fault), or internalwarning (minor problem).

There are also indications regarding the faulty unit, according to Table 1.

You can also connect the internal signals, such as INT--FAIL and INT--WARN to binary output contacts for signalling to a control room.

In the Terminal Status information, you can view the current informationfrom the self-supervision function. Indications of failure or warnings foreach hardware module are provided, as well as information about theexternal time synchronization and the internal clock, according to Table 1.Recommendations are given on measures to be taken to correct the fault.Loss of time synchronisation can be considered as a warning only. Theterminal has full functionality without time synchronisation.

5.2 Using front-connected PC or SMS

Here two summary signals appear, self-supervision summary and CPU-module status summary. These signals can be compared to the internalsignals as:

Table 1: Self-supervision signals

MMI information Status Signal nameActivates summary signal

Description

InternFail OK / FAIL INT--FAIL Internal fail summary

Intern Warning OK /WARNING INT--WARNING

Internal warning summary

CPU-modFail OK / FAIL INT--CPUFAIL

INT--FAIL Main processing module failed

CPU-modWarning OK /WARNING INT--CPUWARN

INT--WARNING

Main processing module warning (failure of clock, time synch., fault locator or disturbance recorder)

ADC-module OK / FAIL INT--ADC INT--FAIL A/D conversion module failed

Slotnn-XXXyy OK / FAIL INT--IOyy INT--FAIL I/O module yy failed

Real Time Clock OK /WARNING INT--RTC INT--WARNING

Internal clock is reset - Set the clock

Time Sync OK /WARNING INT--TSYNC INT--WARNING

No time synchronisation


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 166-XENPage 3 - 16

rma-M-

the

butance

n of

on

• Self-supervision summary = INT--FAIL and INT--WARNING

• CPU-module status summary = INT--CPUFAIL and INT--CPU-WARN

When an internal fault has occurred, you can retrieve extensive infotion about the fault from the list of internal events available in the TERSTS Terminal Status part of the PC program. A time-tagged list withdate and time of the last 40 internal events is available here.

The internal events in this list not only refer to faults in the terminal, also to other activities, such as change of settings, clearing of disturbreports, and loss of external time synchronization.

These events are logged as Internal events:

The events in the Internal event list are time tagged with a resolutio1 ms.

This means that using the PC for fault tracing provides informationthe:

• Module that should be changed

• Sequence of faults, if more than one unit is faulty

• Exact time of the occurrence of the fault

Event message: Description: Generating signal:

INT--FAIL Off Internal fail status INT--FAIL (reset event)

INT--FAIL On INT--FAIL (set event)

INT--WARNING Off Internal warning status INT--WARNING (reset event)

INT--WARNING On INT--WARNING (set event)

INT--CPUFAIL Off Main processing module fatal error status INT--CPUFAIL (reset event)

INT--CPUFAIL On INT--CPUFAIL (set event)

INT--CPUWARN Off Main processing module non-fatal error status INT--CPUWARN (reset event)

INT--CPUWARN On INT--CPUWARN (set event)

INT--ADC Off A/D conversion module status INT--ADC (reset event)

INT--ADC On INT--ADC (set event)

INT--IOn Off In/Out module No n status INT--IOn (reset event)

INT--IOn On INT--IOn (set event)

INT--RTC Off Real Time Clock (RTC) status INT--RTC (reset event)

INT--RTC On INT--RTC (set event)

INT--TSYNC Off External time synchronisation status INT--TSYNC (reset event)

INT--TSYNC On INT--TSYNC (set event)

DREP-MEMUSED On >80% of the disturbance recording memory used

DREP-MEMUSED (set event)

SETTING CHANGED Any settings in terminal changed

DISTREP CLEARED All disturbances in Disturbance report cleared


Version 1.0-00

r

rre- is

withd inonly

herower

6 Repair instructionWhen a module in any terminal needs repair, the whole terminal can beremoved and sent to ABB.

An alternative to this can be to disassemble the terminal and send only thefaulty circuit board to ABB for repair. When a printed circuit board istransported to ABB, it must always be placed in a metallic protection bag(closest to the card) which is ESD-proof (electrostatic discharge). You canalso purchase separate modules for replacement.

Note: Follow all power company safety rules.

Before disassembling the terminal, remember the consequences of theESD phenomenon. Most electronic components are sensitive to electro-static discharge, and latent damage may occur, unless measures are taken.To prevent this, use an ESD wrist strap. A semi-conducting cover must beplaces on the workbench. The cover must be connected to earth.

Disassemble the terminal like this:

1. Switch off the dc supply.

2. Short-circuit all current inputs and disconnect all voltage connec-tors.

3. Disconnect all signal connectors.

4. Disconnect the optical fibres.

5. Unscrew the main back plate of the terminal.

6. Unscrew the small back plate of the terminal— if the transformemodule is to be changed.

7. Pull out the module that needs repair.

8. Check that the springs on the card rail have connection to the cosponding metallic area on the circuit board when the new modulepushed in.

9. Reassemble the terminal.

If the terminal has the option Increased measuring accuracy, a file calibration data which is unique for the Transformer module is storethe Main processing module. Therefore it is not possible to change one of these modules with maintained accuracy.

7 MaintenanceThe terminal is self-supervised. No special maintenance is required.

But you must follow the instructions of the power company and otmaintenance directives that are valid for the maintenance of the psystem.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 166-XENPage 3 - 18


Function:

3Local man machine communication

1MRK 580 156-XEN


1 IntroductionThe built-in man machine interface (MMI) provides local communicationbetween the user and the terminal.

Local communication also occurs with a PC connected to the built-inMMI via a special optical interface. This communication works like theremote communication within the station monitoring system (SMS)described in the other corresponding documents.

This chapter describes in detail the structure of a local MMI, the basicprinciples of local man-machine communication (MMC), and the basicstructure of a menu tree in a terminal.

Document 1MRK 580 158-XEN presents a detailed menu tree for allREx 5xx series terminals in detail.

2 Man-machine interface module - designThe MMI module consists of three light emitting diodes (LEDs), a liquidcrystal display (LCD), six membrane button, and one optical connectorthat enables local man machine communication (MMC) with the aid of apersonal computer (PC).

Fig. 1 Built-in man-machine interface module.

2.1 LEDs Three LEDs provide primary information on the status of a terminal. EachLED has a special function, which also depends on whether it is dark, hasa steady light, or a flashing light.

E

C


green yellow red

LEDs



push buttons

(X80156-1)

ABB Network Partner ABLocal man machine communication

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 156-XENPage 3 - 20

ws.

the

Signal: Indicates that ...

Green LED, steady light The operating condition of a terminal isnormal.

Green LED, flashing light An internal error is detected within theterminal. You can block a terminal oroperate with reduced functionality,depending on the type of error and theinternal configuration.

Yellow LED, steady light One or more disturbances are recordedand stored in the terminal.

Yellow LED, flashing light The terminal is in test mode or configura-tion mode.

Red LED, steady light At least one of the protection functionsissued a trip command during a distur-bance recording.

Red LED, flashing light The terminal is blocked by an internal orexternal command.

2.2 LCD display The liquid crystal display (LCD) provides detailed information on the ter-minal. Normally, it is dark. Select any button to turn on the current statusof all LEDs and display the type of terminal with its version, together withinstructions on how to continue local communication with the terminal.

The display shuts down after you exit the menu tree or if no button isselected for more than about 45 minutes.

The disturbance summary (automatic scrolling of disturbance data for thelast two disturbances) is active if there is a disturbance report in a termi-nal, which is not yet acknowledged.

2.3 Buttons The number of buttons used on the MMI module was reduced to the mini-mum acceptable amount to make the communication as simple as possiblefor the user. The buttons normally have more than one function, depend-ing on where they are used in the dialogue.

All buttons have one function in common: when the display is in idle(dark, non active) mode, selecting any of them results in activation of thedisplay.

The C button has three main functions, it:

• Cancels the operation, when used together with the dialogue windo

• Provides an Exit operation in a menu tree. This means that eachselection of the C button within the menu tree results in stopping

Local man machine communication


Version 1.0-00

ple,.

real

on

ting

current function or leaving the menu branch and moving one step higher in the menu tree.

• Clears LEDs when in an upper menu level.

The E button mainly provides an Enter function. It activates, for examthe selected menu tree branch, confirm settings, and different actions

The left and right arrow buttons have two functions, to:

• Position the cursor in a horizontal direction, for instance, to movebetween the digits in a number during the setting procedures for values.

• Move between the data windows within the same menu branch.

The up and down arrow buttons have three functions, to:

• Move between different menus within the menu and the dialoguewindows.

• Scroll the menu tree when it contains more branches than shownthe display.

• Change the parameter values in the data windows during the setprocedure.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 156-XENPage 3 - 22

haso oneains dis-

s is.

hasis:

s-

3 Unattended MMIWhen the MMI is unattended in normal operation, two things mightoccur:

• No reporting of a disturbance (idle mode)

• Reporting of a disturbance (reporting mode)

3.1 Idle mode When the terminal is in normal operation after the latest disturbancebeen acknowledged or no disturbance is stored in the memory, and nhas attended the MMI for more than 45 minutes, the green LED remactive. The yellow and red LEDs are dark and no text is shown on theplay. The display is dark, with no light behind.

The display and LEDs will change their status when one of the buttonselected, or when a new disturbance is stored in the terminal memory

3.2 Reporting mode When the terminal is in normal operation and a protection function operated since the latest reset of the indications, the MMI looks like th

Green LED Lit.

Yellow and red LEDs Lit, if conditions for their operationsoccurred (start for yellow, trip for red).

Disturbance summary Displayed for the last two disturbancethat are automatically scrolled on the display.

3.3 Configuration mode When the terminal is in configuration mode, the MMI looks like this:

Green LED Lit.

Yellow LED Flashing.



Version 1.0-00

ted

that

e thes areenu

win-ge in menu

pro-meed ast the

4 Menu window

Fig. 2 Menu window, general configuration (2a) and typical example (2b)

For row one:

• A dot always appears at the beginning of the row when the selecmenu window does not represent the main menu.

• path1 displays the name of the previous menu.

• path2 displays the name of the active menu window.

For rows two, three, and four:

• Menus k, k + 1 and k + 2 appear in the three bottom rows.

• When the cursor highlights one of the rows, it indicates the path you can activate by selecting the E button.

The up arrow appears in row 2 when more menus are available befork menu. The down arrow appears in the bottom row when more menuavailable after the k+2 menu. To change the active path within the mtree (scrolling the menu) select the up or down arrow button.

To change the menu window into a new menu window or into a data dow select the E button. In same case the paths in the first row chansuch a way that the old path2 now becomes a path1 and the previousline with the cursor then changes into path2.

Fig. 2b shows a menu window that appears during the configuration cedure on the terminal. The configuration of function inputs will becopossible by selecting the E button, since this submenu appears markan active path by a cursor. The down arrow informs the user abouadditional menus that are available for a configuration.

.path1/path2Menu (k)Menu (k+1)Menu (k+2)

V

Va)

REL 531/ConfigFunction InputsSlot 11-BIM1Slot 13-BOM2 V

b) (X80156-2)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 156-XENPage 3 - 24

m-

ig.ve.

5 Dialogue window

Fig. 3 Dialogue windows, typical examples

The dialogue windows instruct the operator how to perform the actionsdefined by the text in the third and fourth rows. The first and second rowsusually display a headline that provides more information to the userabout the proposed action or the terminal.

The REx 5xx series has five different dialogue windows within each ter-minal:

• Start window

• Command without a selection

• Command with a selection

• Command with a cancellation

• Command with a selection and a cancellation

5.1 Starting the dialogue Fig. 3a and Fig. 3b show two typical dialogue windows for starting comunication with the terminal. Select the:

• C button to clear the LEDs (if required), or

• E button to enter the menu tree

The text (Ready, Start, Trip) in row one of the window in Fig. 3a and F3b describes the LEDs that are at the top of the display when it is acti

RE.5.. VER 1.0C=Clear LEDsE=Enter menu

a) b)

TripStartReady RE.5.. VER 1.0C=QuitE=Enter menu

TripStartReady

(X80156-3)



Version 1.0-00

5.2 Confirming a command

Fig. 4 shows a typical example of a dialogue window for command with-out selection. The instructions in the first two rows describe possibleactions. YES and NO windows with the flashing cursor on one of themappear in the bottom row. You can move the cursor from one to anotherpossibility by selecting the right or left button. The user must, after takingthe decision, confirm the same one by selecting the E button.

Fig. 4 Dialogue window for a command without selection.

Position the cursor on YES and select the E button to confirm the instruc-tions (commands) in rows one and two.

Position the cursor on NO and select the E button to exit the dialogue win-dow without saving changes that were made during communicationwithin the menu tree. Or select C with the same result.

5.3 Selecting a command

Fig. 5 Dialogue window for a command with a selection

Use the up or down buttons to position the cursor on a command. SelectYES to execute the command. Select NO to cancel and exit the dialoguewindow.

Instruction 2Instruction 1

NOYES(X80156-4)

Command nInstruction 1

NOYES

V

(X80156-5)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 156-XENPage 3 - 26

5.4 Cancelling a command Fig. 6 shows a typical dialogue window that lets you cancel a command.Use the right or left arrows to move to YES, NO or CANCEL. Then selectE to confirm your selection. If you select CANCEL confirmed with E,you return to the window that was shown on the display before the dia-logue window appeared.

Fig. 6 Dialogue window for a command with cancellation

5.5 Selecting and cancelling a command

Fig. 7 Dialogue window for a command with a selection

Here you can select the command in row two, which is indicated by the upor down arrow at the end of the row.

Use the right or left arrows to position the cursor on YES, NO or CAN-CEL. Select YES to execute the command. Select NO or CANCEL tocancel and exit the dialogue window.

Instruction 2Instruction 1

NOYES CANCEL(X80156-6)

Command Instruction V

NOYES CANCEL

(X80156-7)



Version 1.0-00

the

ail-ce or

set-onerowh in

6 Data window Use the data windows and branches to perform these tasks:

• Reading information• Configuration• Setting parameters

Fig. 8 Data window, general setting (8a) and typical example (8b)

Row one is the same as in the menu windows.Row two displays the name of a parameter.Rows three and four provide more information about the value in parameter.

The left and right arrow in the bottom row indicate that more data is avable in the same menu branch. Select the right or left arrow button onseveral times to get access to the data.

Fig. 8b shows the data window that appears on the display during theting procedure for Zone 1 of the distance protection. There is only value relevant for the impedance (X1 = 15,00 Ohms). The right arindicates that additional parameters are available for Zone 1 (reacresistive direction, time delay, and so on).

.path1/path2Data name=Data 1Data 2

a)

.Imped/Zone1X1=15.00 Ohm

V

b)(X80156-8)

V

V


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 156-XENPage 3 - 28

9.

6.1 Reading and setting values

The setting procedure for setting different values is identical for all differ-ent types of parameters. Fig. 9 shows a typical example of such a proce-dure.

The top row shows the previous and present menus (.path1/path2) andindicates the position in the complete menu tree. If the background behindthe parameter name flashes, you can enter a value.

Select the E button to switch from Fig. 9a to Fig. 9b. Row three of the firstdata window displays the current value in the parameter with the corre-sponding unit (seconds, Ohm, and so on).

Fig. 9 Example of a setting procedure for a real value of a variable

When the last digit of a number value (second window) is underscored bythe cursor, you can change the current value of the digit.

Select the up arrow to increase the value or the down arrow to decreasethe value. Release the arrow button when you reach the number value thatis required.

Use the left and right arrows to switch between digits (Fig. 9c and 9d).The digit that can be changed is always underscored.

You must confirm the new parameter value by selecting E. Then theparameter changes (Fig. 9f), and the background flashes behind theparameter name, as it did at the start of the procedure.

Note: The new parameter value does not immediately appear in the corre-sponding setting group because all setting procedures are performed inseparate editing areas.

New setting values for a setting group are activated after you save all set-tings in one of four groups of setting parameters and then exit from theediting area. See “Saving the settings in a setting group” in chapter 6.

.path1/path2Parameter=xx.xx unit

a)

xx.xx unit

b)

.path1/path2Parameter=xx.xy unit

d)

zx.xy unit

e)

.path1/path2

xx.xy unit

c)

.path1/path2

zx.xy unit

f)

E

.path1/path2Parameter=


Parameter=

Parameter=

(X80156-9)

EV

V



Version 1.0-00

6.2 Reading and setting of non-numerical parameters

Non-numerical parameters can be set to predefined non-numerical values,for example, On - Off for the activation of different functions.

Fig. 10 Setting and reading the enumerators

The top row shows the previous and present menus (.path1/path2) andindicate the position in the complete menu tree. The parameter name ishighlighted, which means that you can enter a value. Select E to switchfrom Fig. 10a to Fig. 10b. The current non-numerical value appears in thethird row.

Select the up or down arrows to switch between the current non-numericalvalues (Fig. 10b, 10c, and 10d). Select E again to enter the new value(transition from Fig. 10d to 10e).

6.3 Reading and setting strings

Strings are the parameters within the terminal that can have user-definednames. Typical examples of strings are names of substations and lineswithin them, and names of different input signals connected to binaryinputs.

Fig. 11 Setting a string

Each string can be displayed in one row (13-16 characters).

(X80156-10)

.path1/path2

ABC

a)

ABC

b)

.path1/path2Parameter=XYZ

d)

XYZ

e)

.path1/path2

XBA

c)

E



Parameter=

E

Parameter=

V

V

V

V

(X80156-11)

.path1/path2Parameter=LIMbft34ytr7nlhd

a)

Line 37ytrnlhd

b)

.path1/path2Parameter=Line 37

c)

Line 37

d)

E


.path1/path2Parameter=E

V

V

V

V


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 156-XENPage 3 - 30

Row one in the data window displays the last two branches of the menutree. Row two displays the parameter that has a string value. Row threedisplays the value (Fig. 11a). You can enter and change the value if theparameter is highlighted.

Select E (Fig. 11a) and a character is underscored by the cursor (Fig. 11b).

Select the up or down arrow to change the character. Or, use the left andright arrows to switch between characters in a string (Fig. 11c).

After the string value is set (user-defined value, Fig. 11c), select E and thedata window changes as shown in Fig. 11d, which indicates that the stringhas a new value.

6.4 Configuration of the binary inputs

The user can define the names of the binary inputs that appear later in thedisturbance reports, under the Configuration submenu as shown in Fig.12. After selection of a Slot in a menu window (Fig. 12a), a new menuwindow appears, where the user can enter the desired name of the corre-sponding binary input according to the instructions for setting strings.

Up to five slots can be configured from the built-in MMI.

Fig. 12 Configuration (naming) of binary inputs

The left and right arrows in the bottom row of the data window inFig. 12b appear if more binary inputs are available. This means that youcan reach all the binary inputs in the same module by selecting the left orright arrows.

6.5 Configuration of the binary outputs

Practically all internal signals and binary inputs within the terminal arefreely programmable to any of the binary outputs (output relay contacts).The configuration follows the procedure in Fig. 13.

The selection of corresponding binary outputs on the module follows thesame procedure as described for the configuration of binary inputs.

(X80156-12)

REx 5xx/ConfigFunction InputsSlot 11-BIM1Slot 13-BOM2

V

Va)

Config/BIM1IO1--BINAME1=Input 1 name

V

b)



Version 1.0-00

The bottom row in Fig. 13b displays the signal that is connected to thebinary output displayed in row two.

Row three displays the function that the signal belongs to.

Left and right arrows in row four indicate that more binary outputs are onthe same module.

Select the E button to view the display shown in Fig. 13c. The cursorhighlights row three, which displays the function name. Now you canenter the function and select corresponding signals.

To access other functions, select the up or down arrows (Fig. 13d).

After you select the desired function in Fig. 13d, select the E button toactivate the signal branch within this function (Fig. 13e). Select the up ordown arrows to access other signals that belong to the same function (Fig.13f).

Fig. 13 Configuration of the binary outputs

REx 5xx/ConfigFunction InputsSlot 11-BIM1

Va)

Function s

b)

.Config/BOM2Config BO1=Function s+1

d)

Function s+1

e)

.Config/BOM2

Function s

c)

.Config/BOM2

Function s+1

f)

E

V

.Config/BOM2Config BO1=

.Config/BOM2Config BO1=

Config BO1=

Config BO1=

(X80156-13)

g)

User defined name

h)

Function s

j)

.Config/BOM2

User changed name

i)

E

.Config/BOM2IO2--BONAME1=

.Config/BOM1Config BOn+1=

Slot 13-BOM2 Signal m (s)

E

E

Signal k+1

E

.Config/BOM2

Function s+1Config BO1=

VSignal k+1

IO2--BONAME1= E

Signal m

Signal k

V

V

V

V


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 156-XENPage 3 - 32

After the correct signal appears in the data window (Fig. 13f), select the Ebutton to confirm this action. Then the window changes from Fig. 13f toFig. 13g. This window indicates that the function and signal were config-ured to the corresponding binary output.

Select the right arrow and E to switch to the window in Fig. 13h. Here,you can select the preferred name for the selected signal on the binary out-put as displayed in row two.

Use the same setting procedure that you used for setting string values.

After you rename the signal, select E to confirm the change.

6.6 Configuration of the functional inputs

Configurable functional inputs are connectable to any of the configurablefunctional outputs and to different binary inputs. Fig. 14 shows the proce-dure necessary for the configuration of functional inputs, where an inputsignal (m) that belongs to function n will be connected to the output signal(l+1) belonging to a function (k+1).

You configure the functional inputs from the configuration menu. Youcan access the function and input signals from the first three data windows(Figures 14a, 14b, and 14c). Rows three and four in Fig. 14c also display afunction and a signal that was already connected to function n.

Select E to confirm the selection of the input signal to be changed. Thewindow changes as shown in Fig. 14d.

Fig. 14 Configuration of the functional inputs

Select the up or down arrows to select another function. Select E to con-firm the selection. After confirmation, the window changes from Fig. 14dto 14e.

Select the up or down arrows to select the output signal. During the selec-tion, the window changes as shown in Fig. 14f. Select E to confirm theselection.

REx 5xx/ConfigFunction InputsSlot 11-BIM1

a)

Function n

b)

.FuncInp/Func n

Function k

c)

E

V

.Config/FuncInpFunction n-1

Slot 13-BOM2 Function n+1 Signal h

E

V

V

Input signal m=

.FuncInp/Func nInput signal m =Function k

d)

Function k+1

e)

.FuncInp/Func n

Function k+1

f)

.FuncInp/Func nInput signal m =

Signal l Signal l+1

Input signal m= E

(X80156-14)

E

E

V

V



Version 1.0-00

All

igu-blecular

er

re.

The window in Fig. 14c reappears, and then you can configure anothersignal for the same function.

6.7 Setting internal time Use the setting menu to set the internal time for a complete terminal,according to Fig. 15.

.

Fig. 15 Setting internal time within a terminal

After you select the E button, the data window changes from Fig. 15a toFig. 15b. Note that the cursor is always positioned under the secondsvalue when you begin. Select the left arrow to move to the date value.

Real time in a terminal uses these values:

• YYYY, year

• MMM, first three letters of the month’s name

• DD, day in the month

• hh, hour

• mm, minutes

• ss, seconds

Apply the rules for setting a string when you set the month value.other values are real values.

6.8 Additional information The terminal also provides more information about its operation, confration, and service conditions. The following information is availa(also depending on the basic functions and options included in a partiterminal):

• Phasors of primary and secondary voltages and currents and othmeasured values.

• Logical signals that are active during the communication procedu

• Summary of the recorded disturbance under observation.

• Time of the disturbance under observation.

• The version of software that is built into the terminal.

• The version of hardware that is built into the terminal.

.Set/TimeDate & Time=YYYY-MMM-DD

a)

YYYY-MMM-DD

b)

E.Set/TimeDate & Time=

(X80156-15)

hh:mm:ss hh:mm:ss


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 156-XENPage 3 - 34

All this information is available under the different parts of a menu tree(See Menu tree - Appendix, (1MRK 580 158-XEN)).

In addition, a recalculation of the distance to fault is possible when theFault locator option is included in the terminal. For more details, see thedescription of the Fault locator function, in Fault locator(1MRK 580 138-XEN).

6.9 Saving the settings in a setting group

You set different parameters within one of the four setting groups in aseparate editing area. Select the E button under the Setting submenu toenter this area for a desired setting group. See Fig. 16.

Then you change different parameters for different functions. To exit theediting area, select the C button until a dialogue window for a commandwith confirmation appears.

If you select the C button too many times, the terminal changes to the dia-logue window with confirmation. Here, you must confirm the cancellationof the previous setting activities by selecting the E button. Otherwise,select C again and the menu tree returns to the first dialogue window.

The terminal prompts you to save the changed settings in the same settinggroup that you started with (setting group n in Fig. 16). You can confirmthe save or request that the settings be saved in another setting group,which is available within the current menu window.

Use the up or down arrows to select the desired setting group.



Version 1.0-00

Fig. 16 Saving the settings in a setting group

Use this function to copy the setting parameters from one setting group toanother when you must change only a small number of parameters for dif-ferent operating conditions.

Select the E button to save the setting values that were set in the editionareas for a selected setting group.

Confirm the save when prompted for a confirmation in the dialogue win-dow on the MMI. Select the E button and the first menu window for theselection of setting groups reappears on the MMI. Then new parametervalues appear in the desired setting group.

(X80156-16)

.Set/FuncGroup (n-1)Group n

V

Group n

.Func/Grp n

Function mV

.Set/FuncGroup n-1

Group (n+1) Function (m+1)

E

V

V

Function (m-1)

Group nSave as:

NOYES CANCEL

Group n+1Save as:

NOYES CANCEL

Group (n+1)

V

V

E

C

C2 x

Setting procedure as described underthe instructions for setting and readingof different variables and parameters

Group nSave as:

NOYES

V

V

E C E C

CANCEL

Group nSave as:

NOYES CANCEL

E

C

procedureSaving

cancelledV

VGroup nSave as:

NOYES

V

V

CANCEL

V

V

V

V

No settingssaved

Settingssaved


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 156-XENPage 3 - 36


Function:

s andthe

3Menu tree REC 561 1MRK 580 189-XEN


1 GeneralThis chapter presents the main body of a menu tree. It is divided into theselarger menus:

• Disturbance report• Service report• Settings• Terminal status• Configuration• Command• Test

The selection of menus can be masked by the use of SMS i.e. menusubmenus can be visible or not on the built-in MMI according to user’s wishes.

Fig. 1 Menu tree for REC 561

MAN MACHINE COMMUNICATIONMENU TREE

DISTURBANCE REPORTInformation on last 10 disturbancesManual triggering of adisturbance recordingClearing of the disturbancereporting memory

SERVICE REPORTMean valuesPhasorsSynchronizing valuesLogical signalsI/O modulesCounters within the autoreclosing functionDisturbance reportActive groupInternal time

SETTINGSParameters within the four setting groupsfor different protection functionsChanging of the active setting groupDisturbance reportInternal time

CONFIGURATIONIdentifiers (IDs)Analogue inputsI/O modulesTime synchronizing sourceBuilt-in MMISPA communication

TERMINAL STATUSReport on self supervisionTerminal ID

TESTBlock terminalTest mode

OperationBlock functionsDisturbance reporting unit

COMMMANDActivation and current statusof command

LON communication

Configuration mode

(X80189-1)

ABB Network Partner ABMenu tree REC 561

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 189-XENPage 3 - 38

l s

-

et a

sav-aredg of

le.fromnces

ndi-gueded

2 Disturbance reportThe disturbance recording function is optional. The disturbance reportmenu gives the user all information recorded by the terminal for the last10 disturbances after the last clearing of the disturbance recorder memory.The complete menu consists of these branches:

• Information on up to the 10 last recorded disturbances• Manual triggering of the disturbance reporting unit• Clearing of the memory that belongs to the disturbance report

2.1 Information on recorded disturbances

Each of the recorded disturbances displays:

• The time of disturbance, which is displayed as an internal terminadate and time at the instant when the first of the triggering signalstarts the disturbance recording.

• Trig signal that started the recording.

• Indications that appeared during the recorded disturbance. Indications that can be recorded by the disturbance reporting unit are selectable during the configuration procedure.

• Trip values that are displayed as phasors (RMS value and phaseangle) of the currents and voltages, before and during the fault.

2.2 Manual triggering of a disturbance recording

Use the manual triggering of a disturbance recording submenu to gsnapshot.

2.3 Clearing of the disturbance report memory

The disturbance report has a dedicated memory facility, sufficient for ing the up to the 10 latest disturbances. All this memory can be cleand thus prepared for a completely new set of records. The memorizindisturbances in the terminal follows the first in - first out (FIFO) principThis means that the oldest disturbance will disappear automatically the terminal memory when a new disturbance occurs, if 10 disturbaare already stored in the terminal memory.

3 Service reportThe Service report menu displays information about the operating cotions and information about the terminal. The service report for analovalues is available only when the transformer module option is incluin the terminal. The total report consists of these items:

• Mean values• Phasors• Synchronizing values• Logical signals• I/O modules• Counters within the autoreclosing function• Disturbance report• Active group• Internal time

Menu tree REC 561ABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 189-XENPage 3 - 39

Version 1.0-00

of al.

es

the

con-

3.1 Mean values Mean values of the measured current, voltage, active and reactive power,and of the frequency, are displayed on the control terminals.

3.2 Phasors The control terminal displays primary and secondary phasors of measuredcurrents and voltages.

3.3 Synchronizing values The actual measured values of phase angle, voltage, and frequency differ-ences are displayed if the optional synchro-check is built into the controlterminal.

3.4 Logical signals The current values of internal logical signals are displayed on the Logicalsignals submenu.

3.5 I/O modules For each of the included I/O modules, the current logical values of allbinary inputs and outputs of a terminal and the analogue values of the mAinput module are always displayed.

3.6 Counters within the autoreclosing function

Autoreclosing functions are available as options. They also comprise dif-ferent counters, and their actual values are displayed on this submenu.You can reset the counters to the initial zero value on this submenu.

3.7 Disturbance report The service report information on the disturbance report contains:

• Percentage of the used dedicated memory capacity for purposesthe disturbance recording function, when it is built into the termin

• The sequence number that the next recorded disturbance receiv(can be both read and set here).

• The status of built-in analogue triggers that can start operation ofdisturbance recorder.

3.8 Active group The current active setting group is displayed on this submenu.

3.9 Internal time You can check he internal terminal time on this submenu. The data tains information about the date and the time - down to seconds.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 189-XENPage 3 - 40

ary

hour,

rmi-

rvi-rmi-

ars,di-oni-

4 SettingsUse this menu to set different parameters within the built-in functions.

4.1 Functions You can set different setting parameters for basic and optional protectionand automation functions that are built into the terminal. The parametersare independent of each other, within four separate setting groups.

4.2 Changing of an active setting group

Users can select the active setting group in a dialogue window, using acommand with confirmation.

4.3 Disturbance report You can set these parameters from the Disturbance report submenu:

• On or Off, which specifies if the disturbance reporting unit is acti-vated or deactivated.

• Recording times, for example, pre-fault, post-fault, and limit time.

• Triggering functions.

• Masking - to enable man machine communication of up to 48 binsignals that are selected when configuring the terminal.

• Up to 10 analogue signals that are recorded by the disturbance recorder (when they are included in the terminal).

• Triggering mode (overfunction, underfunction, and Off-mode, as necessary).

4.4 Internal time Use this submenu to set and read the internal time (year, month, day,minute, second) of a terminal.

5 Terminal statusThis menu displays some of the most important information on the tenal. This information consists of:

• Self supervision - report

• ID of the terminal

5.1 Self supervision - report

The terminals of the REx 5xx series have built-in extensive self-supesion functions, which inform the user about errors detected in the tenal.

If an error occurs in the terminal, a general warning signal appetogether with information about the faulty module in the terminal. In adtion, a self-supervision function also displays the status of time synchrzation.

Menu tree REC 561ABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 189-XENPage 3 - 41

Version 1.0-00

text.

rrent

al

I/Ot isilla-

rnals of

5.2 Terminal ID The terminal ID consists of information about the terminal’s serialnumber, ordering number, and software version. The built-in moduleswith their versions are also included.

In addition, the user can enter information about different changes to themodules in a terminal.

6 ConfigurationUse this menu to tailor the configuration of a terminal. Use the CAP 531configuration tool to configure the functions and I/O modules. The MMIdisplays these submenus:

• Identifiers (IDs)• Analogue inputs• I/O modules (operation and oscillation)• Time synchronization source• Built-in MMI• SPA communication• LON communication

6.1 Identifiers The user can program the terminal parameters that define the location of aterminal within the power system. The parameters consist of free Some typical parameters (specific for the control terminals) are:

• The station name and number• The name of the covered bay• The name of the unit and its number

6.2 Analogue inputs This menu consists of:

• General data about the power network such as rated voltage, cuand frequency, and the position of the earthing point.

• Analogue current and voltage inputs ratio and name.

• User-defined names of the mean values measured by the termin(voltage, current, active and reactive power, frequency).

6.3 I/O modules This submenu displays information about the operation of the built-inmodules. You can set the level for when an oscillating binary inpublocked internally in the terminal. The input is released when the osction reduces its frequency.

6.4 Time synchronization source

The internal time of the terminal can be synchronized with some exteunits via the LON bus or SPA bus communication (option) or by meanminute pulse synchronization via a programmable binary input.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 189-XENPage 3 - 42

6.5 Built-in man machine interface (MMI)

You can activate the setting restriction function, which restricts thechanges of setting values and active groups via the built-in MMI.

6.6 SPA communication Parameters for SPA communication must be specified for each communi-cation port (one on the rear plane (optional) and one in the front). You canselect the communication speed for each communication channel sepa-rately. For the two rear channels (one SPA and one LON) you can set theaccess level to the terminal.

6.7 LON communication For the LON communication, you can read node information as addressand location, which are set from the LON Network Tool and also read theNeuron ID. At installation of a node, you can enter a ServicePinMsg com-mand to define for the terminal the address that is set in the LON NetworkTool. You can also reset all LON configurations by giving the commandLONDefault.

7 CommandUnder the command menu, you can activate different output signals forperformance of various commands in the terminal. From the CAP 531configuration tool, you can assign the commands with a programmablename.

8 TestUse this menu for testing purposes - to make secondary injection testingof the terminal as easy as possible. The user can block all binary outputsto prevent unwanted tripping of the circuit breaker and to prevent thesending of alarm signals to the control room and the control centre duringthe testing activities.

Under the block function menu, functions can be On or Off during testing.

Similarly, you can block the operation of the disturbance report so as notto overload the memory with operations caused by the secondary injectiontesting. Automatic testing logic can be used under this submenu.

You can set the terminal in configuration mode, which stops the executionof the logical functions, when the configuration is down-loaded from theCAP 531 configuration tool.


Function:

).

an

ters.

s.

are

3Menu tree - Appendix 1MRK 580 158-XEN

Version 1.0-00November 1996 Basic

1 IntroductionThis appendix describes the MMI-tree structure for the complete REx 5xxseries of terminals. This means that the MMI-tree in a certain terminal isonly a part of what is shown in this appendix. What is shown in a terminaldepends on the:

• Type of terminal• Options installed in the terminal

In some terminals, the MMI-tree can be partly hidden (programmable

To operate the built-in man machine interface (MMI), refer to “Local mmachine communication”, in “1MRK 580 156-XEN” .

This document uses these conventions:

• The path to the end-nodes is displayed with white-on-black charac

• Menu-nodes appear in plain text.

• Data nodes (parameters) appear in italic.

• Dialogues and references to other documents have thicker frame

Section 2.8 in this appendix lists the signals in the terminal, whichgrouped under function submenus.

ABB Network Partner ABMenu tree - Appendix

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 158-XENPage 3 - 44

2 Menu tree structure

2.1 Display for Disturbance Report menu

REx5xx RExx5xx/DistRep .DistRep/Disturb .Disturb/Dist1 .Dist1/Time .TripVal/PreFlt

Disturb.Report Disturbances Disturbance 1 TimeOfDisturb TimeOfDisturb U1 (*)

Service Report CalcDistToFlt Disturbance 2 Trig Signal U2 (*)

Settings Manual Trig Disturbance 3 Indications .Dist1/TrigSig U3 (*)

Terminal Status Clear DistRep Disturbance 4 Fault Locator TrigSignal U4 (*)

Configuration Disturbance 5 Trip Values U5 (*)

Command Disturbance 6 .Dist1/Indic I1 (*)

Test Disturbance 7 CalcDistToFault Indications I2 (*)

Disturbance 8 Command with I3 (*)

Disturbance 9 confirmation, see .Dist1/FItLoc I4 (*)

Disturbance 10 “Local MMC” FltLoop I5 (*)

1MRK580156-XEN Dist Frequency (*)

.DistRep/CalcFlt

.Disturbance 1 .Dist1/TripVal .TripVal/Fault

Disturbance 2 PreFault U1 (*)

Disturbance 3 Fault U2 (*)

Disturbance 4 U3 (*)



Disturbance 7 I1 (*)




I5 (*)

Manual Trig

Command with confirmation, see“Local MMC”1MRK580156-XEN

(*) User-defined name, default name is shown

Clear DistRep

Command with confirmation, see“Local MMC”1MRK580156-XEN

Menu tree - AppendixABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 158-XENPage 3 - 45

Version 1.0-00

2.2 Display for Service Report menu

REx5xx REx5xx/ServRep .ServRep/MeanVal .Phasors/Primary

Disturb.Report Mean Values U (*) U1 (*)

Service Report Diff Values I (*) U2 (*)

Settings Phasors P (*) U3 (*)

Terminal Status Sync Values1 Q (*) U4 (*)

Configuration Sync Values2 f (*) U5 (*)

Command Sync Values3 I1 (*)

Test Sync Values4 .ServRep/DiffVal I2 (*)

Logical Signals IDiffL1 I3 (*)

Slot12-BIM1 IBiasL1 I4 (*)

Slot14-IOM2 IDiffL2 I5 (*)

Slot16-BOM3 IBiasL2

Slot18-MIM1 IDiffL3 .Phasors/Second

Slot20-BIM5 IBiasL3 U1 (*)

Slot22-IOM6 U2 (*)

Slot24-BOM7 .ServRep/Phasors U3 (*)

Slot26-MIM2 Primary U4 (*)

Slot28-BIM9 Secondary U5 (*)

Slot30-IOM10 I1 (*)

Slot32-BOM11 .ServRep/SyncVn I2 (*)

Slot34-MIM3 UDiff I3 (*)

Slot36-BIM13 FreqDiff I4 (*)

ARCounters PhaseDiff I5 (*)

DiffCommunic

Direction

DisturbReport (*) User-defined name, default name is shown

Active Group

Time


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 158-XENPage 3 - 46

REx5xx REx5xx/ServRep .ServRep/LogSign

Disturb.Report Mean Values All signals in signal list

Service Report Diff Values are grouped under

Settings Phasors function sub-menus,

Terminal Status Sync Values1 see SIGNAL LIST A

Configuration Sync Values2

Command Sync Values3

Test Sync Values4

Logical Signals

Slot12-BIM1

Slot14-IOM2

Slot16-BOM3

Slot18-MIM1

Slot20-BIM5

Slot22-IOM6

Slot24-BOM7

Slot26-MIM2

Slot28-BIM9

Slot30-IOM10

Slot32-BOM11

Slot34-MIM3

Slot36-BIM13

ARCounters

DiffCommunic

Direction

DisturbReport

Active Group

Time


Version 1.0-00

REx5xx REx5xx/ServRep .ServRep/BIM1 .ARCount/ARnn .ARnn/CountDisturb.Report Mean Values IO1--BI01 Counters 1-ph Shot1Service Report Diff Values IO1--BI02 Clear Counters 3-ph Shot1Settings Phasors ... 3-ph Shot2Terminal Status SyncValues1 ... 3-ph Shot3Configuration SyncValues2 IO1--BI15 3-ph Shot4Command SyncValues3 IO1--BI16 NoOfReclosingsTest SyncValues4 IO1--Error

Logical Signals Clear CountersSlot12-BIM1 (*) .ServRep/IOM2 Command with

Slot14-IOM2 (*) IO2--BI01 confirmation, see

Slot16-BOM3 (*) ... “Local MMC”

Slot18-MIM1 (*) IO2--BI08 1MRK580156-XEN

Slot20-BIM5 (*) IO2--BO01Slot22-IOM6 (*) ...Slot24-BOM7 (*) IO2--BO12Slot26-MIM2 (*) IO2--ErrorSlot28-BIM9 (*)Slot30-IOM10 (*) .ServRep/BOM3Slot32-BOM11 (*) IO3--BO01Slot34-MIM3 (*) IO3--BO02Slot36-BIM13 (*) ...ARCounters ...DiffCommunic IO3--BO23 (*) This is an example

Direction IO3--BO24DisturbReport IO3--ErrorActive GroupTime .ServRep/MIM1

MI11-ValueMI12-ValueMI13-ValueMI14-ValueMI15-ValueMI16-Value

.ServRep/ARCountAR01-CountersAR02-CountersAR03-CountersAR04-CountersAR05-CountersAR06-Counters


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 158-XENPage 3 - 48

REx5xx REx5xx/ServRep .ServRep/DiffCom .DiffCom/ChInfoDisturb.Report Mean Values Channel Info TransmDelayService Report Diff Values Clear Counters NoOfShlnterrSettings Phasors NoOfMedlnterrTerminal Status SyncValues1 .ServRep/Direct NoOfLonglnterrConfiguration SyncValues2 L1-L2 CommStatusCommand SyncValues3 L2-L3 NoOfTXDTest SyncValues4 L3-L1 NoOfRXD

Logical Signals SyncErrorSlot12-BIM1 .ServRep/DistRepSlot14-IOM2 Memory Used Clear CountersSlot16-BOM3 Sequence No Command with

Slot18-MIM1 AnalogTrigStat confirmation, see

Slot20-BIM5 “Local MMC”

Slot22-IOM6 .ServRep/ActGrp 1MRK580156-XEN

Slot24-BOM7 Active GroupSlot26-MIM2Slot28-BIM9 .ServRep/Time .DistRep/MemorySlot30-IOM10 Date & Time Memory UsedSlot32-BOM11Slot34-MIM3 .DistRep/SeqNoSlot36-BIM13 Sequence NoARCountersDiff Communic .DistRep/AnaTrigDirection U1> (*)Disturb Report U1< (*)Active Group U2> (*)Time U2< (*)

U3> (*)U3< (*)U4> (*)U4< (*)U5> (*)U5< (*)I1> (*)I1< (*)I2> (*)I2< (*)I3> (*)I3< (*)

(*) User-defined name, default is shown I4> (*)I4< (*)I5> (*)I5< (*)


Version 1.0-00

2.3 Display for Settings menu

REx5xx REx5xx/Set .Set/Func .Func/Grp1 .Grp1/LineRef

Disturb.Report Functions Group 1 Line Reference Length Unit

Service Report ChangeAct Grp Group 2 Differential Line Length

Settings DisturbReport Group 3 High Speed X1

Terminal Status Time Group 4 Impedance R1

Configuration EarthFault X0

Command Sensitive EF R0

Test FuseFailure X1SA

Save as Grp1 OverLoad R1SA

Save as Grp2 BrokenConduct X1SB

Save as Grp3 OverVoltage R1SB

Save as Grp4 HiSetOverCurr Xm0

Command with UnderVoltage Rm0

confirmation, see Stub

“Local MMC” LossOfVoltage .Grp1/Diff

1MRK580156-XEN Breaker Failure Operation

PoleDiscord CTFactor

AutoRecloser1 IMinSat

AutoRecloser2 IMinOp

AutoRecloser3 IDiffLvl1

AutoRecloser4 IDiffLvl2

AutoRecloser5 ILvl1/2Cross

AutoRecloser6 Evaluate

SynchroCheck1

SynchroCheck2 .Grp1/HighSp

SynchroCheck3 Operation

SynchroCheck4 X1HS

TimeOverCurr X1CSHS

Trip RFHS

X1NHS

X0HS

X1CSNHS

RFNHS


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 158-XENPage 3 - 50

REx5xx/Set .Set/Func .Func/Grp1 .Grp1/Imp .Imp/DirComp .ZComm/ExtensFunctions Group 1 Line Reference DirCompNetwork Operation OperationChangeAct Grp Group 2 Differential GFC X1DIRDisturbReport Group 3 High Speed Zone 1 RFDIR .ZComm/LossOfLTime Group 4 IImpedance Zone 2 X0DIR Operation

EarthFault Zone 3 RFNDIRSensitiveEF Zone 4 .Imp/GFC .ZComm/SchType

FuseFailure Zone 5 Operation OperationSave as Grp1 OverLoad ZCommunication I> SchemeTypeSave as Grp2 Broken Conduct PhaseSelection IN> tCoordSave as Grp3 OverVoltage Highlmp Net X1GFCFw tSendMinSave as Grp4 HiSetOverCurr PowerSwingBlck X1GFCRv UnblockCommand with UnderVoltage SwitchOntoFlt X0GFCFw tSecurityconfirmation, see Stub X0GFCRv CurrRev“Local MMC” LossOfVoltage RFGFC tPickUp1MRK580156-XEN BreakerFailure RFNGFC tDelay

PoleDiscord RLd WEIAutoRecloser 1 ARGLd tWEIAutoRecloser 2 tPhaseAutoRecloser 3 tNAutoRecloser 4 .Imp/Zone 1AutoRecloser 5 OperationAutoRecloser 6 X1Z1SynchroCheck1 R1Z1SynchroCheck2 X0Z1SynchroCheck3 R0Z1SynchroCheck4 RFZ1TimeOverCurr RFNZ1Trip Timer t1

t1DirZ1Operation I>I >.Imp/Zone 2..5 OperationX1Z5R1Z5X0Z5R0Z5RFZ5RFNZ5Timer t5t5DirZ5.Imp/ZCommExtensionLossOfLoadSchemeType


Version 1.0-00

REx5xx/Set .Set/Func .Func/Grp1 .Grp1/Imp .Imp/PhSel

Functions Group 1 Line Reference DirCompNetwork X1PHS

ChangeAct Grp Group 2 Differential GFC RFPHS

Disturb Report Group 3 High Speed Zone 1 X0PHS

Time Group 4 Impedance Zone 2 RFNPHS

EarthFault Zone 3

Sensitive EF Zone 4 .Imp/Highlmp

Save as Grp1 FuseFailure Zone 5 PhasePref

Save as Grp2 OverLoad ZCommunication 3I0>

Save as Grp3 BrokenConduct PhaseSelection 3U0>

Save as Grp4 OverVoltage HighImp Net

Command with HiSetOverCurr PowerSwingBlck .Imp/PSB

confirmation, see UnderVoltage SwitchOntoFlt Operation

“Local MMC” Stub X1PSB

1MRK580156-XEN LossOfVoltage RFPSB

BreakerFailure

Pole Discord .Imp/SOTF (*)

AutoRecloser1 Operation

AutoRecloser2 Automatic

AutoRecloser3

AutoRecloser4 .Imp/SOTF (**)


AutoRecloser6 Automatic

SynchroCheck1 X1SOTF

SynchroCheck2 R1SOTF

SynchroCheck3 X0SOTF

SynchroCheck4 R0SOTF

TimeOverCurr RFSOTF

Trip RFNSOTF

(*) For REL 501, REL 511, REL 521 only

(**) For REL 531 only


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 158-XENPage 3 - 52

REx5xx/Set .Set/Func .Func/Grp1 .Grp1/EarthFl .Earth/NoDirEF

Functions Group 1 Line Reference NonDir EF Operation

Change Act Grp Group 2 Differential Directional EF CurveType

Disturb Report Group 3 High Speed Communication 3I0>

Time Group 4 Impedance IMin

EarthFault (*) .Grp1/SensEF t1

Sensitive EF Operation K

Save as Grp1 FuseFailure t1 tMin

Save as Grp2 OverLoad t2

Save as Grp3 BrokenConduct t3 .EarthFl/DirEF

Save as Grp4 OverVoltage Operation

Command with HiSetOverCurr CurveType

confirmation, see UnderVoltage 3I0>

“Local MMC” Stub IMin

1MRK580156-XEN LossOfVoltage t1

BreakerFailure K

PoleDiscord tMin

AutoRecloser1 Direction

AutoRecloser2 3I0D>

AutoRecloser3

AutoRecloser4 .EarthFl/Comm

AutoRecloser5 SchemeType

AutoRecloser6 tCoord

SynchroCheck1 CurrRev

SynchroCheck2 tPickUp

SynchroCheck3 tDelay

SynchroCheck4 WEI

TimeOverCurr 3U0>

Trip


Version 1.0-00

REx5xx REx5xx/Set .Set/Func .Func/Grp1 .Grp1/FuseF

Disturb.Report Functions Group 1 LineReference Operation

Service Report ChangeArtGrp Group 2 Differential U>

Settings DisturbReport Group 3 High Speed I>

Terminal Status Time Group 4 Impedance .Grp1/OvLoad

Configuration EarthFault Operation

Command SensitiveEF I>

Test FuseFailure t

Save as Grp1 OverLoad .Grp1/BrkCond

Save as Grp2 BrokenConduct Operation

Save as Grp3 OverVoltage t

Save as Grp4 HiSetOverCurr .Grp1/OvVolt

Command with UnderVoltage Operation

confirmation, see Stub U>

“Local MMC” LossOfVoltage t

1MRK580156-XEN BreakerFailure .Grp1/HiSetOC

PoleDiscord Operation

AutoRecloser1 I>>

AutoRecloser2 .Grp1/UnVolt


AutoRecloser4 U<

AutoRecloser5 t

AutoRecloser6 .Grp1/Stub


SynchroCheck2 .Grp1/LOVolt


SynchroCheck4 .Grp1/BrkFail

TimeOverCurr Operation

Trip I>

t2

RetripType

t1

.Grp1/PolDisc

Operation

t


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 158-XENPage 3 - 54

REx5xx REx5xx/Set .Set/Func .Func/Grp1 .Grp1/ARnn


Service Report ChangeActGrp Group 2 Differential Program

Settings DisturbReport Group 3 High Speed Extend t1

Terminal Status Time Group 4 Impedance t1S

Configuration EarthFault t1

Command SensitiveEF t2

Test Save as Grp1 FuseFailure t3

Save as Grp2 OverLoad t4

Save as Grp3 BrokenConduct tSync

Save as Grp4 OverVoltage tPulse

Command with HiSetOverCurr CutPulse

confirmation, see UnderVoltage tReclaim

“Local MMC” Stub tInhibit

1MRK580156-XEN LossOfVoltage CBReady

BreakerFailure tTrip

PoleDiscord Priority

AutoRecloser1 tWait

AutoRecloser2

AutoRecloser3

AutoRecloser4

AutoRecloser5

AutoRecloser6

SynchroCheck1

SynchroCheck2

SynchroCheck3

SynchroCheck4

TimeOverCurr

Trip


Version 1.0-00

REx5xx REx5xx/Set .Set/Func .Func/Grp1 .Grp1/SyncCh n


Service Report ChangeActGrp Group 2 Differential InputPhase

Settings DisturbReport Group 3 High Speed UMeasure

Terminal Status Time Group 4 Impedance USelection

Configuration EarthFault AutoEnerg

Command SensitiveEF ManEnerg

Test Save as Grp1 FuseFailure UHigh

Save as Grp2 OverLoad ULow

Save as Grp3 BrokenConduct FreqDiff

Save as Grp4 OverVoltage PhaseDiff

Command with HiSetOverCurr UDiff

confirmation, see UnderVoltage tAutoEnerg

“Local MMC” Stub tManEnerg

1MRK580156-XEN LossOfVoltage

BreakerFailure .Grp1/ITOC

PoleDiscord Operation

AutoRecloser1 I>

AutoRecloser2 t

AutoRecloser3 IN>

AutoRecloser4 tN

AutoRecloser5

AutoRecloser6 .Grp1/Trip


SynchroCheck2

SynchroCheck3

SynchroCheck4

TimeOverCurr

Trip


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 158-XENPage 3 - 56

REx5xx REx5xx/Set ChangeActGrp

Disturb.Report Functions Command with

Service Report ChangeActGrp confirmation, see

Settings DisturbReport “Local MMC”

Terminal Status Time 1MRK580156-XEN

Configuration

Command

Test


Version 1.0-00

REx5xx REx5xx/Set .Set/DistRep .DistRep/Oper .Binary/Input1

Disturb.Report Functions Operation Operation User name (**)

Service Report ChangeActGrp RecordingTimes TrigOperation

Settings DisturbReport BinarySignals .DistRep/RecTime TrigLevel

Terminal Status Time AnalogSignals tPre IndicationMask

Configuration FaultLocator tPost

Command tLim .Binary/Input48

Test .Set/Time User name (**)

Date & Time .DistRep/Binary TrigOperation

Input1 (*) TrigLevel

Input2 (*) IndicationMask

...

... .Analog/U1 (***)

Input47 (*) User name (**)

Input48 (*) Operation

Trig U>

.DistRep/Analog U>

U1 (*) Trig U<

U2 (*) U<

U3 (*)

U4 (*) .Analog/I1 (***)

U5 (*) User name (**)

I1 (*) Operation

I2 (*) Trig I>

I3 (*) I>

I4 (*) Trig I<

I5 (*) I<

.DistRep/FltLoc (*) User-defined name,

tFilter default is shown

Distance Unit

(**) Read only

(***) User-defined name will not be shown


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 158-XENPage 3 - 58

2.4 Display for Terminal Status menu

REx5xx REx5xx/TermSt .TermSt/SelfSup .IdentNo/Observe .Observe/General

Disturb.Report Self Superv InternFail General OrderingNo

Service Report Identity No InternWarning IO-modules TermSerialNo

Settings CPU-modFail SW version

Terminal Status CPU-modWarning .IdentNo/Note CPU-module

Configuration ADC-module Trafo-module

Command Slot12-BIM1 (*) ADC-module .Observe/IO-mod

Test Slot14-IOM2 (*) MMI-module Slot12-BIM1 (*)

Slot16-BOM3 (*) Frame Slot14-IOM2 (*)

Slot18-MIM1 (*) Power module Slot16-BOM3 (*)

Slot20-BIM5 (*) SPA-module Slot18-MIM1 (*)

Slot22-IOM6 (*) LON-module Slot20-BIM5 (*)

Slot24-BOM7 (*) Slot22-IOM6 (*)

Slot26-MIM2 (*) Slot24-BOM7 (*)

Slot28-BIM9 (*) Slot26-MIM2 (*)

Slot30-IOM10 (*) Slot28-BIM9 (*)

Slot32-BOM11 (*) Slot30-IOM10 (*)

Slot34-MIM3 (*) Slot32-BOM11 (*)

Slot36-BIM13 (*) Slot34-MIM3 (*)

Real Time Clock Slot36-BIM13 (*)

Time Sync

.TermSt/IdentNo

Observed

Noted

(*) Follows the IdentNo installed on each position in the framework


Version 1.0-00

2.5 Display for Configuration menu

REx5xx REx5xx/Config .Config/FuncInp .FuncInp/Trip SIGNAL LIST

Disturb. Report FunctionInputs Trip TRIP-BLOCK All signals in signal

Service Report Slot11-BIM1 (*) Differential TRIP-TRTP list are grouped

Settings Slot13-IOM2 (*) HighSpeed TRIP-TRSPE under function sub-

Terminal Status Slot15-BOM3 (*) GFC TRIP-TRSPZ menus

Configuration Slot17-BOM4 (*) Zone 1 TRIP-EXTL1 see SIGNAL LIST B

Command Slot19-BIM5 (*) Zone 2 TRIP-EXTL2

Test Identifiers Zone 3 TRIP-EXTL3

AnalogInputs Zone 4 TRIP-EXTTRIP

I/O-modules Zone 5 TRIP-PTPTRIP

Time ZCommunication TRIP-PSL1

BuiltInMMI PhaseSelection TRIP-PSL2

SPAComm PowerSwingBlck TRIP-PSL3

LONComm SwitchOnToFlt

Differential EarthFault .FuncInp/Diff

DisturbReport Sensitive EF DIFF-BLOCK

FuseFailure DIFF-TRTRIN

HiSetOverCurr

UnderVoltage .FuncInp/HighSp

Stub HS---BLOCK

LossOfVoltage HS---IOMOD

Breaker Failure HS---TR1L1OUT (*) This is an example

PoleDiscord HS---TR2L1OUT

AutoRecloser1 HS---TR1L2OUT

SynchroCheck1 HS---TR2L2OUT

TimeOverCurr HS---TR1L3OUT

TripSuperv HS---TR2L3OUT

ActiveGroup HS---CSL1OUT

Test HS---CSL2OUT

AND HS---CSL3OUT

OR

Timer

Pulse

INV

SR


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 158-XENPage 3 - 60

REx5xx REx5xx/Config .Config/FuncInp .FuncInp/GFC

Disturb Report Function Inputs Trip GFC--BLOCK

Service Report Slot11-BIM1 (*) Differential .FuncInp/Zone n

Settings Slot13-IOM2 (*) HighSpeed ZM1--BLOCK

Terminal Status Slot15-BOM3 (*) GFC ZM1--BLTRIP

Configuration Slot17-BOM4 (*) Zone 1 ZM1--VTSZ

Command Slot19-BIM5 (*) Zone 2 .FuncInp/ZComm

Test Identifiers Zone 3 ZCOM-BC

AnalogInputs Zone 4 ZCOM-BLOCK

I/O-modules Zone 5 ZCOM-EXACC

Time ZCommunication ZCOM-LLACC

BuiltInMMI PhaseSelection ZCOM-CACC

SPAComm PowerSwingBlck ZCOM-CSUR

LONComm SwitchOnToFlt ZCOM-CSOR

Differential EarthFault ZCOM-CSBL

DisturbReport Sensitive EF ZCOM-CSNBL

FuseFailure ZCOM-CR

HiSetOverCurr ZCOM-CRG

UnderVoltage ZCOM-IREV

Stub ZCOM-VTSZ

LossOfVoltage ZCOM-IREVBL

Breaker Failure ZCOM-WEIBL

PoleDiscord ZCOM-ARREADY

AutoRecloser1 ZCOM-CSURL1

SynchroCheck1 ZCOM-CSURL2

TimeOverCurr ZCOM-CSURL3

TripSuperv ZCOM-CRL1

ActiveGroup ZCOM-CRL2(*) This is an example Test ZCOM-CRL3

AND ZCOM-CSORL1

OR ZCOM-CSORL2

Timer ZCOM-CSORL3

Pulse .FuncInp/PhSel

INV PHS--BLOCK

SR .FuncInp/PSB

PSB--EXTERNAL

.FuncInp/SOTF

SOTF-BC

SOTF-BLOCK

SIGNAL LIST

All signals in signal

list are grouped

under function sub-

menus

see SIGNAL LIST B


Version 1.0-00

REx5xx REx5xx/Config .Config/FuncInp .FuncInp/EarthFI SIGNAL LIST

Disturb Report Function Inputs Trip EF---BLOCK All signals in signal

Service Report Slot11-BIM1 (*) Differential EF---BLKTEF list are grouped

Settings Slot13-IOM2 (*) HighSpeed EF---BC under function sub-

Terminal Status Slot15-BOM3 (*) GFC EF---CR menus

Configuration Slot17-BOM4 (*) Zone 1 see SIGNAL LIST B

Command Slot19-BIM5 (*) Zone 2 .FuncInp/SensEF

Test Identifiers Zone 3 SEFZ-BLOCK

AnalogInputs Zone 4 SEFZ-RXPIN

I/O-modules Zone 5

Time ZCommunication

BuiltInMMI PhaseSelection

SPAComm PowerSwingBlck

LONComm SwitchOnToFlt

Differential EarthFault

DisturbReport SensitiveEF

FuseFailure

HiSetOverCurr (*) This is an example

UnderVoltage

Stub

LossOfVoltage

Breaker Failure

PoleDiscord

AutoRecloser1

SynchroCheck1

TimeOverCurr

TripSuperv

ActiveGroup

Test

AND

OR

Timer

Pulse

INV

SR


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 158-XENPage 3 - 62

REx5xx REx5xx/Config .Config/FuncInp .FuncInp/FuseF SIGNAL LISTDisturb Report FunctionInputs Trip FUSE-MCB All signals in signal Service Report Slot11-BIM1 (*) Differential FUSE-DISC list are grouped Settings Slot13-IOM2 (*) HighSpeed .FuncInp/HiSetOC under function sub-Terminal Status Slot15-BOM3 (*) GFC HII--BLKTR menus Configuration Slot17-BOM4 (*) Zone 1 .FuncInp/UnVolt see SIGNAL LIST BCommand Slot19-BIM5 (*) Zone 2 UUVT-VTSUTest Identifiers Zone 3 UUVT-BLOCK

AnalogInputs Zone 4 .FuncInp/StubI/O-modules Zone 5 STUB-DISC (*) This is an exampleTime ZCommunication .FuncInp/LOVoltBuiltInMMI PhaseSelection LOV--BCSPAComm PowerSwingBlck LOV--VTSULONComm SwitchOnToFlt .FuncInp/BrkFailDifferential EarthFault BFP--STL1DisturbReport SensitiveEF BFP--STL2

FuseFailure BFP--STL3HiSetOverCurr BFP--ST3PHUnderVoltage .FuncInp/PolDiscStub PDP--POLDISCLossOfVoltage PDP--BCBreakerFailure PDP--BLOCKPoleDiscord PDP--GTRIPAutoRecloser1 .FuncInp/AR01SynchroCheck1 AR01--STARTTimeOverCurr AR01--ONTripSuperv AR01--OFFActiveGroup AR01--CBREADYTest AR01--CBCLOSEDAND AR01--INHIBITOR AR01--PLCLOSTTimer AR01--WAITPulse AR01--SYNCINV AR01--TRSOTFSR AR01--TPTRIP

.FuncInp/SyncCh1SYN1-BLOCKSYN1-FD1OPENSYN1-FD1CLDSYN1-FD2OPENSYN1-FD2CLDSYN1-CB1OPENSYN1-CB1CLDSYN1-CB2OPENSYN1-CB2CLDSYN1-CB3OPENSYN1-CB3CLDSYN1-UB1FFSYN1-UB1OKSYN1-UB2FFSYN1-UB2OKSYN1-UF1FFSYN1-UF1OKSYN1-UF2FFSYN1-UF2OKSYN1-VTSU


Version 1.0-00

REx5xx REx5xx/Config .Config/FuncInp .FuncInp/ITOC SIGNAL LIST

Disturb Report FunctionInputs Trip ITOC-BLKTR All signals in signal

Service Report Slot11-BIM1 (*) Differential ITOC-VTSZ list are grouped

Settings Slot13-IOM2 (*) HighSpeed under function sub-

Terminal Status Slot15-BOM3 (*) GFC .FuncInp/TripSup menus

Configuration Slot17-BOM4 (*) Zone 1 TCS--INPUT see SIGNAL LIST B

Command Slot19-BIM5 (*) Zone 2

Test Identifiers Zone 3 .FuncInp/Group

AnalogInputs Zone 4 GRP--ACTGROUP1

I/O-modules Zone 5 GRP--ACTGROUP2

Time ZCommunication GRP--ACTGROUP3

BuiltInMMI PhaseSelection GRP--ACTGROUP4

SPAComm PowerSwingBlck

LONComm SwitchOnToFlt .FuncInp/Test

Differential EarthFault TEST-INPUT

DisturbReport SensitiveEF TEST-BLOCKON

FuseFailure TEST-BLOCKOFF

HiSetOverCurr

UnderVoltage .FuncInp/AND

Stub A001-INPUT1

LossOfVoltage A001-INPUT2

BreakerFailure A001-INPUT3 (*) This is an example

PoleDiscord A001-INPUT4N

AutoRecloser1 A002-INPUT1

SynchroCheck1 A002-INPUT2

TimeOverCurr A002-INPUT3

TripSuperv A002-INPUT4N

ActiveGroup ...

Test ...

AND A010-INPUT1

OR A010-INPUT2

Timer A010-INPUT3

Pulse A010-INPUT4N

INV

SR


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 158-XENPage 3 - 64

REx5xx REx5xx/Config .Config/FuncInp .FuncInp/OR SIGNAL LISTDisturb Report FunctionInputs Trip O001-INPUT1 All signals in signal Service Report Slot11-BIM1 (*) Differential O001-INPUT2 list are grouped Settings Slot13-IOM2 (*) HighSpeed O001-INPUT3 under function sub-Terminal Status Slot15-BOM3 (*) GFC O001-INPUT4 menus Configuration Slot17-BOM4 (*) Zone 1 O001-INPUT5 see SIGNAL LIST BCommand Slot19-BIM5 (*) Zone 2 O001-INPUT6Test Identifiers Zone 3 O002-INPUT1

AnalogInputs Zone 4 O002-INPUT2I/O-modules Zone 5 O002-INPUT3Time ZCommunication O002-INPUT4BuiltInMMI PhaseSelection O002-INPUT5SPAComm PowerSwingBlck O002-INPUT6LONComm SwitchOnToFlt ..Differential EarthFault ..DisturbReport SensitiveEF O040-INPUT1

FuseFailure O040-INPUT2HiSetOverCurr O040-INPUT3UnderVoltage O040-INPUT4Stub O040-INPUT5LossOfVoltage O040-INPUT6BreakerFailurePoleDiscord .FuncInp/Timer AutoRecloser1 TM01-INPUTSynchroCheck1 TM01-TTimeOverCurr TM02-INPUTTripSuperv TM02-TActiveGroup ...Test ...AND TM10-INPUTOR TM10-TTimerPulse .FuncInp/Pulse INV TP01-INPUTSR TP01-T

TP02-INPUTTP02-T......TP10-INPUTTP10-T

.FuncInp/INVIV01-INPUT......

(*) This is an example IV20-INPUT

.FuncInp/SRSR01-SETSR01-RESET......SR05-SETSR05-RESET


Version 1.0-00

REx5xx REx5xx/Config .Config/BIM1(*) SIGNAL LIST

Disturb Report FunctionInputs IO1--BINAME01 All signals in signal

Service Report Slot11-BIM1 (*) IO1--BINAME02 list are grouped

Settings Slot13-IOM2 (*) ... under function sub-

Terminal Status Slot15-BOM3 (*) ... menus

Configuration Slot17-BOM4 (*) IO1--BINAME15 see SIGNAL LIST B

Command Slot19-BIM5 (*) IO1--BINAME16

Test Identifiers

AnalogInputs .Config/IOM2(*)

I/O-modules IO2--BINAME01

Time ...

BuiltInMMI IO2--BINAME08

SPAComm ...

LONComm IO2--BO01

Differential IO2--BONAME01

DisturbReport ...

IO2--BO12

IO2--BONAME12

.Config/BOM3(*)

IO3--BO01 (*) This is an example

IO3--BONAME01

...

IO3--BO24

IO3--BONAME24


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 158-XENPage 3 - 66

REx5xx REx5xx/Config .Config/Ident .AnInp/GeneraI .IOmod/BIM1

Disturb Report FunctionInputs Station Name Ur BIM1--OscBlockService Report Slot11-BIM1 (*) Station No Ir BIM1--OscRelSettings Slot13-IOM2 (*) Object Name frTerminal Status Slot15-BOM3 (*) Object No CTEarthConfiguration Slot17-BOM4 (*) Unit NameCommand Slot19-BIM5 (*) Unit No .AnInp/U1

Test Identifiers NameAnalogInputs .Config/AnInp VTPrimI/O-modules General

Time U1 .AnInp/I5

BuiltInMMI U2 NameSPAComm U3 CTPrimLONComm U4

Differential U5 .AnInp/U

DisturbReport I1 NameI2

I3 .AnInp/I

I4 NameI5

U .AnInp/P

I NameP

Q .AnInp/Q

f Name

.Config/IOmod .AnInp/f

Operation NameReconfigure

Oscillation .IOmod/Oper

Slot11-BIM1 (*)

Slot13-IOM2 (*)

Slot15-BOM3 (*)

Slot17-BOM4 (*)

Slot19-BIM5 (*)

ReconfigureCommand with

(*) This is an example confirmation, see

“Local MMC”

1MRK580156-XEN

.IOmod/Osc

Slot11-BIM1 (*)

Slot19-BIM5 (*)


Version 1.0-00

REx5xx REx5xx/Config .Config/Time .SPAComm/Rear .NodeInf/AdrInfo

Disturb Report FunctionInputs TIME-MINSYNC (***) SlaveNo DomainID

Service Report Slot11-BIM1 TimeSyncSource BaudRate SubnetID

Settings Slot13-IOM2 ActGrpRestrict NodeID

Terminal Status Slot15-BOM3 .Config/MMI SettingRestrict

Configuration Slot17-BOM4 MMI--BLOCKSET (*) .NodeInf/NeurID

Command Slot19-BIM5 SettingRestrict .SPAComm/Front NeuronID

Test Identifiers SlaveNo

AnalogInputs .Config/SPAComm BaudRate .NodeInf/Locat

I/O-modules Rear Location

Time Front .LONComm/NodeInf

BuiltInMMI AdressInfo (*) SIGNAL LIST

SPAComm .Config/LONComm NeuronID All signals in signal

LONComm NodeInformation Location list are grouped

Differential ServicePinMsg under function sub-

DisturbReport LONDefault .Diff/System menus

DiffSync see SIGNAL LIST C

.Config/Diff TerminalNo

System RemoteTermNo (**) SIGNAL LIST

Communication All signals in signal

.Diff/Comm list are grouped

.Config/DistRep BitRate under function sub-

CLRLEDS OptoPower menus

Input 1 CommSync see SIGNAL LIST B

Input 2

... .DistRep/CLRLEDS (**) SIGNAL LIST

... DREP-CLRLEDS All signals in signal

Input 47 list are grouped

Input 48 .DistRep/Input1 under function sub-

DREP-Name1 menus

DREP-INPUT1 (**) see SIGNAL LIST D

.DistRep/Input48

DREP-Name48

DREP-INPUT48 (**)

ServicePinMsg and LONDefault

Command with

confirmation, see

“Local MMC”

1MRK580156-XEN


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 158-XENPage 3 - 68

2.6 Display for Command menu

REx5xx REx5xx/Cmd .Cmd/CD01 CD01-CmdOut n

Disturb. Report CD01 CD01-CmdOut1 (*) Command with

Service Report CD02 CD01-CmdOut2 (*) confirmation, see

Settings CD03 CD01-CmdOut3 (*) “Local MMC”

Terminal Status CD04 CD01-CmdOut4 (*) 1MRK580156-XEN

Configuration CD05 CD01-CmdOut5 (*)

Command CD06 CD01-CmdOut6 (*)

Test CD07 ...

CD08 ...

CD09 CD01-CmdOut14 (*)



CD02 to CD16 conforms with CD01

(*) User-defined name, default name is shown


Version 1.0-00

2.7 Display for Test menu

REx5xx REx5xx/Test .Test/BlockT .Mode/TestOpDisturb.Report Block Terminal BlockTerminal OperationService Report Test ModeSettings ConfigMode .Test/Mode .Mode/BlkFncTerminal Status Operation BlockAR01Configuration BlockFunctions BlockAR02Command DisturbReport BlockAR03Test Differential BlockAR04

BlockAR05BlockAR06

.Test/CnfMode BlockBFPConfigMode BlockBRC

BlockDIFFBlockEFBlockFUSEBlockGFCBlockHIIBlockITOCBlockLOVBlockOVLDBlockPDPBlockPHSBlockPSBBlockSEFZBlockSOTFBlockSTUBBlockSYN1BlockSYN2BlockSYN3BlockSYN4BlockTRIPBlockTCSBlockUOVTBlockUUVTBlockZCOMBlockHSBlockZM1BlockZM2BlockZM3BlockZM4BlockZM5

.Mode/Dist RepOperationDisturbSummary

.Mode/DiffDiffTestMode


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 158-XENPage 3 - 70

2.8 Signal lists

SIGNAL LIST A SIGNAL LIST B SIGNAL LIST C SIGNAL LIST D

Fixed Signals Fixed Signals NotConnected NotConnected

NotConnected NotConnected Slot11-BIM1 (*) Fixed Signals

Trip Trip Slot13-IOM2 (*) Slot11-BIM1 (*)

Differential Differential Slot15-BOM3 (*) Slot13-IOM2 (*)

High Speed High Speed Slot17-BOM4 (*) Slot15-BOM3 (*)

Zone 1 Zone 1 Slot19-BIM5 (*) Slot17-BOM4 (*)

Zone 2 Zone 2 Slot19-BIM5 (*)

Zone 3 Zone 3

Zone 4 Zone 4

Zone 5 Zone 5

ZCommunication ZCommunication

PhaseSelection PhaseSelection

GFC GFC

PowerSwingBlck PowerSwingBlck

SwichOnToFlt SwichOnToFlt

EarthFault EarthFault

Sensitive EF Sensitive EF

Fuse Failure FuseFailure

OverLoad OverLoad

Broken Conduct BrokenConduct

OverVoltage OverVoltage

HiSetOverCurr HiSetOverCurr

UnderVoltage UnderVoltage

Stub Stub

LossOfVoltage LossOfVoltage

BreakerFailure BreakerFailure

PoleDiscord PoleDiscord

AutoRecloser1 AutoRecloser1

... SyncroCheck1

AutoRecloser6 TimeOverCurr

SyncroCheck1 DisturbReport

... InternSignals

SyncroCheck4 TripSupervision

TimeOverCurr Test

DisturbReport Time

InternSignals CD01

TripSupervision AND

Test OR

Time Timer

MI11-Error (*) Pulse (*) This is an example


Version 1.0-00

SIGNAL LIST A cont. SIGNAL LIST B cont.

MI21-Error (*) INV

MI31-Error (*) SR

CD01 Slot11-BIM1 (*)

... Slot13-IOM2 (*)

CD11 Slot15-BOM3 (*)

AND Slot17-BOM4 (*)

OR Slot19-BIM5 (*)

Timer

Pulse

INV

SR

(*) This is an example


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 158-XENPage 3 - 72


Function:

her

ress ent

15

e input

eent,d for

nt 23E25fined

3Communication addresses REC 561

1MRK 580 155-XEN


1 Object addresses for indications in REC 561The table below describes the LON address and the SPA address for theevent function blocks in REC 561.

• The first column contains the name of the function block in REC 561.

• The second column contains the LON object address for the firstinput on the event function block. The object addresses to the otinputs on the event function block are consecutive after the first input. For example, input 15 on event block EV23 has the objectaddress 1376 + 14 (15 - 1) = 1390. For double indication, the addof the first of the two inputs is used. When input 15 and 16 on evfunction block EV23 is used as a double indication, the object address is 1390.

• The third column contains the SPA channel for the event functionblock. The values for the separate inputs are on the 01 channel to the 016 channel address. The 017 channel contains a value with all the 16 inputs combined to a hex-value (0-FFFF). For example, inputon the EV23 event function block has the 44015 address.

For single indications, the E32 channel to E63 channel event codes arused. E32 is the reset event for input one and E33 is the set event forone and so on. For example, the reset event for input 15 on the 23 eventfunction block is 44E60, and the set event is 44E61.

For double indications, the EO channel to E31 channel are used. E0 is thintermediate position (00) event for input 1 and 2, E1 is the closed evE2 is the open event and E3 is an undefined event. E4 to E7 are useinput 3 and 4 and so on. For example, when input 15 and 16 on eveare defined as double indication, 44E24 is the intermediate event, 44is the closed event, 44E26 is the open event, and 44E27 is the undeevent.

ABB Network Partner ABCommunication addresses REC 561

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 155-XENPage 3 - 74

Function block:

First LON address in function block:

SPA channel:

EV01 1024 22

EV02 1040 23

EV03 1056 24

EV04 1072 25

EV05 1088 26

EV06 1104 27

EV07 1120 28

EV08 1136 29

EV09 1152 30

EV10 1168 31

EV11 1184 32

EV12 1200 33

EV13 1216 34

EV14 1232 35

EV15 1248 36

EV16 1264 37

EV17 1280 38

EV18 1296 39

EV19 1312 40

EV20 1328 41

EV21 1344 42

EV22 1360 43

Communication addresses REC 561


Version 1.0-00

Function block:


SPA address:

EV23 1376 44

EV24 1392 45

EV25 1408 46

EV26 1424 47

EV27 1440 48

EV28 1456 49

EV29 1472 50

EV30 1488 51

EV31 1504 52

EV32 1520 53

EV33 1536 54

EV34 1552 55

EV35 1568 56

EV36 1584 57

EV37 1600 58

EV38 1616 59

EV39 1632 60

EV40 1648 61

EV41 1664 62

EV42 1680 63

EV43 1696 64

EV44 1712 65


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 155-XENPage 3 - 76

lue.

The table below describes the LON address and the SPA address for thedirect analogue input and mA input function blocks in REC 561.


• The second column contains the LON object address for each va

• The third column contains the SPA address for each value.

Function block:

LON object address: SPA address:

DA01 2181 7I31

DA02 2182 7I33

DA03 2183 7I35

DA04 2184 7I37

DA05 2185 7I39

DA06 2186 7I41

DA07 2187 7I43

DA08 2188 7I45

DA09 2189 7I47

DA10 2190 7I49

DA11 2191 7I1

DA12 2192 7I2

DA13 2193 7I3

DA14 2194 7I4

DA15 2195 7I5

MI11 2111 96I980

MI12 2112 96I981

MI13 2113 96I982

MI14 2114 96I983

MI15 2115 96I984

MI16 2116 96I985



Version 1.0-00

Function block:


SPA address:

MI21 2121 96I990

MI22 2122 96I991

MI23 2123 96I992

MI24 2124 96I993

MI25 2125 96I994

MI26 2126 96I995

MI31 2131 97I10

MI32 2132 97I11

MI33 2133 97I12

MI34 2134 97I13

MI35 2135 97I14

MI36 2136 97I15

MI41 2141 97I20

MI42 2142 97I21

MI43 2143 97I22

MI44 2144 97I23

MI45 2145 97I24

MI46 2146 97I25

MI51 2151 97I30

MI52 2152 97I31

MI53 2153 97I32

MI54 2154 97I33

MI55 2155 97I34

MI56 2156 97I35

MI61 2161 97I40

MI62 2162 97I41

MI63 2163 97I42

MI64 2164 97I43

MI65 2165 97I44

MI66 2166 97I45


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 155-XENPage 3 - 78

lue.

The table below describes the LON address and the SPA address for thepulse counter function blocks in REC 561.


• The second column contains the LON object address for each va

• The third column contains the SPA address for each value.

Function block:

LON object address: SPA address:

PC01 2001 38I1

PC02 2002 38I11

PC03 2003 38I21

PC04 2004 38I31

PC05 2005 38I41

PC06 2006 38I51

PC07 2007 38I61

PC08 2008 38I71

PC09 2009 38I81

PC10 2010 38I91

PC11 2011 38I101

PC12 2012 38I111



Version 1.0-00

func-1, cu-on

s isted.ress

highr:13ning,

to the

2 SPA addresses for commands in REC 561The table below describes the SPA address for the commands inREC 561.


• The second column contains the SPA address for the command tion block. For the single command function block, CD01 to CD1the address is for the first output. The other outputs follow consetively after the first one. For example, output 7 on the CD04 functiblock has the 12I67 address.

For the multiple command function block, CM01 to CM80, the addresfor the whole block, the 0-65535 value defines what output is activaFor example, output 7 on the CM04 function block has the 12I281 addand the value is 64.

For the analogue values limit supervision, the SPA address is for thealarm limit. The other limits follow consecutively in the following ordehigh warning, low warning, and low alarm. For example, for the DAfunction block, the 40S255 address is high alarm, 40S256 is high war40S257 is low warning, and 40S258 is low alarm.

To store the limits for DAxx in REC 561, the 0 value must be writtenthe 10V42 address. For the MIxx limits, the 0 value must be written to10V43 address.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 155-XENPage 3 - 80

Function block SPA address

CD01 12I1

CD02 12I21

CD03 12I41

CD04 12I61

CD05 12I81

CD06 12I101

CD07 12I121

CD08 12I141

CD09 12I161

CD10 12I181

CD11 12I201

CM01 12I221

CM02 12I241

CM03 12I261

CM04 12I281

CM05 12I301

CM06 12I321

CM07 12I341

CM08 12I361

CM09 12I381

CM10 12I401



Version 1.0-00


CM11 12I421

CM12 12I441

CM13 12I461

CM14 12I481

CM15 12I501

CM16 12I521

CM17 12I541

CM18 12I561

CM19 12I581

CM20 12I601

CM21 12I621

CM22 12I641

CM23 12I661

CM24 12I681

CM25 12I701

CM26 12I721

CM27 12I741

CM28 12I761

CM29 12I781

CM30 12I801

CM31 12I821

CM32 12I841

CM33 12I861

CM34 12I881

CM35 12I901

CM36 12I921

CM37 12I941

CM38 12I961


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 155-XENPage 3 - 82


CM39 12I981

CM40 21I1

CM41 21I21

CM42 21I41

CM43 21I61

CM44 21I81

CM45 21I101

CM46 21I121

CM47 21I141

CM48 21I161

CM49 21I181

CM50 21I201

CM51 21I221

CM52 21I241

CM53 21I261

CM54 21I281

CM55 21I301

CM56 21I321

CM57 21I341

CM58 21I361

CM59 21I381

CM60 21I401

CM61 21I421

CM62 21I441

CM63 21I461

CM64 21I481

CM65 21I501

CM66 21I521



Version 1.0-00

.


CM67 21I541

CM68 21I561

CM69 21I581

CM70 21I601

CM71 21I621

CM72 21I641

CM73 21I661

CM74 21I681

CM75 21I701

CM76 21I721

CM77 21I741

CM78 21I761

CM79 21I781

CM80 21I801

DA01, Limit supervision 40S15
















Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 155-XENPage 3 - 84

Function block: SPA address:

MI11, Limit supervision 40S312





































Contents Page

Application.............................................................................................. 4-1Setting .................................................................................................... 4-1Appendix................................................................................................. 4-2

Setting table ................................................................................... 4-2Introduction............................................................................................. 4-5Application.............................................................................................. 4-5Configuration and operation ................................................................... 4-5Testing.................................................................................................... 4-6Appendix................................................................................................. 4-7

Terminal diagram ........................................................................... 4-7Signal list ........................................................................................ 4-7

Application.............................................................................................. 4-9Installation and setting instructions....................................................... 4-10Testing.................................................................................................. 4-11Appendix............................................................................................... 4-12

Terminal diagram ......................................................................... 4-12Signal list ...................................................................................... 4-12Setting table ................................................................................. 4-12

Application............................................................................................ 4-13Design .................................................................................................. 4-14

General......................................................................................... 4-14Binary input module...................................................................... 4-15Binary output module ................................................................... 4-16Input/output module...................................................................... 4-17mA input module .......................................................................... 4-17I/O position ................................................................................... 4-18

Configuration ........................................................................................ 4-20Setting .................................................................................................. 4-21Testing.................................................................................................. 4-22Appendix............................................................................................... 4-23

Signal list ...................................................................................... 4-23Setting table ................................................................................. 4-24

Application............................................................................................ 4-25


Design...................................................................................................4-25Inverter (INV) ................................................................................4-26OR ................................................................................................4-26AND..............................................................................................4-27Timer ............................................................................................4-27Pulse.............................................................................................4-28Exclusive OR (XOR).....................................................................4-28Set-Reset (SR) .............................................................................4-29MOVE...........................................................................................4-29

Setting...................................................................................................4-31Configuration ........................................................................................4-31Testing..................................................................................................4-32Appendix...............................................................................................4-33

Terminal diagram..........................................................................4-33Signal list ......................................................................................4-36Setting table..................................................................................4-39


Function:

yn-

rnal

4Terminal identification 1MRK 580 160-XEN


1 ApplicationYou can store the identification names and numbers of the station, theline, and the terminal itself in the terminal. This information can be readon the built-in MMI or when communicating with the terminal through aPC or an SMS/SCS.

The nominal frequency must be set because this value is used by manyfunctions. Also set the input transformer ratio. The current transformerratio affects the impedance measuring functions.

The internal clock is used for time tagging of:

• Internal events

• Disturbance reports

• Events in a disturbance report

• Events transmitted to the SCS substation control system

This implies that the internal clock is very important. The clock can be schronised (see Time synchronisation (1MRK 580 135-XEN)) to achievehigher accuracy of the time tagging. Without synchronisation, the inteclock is useful for comparisons among events within the terminal.

2 SettingThe MMI displays the identification settings at:

ConfigurationIdentifiers and AnalogInputs

The settings of the internal clock are at:

SettingsTime

The current internal time is read at:

Service reportTime

ABB Network Partner ABTerminal identification

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 160-XENPage 4 - 2

3 Appendix

3.1 Setting table

PARAMETER: SETTING RANGE: DESCRIPTION:

Identifiers:

Unit No (0 - 99999) Unit No.

Unit Name 16 character string Unit Name

Object No (0 - 99999) Object No.

Object Name 16 character string Object Name

Station No (0 - 99999) Station No.

Station Name 16 character string Station Name


AnalogInputs/General:

CT Earth In, Out Direction of CT earthing, Out=towards the line In=towards the bus

Ir 1 A, 5 A Rated current of the terminal

Ur 100V, 110V, 115V, 120V Rated voltage of the terminal

f 50Hz, 60Hz Nominal network frequency


AnalogInputs/U1:

VTPrim U1 (1 - 9999)kV Nominal primary voltage of U1 input

Name 13 character string User-defined name of analogue input U1

AnalogInputs/U2:



AnalogInputs/U3:



AnalogInputs/U4:

VT Prim U4 (1 - 9999)kV Nominal primary voltage of U4 input


AnalogInputs/U5:



Terminal identificationABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 160-XENPage 4 - 3

Version 1.0-00


AnalogInputs/I1:

CTPrim I1 (1 - 9999)A Nominal primary current of input I1

Name 13 character string User-defined name of analogue input I1

AnalogInputs/I2:



AnalogInputs/I3:



AnalogInputs/I4:

CT Prim I4 (1 - 9999)A Nominal primary current of input I4


AnalogInputs/I5:

CT Prim I5 (1 - 9999)A Nominal primary current of input I5


ABB Network Partner ABTerminal identification

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 160-XENPage 4 - 4


Function:

4Activation of setting group 1MRK 580 162-XEN


1 IntroductionREx 5xx protection, monitoring and control terminals have four built-inindependent groups (sets) of setting parameters, which can be activated atany time on five different ways:

1. Locally by means of built-in man-machine interface (MMI)

2. Locally by means of front-connected personal computer (PC)

3. Remotely through the Station Monitoring System (SMS), when remote communication option is built into the terminal.

4. Remotely through the Station Control System (SCS), when remote communication option is built into the terminal.

5. Locally by means of up to four, programmable binary inputs.

In Local man-machine communication (1MRK 580 156-XEN) the proce-dure is described, necessary for changing the active setting group by thebuilt-in MMI. Operating procedures for the PC aided methods of chang-ing the active setting groups are described in the corresponding SMS doc-uments and instructions for the operators within the SCS documents. Thisdocument deals with the option to change the active setting group bymeans of the control signals connected to the programmable binary inputsof a terminal.

2 ApplicationDifferent conditions in networks of different voltage levels require highadaptability of the used protection and control schemes, to best providefor dependability, security, and selectivity requirements. Protectionschemes especially operate with higher degree of availability, if the set-ting values of their parameters are continuously optimised regarding theconditions in power system.

The operational departments can plan different operating conditions forthe primary equipment. The protection engineer can prepare in advancefor the necessary optimised and pre-tested settings for different protectionfunctions. Four different groups of setting parameters are available inREx 5xx terminals. Any of them can be activated automatically throughup to four different programmable binary inputs by means of externalcontrol signals.

3 Configuration and operationThis function has four built-in input signals, as shown on Fig. 1. Each isconfigurable to any of the binary inputs built into the terminal. Configura-tion must be performed under the menu:

ConfigurationFunctionInputs

ActiveGroup

The number of the signals configured must correspond to the number ofthe setting groups to be controlled by the external signals (contacts).

ABB Network Partner ABActivation of setting group

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 162-XENPage 4 - 6

The voltage need not be permanently present on one binary input. Anypulse, which must be longer than 200 ms activates the corresponding set-ting group. The group remains active until some other command, issuedeither through one of the binary inputs or by other means (built-in MMI,SMS, SCS), activates another group.

Only one input can be active at the same time. This means that the con-tact, which determines an actual active group, must open before the con-tact that activates a new setting group closes.

Fig. 1 Connection of the function to external circuits

4 TestingConfigure the GRP--ACTGRPn input signals to the corresponding binaryinputs of a terminal and browse the built-in MMI for the informationabout the active setting group under the menu:

Service Report Active Group

Connect the appropriate dc voltage to the corresponding binary input ofthe terminal and observe the information presented on the MMI unit. Thedisplayed information must always correspond to the activated input.

(X80162-1)

GRP--ACTGROUP1

GRP--ACTGROUP2

GRP--ACTGROUP3

GRP--ACTGROUP4

IOx-Bly1

IOx-Bly2

IOx-Bly3

IOx-Bly4

ACTIVE GROUP 1ACTIVE GROUP 2

ACTIVE GROUP 4ACTIVE GROUP 3

+RL2

Activation of setting groupABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 162-XENPage 4 - 7

Version 1.0-00

5 Appendix

5.1 Terminal diagram

Fig. 2 Simplified terminal diagram of the function.

5.2 Signal list

(X80162-2)

GRP--ACTGROUP1GRP--ACTGROUP2GRP--ACTGROUP3GRP--ACTGROUP4

ACTIVATE SETTING GROUP

IN: DESCRIPTION:

GRP--ACTGRP1 Functional input for the activation of the setting group No. 1 Warning: Configure it only tothe terminal binary inputs




ABB Network Partner ABActivation of setting group

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 162-XENPage 4 - 8


Function:

4Restricted settings via man- machine interface

1MRK 580 163-XEN


WARNING!Do not set this function in operation before carefully reading theseinstructions and configuring the MMI--BLOCKSET functional inputto the selected binary input.

The MMI--BLOCKSET functional input is configurable only to oneof the available binary inputs of a terminal. For this reason, the ter-minal comes with the default configuration, where the MMI--BLOCKSET signal is connected to NONE-NOSIGNAL.

1 ApplicationSetting values of different protection and control parameters and the con-figuration of different function and logical circuits within the terminal areimportant not only for reliable and secure operation of terminal, but alsofor the entire power system.

Non-permitted and non-coordinated changes, made by unauthorized per-sons, can cause severe damages in primary and secondary power circuits.They can influence the security of people working in close vicinity of theprimary and secondary apparatuses and those using electric energy in eve-ryday life.

For this reason, all REx 5xx terminals have built in a special feature that,when activated, blocks the possibility to change the settings or configura-tion of the terminal on the MMI unit.

All other functions of the local man-machine communication remainintact. This means that the operator can read all disturbance reports andother information and setting values for different protection parametersand the configuration of different logical circuits.

This function permits remote changes of settings and configurationthrough the built-in, serial communication ports, when the remote com-munication option is installed in the terminal and if the setting restrictions,which can be set only on the local MMI, permit remote changes of set-tings.

ABB Network Partner ABRestricted settings via man- machine interface

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 163-XENPage 4 - 10

2 Installation and setting instructionsFig. 1 presents the combined connection and logical diagram for the func-tion.

Configuration of the MMI--BLOCKSET functional input signal under thesubmenu is possible only to one of the built-in binary inputs :

ConfigurationBuiltInMMI

Carefully select the binary input from among those that do not belong toany of other built-in functions or logical circuits, before activating thefunction.

Fig. 1 Connection and logical diagram for the function

Set the setting restriction function under the submenu:

ConfigurationBuiltInMMI

SettingRestric

to the Setting Restrict = Block:

The selected binary input must be connected to the control DC voltage viaa normally closed contact of a control switch, which could be locked by akey. When the switch is closed, by its normally closed contact open, thesetting and configuration of the terminal via the MMI is only possible.

(X80163-1)

&

MMI--BLOCKSET

Setting.Restrict=Block RESTRICT

SETTINGS

+

REx5xx

SWITCH WITHKEY

SETTING RESTRICTION

Restricted settings via man- machine interface


Version 1.0-00

3 Testing1.1 Configure the MMI--BLOCKSET functional input to the binary input

of the terminal, which is determined by the engineering or the inputthat is not used by any other built-in function.

1.2 Set the setting restriction to Setting Restrict = Block.

1.3 Connect the rated control DC voltage to the selected binary input.

1.4 Try to change the setting of any parameter for one of the built-infunctions. Reading of the values must be possible. The terminal mustnot respond to any attemp to change the setting value or configura-tion.

1.5 Disconnect the control DC voltage from the selected binary input.

1.6 Repeat the attempt under item 1.4. The terminal must accept thechanged setting value or changed configuration.

1.7 Depending on the requested design for a complete terminal, leave thefunction active or reconfigure the function into the default configura-tion and set the setting restriction function out of operation to SettingRestrict = Open.

ABB Network Partner ABRestricted settings via man- machine interface

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 163-XENPage 4 - 12

4 Appendix


Fig. 2 Simplified terminal diagram of the function

4.2 Signal list

4.3 Setting table

(X80163-2)

SETTING RESTRICTION

MMI--BLOCKSET

IN: DESCRIPTION:

MMI--BLOCKSET Input signal that restricts the setting and configuration options by the MMI unit. Warning: Read the instructions before use. Default configuration to NONE-NOSIGNAL

PARAMETER: SETTING RANGE: DESCRIPTION

SettingRestrict Open, Block Open: permits changes of settings and configuration by means of the MMI unit regardless of the status of input MMI--BLOCKSET. Block: inhibits changes of settings and configuration via the MMI unit when the MMI--BLOCKSET input signal is equal to logical one.


Function:

t

dule

4I/O system configuration 1MRK 580 190-XEN


1 ApplicationThis document describes the I/O system configuration that is used to add,remove, or move I/O modules in the REC 561 and REL 531 terminalproducts. Available I/O modules are:

• BIM, Binary Input Module with 16 binary input channels

• BOM, Binary Output Module with 24 binary output channels

• IOM, Input/Output Module with 8 binary input and 12 binary outpuchannels

• MIM, mA Input Module with 6 analogue input channels

A product houses a maximum of 13 modules. REC 561 can have upto 13 modules. REL 531 can have up to 5 modules and no MIM.

To configure, connect the function blocks that represent each I/O mo(BIM, BOM, IOM, and MIM) to a function block for the I/O positions(IOP).

ABB Network Partner ABI/O system configuration

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 190-XENPage 4 - 14

2 Design

2.1 General You can fit up to 13 modules of the type BIM, up to 6 BOM or IOM inany combination, and up to 6 modules of type MIM in one REC 561, buttotally maximum 13 modules. In REL 531, you can fit up to 5 modulesand no MIM.

Each module can be placed in any CAN-I/O slot in the product. To add,remove, or move modules in the product, reconfigure the product fromeither the graphical configuration tool or for REL 531, from the built-inMMI.

Users refer to the CAN-I/O slots by the physical slot numbers of theCAN-I/O slots, which also appear in the product drawings.

If the user-entered configuration does not match the actual configurationin the terminal, an error output is activated on the function block, whichcan be treated as an event or alarm.

The BIM, BOM, and IOM share the same communication addresses forparameters and configuration. So they must share I/O module 1-13(IOxx), which are the same function block. A user-configurable functionselector per I/O module function block determines which type of moduleit is.

All names for inputs and outputs are inputs on the function blocks and areset from the graphical tool for REC 561. You can also configure the first 5I/O modules from the built-in MMI or the SMS, but only for REL 531.

I/O system configurationABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 190-XENPage 4 - 15

Version 1.0-00

2.2 Binary input module The binary input module (BIM) has 16 inputs. These inputs appear as out-puts on the IOxx function block. The BIM supervises oscillating input sig-nals.

Fig. 1 Terminal diagram of the binary input module (BIM)

ERROR

BI2BI3BI4BI5BI6

IOxx

BI1

POSITION

BI7BI8BI9

BI10BI11BI12BI13

BI15BI16

BI14

BINAME1BINAME2BINAME3BINAME4BINAME5BINAME6BINAME7BINAME8BINAME9BINAME10BINAME11BINAME12BINAME13BINAME14BINAME15BINAME16

I/O-module

(X80190-1)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 190-XENPage 4 - 16

2.3 Binary output module The binary output module (BOM) has 24 outputs. The outputs are used inpairs when used as command outputs. Refer to Apparatus Control(1MRK 580 150-XEN), which describes the application of using theseoutputs. These outputs appear as inputs on the IOxx function block.

Fig. 2 Terminal diagram of the binary output module (BOM)

ERROR

IOxx

POSITION

BO1BO2BO3

BO5BO4

BO6BO7BO8BO9

BO11BO10

BO12BO13BO14BO15

BO17BO16

BO18BO19BO20BO21

BO23BO22

BO24

BONAME1BONAME2BONAME3

BONAME5BONAME4

BONAME6BONAME7BONAME8BONAME9

BONAME11BONAME10


BONAME16BONAME15


BONAME21BONAME20


I/O-module

(X80190-2)


Version 1.0-00

2.4 Input/output module The input/output module (IOM) has 8 inputs and 12 outputs. The func-tionality of the oscillating input blocking that is available on BIM and onthe supervised outputs on BOM are not available on this module.

Fig. 3 Terminal diagram of the input/output module (IOM)

2.5 mA input module The mA input module (MIM) has 6 inputs for mA signals. The POSI-TION input is located on the first MIM channel for each MIM module. Ifthe configuration is incorrect, the ERROR output is set on the:

• First MIM channel (MI11, MI21-MI61) of that MIM• InputErr outputs on all MIM channels of that MIM

ERROR

BI2BI3BI4BI5BI6

IOxx

BI1

POSITION

BI7BI8

BO1BO2BO3

BO5BO4

BO6BO7BO8BO9

BO11BO10

BO12

BINAME1BINAME2

BINAME4BINAME3

BINAME5BINAME6BINAME7BINAME8

BONAME2BONAME1


BONAME7BONAME6

BONAME8BONAME9BONAME10BONAME11BONAME12

I/O-module

(X80190-3)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 190-XENPage 4 - 18

For more information about the mA input module including the signal listand setting table, refer to the document Direct Current Measuring Unit(1MRK 580 154-XEN).

Fig. 4 Terminal diagram of the mA input module (MIM)

2.6 I/O position The IOP (I/O position) function block has a different appearance in differ-ent products, depending on the number of slots available and the slot num-bering.

ERROR

RMINALHIALARM

HIWARNLOWWARN

LOWALARM

MIx1

BLOCK

RMAXAL

POSITION

INPUTERR

MIM

RMINALHIALARM

HIWARNLOWWARN

LOWALARM

MIx6

BLOCK

RMAXAL

INPUTERR

MIM

(X80190-4)


Version 1.0-00

The Sxx outputs are connected to the POSITION inputs of the I/O Mod-ules and MIMs.

Fig. 5 Terminal diagram of the I/O position block (IOP)

IOP1

S12

S18S20S22S24S26

S16S14

REC 561

S28S30S32

S36S34

S11

S17S19

IOP1

S15S13

REL531

I/OPosition

I/OPosition

(X80190-5)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 190-XENPage 4 - 20

L

gu--

e

to

3 ConfigurationThe configuration can be performed in two ways:

• From CAP 531, the graphical configuration tool

• By using the reconfiguration command from the built-in MMI (RE531 only) from this menu:

ConfigurationI/O-modules

Reconfigure

The reconfiguration command:

• Automatically adds new, detected binary I/O modules to the confiration as the logical I/O module x, where x is 1 for the lowest numbered slot, for example, S11 for REL 531. Previous configurationwill be discarded.

• Deletes any removed I/O modules from the configuration.

To configure from the graphical tool:

• First, set the function selector for the logical I/O module to the typof I/O module that is used, BIM, BOM, IOM, or MIM.

• Secondly, connect the POSITION input of the logical I/O module a slot output of the IOP function block.

Fig. 6 Example of an I/O-configuration in the graphical tool for REL 531 with two BIMs

S11

S17S19

IOP1

S15S13

I/OPosition

ERROR

BI6

IO01

BI1

POSITION

I/O-module

.

.

.

ERROR

BI6

IO02

BI1

POSITION

I/O-module

.

.

.

(X80190-6)


Version 1.0-00

4 SettingYou can set the input names for binary input and binary output modules(BIM, BOM, and IOM) from the CAP 531 configuration tool. For REL531, you can set the names from the SMS or the built-in MMI.

The binary input module (BIM) has a suppression function that blocksoscillating inputs on the module. You can set the oscillation blocking/release frequencies from the SMS or from the built-in MMI.

The appendix contains the parameters and their setting ranges for BIM,BOM, and IOM.

Refer to the document Direct Current Measuring Unit (1MRK 580 154-XEN) to set the mA input module.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 190-XENPage 4 - 22

5 TestingI/O modules that are not configured are not supervised. When an I/O mod-ule is configured as a logical I/O module (BIM, BOM, IOM, or MIM), thelogical I/O modules are supervised.

Each logical I/O module has an error flag that is set if anything is wrongwith any signal or the whole module. The error flag is also set when thereis no physical I/O module of the right type present in the connected slot.

You can find status for inputs and outputs as well as self supervision sta-tus from built-in MMI menus:

Terminal StatusSelf Superv

..., Slotxx-BIMyy=, ...OK/FAILED

Service ReportSlotxx-BIMyy

IOzz-BI1=, ..., IOzz-Error=0/1 0/1


Version 1.0-00

6 Appendix

6.1 Signal list

Table 1: Signal list for binary input module (BIM), binary output module (BOM), and input/output module (IOM)

IN: DESCRIPTION:

IOxx-BOy Binary output no. y, applicable for IOM and BOM.

IOxx-POSITION Slot position input of the I/O module. Is con-nected to a slot position output of the IOP function block.

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

IOxx-BIy Binary input no. y, applicable for IOM and BIM.

IOxx-ERROR Status of the I/O module. Is activated if the I/O module is failed.

Table 2: Signal list for I/O position block (IOP)

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

IOP1-Szz I/O board located in slot number zz. zz = odd numbers 11 to 19 for REL 531 and even numbers 12 to 36 for REC 561. Is con-nected to the corresponding I/O module function block for BIM, BOM, IOM, or MIM.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 190-XENPage 4 - 24

6.2 Setting table

Table 3: Setting table for binary input module (BIM), binary output module (BOM), and input/output module (IOM)


IOxx-BINAMEy 13 characters Name of binary input No. y, used for BIM and IOM. To be set from CAP 531. For REL 531 it is also settable from SMS or built-in MMI.

IOxx-BONAMEy 13 characters Name of binary output No. y, used for BOM and IOM. To be set from CAP 531. For REL 531 it is also settable from SMS or built-in MMI.

OscBlock 1-40 Hz Oscillation blocking frequency, common for all channels on I/O module BIM. To be set from SMS or built-in MMI.

OscRel 1-40 Hz Oscillation release frequency, common for all channels on I/O module BIM. To be set from SMS or built-in MMI.

Operation On, Off I/O module in operation. Opera-tion Off puts the I/O module in a non-active state. To be set from SMS or built-in MMI.


Function:

s:

4Configurable logic 1MRK 580 161-XEN


1 ApplicationDifferent protection, control, and monitoring functions within theREx 5xx protection, control and monitoring terminals are quite independ-ent as far as their configuration in the terminal is concerned. You cannotenter and change the basic algorithms for different functions, because theyare located in the digital signal processors and extensively type tested.You can configure different functions in the terminals to suit specialrequirements for different applications.

For this purpose, you need additional logic circuits to configure the termi-nals to meet your needs and also to build in some special logic circuits,which use different logic gates and timers.

2 DesignThe number of blocks of configurable logic circuits available in REL 531and REC 561 are:

REL 531

Fast execution cyclicity (typical 5 ms)

• 20 INV (INVerters)

• 40 OR gates

• 10 AND gates

• 10 timers (for On or Off delay)

• 10 pulses

Slow execution cyclicity (typical 200 ms)

• 5 SR (Set-Reset)

REC 561

Same as for REL 531 with these execution times and additional block

Fast execution cyclicity (typical 8 ms)

• 40 Pulses

Slow execution cyclicity (typical 200 ms)

• 59 INV (INVerters)

• 159 OR gates

• 239 AND gates

• 39 XOR (eXclusive OR)

• 6 MOVE (3 MOF and 3 MOL)

ABB Network Partner ABConfigurable logic

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 161-XENPage 4 - 26

2.1 Inverter (INV) The configuration logic Inverter (INV) (Fig. 1) has one input, designatedIVnn-INPUT, where nn runs from 01 to 20 for REL 531 and to 79 forREC 561 and presents the serial number of the block. Each INV circuithas one output, IVnn-OUT.

Fig. 1 Block diagram of the inverter (INV) function

2.2 OR The configuration logic OR gate (Fig. 2) has six inputs, designated Onnn-INPUTm, where nnn runs from 001 to 040 for REL 531 and to 199 forREC 561 and presents the serial number of the block, and m presents theserial number of the inputs in the block. Each OR circuit has two outputs,Onnn-OUT and Onnn-NOUT (inverted).

Fig. 2 Block diagram of the OR function

INPUT1

OUT

IVnn

(X80161-1)

≥1INPUT1

INPUT2

INPUT3

INPUT4

INPUT5

INPUT6

Onnn

1

OUT

NOUT

(X80161-2)

Configurable logicABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 161-XENPage 4 - 27

Version 1.0-00

2.3 AND The configuration logic AND gate (Fig. 3) has four inputs (one of theminverted), designated Annn-INPUTm (Annn-INPUT4N is inverted), wherennn runs from 001 to 010 for REL 531 and to 249 for REC 561 andpresents the serial number of the block, and m presents the serial numberof the inputs in the block. Each AND circuit has two outputs, Annn-OUTand Annn-NOUT (inverted).

Fig. 3 Block diagram of the AND function

2.4 Timer The configuration logic TM timer, delayed at pick-up and at drop-out (Fig. 4)has a settable time delay TMnn-T between 0 and 50.00 s in steps of 0.01 s.The input signal for each time delay block has the designation TMnn-INPUT, where nn runs from 01 to 10 and presents the serial number of thelogic block. The output signals of each time delay block are TMnn-ONand TMnn-OFF. The first one belongs to the timer delayed on pick-up andthe second one to the timer delayed on drop-out. Both timers within oneblock always have the same setting.

Fig. 4 Block diagram of the Timer function

INPUT1

INPUT2

INPUT3

INPUT4N

Annn

1

OUT

NOUT

&

(X80161-3)

t

t

Time delay 0-50.00 s

INPUT

T

OFF

ON

TMnn

(X80161-4)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 161-XENPage 4 - 28

If you need more timers than available in the terminals, you can use pulsetimers with AND or OR logics. Fig. 5 shows an application example ofhow to realize a timer delayed on pick-up. Fig. 6 shows the realization ofa timer delayed on drop-out. Note that the resolution of the setting timemust be 0.2 s, if the connected logic has a cycle time of 200 ms.

Fig. 5 Realization example of a timer delayed on pick-up

Fig. 6 Realization example of a timer delayed on drop-out

2.5 Pulse The configuration logic pulse timer TP (Fig. 7) has a settable length of apulse between 0.01 s and 50.00 s in steps of 0.01 s. The input signal foreach pulse timer has the designation TPnn-INPUT, where nn runs from 01to 10 for REL 531 and to 50 for REC 561 and presents the serial numberof the logic block. Each pulse timer has one output, designated by TPnn-OUT. The pulse timer is not retriggable, that is, it can be restarted firstafter that the time T has elapsed.

Fig. 7 Block diagram of the Pulse function

2.6 Exclusive OR (XOR) The configuration logic exclusive OR (XOR) (Fig. 8) has two inputs, des-ignated XOnn-INPUTm, where nn runs from 01 to 39 for REC 561 andpresents the serial number of the block, and m presents the serial number

INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4N

AND

PulseINPUTT

OUT

FIXED-ON

OUTNOUT

0-50.0 s

(X80161-5)

INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4

OR

PulseINPUT

T

OUT

FIXED-OFF

OUTNOUT

0-50.0 s

INPUT5INPUT6

INVINPUT OUT

(X80161-6)

Time delay 0.01-50.00 s

INPUT

T

OUT

TPnn

(X80161-7)


Version 1.0-00

of the inputs in the block. Each XOR circuit has two outputs, XOnn-OUTand XOnn-NOUT (inverted). The output signal (OUT) is 1 if the inputsignals are different and 0 if they are equal.

Fig. 8 Block diagram of the XOR function

2.7 Set-Reset (SR) The configuration logic Set-Reset (SR) (Fig. 9) has two inputs, designatedSRnn-SET and SRnn-RESET, where nn runs from 01 to 05 and presentsthe serial number of the block. Each SR circuit has two outputs, SRnn-OUT and SRnn-NOUT (inverted). The output (OUT) is set to 1 if theinput (SET) is set to 1, if the input (RESET) is 0. If the reset input is set to1, the output is unconditionally reset to 0.

Fig. 9 Block diagram of the Set-Reset function

2.8 MOVE The MOVE function blocks (may also be called copy-blocks) are used forsynchronization of boolean signals sent between logics with slow execu-tion time and logics with fast execution time.

There are two types of MOVE function blocks - MOF located First in theslow logic and MOL located Last in the slow logic. The MOF functionblocks are used for signals coming into the slow logic and the MOL func-tion blocks are used for signals going out from the slow logic.

The control terminal contains 3 MOF function blocks of 16 signals each,and 3 MOL function blocks of 16 signals each. This means that a maxi-mum of 48 signals into and 48 signals out from the slow logic can be syn-chronized. The MOF and MOL function blocks are only a temporarystorage for the signals and do not change any value between input andoutput.

=1INPUT1

INPUT2

XOnn

1

OUT

NOUT

(X80161-8)

SET

RESET1

OUT

NOUT

&≥1

SRnn

(X80161-9)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 161-XENPage 4 - 30

Each block of 16 signals is protected from being interrupted by other logicapplication tasks. This guarantees the consistency of the signals to eachother within each MOVE function block.

Synchronization of signals with MOF should be used when a signal whichis produced outside the slow logic is used in several places in the logicand there might be a malfunction if the signal changes its value betweenthese places.

Synchronization with MOL should be used if a signal produced in theslow logic is used in several places outside this logic, or if several signalsproduced in the slow logic are used together outside this logic, and there isa similar need for synchronization.

Fig. 10 shows an example of logic, which can result in malfunctions onthe output signal from the AND gate to the right in the figure.

Fig. 10 Example of logic, which can result in malfunctions

Fig. 11 shows the same logic as in Fig. 10, but with the signals synchro-nized by the MOVE function blocks MOFn and MOLn. With this solutionthe consistency of the signals can be guaranteed.

Fig. 11 Example of logic with synchronized signals

MOFn and MOLn, n=1-3, have 16 inputs and 16 outputs. Each INPUTmis copied to the corresponding OUTPUTm, where m presents the serialnumber of the input and the output in the block. The MOFn are the firstblocks and the MOLn are the last blocks in the execution order in the slowlogic.

&

&

Function 1 Function 2

Function 3

Fast logic Slow logic Fast logic

(X80161-10)

& &

Function 1 Function 2

Function 3

Fast logic Slow logic Fast logicMOFn

MOLn

MOVE

MOVE

(X80161-11)


Version 1.0-00

n be

531

thettinge cir-

ra-one

s ins.

rialith

ple, is

uldtimalorentE”

tiontime, for

The appendix, attached to this document of the configurable logic, con-tains:

• Simplified terminal diagrams• Description of the connection and production signals• Description of the setting parameters

3 SettingTime delays and pulse lenghts for the different timers in REL 531 caset from the built-in MMI under the submenu:


Timer (Pulse)

For REL 531, you can also set the timers from the SMS.

For REC 561, the time delays and pulse lenghts are set from the CAPconfiguration tool.

Both timers in the same logic block (the one delayed on pick-up andone delayed on drop-out) always have a common setting value. Sevalues of the pulse length are independent on one another for all pulscuits.

4 ConfigurationThe configuration of the logics is performed from the CAP 531 configution tool for REL 531 and REC 561, but can for REL 531 also be dfrom the SMS and the built-in MMI.

Execution of functions as defined by the configurable logic blocks runa fixed sequence in two different cycle times, typical 8 ms and 200 m

For each cycle time, the function block is given an execution senumber. This is shown when using the CAP 531 configuration tool wthe designation of the function block and the cycle time, for examTMnn-(1044, 8). TMnn is the designation of the function block, 1044the execution serial number and 8 is the cycle time.

Execution of different function blocks within the same cycle time shofollow the same order as their execution serial numbers to get an opsolution. Always remember this when connecting in series two or mlogical function blocks. When you connect function blocks with differecycle times, see the use of MOVE function blocks in the section “MOVon page 29.

So design the logic circuits carefully and check always the execusequence for different functions. In the opposite cases, additional delays must be introduced into the logic schemes to prevent errorsexample, race between functions.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 161-XENPage 4 - 32

l.

ratedgic

ts

enttions.

5 TestingYou can separately test configuration logic circuits for each group andeach circuit. For each block, you must configure all:

• Input signals to the corresponding binary inputs.• Output signals to the corresponding binary outputs of the termina

Then check the operation of each separate block by applying the DC voltage to the corresponding binary inputs and observing the lostatuses of the corresponding binary outputs.

Configuration from the built-in MMI of the corresponding logic circuifor the binary inputs for REL 531 occurs under:


AND (OR, Timer, Pulse, INV, SR)Slotxx-IOMy (BIMy)

and for the binary outputs under:

ConfigurationSlotxx-IOMy (BOMy)

AND (OR, Timer, Pulse, INV, SR)

The configuration logic blocks included in the operation of the differfunctions must be tested at the same time as their corresponding func


Version 1.0-00

6 Appendix


Fig. 12 Simplified terminal diagram of the Inverter function

Fig. 13 Simplified terminal diagram of the OR function

Fig. 14 Simplified terminal diagram of the AND function

Fig. 15 Simplified terminal diagram of the Timer function

INPUT OUT

(X80161-12)

IVnn

INV

INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4

OUTNOUT

INPUT5INPUT6

(X80161-13)

Onnn

OR

INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4N

OUTNOUT

(X80161-14)

Annn

AND

INPUTT

OFFON

(X80161-15)

TMnn

Timer


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 161-XENPage 4 - 34

Fig. 16 Simplified terminal diagram of the Pulse function

Fig. 17 Simplified terminal diagram of the Exclusive OR function

Fig. 18 Simplified terminal diagram of the Set-Reset function

Fig. 19 Simplified terminal diagram of the MOVE First (MOF) func-tion

INPUTT

OUT

(X80161-16)

TPnn

Pulse

INPUT1INPUT2

OUTNOUT

(X80161-17)

XOnn

XOR

SETRESET

OUTNOUT

(X80161-18)

SRnn

SR

OUTPUT2OUTPUT3OUTPUT4OUTPUT5OUTPUT6

OUTPUT1

OUTPUT7OUTPUT8OUTPUT9

OUTPUT10OUTPUT11OUTPUT12OUTPUT13

OUTPUT15OUTPUT16

OUTPUT14

INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4INPUT5INPUT6INPUT7INPUT8INPUT9INPUT10INPUT11INPUT12INPUT13INPUT14INPUT15INPUT16

(X80161-19)

MOFnMOVE


Version 1.0-00

Fig. 20 Simplified terminal diagram of the MOVE Last (MOL) func-tion

OUTPUT2OUTPUT3OUTPUT4OUTPUT5OUTPUT6

OUTPUT1

OUTPUT7OUTPUT8OUTPUT9

OUTPUT10OUTPUT11OUTPUT12OUTPUT13

OUTPUT15OUTPUT16

OUTPUT14


(X80161-20)

MOLn

MOVE


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 161-XENPage 4 - 36

6.2 Signal list

Table 1: Signal list for the Inverter function

IN: DESCRIPTION:

IVnn-INPUT Logic INV input to INV gate number nn

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

IVnn-OUT Logic INV output from INV gate number nn

Table 2: Signal list for the OR function

IN: DESCRIPTION:

Onnn-INPUTm Logic OR input m (m=1-6) to OR gate number nnn

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

Onnn-OUT Output from OR gate number nnn

Onnn-NOUT Inverted output from OR gate number nnn

Table 3: Signal list for the AND function

IN: DESCRIPTION:

Annn-INPUTm Logic AND input m (m=1-3) to AND gate number nnn

Annn-INPUT4N Logic AND input 4 (inverted) to AND gate number nnn

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

Annn-OUT Output from AND gate number nnn

Annn-NOUT Inverted output from AND gate number nnn


Version 1.0-00

Table 4: Signal list for the Timer function

IN: DESCRIPTION:

TMnn-INPUT Logic Timer input to timer number nn

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

TMnn-OFF Output from timer number nn, Off delay

TMnn-ON Output from timer number nn, On delay

Table 5: Signal list for the Pulse function

IN: DESCRIPTION:

TPnn-INPUT Logic pulse timer input to pulse timer number nn

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

TPnn-OUT Output from pulse timer number nn

Table 6: Signal list for the Exclusive OR function

IN: DESCRIPTION:

XOnn-INPUTm Logic XOR input m (m=1-2) to XOR gate number nn

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

XOnn-OUT Output from XOR gate number nn

XOnn-NOUT Inverted output from XOR gate number nn


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 161-XENPage 4 - 38

Table 7: Signal list for the Set-Reset function

IN: DESCRIPTION:

SRnn-SET Logic set input to Set-Reset gate number nn

SRnn-RESET Logic reset input to Set-Reset gate number nn

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

SRnn-OUT Output from Set-Reset gate number nn

SRnn-NOUT Inverted output from Set-Reset gate number nn

Table 8: Signal list for the MOVE First (MOF) function

IN: DESCRIPTION:

MOFn-INPUTm Logic MOVE input m (m=1-16) to MOF number n

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

MOFn-OUTPUTm Output m (m=1-16) from MOF number n

Table 9: Signal list for the MOVE Last (MOL) function

IN: DESCRIPTION:

MOLn-INPUTm Logic MOVE input m (m=1-16) to MOL number n

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

MOLn-OUTPUTm Output m (m=1-16) from MOL number n


Version 1.0-00

6.3 Setting table

Table 10: Setting table for the Timer function


TMnn-T 0.00-50.00 s Time delay for timer number nn. To be set from CAP 531. For REL 531 the time delay can also be set from built-in MMI and SMS.

Table 11: Setting table for the Pulse function


TPnn-T 0.01-50.00 s Pulse length for pulse timer number nn. To be set from CAP 531. For REL 531 the pulse length can also be set from built-in MMI and SMS.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 161-XENPage 4 - 40


Contents Page

Application.............................................................................................. 5-1Design .................................................................................................... 5-1

Three-phase front logic .................................................................. 5-1Single-phase front logic.................................................................. 5-2Tripping logic circuits...................................................................... 5-3

Testing.................................................................................................... 5-6Appendix................................................................................................. 5-7

Terminal diagrams.......................................................................... 5-7Signal list ........................................................................................ 5-7Setting table ................................................................................... 5-8

Application.............................................................................................. 5-9Synchronism check ........................................................................ 5-9Energizing check .......................................................................... 5-11Voltage selection .......................................................................... 5-12

Voltage selection for a single busbar................................... 5-13Voltage selection for a double bus....................................... 5-16

Theory of operation .............................................................................. 5-17Synchro check.............................................................................. 5-17Voltage-selection.......................................................................... 5-18

Setting .................................................................................................. 5-20Operation...................................................................................... 5-20Input phase................................................................................... 5-21UMeasure..................................................................................... 5-21USelection .................................................................................... 5-21AutoEnerg and ManEnerg............................................................ 5-21

Testing.................................................................................................. 5-22Test equipment............................................................................. 5-22Synchro-check tests ..................................................................... 5-22

Test of voltage difference .................................................... 5-22Test of phase difference ...................................................... 5-24Test of frequency difference ................................................ 5-25Test of reference voltage ..................................................... 5-25

Test of energizing check .............................................................. 5-25Test of dead line live bus (DLLB)......................................... 5-25Dead bus live line (DBLL) .................................................... 5-26Energizing in both directions (DLLB or DBLL) ..................... 5-27Test of voltage selection ...................................................... 5-27

Appendix............................................................................................... 5-29Terminal diagrams........................................................................ 5-29


Signal list ......................................................................................5-29Setting table..................................................................................5-30

Application ............................................................................................5-31Synchronism check ......................................................................5-31Energizing check ..........................................................................5-33Voltage selection ..........................................................................5-34Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals ............................................5-35

Theory of operation...............................................................................5-36Synchro check ..............................................................................5-36

Setting...................................................................................................5-38Operation......................................................................................5-38Input phase...................................................................................5-39UMeasure .....................................................................................5-39AutoEnerg and ManEnerg ............................................................5-39

Testing..................................................................................................5-40Test equipment.............................................................................5-40Synchro-check tests .....................................................................5-40

Test of voltage difference.....................................................5-40Test of phase difference ......................................................5-42Test of frequency difference ................................................5-43Test of reference voltage .....................................................5-43

Test of energizing check...............................................................5-43Test of dead line live bus (DLLB).........................................5-43Dead bus live line (DBLL) ....................................................5-44Energizing in both directions (DLLB or DBLL) .....................5-45

Appendix...............................................................................................5-46Terminal diagrams........................................................................5-46Signal list ......................................................................................5-46Setting table..................................................................................5-47

Application ............................................................................................5-49Measuring principle...............................................................................5-49Design...................................................................................................5-50

Settings.........................................................................................5-51Testing..........................................................................................5-52

Appendix...............................................................................................5-56Terminal diagrams........................................................................5-56Signal list ......................................................................................5-57Setting table..................................................................................5-57

Application ............................................................................................5-59Theory of operation...............................................................................5-60

Input and output signals ...............................................................5-61AR Operation................................................................................5-62Function logic ...............................................................................5-63


Start and control of the auto-reclosing................................. 5-63Extended AR open time, shot 1 ........................................... 5-64Long trip signal .................................................................... 5-64Reclosing programs............................................................. 5-64

1/3ph reclosing........................................................... 5-64Evolving fault ....................................................................... 5-65AR01-P3PH, Prepare three-phase trip ................................ 5-65Blocking of a new reclosing cycle ........................................ 5-65Reclosing checks and Reclaim timer................................... 5-65Pulsing of CB closing command and incrementing the operation counters ............................................................................... 5-66Transient fault ...................................................................... 5-66Permanent fault ................................................................... 5-67More details about reclosing programs................................ 5-67

Setting .................................................................................................. 5-68Recommendations regarding input signals .................................. 5-68Recommendations for output signals ........................................... 5-69

Testing.................................................................................................. 5-70Suggested testing procedure: ...................................................... 5-70

Preparations ........................................................................ 5-70Check that the AR function works........................................ 5-71Check that reclosing does not occur when it is not meant to5-71Termination of the test ......................................................... 5-72

Diagrams .............................................................................................. 5-73Appendix............................................................................................... 5-80

Terminal diagrams........................................................................ 5-80Signal list ...................................................................................... 5-82Setting table ................................................................................. 5-83

Application............................................................................................ 5-85Theory of operation .............................................................................. 5-87

Input and output signals ............................................................... 5-88Start functions .............................................................................. 5-88Measuring principles .................................................................... 5-89Retrip functions ............................................................................ 5-90Back-up trip .................................................................................. 5-91

Setting .................................................................................................. 5-91Man-machine interface (MMI) ...................................................... 5-91

Testing.................................................................................................. 5-92Test of the breaker-failure protection.................................................... 5-92

Preparations ................................................................................. 5-92Check that the protection does not trip when set passive ............ 5-93Check that the protection can be started from all start inputs ...... 5-93Check that the retrip function works ............................................. 5-93Check that the back-up trip function works .................................. 5-94


Terminate the test and restore the equipment to normal state.....5-94Appendix...............................................................................................5-95

Terminal diagrams........................................................................5-95Signal list ......................................................................................5-96Setting table..................................................................................5-96

Application ............................................................................................5-97Measuring principle...............................................................................5-97Design...................................................................................................5-97Setting...................................................................................................5-98Testing..................................................................................................5-99

General.........................................................................................5-99Appendix.............................................................................................5-102

Terminal diagrams......................................................................5-102Signal list ....................................................................................5-103Setting table................................................................................5-103


Function:

es

ar-hen ssi-

and/ trip-

dis-

o-i-ee-

ro-ter-

The

lated,

5Tripping logic 1MRK 580 120-XEN


1 ApplicationThe tripping logic in REx 5xx protection, control and monitoring termi-nals offers two options:

• Three-phase tripping, available as a basic function in all 500 seriterminals of REx 5xx type.

• Single-phase tripping available as a basic or optional function, dependent on type of terminal. For details refer to the ordering pticulars. The logic also issues a three-phase tripping command wphase selection within the operating protection function is not poble, or when external conditions request three-phase tripping.

You can select the operating mode (exclusively three-phase, or singleor three-phase) under the menu below only, when the single-phaseping logic is included in the terminal:

SettingsFunctions

Group nTrip

You can always switch off the operation of the tripping logic and thus able the terminal's tripping function.

2 DesignThe function consists of three basic logic parts:

• A three-phase front logic that is activated when the terminal is prvided with a three-phase tripping function only. Or when the termnal with the single and/or three-phase tripping logic is set to a thrphase operating mode.

• A single-phase front logic that is activated when the terminal is pvided with a single and/or three-phase tripping function, and the minal is set to a single-phase tripping mode.

• The tripping logic circuits.

2.1 Three-phase front logic

Fig. 1 shows a simplified block diagram of a three-phase front logic. external phase-selective trip signals are:

• TRIP-EXTL1

• TRIP-EXTL2

• TRIP-EXTL3

When any of these three signals obtains logical 1, all three-phase-retripping signals appear:

• L1TRIP• L2TRIP• L3TRIP

ABB Network Partner ABTripping logic

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 120-XENPage 5 - 2

n

-s o-

ion e

pingnal.

ctiontrip-

enceing is logic,

These signals continue to appear within the tripping logic circuits (seeFig. 3).

Any of the functional input signals that are connected to either the selectedsingle-phase (TRIP-TRSPZ) or three-phase (TRIP-TRTP) selected trippingsignals within the terminal, also causes the same phase-related tripping sig-nals.

Fig. 1 Three-phase front logic—simplified logic diagram

2.2 Single-phase front logic

The following input signals to the single-phase front logic influence thesingle-phase tripping of the terminal (see Fig. 2):

• Phase selection signals from different protection functions that caoperate on a single-phase basis and are used in the terminal.

• Internal phase-selective tripping signals

• External phase-selective tripping signals, which should be configured to the terminal binary inputs. The purpose of these signals ialso to include some external protective devices, such as main twline protection, breaker failure units from other bays in the substatinto the optionally built-in auto-reclosing scheme or breaker failurprotection.

For additional control of the internal signals and the single-phase tripscheme, there must be the internal TRIP-TRSP or TRIP-TRSPE sigThe TRIP-TRSP signal enables tripping corresponding to phase selesignals without any restriction while any any phase selective external ping signals prevent such tripping from the TRIP-TRSPE signal.

If any of these signals continues for more than 50 ms without the presof any other internal single-phase selection signals, three-phase trippissued. The phase selection signals, as issued by the phase-selectioncorrespond to:

1V

TRIP-EXTL1

TRIP-EXTL2

TRIP-EXTL3

1VTRIP-TRSPZ

TRIP-TRTP

1V

1V

1V

L1TRIP

L2TRIP

L3TRIP

To Fig. 3

(X80120-1)

Tripping logicABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 120-XENPage 5 - 3

Version 1.0-00

Signal To phase...

L1TRIP L1

L2TRIP L2

L3TRIP L3

External tripping signals can also cause a single-phase tripping withoutany restriction.

Fig. 2 Single-phase front logic—simplified logic diagram

You can configure the TRIP-TRSPE signal to the output signal of the EF---TREF overcurrent, earth-fault, protection function (directional and non-directional). This enables single-phase tripping when the faulty phase isdetected by some other phase-selection element such as the phase selec-tion in distance protection.

2.3 Tripping logic circuits Fig. 3 shows a simplified illustration of the tripping logic circuits. TheTRIP-BLOCK signal might block the operation of the complete trippingunit. In a similar way, an external TRIP-EXTTRIP signal can causeinstantaneous three-phase tripping if the function has not been blocked byexternal signal or the terminal has been switched to operational testingmode with activated blocking. A functional TRIP-PTPTRIP input signalprepares the three-phase tripping conditions for any of the tripping signalsarriving from the front logics. Timers, delayed for 2 seconds at drop-out,assure correct three-phase tripping for evolving faults.

TRIP-TRTP

TRIP-EXTL1

TRIP-PSL1

TRIP-EXTL2

TRIP-PSL2

1V

1V

1V

L1TRIP

L2TRIP

L3TRIP

To Fig 3

TRIP-EXTL3

TRIP-PSL3

TRIP-TRSPE

TRIP-TRSPZt

50ms

Loop delay

&

&

1V

&

&

&

&

Loop delay

1V

&

1V

1V

1V

1V

(X80120-2)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 120-XENPage 5 - 4

The impulse circuits assure that the tripping signals that are issued by theterminal are not shorter than 150 ms.


Version 1.0-00

Fig. 3 Tripping logic circuits—simplified logic diagram

TEST-ACTIVE

BLOCK-TRIP

TRIP-EXTTRIP

TRIP-BLOCK

OPERATION=OFF

1V

1V

1V

L1TRIP

L2TRIP

L3TRIP

TRIP-PTPTRIP

t2000ms

&

&

Delay loop

&

1VTRIP-TRIPL1

TRIP-TRIPL2

TRIP-SPTRIP

TRIP-GTRIP

TRIP-TRIPL3

TRIP-TPTRIP

150ms

t10ms

&

TEST

1V

1V

t2000ms

1V

150ms1V

t2000ms

1V

150ms1V

&

&

1V

1V

1V

&

&

&

1V

& 1V

&(X80120-3)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 120-XENPage 5 - 6

di-b-

mi-

eci-

theal

theEx

ura- by

that dif-ocu-riate.

3 Testing The function can be disabled during the testing mode under these condi-tions:

• When the function is selected to be blocked under the testing contions, select the functions, which should be blocked under the sumenu:

TestBlockFunctions

• Set the Operation parameter to On (Operation=On) to set the ternal in to testing mode. Select the operating mode under this sub-menu:

TestTestMode

Operation

• The terminal is switched to testing mode when the logical 1 is spfied for the TEST-INPUT functional input.

Note: The function is blocked if the corresponding setting under BlockFunctions submenu remains on and the TEST-INPUT signremains active.

Here, it is practically impossible to provide any general instructions ontesting procedure for the testing of the tripping logic as built into the R5xx protection and monitoring terminals. The reason is that the configtion of each terminal depends very much on the functionality definedthe user.

So when you test different functions, ABB Network Partner recommendsyou check the correct operation of the tripping logic for the operation offerent built-in protection and control functions. Also use the appropriate dmentation that is issued separately for each terminal. The appropdocumentation indicates the terminal´s serial number, so always check it


Version 1.0-00

4 Appendix

4.1 Terminal diagrams

Fig. 4 Simplified terminal diagram for the function

4.2 Signal list

THREE-PHASE TRIPPING LOGIC

TRIP_BLOCKTRIP_TESTBLCKTRIP_EXTTRIPTRIP_EXTL1TRIP_EXTL2TRIP_EXTL3TRIP_TRSPTRIP_TRTP

TRIP_TRIPL1TRIP_TRIPL2TRIP_TRIPL3TRIP_GTRIP

TRIP_TPTRIPTRIP_SPTRIP

(X80120-4)

SINGLE AND/OR THREE-PHASE TRIPPING LOGIC

TRIP_BLOCKTRIP_TESTBLCKTRIP_TRTPTRIP_EXTTRIPTRIP_EXTL1TRIP_EXTL2TRIP_EXTL3TRIP_TRSPE

TRIP_TRIPL1TRIP_TRIPL2TRIP_TRIPL3TRIP_GTRIP

TRIP_TPTRIPTRIP_SPTRIP

TRIP_PSL1TRIP_PSL2TRIP_PSL3TRIP_TRSPZTRIP_PTPTRIP

IN: DESCRIPTION:

TRIP-BLOCK Inhibits the operation of tripping logic.

TRIP-EXTTRIP Initiates the instantaneous three-phase tripping. Disabled when the function is out of oper-ation.

TRIP-EXTL1 External tripping related to phase L1.



TRIP-TRSPE Information on necessary tripping in one phase. It causes instantaneous single-phase trip-ping if some of the phase selection signals are present. If not, three-phase tripping, delayed for 50 ms, is initiated.

TRIP-PSL1 Necessary condition for single phase trip in phase L1. Usually connected to protection functions with phase-selective operation.

TRIP-PSL2 Necessary condition for single phase trip in phase L2. Usually connected to protective functions with phase-selective operation.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 120-XENPage 5 - 8

4.3 Setting table

TRIP-PSL3 Necessary condition for single phase trip in phase L3. Generally connected to protective functions with phase selective operation

TRIP-PTPTRIP Turns the tripping logic into three phase operating mode.

TRIP-TRSPZ Initiation of single phase tripping. Requires a phase selection signal. In opposite case initi-ate 50 ms delayed three phase tripping.

TRIP-TRTP Initiation of three phase tripping.

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

TRIP-GTRIP General information on tripping caused by tripping logic within the terminal.

TRIP-SPTRIP General information on single phase tripping caused by tripping logic within the terminal

TRIP-TPTRIP General information on three phase tripping caused by tripping logic within the terminal

TRIP-TRIPL1 Trip in phase L1



IN: DESCRIPTION:


Operation Off, 3ph, 1ph Operating mode of the tripping logic. Off: the operation is disabled. 3ph: only three phase tripping is possible. 1ph: single phase or three phase tripping, dependent on combina-tion of different input signals


Function:

the

akernc-

5Synchronism and energizing check for single circuit breaker with voltage selection

1MRK 580 152-XEN

Version 1.0-00October 1996 Optional

1 Application

1.1 Synchronism check The synchro-check function is used for controlled closing of a circuit in aninterconnected network. When used, the function gives an enable signal atsatisfied voltage conditions across the breaker to be closed. When there is aparallel circuit established, the frequency is normally the same at the twosides of the open breaker. At power swings, e.g. after a line fault, an oscil-lating difference can appear. Across the open breaker, there can be a phaseangle and a voltage amplitude difference due to voltage drop across the par-allel circuit or circuits. The synchro-check function measures the differencebetween the U-line and the U-bus, regarding voltage (UDiff), phase angle(PhaseDiff), and frequency (FreqDiff). It operates and permits closing ofthe circuit breaker when these conditions are simultaneously fulfilled.

• The voltages U-line and U-bus are higher than the set value for UHigh of the rated voltage Ur/sqr3.

• The differences in the voltage and phase angles are smaller thanset values of UDiff and PhaseDiff.

• The difference in frequency is less than the set value of FreqDiff.The bus frequency must also be within a range of ±5 Hz from therated frequency.

The function can be used as a condition to be fulfilled before the breis closed at manual closing and/or together with the auto-recloser fution.

Fig. 1 Synchronism check

SYN 1

UHigh>70-100% UrUDiff<5-50% UrPhaseDiff<5-75o

FreqDiff<50-300mHz

Fuse fail

Fuse fail

U-Line Line referencevoltage

(X80152-1)

U-LineU-Bus

ABB Network Partner ABSynchronism and energizing check for single circuit breaker with voltage selection Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 152-XENPage 5 - 10

The voltage circuits are arranged differently depending on the number ofsynchro-check functions that are included in the control terminal.

In terminals intended for one bay the U-line voltage reference phase isselected on the man-machine interface (MMI). The reference voltage canbe single-phase L1, L2, L3 or phase-phase L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1. The U-bus voltage must then be connected to the same phase or phases as arechosen on the MMI. Fig. 2 shows the voltage connection.

In terminals intended for several bays, all voltage inputs are single phasecircuits. The voltage can be selected for single phase or phase-to-phasemeasurement on the MMI. All voltage inputs must be connected to thesame phase or phases.

The circuit breaker can be closed when the conditions for FreqDiff, PhaseDiff, and UDiff are fulfilled with the UHigh condition.

Fig. 2 Connection of the synchro-check function for one bay(X80152-2)

U-Line

U-Bus

UL1

UL2

UL3

UN

U

UN

AD

L1,L2,L3

L12,L23

L31

ϕ

U

f

SYN1AUTOOK

SYN1MANOK

MMISetting

Synchronism and energizing check for single circuit breaker with voltage selection


Version 1.0-00

thelive)he

value setndi-%

ance,in-h as

r thee thetion

1.2 Energizing check The energizing check is made when a disconnected line is to be connectedto an energized section of a network, see Fig. 3. The check can also be setto allow energization in the busbar or in both directions.

Fig. 3 Principle for energizing check

The voltage level considered to be a non-energized bus or line is set on theMMI. An energizing can occur — depending on the set direction of energizing function. There are separate settable limits for energized (condition, UHigh, and non-energized (dead) ULow conditions. Tequipment is considered energized if the voltage is above the set UHigh (e.g. 80% of rated voltage), and non-energized if it is below thevalue, ULow (e.g. 30% of the rated voltage) You can set the UHigh cotion between 70-100% Ur/sqr3 and the ULow condition between 10-80Ur/sqr3.

A disconnected line can have a considerable potential due to, for instinduction from a line running in parallel, or by being fed via the extguishing capacitors in the circuit breakers. This voltage can be as hig30% or more of the rated voltage of the line.

The energizing operation can be set to operate in either direction ovecircuit breaker, or it can be permitted to operate in both directions. UsAutoEnerg and ManEnerg MMI setting to select the energizing operain:

• Both directions (Both)

• Dead line live bus (DLLB)

• Dead bus live line (DBLL)

UHigh>70-100%UrULow<10-80%Ur

U-Bus U-Line

(X80152-3)


1MRK 580 152-XENPage 5 - 12

The voltage check can also be set Off. A closing impulse is issued to thecircuit breaker if one of the U-line or U-bus voltages is High and the otheris Low, that is, when only one side is energized. You can set AutoEnergand ManEnerg to enable different conditions during automatic and ma-nual closing of the circuit breaker.

1.3 Voltage selection The voltage selection function is used for the synchronism (SYNX) andenergizing check functions. When the REC 561 is used in a doublebus,the voltage that should be selected depends on the positions of the break-ers and/or disconnectors. By checking the position of the disconnectorsand/or breakers auxiliary contacts, the REC 561 can select the right volt-age for the synchronism and energizing function. Select the type of volt-age from the Synchro-check, Uselection, SingleBus or DbleBus on theMMI.

The configuration of internal signal inputs and outputs may be differentfor different busbar systems, and the actual configuration for the substa-tion must be done during engineering of the control terminal.



Version 1.0-00

Fig. 4 Voltage connection in a single busbar arrangement. Alterna-tively, it can be extended up to three bays in one control termi-nal

1.3.1 Voltage selection for a single busbar

Single bus is selected on the MMI. Fig. 4 shows the principle for the con-nection arrangement. One control terminal unit is used for each bay, or itcan alternatively be common for three bays. For the synchronism check(SYNX) and energizing check function , there is one voltage transformerat each side of the circuit breaker. The voltage transformer circuit connec-tions are straightforward, no special voltage selection is needed.

For the synchronism-check and energizing check, the voltage from Bus 1(SYNX-U-Bus) is connected to the single phase analogue input (U5) onthe control terminal unit.

Bus 1 Bay 1

U-Bus 1

U-Line 1

REC561SYNCH.CHECK VOLT SELECTION I/O BI AISYN1

U5

ULX(1)

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB1FUSEF1

FUSEUB1FUSEF1 F1

SYN1_UB1OK/FFSYN1_VTSU

SYN2

U5

UL2

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB1FUSEF2


SYN3

U5

UL3

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB1FUSEF3


U-Line 2

FUSEF2

U-Line 3

FUSEF3

U5

ULX(1)

UL2

UL3

From Bay 2

From Bay 3

(X80152-4)


1MRK 580 152-XENPage 5 - 14

For the control terminal intended for one bay, the line voltage (SYN1-U-line 1) is connected as a three-phase voltage to the analogue inputs UL1,UL2, UL3 (ULx). For the version intended for three bays, the line volt-ages are connected as three single-phase inputs, UL1 for Bay 1, UL2 forBay 2, and UL3 for Bay 3.

Fuse failure and Voltage OK signalsThe external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to binary inputs configured to inputs of the synchro-check functions in the control terminal. There are two alternative connec-tion possibilities. Inputs named OK must be supplied if the voltage circuitis healthy. Inputs named FF must be supplied if the voltage circuit isfaulty.

The SYNX-UB1OK and SYNX-UB1FF inputs are related to the busbarvoltage. Configure them to the binary inputs that indicate the status of theexternal fuse failure of the busbar voltage. The SYNX-VTSU input isrelated to the line voltage from each line.

For the control terminal that is intended for one bay, you can use theFUSE-VTSU signal from the built-in optional selectable fuse-failurefunction as an alternative to the external fuse-failure signals.

In case of a fuse failure (FUSE-VTSU), the energizing check (dead line-check) is blocked via the input (SYN1-VTSU). The synchronizing checkis also blocked due to a lack of voltage compared to the set voltage condi-tions.



Version 1.0-00

Fig. 5 Voltage selection in a double bus arrangement. Alternatively it can be extended up to three bays in one control terminal

Bus 1 Bay 1

U-Bus 1

U-Line 1


U5

ULX(1)

U-Bus

U-Line

1CB11CB2

1CB1

FUSEF1

SYN1_CB1OPEN/CLDSYN1_CB2OPEN/CLD

SYN2

SYN3

U5

ULX(1)

From Bay 2

(X80152-5)

Bus 2

U-Bus 2U4

1CB2

U4

VOLT. SEL1

FUSEUB1FUSEUB2

FUSEUB1SYN1_UB1OK/FF


FUSEF1SYN1_VTSU

VOLT. SEL2

VOLT. SEL3

UL2

U-Bus

U-Line

2CB12CB2

2CB1SYN2_CB1OPEN/CLDSYN2_CB2OPEN/CLD

UL2

2CB2

U4

FUSEF2



FUSEF2SYN2_VTSU

U5

U-Line 2

From Bay 3

UL3

U-Bus

U-Line

3CB13CB2

3CB1SYN3_CB1OPEN/CLDSYN3_CB2OPEN/CLD

UL3

3CB2

U4

FUSEF3



FUSEF3SYN3_VTSU

U5

U-Line 3


1MRK 580 152-XENPage 5 - 16

1.3.2 Voltage selection for a double bus

Select DbleBus on the MMI. Fig. 5 shows the principle for the connectionarrangement. One control terminal unit is used for each bay or it canalternatively be common for three bays. For the synchronism check(SYNX) and energizing check function, the voltages on the two busbarsare selected by voltage selection (VOLT.SELX) in the control terminalunit. The bus voltage from Bus 1 is fed to the U5 analogue single-phaseinput, and the bus voltage from Bus 2 is fed to the U4 analogue single-phase input. The line voltage transformers are connected as a three-phasevoltage UL1, UL2, UL3 (ULx) to the input U-line. For the versionintended for three bays, the line voltages are connected as three, single-phase inputs, UL1 for Bay1, UL2 for Bay2 and UL3 for Bay3.

The selection of the bus voltage is made by checking the position of thedisconnectors’ auxiliary contacts connected via binary inputs of the voltageselection logic inputs, SYNX-CB1OPEN (Breaker section X open),SYNX-CB1CLD (Breaker section 1 closed) and SYNX-CB2OPEN(Breaker section 2 open), SYNX-CB2CLD (Breaker section 2 closed).

Fuse failure and Voltage OK signalsThe external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to binary inputs configured to inputs of the synchro-check functions in the control terminal. There are two alternative connec-tion possibilities. Inputs named OK must be supplied if the voltage circuitis healthy. Inputs named FF must be supplied if the voltage circuit isfaulty.

The SYNX-UB1(2)OK and SYNX-UB1(2)FF inputs are related to eachbusbar voltage. The SYNX-VTSU input is related to each line voltage.Configure them to the binary inputs that indicate the status of the externalfuse failure of the busbar respectively the line voltage. Only the fuse fail-ure of a selected voltage causes a blocking of the relevant energizingcheck unit.

For the control terminal that is intended for one bay, you can use theFUSE-VTSU signal from the built-in optional selectable fuse-failurefunction as an alternative to the external fuse-failure signals.

In case of a fuse failure (FUSE-VTSU), the energizing check (dead line-check) is blocked via the input (SYNX-VTSU). The synchronizing checkis also blocked due to a lack of voltage compared to the set voltage condi-tions.



Version 1.0-00

2 Theory of operation

Fig. 6 Input and output signals

2.1 Synchro check Description of input and output signals for the synchro check function.

Input signals Description

SYNX-BLOCK General block input from any external condition, that should block the synchro-check.

SYNX-VTSU The SYNC function cooperates with the FUSE-VTSU connected signal, which is the built-inoptional fuse failure detection. It can also beconnected to external condition for fuse failure.This is a blocking condition for the energizingfunction.

Output signals Description

SYNX-AUTOOK Synchro-check/energizing OK. The output sig-nal is high when the synchro-check conditions set on the MMI are fulfilled. It can also include the energizing condition, if selected. The signal can be used to release the auto-recloser before closing attempt of the circuit breaker. It can also be used as a free signal.

SYNX-MANOK Same as above but with alternative settings of the direction for energizing to be used during manual closing of the circuit breaker.

FreqDiffPhaseDiffUDiffUHighULow

<<<><

50-300 mHz5-75 deg5-50 %70-100 %10-80 %

SYNX-VTSU

SYNX-BLOCK

SYNX

SYNX-AUTO

SYNX-MANOK

Connectable

From fuse failure

inputs

detection, lineside(external or internal)

Connectableoutputs

(X80152-6)

X=1,2 or 3

General Block


1MRK 580 152-XENPage 5 - 18

Fig. 7 Voltage selection logic in a double bus, single breaker arrangement. In case of three bay arrangement the 1 in SYN1 and UENERG1OK are replaced by 2 and 3 in the logic

2.2 Voltage-selection Description of the input and output signals shown in the above logic dia-grams for voltage selection:

Input signal Description

SYNX-CB1OPEN Breaker section of Bay X open. Connected tothe auxiliary contacts of a breaker section (CBand disconnector) in a double-bus, single-breaker arrangement, to inform the voltageselection about the positions.

SYNX-CB1CLD Breaker section of Bay X closed. Connected tothe auxiliary contacts of a breaker section (CBand disconnector) in a double-bus, single-breaker arrangement to inform the voltageselection about the positions.

SYNX-UB1FF External fuse failure input from busbar voltageBus 1 (U5). This signal can come from a trippedfuse switch (MCB) on the secondary side of thevoltage transformer. In case of a fuse failure,the energizing check is blocked.

SYNX-UB1OK No external voltage fuse failure (U5). Invertedsignal.

SYNX-UB2FF External fuse failure input from busbar voltageBus 2 (U4). This signal can come from a trippedfuse switch (MCB) on the secondary side of thevoltage transformer. In case of fuse failure, theenergizing check is blocked.


1V

SYN1-CB1OPENSYN1-CB1CLD

SYN1-CB2OPEN

1V

SYN1-CB2CLD

SYN-UB1FF

SYN1-VTSU

1V UENERG1OK

(X80152-7)

SYN-UB1OK

SYN-UB2FFSYN-UB2OK

&

&

&

&

&

SYN1-VSUB1

SYN1-VSUB2

U5

U4

SYN1-U-BUS



Version 1.0-00

SYNX-VTSU Internal fuse failure detection or configured to abinary input indicating external fuse failure ofthe UL1, UL2, UL3 line-side voltage. Blocksthe energizing function.


SYNX-VSUB1 Signal for indication of voltage selection fromBus 1 voltage.

SYNX-VSUB2 Signal for indication of voltage selection fromBus 1 voltage.

Fig. 8 Block diagram - Synchro-check

t& 1V

UDiff

OPERATIONOFF

RELEASEON

SYN1-BLOCK

UBusHigh

ULineHigh

FreqDiff

PhaseDiff

AUTOENERG1

MANENERG1

50ms

&

&

&

1V

SYN1

From energizingcheck (fig.9)

SYN1-AUTOOK

SYN1-MANOK

(X80152-8)


1MRK 580 152-XENPage 5 - 20

Fig. 9 Block diagram - Energizing check

3 SettingThe setting parameters are accessible through the MMI. The parametersfor the synchro-check function are found in the MMItree under:

Settings Functions Groupn

SynchroCheck 1,2, and 3(The number of SynchroCheck functions is dependent of the version)

Comments regarding settings.

3.1 Operation Off/Release/On

Off The function is off and the output is low.

Release There are fixed, high output signals SYN1-AUTOOK = 1 and SYN1-MANOK = 1.

On The function is in service and the output sig-nal depends on the input conditions.

t&1V

OFFBothDLLBDBLL

UL HighUL LowUB High

50ms

&& AUTOENERG 1

(X80152-9)

UB Low

UENERG1OK

OFFBothDLLBDBLL

Manenerg.

AutoEnerg.

1V

t50ms

1V t0.00-1.0s

t&1V 50ms

&& MANENERG 11V

t50ms

1V t0.00-1.0s

From voltage selection fig.7

To synchrocheck fig 8



Version 1.0-00

3.2 Input phase The measuring phase of the UL1, UL2, UL3 line voltage, which can be ofa single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phases (phase-phase). (Only availa-ble in terminals intended for one bay).

3.3 UMeasure Selection of single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phase (phase-phase)measurement.(Only available in terminals intended for several bays).

3.4 USelection Selection of single or double bus voltage-selection logic.

3.5 AutoEnerg and ManEnerg

Two different settings can be used for automatic and manual closing ofthe circuit breaker.

Off The energizing condition is not used only the synchro-check.

DLLB The line voltage U-line is low, below (10-80% Ur/sqr3)and the bus voltage U-bus is high, above (70-100% Ur/sqr3).

DBLL The bus voltage U-bus is low, below (10-80% Ur/sqr3))and the line voltage U-line is high, above (70-100% Ur/sqr3)).

Both Energizing can be done in both directions, DLLB orDBLL.

tAutoEnerg The required consecutive time of fulfillment of the ener-gizing condition to achieve SYN1-AUTOOK.

tManEnerg The required consecutive time of fulfillment of the ener-gizing condition to achieve SYN1-MANOK.


1MRK 580 152-XENPage 5 - 22

e theentedent

nglee, thee fre-es isstem

hro-

use

.

dwer

4 TestingAt periodical checks, the functions should preferably be tested with theused settings. To test a specific function, you might need to change somesetting parameters, for example:

• AutoEnerg = On/Off/DLLB/DBLL/Both

• ManEnerg = Off

• Operation = Off, On

The tests explained under the “Synchro-check tests” heading describsettings, which can be used as references during testing, are presbefore the final settings are specified. After testing, restore the equipmto the normal or desired settings.

4.1 Test equipment A secondary injection test set with the possibility to alter the phase aby regulation of the resistive and reactive components is needed. Herphase angle meter is also needed. To perform an accurate test of thquency difference, a frequency generator at one of the input voltagneeded. You can also perform the tests with computer-aided test syFREJAFREJA has a specially designed program for evaluating the synccheck function.Fig. 10 shows the general test connection principle, which you canduring testing.

This description describes the test of the version intended for one bay

Fig. 10 General test connection for synchro-check with three-phase voltage connected to the line side

4.2 Synchro-check tests

4.2.1 Test of voltage difference

Set the voltage difference at 30% Ur/sqr3 on the MMI, and the test shoulcheck that operation is achieved when the voltage difference UDiff is lothan 30% Ur/sqr3.

Testequipment

U-Bus

U-Line

N

U-Bus

N

UL1UL2UL3N

Input PhaseL1,L2,L3L12,L23,L31

UMeasurePh/NPh/Ph

REx 5xx

(X80152-10)



Version 1.0-00

at

These voltage inputs are used:

U-line UL1, UL2 or UL3 voltage input on the terminal.

U-bus U5 voltage input on the terminal

These MMI settings can be used during the test if the final setting is notdetermined:

1 Set these MMI settings, which are found under:

SettingsFunctions

Group nSynchroCheck1

2 Test with UDiff = 0%• Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 80% Ur/sqr3 and U-Bus (U5) = 80%

Ur/sqr3.

• Check that the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs are activated.

• The test can be repeated with different voltage values to verify ththe function operates within UDiff <30%.

3 Test with UDiff = 40%• Increase the U-bus (U5) to 120% Ur/sqr3, and the U-line (UL1) = 80%

Ur/sqr3.

• Check that the two outputs are not activated.

4 Test with UDiff = 20%, Uline < UHigh• Decrease the U-line (UL1) to 60% Ur/sqr3 and the U-bus (U5) to be

equal to 80% Ur/sqr3.


Parameter Setting

Operation On

InputPhase UL1

USelection SingleBus

AutoEnerg Off

ManEnerg Off

UHigh 70% Ur/sqr3

ULow 40% Ur/sqr3

FreqDiff 0.05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 30%

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s


1MRK 580 152-XENPage 5 - 24

erifyower

fer-

e

t the the

canhan

4.2.2 Test of phase difference

The phase difference is set at 45° on the MMI, and the test should vthat operation is achieved when the PhaseDiff (phase difference) is lthan 45°.

1 Set these MMI settings:

2 Test with PhaseDiff = 0° Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 100% Ur/sqr3 and U-bus (U5) = 100%Ur/sqr3, with a phase difference equal to 0° and a frequency difence that is lower than 50 mHz.Check that the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs aractivated.

3 The test can be repeated with other PhaseDiff values to verify thafunction operates for values lower than the set ones. By changingphase angle on U1 connected to U-bus, between +/- 45°. Youcheck that the two outputs are activated for a PhaseDiff lower t45°. It should not operate for other values. See Fig. 11.

Fig. 11 Test of phase difference

Parameter Setting

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


AutoEnerg Off

ManEnerg Off

UHigh 70% Ur/sqr3

ULow 40% Ur/sqr3

FreqDiff 0,05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15%

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s

+45o

-45o

No operation

U-Bus

U-Line operation

U-Bus (X80152-11)



Version 1.0-00

zN1-

thatEJA

n be

ual-

thin

eent the

the

put.

olt-onds

ter-

4.2.3 Test of frequency difference

The frequency difference is set at 50 mHz on the MMI, and the testshould verify that operation is achieved when the FreqDiff frequency dif-ference is lower than 50 mHz.

1 Use the same MMI setting as under “Test of phase difference“.

2 Test with FreqDiff = 0 mHzApply voltages U-Line (UL1) equal to 100% Ur/sqr3 and U-Bus (U5)equal to 100% Ur/sqr3, with a frequency difference equal to 0 mHand a phase difference lower than 45°. Check that the SYAUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs are activated.

3 Test with FreqDiff = 1HzApply voltage to the U-line (UL1) equal to 100% Ur/sqr3 with a fre-quency equal to 50 Hz and voltage U-bus (U5) equal to 100% Ur/sqr3,with a frequency equal to 49 Hz. Check that the two outputs are not activated.

4 The test can be repeated with different frequency values to verifythe function operates for values lower than the set ones. If the FRprogram, Test of synchronising relay, is used the frequency cachanged continuously.

But note that a frequency difference also implies a floating mutphase difference. So the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK out-puts might not be stable, even though the frequency difference is wiset limits, because the phase difference is not stable!

4.2.4 Test of reference voltage

1 Use the same basic test connection as in Fig. 10. The UDiff betwthe voltage connected to U-bus and U-line should be 0%, so thaSYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs are activated first.Change the U-Line voltage connection to UL2 without changeing seting on the MMICheck that the two outputs are not activated.

2 The test can also be repeated by moving the U-line to the UL3 in

4.3 Test of energizing check

Use these voltage inputs:

U-line = UL1, UL2 or UL3 voltage input on the terminal.

U-bus = U5 voltage input on the terminal.

4.3.1 Test of dead line live bus (DLLB)

The test should verify that the energizing function operates for a low vage on the U-Line and for a high voltage on the U-bus. This correspto an energizing of a dead line to a live bus.

Use these MMI settings during the test if the final setting is not demined.


1MRK 580 152-XENPage 5 - 26


2 Apply a single-phase voltage 100% Ur/sqr3 to the U-bus (U5), and asingle-phase voltage 30% Ur/sqr3 to the U-line (UL1).

3 Check that the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs areactivated.

4 Increase the U-Line (UL1) to 60% Ur/sqr3 and U-Bus(U5) to be equalto 100% Ur/sqr3. The outputs should not be activated.

5 The test can be repeated with different values on the U-Bus and theU-Line.

4.3.2 Dead bus live line (DBLL)

The test should verify that the energizing function operates for a low volt-age on the U-bus and for a high one on the U-line. This corresponds to anenergizing of a dead bus from a live line.

1 Change the MMI settings AutoEnerg and ManEnerg to DBLL.

2 Apply a single-phase voltage of 30% Ur/sqr3 to the U-bus (U5) and asingle-phase voltage of 100% Ur/sqr3 to the U-line (UL1).


4 Decrease the U-line to 60% Ur/sqr3 and keep the U-bus equal to 30%Ur/sqr3. The outputs should not be activated.

5 The test can be repeated with different values on the U-bus and the U-line.

Parameter Setting

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


AutoEnerg DLLB

ManEnerg DLLB

UHigh 80% Ur/sqr3

ULow 40% Ur/sqr3

FreqDiff 0,05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15%

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s



Version 1.0-00

U

e U-

sure-pply-

eyin the

4.3.3 Energizing in both directions (DLLB or DBLL)

1 Change the MMI settings AutoEnerg and ManEnerg to Both.

2 Apply a single-phase voltage of 30% Ur/sqr3 to the U-line (UL1) anda single-phase voltage of 100% Ur/sqr3 to the U-bus (U5).

3 Check that the “SYN1-AUTOOK” and “SYN1-MANOK” outputsare activated.

4 Change the connection so that the U-line (UL1) is equal to100%r/sqr3 and the U-bus (U5) is equal to 30% Ur/sqr3.

5 The outputs should still be activated.

6 The test can be repeated with different values on the U-bus and thline.

7 Restore the equipment to normal or desired settings.

4.3.4 Test of voltage selection

This test should verify that the correct voltage is selected for the meament in the energizing function used in a double-bus arrangement. Aa single-phase voltage of 30% Ur/sqr3 to the U-line (UL1) and a singlephase voltage of 100% Ur/sqr3 to the U-bus (U5).

If the SYN1-UB1/2OK inputs for the fuse failure are used, normally thmust be activated, thus activated and deactivated must be inverted description of tests below.


Parameter Setting

Operation On

InputPhase UL1

USelection DbleB

AutoEnerg Both

ManEnerg Both

UHigh 80% Ur/sqr3

ULow 40% Ur/sqr3

FreqDiff 0,05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15%

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s


1MRK 580 152-XENPage 5 - 28

2 Connect the signals below to binary inputs and binary outputs. Applysignals according to the table and verify that correct outsignals aregenerated.

VO

LT

AG

E F

RO

M

BU

S1

U5

VO

LT

AG

E F

RO

M

BU

S2

U4

BIN

AR

Y IN

PU

TS

CB

1OP

EN

CB

1CL

D

CB

2OP

EN

CB

2CL

D

UB

1FF

UB

2FF

VT

SU

BIN

AR

Y O

UT

PU

TS

AU

TO

OK

MA

NO

K

VS

UB

1

VS

UB

2

1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 01 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 01 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 01 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 01 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 01 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0

1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 10 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 10 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 10 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0



Version 1.0-00

5 Appendix



5.2 Signal list

SYN1

SYN

BLOCKFD1OPENFD1CLDCB1OPEN

AUTOOKMANOK

(X80152-12)

CB1CLDCB2OPENCB2CLDUB1FFUB1OKUB2FFUB2OKVTSU

VSUB1VSUB2

IN: DESCRIPTION:

SYN1-BLOCK Block of synchronism and energizing check

SYN1-CB1OPEN Breaker section 1 open

SYN1-CB1CLD Breaker section 1 closed

SYN1-CB2OPEN Breaker section 2 open

SYN1-CB2CLD Breaker section 2 closed

SYN1-UB1FF External voltage fuse failure, bus 1

SYN1-UB1OK External voltage fuse healthy, bus 1



SYN1-VTSU Block from internal fuse failure supervision or from external fuse failure of the line voltage.

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

SYN1-AUTOOK Automatic synchronism and energizing check OK

SYN1-MANOK Manual synchronism and energizing check OK

SYN1-VSUB1 Voltage selection from bus 1


The version for three bays also includes inputs and outputs from SYN2 and SYN3.


1MRK 580 152-XENPage 5 - 30

5.3 Setting table


Synchrocheck 1

Operation Off, Release, On Function execution

InputPhase(For one-bay version)

L1, L2, L3, L1 - L2, L2 - L3, L3 - L1

Voltage reference selection. L1, L2, L3 are phase-neutral. L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1 are phase-phase

UMeasure(For three-bay version)

Ph/N, Ph/Ph Voltage reference selection, phase-neutral or phase-phase

USelection SingleBus, DbleBus Bus arrangement for voltage selection

AutoEnerg Off, DLLB, DBLL, Both Auto energizing check:• Off=Not in use• DLLB=Dead line live bus• DBLL=Dead bus live line• Both=DLLB or DBLL

ManEnerg Off DLLB, DBLL, Both Manual energizing check:• Off=Not in use• DLLB=Dead line live bus• DBLL=Dead bus live line• Both=DLLB or DBLL

UHigh (70 - 100)% of Ur/sqr3 High-voltage limit

ULow (10 - 80)% of Ur/sqr3 Low-voltage limit

FreqDiff (0.05 - 0.30)Hz Frequency-difference limit

PhaseDiff (5 - 75)degrees Phase-difference limit

Udiff (5 - 50)% of Ur/sqr3 Voltage-difference limit

tAutoEnerg (0.00 - 1.00)seconds Auto-energizing time delay

tManEnerg (0.00 - 1.00)seconds Manual-energizing time delay

The version for three bays also includes settings for SYN2 and SYN3.


Function:

the

akernc-

er of

5Synchronism and energizing check for double circuit breakers and voltage selection

1MRK 580 167-XEN


1 Application

1.1 Synchronism check The synchro-check function is used for controlled closing of a circuit in aninterconnected network. When used, the function gives an enable signal atsatisfied voltage conditions across the breaker to be closed. When there is aparallel circuit established, the frequency is normally the same at the twosides of the open breaker. At power swings, e.g. after a line fault, an oscillat-ing difference can appear. Across the open breaker, there can be a phaseangle and a voltage amplitude difference due to voltage drop across the par-allel circuit or circuits. The synchro-check function measures the differencebetween the U-line and the U-bus, regarding voltage (UDiff), phase angle(PhaseDiff), and frequency (FreqDiff). It operates and permits closing of thecircuit breaker when these conditions are simultaneously fulfilled.

• The voltages U-line and U-bus are higher than the set value for UHigh of the rated voltage Ur/sqr3.

• The differences in the voltage and phase angles are smaller thanset values of UDiff and PhaseDiff.

• The difference in frequency is less than the set value of FreqDiff.The bus frequency must also be within a range of ±5 Hz from therated frequency.

The function can be used as a condition to be fulfilled before the breis closed at manual closing and/or together with the auto-recloser fution.

Fig. 1 Synchronism check

The voltage circuits are arranged differently depending on the numbsynchro-check functions that are included in the control terminal.

SYN 1

UHigh>70-100% UrUDiff<5-50% UrPhaseDiff<5-75o

FreqDiff<50-300mHz

Fuse fail

Fuse fail

U-Line Line referencevoltage

(X80167-1)

U-LineU-Bus

ABB Network Partner ABSynchronism and energizing check for double circuit breakers and voltage selection Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 167-XENPage 5 - 32

In terminals intended for one bay the U-line voltage reference phase isselected on the man-machine interface (MMI). The reference voltage canbe single-phase L1, L2, L3 or phase-phase L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1. The U-bus voltage must then be connected to the same phase or phases as arechosen on the MMI. Fig. 2 shows the voltage connection.

In terminals intended for several bays, all voltage inputs are single phasecircuits. The voltage can be selected for single phase or phase-to-phasemeasurement on the MMI. All voltage inputs must be connected to thesame phase or phases.

The circuit breaker can be closed when the conditions for FreqDiff, PhaseDiff, and UDiff are fulfilled with the UHigh condition.

Fig. 2 Connection of the synchro-check function for one bay(X80167-2)

U-Line

U-Bus 1

UL1

UL2

UL3

UN

U

UN

AD

L1,L2,L3L12,L23L31

ϕ

U

f

SYN1AUTOOK

SYN1MANOK

MMISetting

U-Bus 2U

UNL1,L2,L3L12,L23L31

ϕ

U

f

SYN2AUTOOK

SYN2MANOK

MMISetting

SYN1

SYN2

Synchronism and energizing check for double circuit breakers and voltage selection


Version 1.0-00

thelive)he

value setndi-%

ance,in-h as

r thee thetion

thethernergma-

1.2 Energizing check The energizing check is made when a disconnected line is to be connectedto an energized section of a network, see Fig. 3. The check can also be setto allow energization in the busbar or in both directions.

Fig. 3 Principle for energizing check

The voltage level considered to be a non-energized bus or line is set on theMMI. An energizing can occur — depending on the set direction of energizing function. There are separate settable limits for energized (condition, UHigh, and non-energized (dead) ULow conditions. Tequipment is considered energized if the voltage is above the set UHigh (e.g. 80% of rated voltage), and non-energized if it is below thevalue, ULow (e.g. 30% of the rated voltage) You can set the UHigh cotion between 70-100% Ur/sqr3 and the ULow condition between 10-80Ur/sqr3.

A disconnected line can have a considerable potential due to, for instinduction from a line running in parallel, or by being fed via the extguishing capacitors in the circuit breakers. This voltage can be as hig30% or more of the rated voltage of the line.

The energizing operation can be set to operate in either direction ovecircuit breaker, or it can be permitted to operate in both directions. UsAutoEnerg and ManEnerg MMI setting to select the energizing operain:

• Both directions (Both)

• Dead line live bus (DLLB)

• Dead bus live line (DBLL)

The voltage check can also be set Off. A closing impulse is issued tocircuit breaker if one of the U-line or U-bus voltages is High and the ois Low, that is, when only one side is energized. You can set AutoEand ManEnerg to enable different conditions during automatic and nual closing of the circuit breaker.

UHigh>70-100%UrULow<10-80%Ur

U-Bus U-Line

(X80167-3)


1MRK 580 167-XENPage 5 - 34

Fig. 4 Voltage connection in a double busbar double breaker arrangement. Alternatively, it can be extended up to two bays in one control terminal

1.3 Voltage selection The principle for the connection arrangement is shown in Fig. 4. One con-trol terminal unit is used for the two circuit breakers in one or two baysdependent of selected option. There is one voltage transformer at eachside of the circuit breaker, and the voltage transformer circuit connectionsare straightforward, without any special voltage selection.

Bus 1 Bay 1

U-Bus 1

U-Line 1


U5

ULX(1)

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB1FUSEF1

FUSEUB1

FUSEF1 F1


SYN3

U5

UL2

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB1FUSEF2


SYN4

U4

UL2

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB2FUSEF2


U-Line 2

FUSEF2

U5

ULX(1)

UL2

From Bay 2

(X80167-4)

Bus 2

U-Bus 2U4

SYN2

U4

ULX(1)

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB2FUSEF1


FUSEUB2



Version 1.0-00

For the synchro check and energizing check, the voltage from Bus 1(SYN1(3)-U-bus) is connected to the single-phase analouge input (U5) onthe control terminal and the voltage from Bus 2 (SYN2(4)-U-bus) is con-nected to the single-phase analouge input (U4).

For the control terminal intended for one bay the line voltage transformersare connected as a three-phase voltage to the analouge inputs UL1, UL2,UL3 (ULX) (SYN1(2)-U-Line) voltage. For the version intended for twobays the line voltages are connected as two single phase inputs, UL1 forBay 1 and UL2 for Bay 2

The synchronism condition is set on the MMI of the control terminalunint, and the voltage is taken from Bus 1 and the Line or from Bus 2 andthe Line (U-line). This means that the two synchro-check units are operat-ing without any special voltage selection, but with the same line (U-line)voltage.

The configuration of internal signals, inputs, and outputs may be differentfor different busbar systems, and the actual configuration for the substa-tion must be done during engineering of the control terminal.

1.4 Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals

The external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to binary inputs configured to inputs of the synchro-check functions in the control terminal. There are two alternative connec-tion possibilities. Inputs named OK must be supplied if the voltage circuitis healthy. Inputs named FF must be supplied if the voltage circuit isfaulty.

The SYNX-UB1OK and SYNX-UB1FF inputs are related to the busbarvoltage. Configure them to the binary inputs that indicate the status of theexternal fuse failure of the busbar voltage. The SYNX-VTSU input isrelated to the line voltage from each line.

You can use the FUSE-VTSU signal from the built-in optional selectablefuse-failure function as an alternative to the external fuse-failure signals.

In case of a fuse failure (FUSE-VTSU), the energizing check (dead line-check) is blocked via the input (SYN1-VTSU). The synchronizing checkis also blocked due to a lack of voltage compared to the set voltage condi-tions.


1MRK 580 167-XENPage 5 - 36

2 Theory of operation


2.1 Synchro check Description of input and output signals for the synchro check function.

Input signals Description

SYNX-BLOCK General block input from any external condition, that should block the synchro-check.

SYNX-VTSU The SYNC function cooperates with the FUSE-VTSU connected signal, which is the built-in optional fuse failure detection. It can also be connected to external condition for fuse failure. This is a blocking condition for the energizing function.

SYNX-UB1FF External fuse failure input from busbar voltage Bus 1 (U5). This signal can come from a tripped fuse switch (MCB) on the secondary side of the voltage transformer. In case of a fuse failure the energizing check is blocked.


FreqDiffPhaseDiffUDiffUHighULow

<<<><

50-300 mHz5-75 deg5-50 %70-100 %10-80 %

SYNX-VTSU

SYNX-BLOCK

SYNX X=1,2,3 or 4

SYNX-AUTO

SYNX-MANOK

Connectable inputs

From fuse failuredetection, lineside(external or internal)

Connectableoutputs

(X80167-5)

General Block

SYN1-UBIOK

SYN1-UBIFFFrom fuse failuredetection busside



Version 1.0-00


SYNX-AUTOOK Synchro-check/energizing OK. The output sig-nal is high when the synchro-check conditions set on the MMI are fulfilled. It can also include the energizing condition, if selected. The signal can be used to release the auto-recloser before closing attempt of the circuit breaker. It can also be used as a free signal.

SYNX-MANOK Same as above but with alternative settings of the direction for energizing to be used during manual closing of the circuit breaker.

Fig. 6 Block diagram - Synchro-check

t& 1V

UDiff

OPERATIONOFF

RELEASEON

SYN1-BLOCK

UBusHigh

ULineHigh

FreqDiff

PhaseDiff

AUTOENERG1

MANENERG1

50ms

&

&

&

1V

SYN1

From energizingcheck (fig.9)

SYN1-AUTOOK

SYN1-MANOK

(X80167-6)


1MRK 580 167-XENPage 5 - 38

Fig. 7 Block diagram - Energizing check

3 SettingThe setting parameters are accessible through the MMI. The parametersfor the synchro-check function are found in the MMItree under:

Settings Functions Group n

SynchroCheck 1,2, 3, and 4(The number of SynchroCheck settings is dependent of the version)

Comments regarding settings.

3.1 Operation Off/Release/On

Off The function is off and the output is low.

Release There are fixed, high output signals SYN1-AUTOOK = 1 and SYN1-MANOK = 1.

On The function is in service and the output sig-nal depends on the input conditions.

t&1V

OFF

SYN1-VTSU

BothDLLBDBLL

UL HighUL LowUB High

50ms

&& AUTOENERG 1

(X80167-7)

UB Low

SYN1-UB1FF

OFFBothDLLBDBLL

Manenerg.

AutoEnerg.

1V

t50ms

1V1V

t0.00-1.0s

t&1V 50ms

&& MANENERG 11V

t50ms

1V t0.00-1.0s

SYN1-UB1OK 1V

To synchrocheck fig 8



Version 1.0-00

3.2 Input phase The measuring phase of the UL1, UL2, UL3 line voltage, which can be ofa single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phases (phase-phase). (Only availa-ble in terminals intended for one bay).

3.3 UMeasure Selection of single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phase (phase-phase)measurement.(Only available in terminals intended for several bays).

3.4 AutoEnerg and ManEnerg

Two different settings can be used for automatic and manual closing of thecircuit breaker.

Off The energizing condition is not used only the synchro-check.

DLLB The line voltage U-line is low, below (10-80% Ur/sqr3)and the bus voltage U-bus is high, above (70-100% Ur/sqr3).

DBLL The bus voltage U-bus is low, below (10-80% Ur/sqr3))and the line voltage U-line is high, above (70-100% Ur/sqr3)).

Both Energizing can be done in both directions, DLLB orDBLL.

tAutoEnerg The required consecutive time of fulfillment of the ener-gizing condition to achieve SYN1-AUTOOK.

tManEnerg The required consecutive time of fulfillment of the ener-gizing condition to achieve SYN1-MANOK.


1MRK 580 167-XENPage 5 - 40

e theentedent

nglee, thee fre-es isstem

hro-

dur-

..

dwer

4 TestingAt periodical checks, the functions should preferably be tested with theused settings. To test a specific function, you might need to change somesetting parameters, for example:

• AutoEnerg = On/Off/DLLB/DBLL/Both

• ManEnerg = Off

• Operation = Off, On

The tests explained under the “Synchro-check tests” heading describsettings, which can be used as references during testing, are presbefore the final settings are specified. After testing, restore the equipmto the normal or desired settings.

4.1 Test equipment A secondary injection test set with the possibility to alter the phase aby regulation of the resistive and reactive components is needed. Herphase angle meter is also needed. To perform an accurate test of thquency difference, a frequency generator at one of the input voltagneeded. You can also perform the tests with computer-aided test syFREJAFREJA has a specially designed program for evaluating the synccheck function.Fig. 8 shows the general test connection principle, which you can useing testing.

This description describes the test of the version intended for one bay

Fig. 8 General test connection for synchro-check with three-phase voltage connected to the line side

4.2 Synchro-check tests

4.2.1 Test of voltage difference

Set the voltage difference at 30% Ur/sqr3 on the MMI, and the test shoulcheck that operation is achieved when the voltage difference UDiff is lothan 30% Ur/sqr3.

Testequipment

U-Bus

U-Line

N

U-Bus

N

UL1UL2UL3N

Input PhaseL1,L2,L3L12,L23,L31

UMeasurePh/NPh/Ph

REx 5xx

(X80167-8)



Version 1.0-00

at

These voltage inputs are used:

U-line UL1, UL2 or UL3 voltage input on the terminal.

U-bus U5 voltage input on the terminal

These MMI settings can be used during the test if the final setting is notdetermined:

1 Set these MMI settings, which are found under:

SettingsFunctions

Group nSynchroCheck1

2 Test with UDiff = 0%• Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 80% Ur/sqr3 and U-Bus (U5) = 80%

Ur/sqr3.

• Check that the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs are activated.

• The test can be repeated with different voltage values to verify ththe function operates within UDiff <30%.

3 Test with UDiff = 40%• Increase the U-bus (U5) to 120% Ur/sqr3, and the U-line (UL1) = 80%

Ur/sqr3.


4 Test with UDiff = 20%, Uline < UHigh• Decrease the U-line (UL1) to 60% Ur/sqr3 and the U-bus (U5) to be

equal to 80% Ur/sqr3.


Parameter Setting

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


AutoEnerg Off

ManEnerg Off

UHigh 70% Ur/sqr3

ULow 40% Ur/sqr3

FreqDiff 0.05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 30%

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s


1MRK 580 167-XENPage 5 - 42

erifyower

fer-

e

t the the

canhan

4.2.2 Test of phase difference

The phase difference is set at 45° on the MMI, and the test should vthat operation is achieved when the PhaseDiff (phase difference) is lthan 45°.


2 Test with PhaseDiff = 0° Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 100% Ur/sqr3 and U-bus (U5) = 100%Ur/sqr3, with a phase difference equal to 0° and a frequency difence that is lower than 50 mHz.Check that the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs aractivated.

3 The test can be repeated with other PhaseDiff values to verify thafunction operates for values lower than the set ones. By changingphase angle on U1 connected to U-bus, between +/- 45°. Youcheck that the two outputs are activated for a PhaseDiff lower t45°. It should not operate for other values. See Fig. 9.

Fig. 9 Test of phase difference

Parameter Setting

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


AutoEnerg Off

ManEnerg Off

UHigh 70% Ur/sqr3

ULow 40% Ur/sqr3

FreqDiff 0,05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15%

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s

+45o

-45o

No operation

U-Bus

U-Line operation

U-Bus (X80167-9)



Version 1.0-00

zN1-

thatEJA

n be

ual-

thin

n the the

the

put.

olt-onds

ter-

4.2.3 Test of frequency difference

The frequency difference is set at 50 mHz on the MMI, and the testshould verify that operation is achieved when the FreqDiff frequency dif-ference is lower than 50 mHz.

1 Use the same MMI setting as under “Test of phase difference“.

2 Test with FreqDiff = 0 mHzApply voltages U-Line (UL1) equal to 100% Ur/sqr3 and U-Bus (U5)equal to 100% Ur/sqr3, with a frequency difference equal to 0 mHand a phase difference lower than 45°. Check that the SYAUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs are activated.

3 Test with FreqDiff = 1HzApply voltage to the U-line (UL1) equal to 100% Ur/sqr3 with a fre-quency equal to 50 Hz and voltage U-bus (U5) equal to 100% Ur/sqr3,with a frequency equal to 49 Hz. Check that the two outputs are not activated.

4 The test can be repeated with different frequency values to verifythe function operates for values lower than the set ones. If the FRprogram, Test of synchronising relay, is used the frequency cachanged continuously.

But note that a frequency difference also implies a floating mutphase difference. So the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK out-puts might not be stable, even though the frequency difference is wiset limits, because the phase difference is not stable!

4.2.4 Test of reference voltage

1 Use the same basic test connection as in Fig. 8. The UDiff betweevoltage connected to U-bus and U-line should be 0%, so thatSYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs are activated first.Change the U-Line voltage connection to UL2 without changeing seting on the MMICheck that the two outputs are not activated.

2 The test can also be repeated by moving the U-line to the UL3 in

4.3 Test of energizing check

Use these voltage inputs:

U-line = UL1, UL2 or UL3 voltage input on the terminal.

U-bus = U5 voltage input on the terminal.

4.3.1 Test of dead line live bus (DLLB)

The test should verify that the energizing function operates for a low vage on the U-Line and for a high voltage on the U-bus. This correspto an energizing of a dead line to a live bus.

Use these MMI settings during the test if the final setting is not demined.


1MRK 580 167-XENPage 5 - 44


2 Apply a single-phase voltage 100% Ur/sqr3 to the U-bus (U5), and asingle-phase voltage 30% Ur/sqr3 to the U-line (UL1).


4 Increase the U-Line (UL1) to 60% Ur/sqr3 and U-Bus(U5) to be equalto 100% Ur/sqr3. The outputs should not be activated.

5 The test can be repeated with different values on the U-Bus and theU-Line.

4.3.2 Dead bus live line (DBLL)

The test should verify that the energizing function operates for a low volt-age on the U-bus and for a high one on the U-line. This corresponds to anenergizing of a dead bus from a live line.

1 Change the MMI settings AutoEnerg and ManEnerg to DBLL.

2 Apply a single-phase voltage of 30% Ur/sqr3 to the U-bus (U5) and a single-phase voltage of 100% Ur/sqr3 to the U-line (UL1).


4 Decrease the U-line to 60% Ur/sqr3 and keep the U-bus equal to 30%Ur/sqr3. The outputs should not be activated.

5 The test can be repeated with different values on the U-bus and the U-line.

Parameter Setting

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


AutoEnerg DLLB

ManEnerg DLLB

UHigh 80% Ur/sqr3

ULow 40% Ur/sqr3

FreqDiff 0,05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15%

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s



Version 1.0-00

U

e U-

4.3.3 Energizing in both directions (DLLB or DBLL)

1 Change the MMI settings AutoEnerg and ManEnerg to Both.

2 Apply a single-phase voltage of 30% Ur/sqr3 to the U-line (UL1) anda single-phase voltage of 100% Ur/sqr3 to the U-bus (U5).

3 Check that the “SYN1-AUTOOK” and “SYN1-MANOK” outputsare activated.

4 Change the connection so that the U-line (UL1) is equal to100%r/sqr3 and the U-bus (U5) is equal to 30% Ur/sqr3.

5 The outputs should still be activated.

6 The test can be repeated with different values on the U-bus and thline.

7 Restore the equipment to normal or desired settings.


1MRK 580 167-XENPage 5 - 46

5 Appendix


Fig. 10 Simplified terminal diagram of the function.

5.2 Signal list

SYN1

SYN

BLOCKUB1FFUB1OKVTSU

AUTOOKMANOK

(X80167-10)

VSUB1VSUB2

IN: DESCRIPTION:

SYN1-BLOCK Block of synchronism and energizing check



SYN1-VTSU Block from internal fuse failure supervision or from external fuse failure of the line voltage.

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

SYN1-AUTOOK Automatic synchronism and energizing check OK

SYN1-MANOK Manual synchronism and energizing check OK



For the second breaker in the bay, inputs and outputs are named SYN2.The version for two bays also includes inputs and outputs for SYN3 and SYN4



Version 1.0-00

5.3 Setting table


Operation Off, Release, On Function execution

InputPhase L1, L2, L3, L1 - L2, L2 - L3, L3 - L1

Voltage reference selection. L1, L2, L3 are phase-neutral. L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1 are phase-phase

UMeasure(For two bay version)

Ph/N, Ph/Ph Voltage reference selection, phase-neutral or phase-phase

AutoEnerg Off, DLLB, DBLL, Both Auto energizing check:• Off=Not in use• DLLB=Dead line live bus• DBLL=Dead bus live line• Both=DLLB or DBLL

ManEnerg Off DLLB, DBLL, Both Manual energizing check:• Off=Not in use• DLLB=Dead line live bus• DBLL=Dead bus live line• Both=DLLB or DBLL

UHigh (70 - 100)% of Ur/sqr3 High-voltage limit

ULow (10 - 80)% of Ur/sqr3 Low-voltage limit

FreqDiff (0.05 - 0.30)Hz Frequency-difference limit

PhaseDiff (5 - 75)degrees Phase-difference limit

Udiff (5 - 50)% of Ur/sqr3 Voltage-difference limit

tAutoEnerg (0.00 - 1.00)seconds Auto-energizing time delay

tManEnerg (0.00 - 1.00)seconds Manual-energizing time delay

For the second breaker in the bay, inputs and outputs are named SYN2.The version for two bays also includes inputs and outputs for SYN3 and SYN4


1MRK 580 167-XENPage 5 - 48


Function:

r-es

alue

igh ce

ilt-intages

I>

sep-ents.redre-set

5Fuse-failure supervision function 1MRK 580 169-XEN


1 ApplicationDifferent protection functions within the REx 5xx protection, control andmonitoring terminals operate on the basis of the decreased measured volt-age in a relay point. Examples are: distance protection function, under-voltage measuring function, and voltage check for the weak infeed logic.

These functions can operate unnecessarily if a fault occurs in the second-ary circuits between the voltage instrument transformers and the terminal.

It is possible to use different measures to prevent such unwanted opera-tions. Miniature circuit breakers in the voltage measuring circuits, locatedas close as possible to the voltage instrument transformers, are one ofthem. Separate fuse-failure measuring relays or elements within the pro-tection and monitoring devices are another possibility. These solutionscan also be combined to get the best possible effect.

The fuse-failure supervision function as built into the REx 5xx terminalshas these possibilities; it can operate:

• Only on the basis of external binary signals from the miniature cicuit breaker or from the line disconnector. The first case influencthe operation of all voltage-dependent functions while the secondone does not affect the impedance measuring functions.

• On the basis of the zero-sequence measuring quantities: a high vof voltage 3.U0 without the presence of the residual current 3.I0 .

• On the basis of the negative-sequence measuring quantities: a hvalue of voltage 3.U2 without the presence of the negative-sequencurrent 3.I2 (this option is available only in some terminals).

2 Measuring principleThe current and voltage measuring elements within one of the budigital signal processors continuously measure the currents and volin all three phases and calculate:

• The zero-sequence current 3.I0

• The negative-sequence current 3.I2, and

• The corresponding voltages, comparing them with the set valuesand U>

Fourier’s recursive filter filters the current and voltage signals, and a arate trip counter prevents high overreaching of the measuring elemThe following signals receive logical values equal to 1, if the measuvoltage exceeds, and the measured current does not exceed the pvalue:

• VTF0 for the function based on zero-sequence quantities• VTF2 for the function based on negative-sequence quantities

ABB Network Partner ABFuse-failure supervision function

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 169-XENPage 5 - 50

3 Design

Fig. 1 Fuse failure supervision function - simplified block diagram

Figure 1 presents a simplified block diagram for the fuse failure supervi-sion (FFS) function. The external signals perform their function evenwhen the function is switched off. The external signals are supposed to beconnected via the binary inputs of the terminal to the auxiliary contacts ofthe line disconnector (FUSE-DISC) and miniature circuit breaker (FUSE-MCB). Also, they can always operate in parallel with the zero-sequenceor negative-sequence measuring function.

An additional timer prolongs the presence of the FUSE-MCB signal for50 ms to prevent the unnecessary operation of voltage-dependent func-tions due to non-simultaneous closing of the main contacts on the minia-ture circuit breaker.

FUSE-MCB

Operation=

1VUCHL1

t5s

FUSE-VTF3PH

20ms

1V

1V &

t200ms

t50ms

t25ms

FUSE-DISC

UICH

Zeroseg

VTF0&

Operation=NegativeSeq

VTF2&

UCHL2

UCHL3

&

VTF3PH-memory

&

t25ms 1V t

50ms

t50ms

&

1V

1V

FUSE-VTSU

FUSE-VTSZ

(X80169-1)

Fuse-failure supervision functionABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 169-XENPage 5 - 51

Version 1.0-00

The function has built in a phase-segregated voltage and current measur-ing function. It sets the value of internal signal UICH to logical one, if thevoltage in any phase decreases under the set value at the same time as thecurrent in the same phase decreases under 10% of its rated value.

This current and voltage check function inhibits the operation of the FFSfunction for 200 ms after the line energization in order to prevent its oper-ation for unequal pole closing. The same function also blocks the FFSfunction during single-pole auto-reclosing.

The voltage check function seals the fuse-failure condition if the condi-tion exists more than five seconds. UCHL1, UCHL2, and UCHL3 assistthe function. The seal-in condition occurs until the normal voltage condi-tions are achieved.

If any of the fuse-failure conditions are fulfilled and the voltage isdecreased under the pre-set value in all three phases, a correspondingFUSE-VTF3PH output signal receives its value equal to logical one. Thecondition seals in as long as the voltages in all three phases remain low.

This condition remains in the permanent memory of a terminal, even if theauxiliary DC voltage is switched off during the fuse-failure condition.This way, the terminal checks the VTF3PH memory value and establishesthe corresponding starting conditions during the new start-up procedure.

3.1 Settings The setting procedure for the FFS function occurs under the menu:

SettingsFunctions

Group nFuse Failure

The use of a negative-sequence mode of operation is recommended forthe terminals used in isolated or high-impedance earthed networks.

The operating value for the voltage check function is the same as the oper-ating value of the undervoltage function, independent of whether the func-tion is built in the terminal as an option. The setting of the operating valueoccurs under the submenu:

SettingsFunctions

Group n UnderVoltage

Some values of the zero-sequence or negative-sequence voltages and cur-rents always exist due to different non-symmetries in the primary systemand differences in the current and voltage instrument transformers. Theminimum value for the operation of the current and voltage measuringelements must always be set with a safety margin of 10 to 15%, depend-ing on the system operating conditions.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 169-XENPage 5 - 52

s.

a-

ng

t-UT

andnds,nt of

three-st bephasee test con-haseeter is

per-face

rma-

Pay special attention to the dissymmetry of the measuring quantities whenthe function is used on longer untransposed lines, on multicircuit lines,and so on.

3.2 Testing It is possible to disable the function during the test mode under the follow-ing conditions:

• When the function should be blocked under the testing conditionThe selection of functions, which should be blocked is possible under the menu:

TestBlockFunctions

• The terminal has been set into the test mode by setting the Opertion=On. This selection takes place under the menu:

TestTestMode

Operation

• The terminal has been set automatically into test mode by applyithe logical 1 to the TEST-INPUT functional input

Important note: The function will be blocked if the corresponding seting under the BlockFunctions menu remains on and the TEST-INPsignal remains active.

Check the operation of the FFS function during the commissioning during regular maintenance tests. ABB Network Partner recommealthough it does not absolutely request, the use of a testing equipmetype RTS 21 (FREJA) for purposes of the secondary injection testing.

The test equipment used should be able to provide an independent phase supply of voltages and currents to the tested terminal. It mupossible to separately change the values of voltages, currents, and angles among them independent of each other, for each phase. Thvoltages and currents should have a common source, with very smalltent of higher harmonics. If the test equipment cannot indicate the pangles between the measured quantities, a separate phase angle mneeded.

The corresponding binary signals that inform the operator about the oation of the FFS function are available on the local man-machine inter(MMI) unit under the menu:

Service ReportLogical Signals

FuseFailure

The appendix describes the corresponding signals that display infotion on the operation of the FFS function.


Version 1.0-00

These steps are necessary for testing the FFS function:

1.1 Check if the input and output logical signals as shown in Fig. 1 areconfigured to the corresponding binary inputs and outputs of thetested terminal. If not, configure them for testing purposes. Theconfiguration of the FUSE-MCB and FUSE-DISC functionalinputs, respectively occur under the submenu:


Fuse Failure

The FUSE-VTSU, FUSE-VTSZ and FUSE-VTF3PH output sig-nals should be configured to the corresponding binary outputs(relay contacts) under the submenu:

ConfigurationSlotnn-ZZZy

Where nn is the corresponding number of the I/O module, and y isthe number of the output on the module. ZZZ indicates the type ofI/O modulethat is installed in the terminal.

1.2 Set off the operation of the FFS function under the submenu:

Settings Functions

Group nFuseFailure

1.3 Connect the three-phase testing equipment to the tested terminal,and simulate normal operating conditions with the three-phase cur-rents in phase with their corresponding phase voltages and with allof them equal to their rated values.

1.4 Disconnect one of the phase voltages and observe the operation ofthe voltage-dependent built-in functions, such as distance protec-tion and undervoltage protection. They must operate according tothe simulated system condition. Simulate normal operating condi-tions again.

1.5 Connect the nominal dc voltage to the FUSE-DISC binary input,and check that the signal FUSE-VTSU appears with almost no timedelay. Disconnect one of the phase voltages. No signals FUSE-VTSZ and FUSE-VTF3PH should appear on the terminal. Only thedistance protection function operates. No other voltage-dependentfunctions must operate. Simulate normal operating conditions again.Disconnect the dc voltage from the FUSE-DISC binary input termi-nal.

1.6 Connect the nominal dc voltage to the FUSE-MCB binary inputand check that the FUSE-VTSU and FUSE-VTSZ signals appearwithout any time delay. Disconnect one of the phase voltages. No


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 169-XENPage 5 - 54

USE-ulateation

erat-

e ofamet thes and

ter-

voltage-dependent functions must operate. Simulate normaloperating condition again. Disconnect the dc voltage from theFUSE-MCB binary input terminal.

1.7 Set the operating mode of the FFS function to the Operation =Zeroseq. Disconnect one of the phase voltages and observe the log-ical output signals on the terminal binary outputs. FUSE-VTSU andFUSE-VTSZ signals should simultaneously appear.

1.8 Immediately disconnect the remaining two phase voltages and allthree currents. There should be no change in the statuses of all threeoutput signals.

1.9 Simultaneously establish normal voltage and current operating con-ditions and observe the corresponding output signals. They shouldchange to the logical 0 as follows:

•Signal FUSE-VTF3PH after about 25 ms

•Signal FUSE-VTSU after about 50 ms

•Signal FUSE-VTSZ after about 200 ms

1.10 Slowly decrease the measured voltage in one phase until the FVTSU signal appears. Record the measured voltage and calcthe corresponding zero-sequence voltage according to the equ(observe that the voltages in the equation are phasors):

where:

, and are the measured phase voltages.

Compare the result with the set value of the zero-sequence oping voltage. The result should be within the +5% limits of accuracywith the addition of declared accuracy for testing equipment.

1.11 Establish normal operating conditions. Set the operating modthe FFS function at the Operation = Negativeseq. Repeat the sprocedure as under the Zeroseq mode with the difference thameasured and set quantities are the negative-sequence voltagecurrents. The corresponding equations are as follows:

where:

1.12 Disconnect the testing equipment. Don’t forget to configure the minal, if necessary, to its normal operating configuration.

3 U⋅ 0 UL1 UL2 UL3+ +=

UL1 UL2 UL3

3 U2⋅ UL1 a2

UL2 a+⋅ UL3⋅+=

a 1 ej2 π⋅

3----------

⋅ 0 5 j3

2-------+,–= =


Version 1.0-00

4 Appendix



Fig. 3 Terminal diagram of the function

FUSE

FUSE

MCBDISC

VTF3PHVTSUVTSZ

(X80169-2)

(X80169-3)

FUSE-MCB

Operation=

1V

UCHL1

t5s

FUSE-VTS3PH

20ms

1V

1V &

t200ms

t50ms

t25ms

UICH

Zeroseg

VTF0&

Operation=Negativeseg

VTF2&

UCHL2

UCHL3

&

VTF3PH-memory

&

t25ms 1V t

50ms

t50ms

&

1V

1V

FUSE-VTSU

FUSE-VTSZ

FUSE-DISC


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 169-XENPage 5 - 56

4.2 Signal list

4.3 Setting table

IN: DESCRIPTION:

FUSE-MCB Functional input sigal, which is normally connected via binary input to the auxiliary NCcontact of the miniature circut breaker in the voltage measuring circuits

FUSE-DISC Functional input signal, which is normally connected via binary input to the auxiliary NCcontact of the line disconnector

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

FUSE-VTSU Output information on the operation of the FFS function. It is supposed to block all voltagedependent functions within the terminal, except the distance protection. Configure it forthese purposes to the blocking inputs of the relevant functions.

FUSE-VTSZ Output information on the operation of the FFS function. Its appearence is controlled bythe voltage/current check function. It should block the operation of distance protectionfunction during fuse-failure conditions in the voltage measuring circuits.

FUSE-VTF3PH Output signal, which appears five seconds after the fuse-failure condition is detected if themeasured voltages in all three phases are low.

PARAMETER SETTING RANGE DESCRIPTION

Operation Off / Zeroseq / Nega-tiveseq

Operating mode of the fuse-failure supervision function. The opera-tion can be inhibited or based on measurement of the zero or negativesequence quantities.

U> (10-50)% of Ur/sqr(3) The operating level of the voltage measuring element for the zerosequence (3.U0) or negative sequence (3.U2) voltage, set as percent-age of the terminal rated phase voltage.

I> (10-50)% of Ir The operating level of the current measuring element for the zerosequence (3.I0) or negative sequence (3.I2) current, set as percentageof the terminal rated current.


Function:

5Auto-reclosing - Single- and/or three-phase

1MRK 580 170-XEN


1 ApplicationAutomatic reclosing (AR) is a well-established method to restore the serv-ice of a power line after a transient line fault. The majority of line faultsare flashover arcs, which are transient by nature. When the power line isswitched off by operation of line protection and line breakers, the arc de-ionizes and recovers voltage withstand at a somewhat variable rate. So acertain line dead time is needed. But then line service can resume by theauto-reclosing of the line breakers. Select the length of the dead time toenable good probability of fault arc de-ionization and successful reclos-ing.

For the individual line breakers and auto-reclosing equipment, the Auto-reclose open time (AR open time) expression is used.At simultaneous tripping and reclosing at the two line ends, Auto-recloseopen time equals the dead time of the line. Otherwise these two times maydiffer.

In case of a permanent fault, line protection trips again at reclosing, toclear the fault. Fig. 1 shows the operation sequence and some expressions.

The reclosing function can be selected to perform single-phase and/orthree-phase reclosing from eight single-shot to multiple-shot reclosingprograms. The three-phase auto-reclose open time can be selected from0,2-60 s to give either High-speed auto-reclosing (HSAR), or Delayedauto-reclosing (DAR).

Three-phase auto-reclosing can be performed with or without the use ofsynchro-check and energizing check.

Single-phase tripping and single-phase reclosing is a way to limit theeffect of a single-phase line fault to system operation. Especially at thehigher voltages, the majority of line faults are of the single-phase type.The method is of particular value to maintain system stability in systemswith limited meshing or parallel routing. It requires individual operationof each phase of the breakers, which is most common at the higher trans-mission voltages.

A somewhat longer dead time may be required at single-phase reclosingcompared to high-speed three-phase reclosing, due to influence on thefault arc of the non-tripped phases.

ABB Network Partner ABAuto-reclosing - Single- and/or three-phase

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 170-XENPage 5 - 58

Fig. 1 Single-shot auto-reclosing at a permanent fault

2 Theory of operationThe auto-reclosing function first co-operates with the line protection func-tions, the trip function, the circuit-breaker and the synchro-check func-tion. It can also be influenced by other protection functions such as shuntreactor protection through binary input signals, AR On/Off manual con-trol. It can provide information to the disturbance and service report func-tions, event recording, indications, and reclosing operation counters.

The reclosing counters can be read and reset on the built-in MMI:

Service ReportARCounters

The auto-reclosing is a purely logical function that works with logical orbinary signals, logical operations, and timers.

(X80170-1)

Lineprotection

Circuitbreaker

Auto-reclosingfunction

Open

Fault duration AR open time for breaker Fault duration

Closed

Operate time

Break time Break timeClosing time

Res

ets

AR

res

et

Operate time

Set AR open time Reclaim time

Star

t AR

Rec

losi

ngco

mm

and

Clo

se c

omm

and

Ope

rate

s

Fau

lt

Ope

rate

s

Inst

at o

f fa

ult

Res

ets

Con

tact

clo

se

Arc

ext

ingu

ishe

s

Con

tact

s se

para

te

Tri

p co

mm

and

Auto-reclosing - Single- and/or three-phase


Version 1.0-00

2.1 Input and output signals

Fig. 2 Single- and three-phase auto-reclosing; input and output sig-nals

The input signals can be connected to binary inputs or internal functionsof the terminal. The output signals can be connected to binary outputrelays. You can also connect the signals to the free logic functions, forexample, ORgates, and in that way add connection links.

The input and output signals which can be interfaced with the auto-recloser 1 are presented in this document. Data is same for other auto-recloser functions (2 to 6) with signal prefix AR02- to AR06-.

Input signals:AR01-ON Switches the auto-reclosing On

(at Operation = Stand by).

AR01-OFF Switches the auto-reclosing Off (at Operation =Stand by).

AR01-START Auto-reclosing start by a protection trip signal.It also makes the reclosing program continue at arepeated trip, if multi-shot reclosing is selected.

AR01-CBCLOSED Circuit breaker closed. A condition for the start of areclosing cycle.

AR01-CBREADY Circuit breaker ready for a Close-Open (CO) orOpen-Close-Open (OCO) operation. A conditionfor the start of a reclosing cycle.

AR01-INHIBIT Inhibit auto-reclosing. Interrupts and blocks auto-reclosing. Signals that should not cause auto-reclosing can be connected. For example zone 2trip, backup trip, and so on.

TRSOTFTPTRIPSTARTONOFFCBREADYCBCLOSEDINHIBITPLCLOSTWAITSYNC

CLOSECBSETON

INPROGWFMASTER

P1PHP3PH

READYSP1TP1TP2TP3TP4

UNSUC

(X80170-2)

SYNCHROCHECK

PR

OT

EC

TIO

NA

ND

TR

IP

CAN BE CONNECTED TOBINARY INPUTS

AR CONNECTED TO BINARY OUTPUTS

2nd AR**

** ONLY IN SOME TERMINALS


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 170-XENPage 5 - 60

AR01-SYNC Synchro-check OK from the internal synchro-check function or an external device required forthree-phase auto-reclosing.

AR01-PLCLOST Power line carrier or other form of permissive sig-nal lost. An optional input signal at loss of a com-munication channel in a permissive line protectionscheme. Can extend the AR open time.

AR01-TRSOTF Protection trip switch-onto-fault.

AR01-TPTRIP Three-phase trip. Signal to the auto-reclosing func-tion that a three-phase tripping occurred.

AR01-WAIT Signal to the low priority auto-reclosing functionfrom the master in multi-breaker arrangements forsequential reclosing.

Output signals:AR01-SETON Indicates that the AR operation is On, that is, opera-

tive.

AR01-READY Indicates that the AR function is ready for a newAR cycle. It is On and it is not started or blocked.

AR01-INPROGR Auto-reclosing in progress. Activated during theAR open time.

AR01-SP1 Auto-reclosing single-phase, Shot 1 in progress.

AR01-TP1 Auto-reclosing three-phase, Shot 1 in progress.

AR01-TP2 Auto-reclosing three-phase, Shot 2 in progress.

AR01-UNSUC Auto-reclosing unsuccessful. Activated at a newtrip after the last programmed shot.

AR01-CLOSECB Close circuit-breaker command.

AR01-P3PH Prepare three-phase trip. Control of the next tripoperation.

AR01-P1PH Permit single-phase trip. Inverse signal to AR01-P3PH.

AR01-WFMASTER Wait from master. Issued by the high priority unitfor sequential reclosing.

AR01-LONGDURA Output signal inhibiting the auto-reclosing whenthe extension of AR OPEN TIME is set off.

2.2 AR Operation You can control the auto-reclosing function from the MMI. Use the Operationparameter, which you can set to Off, Stand by or On. See Fig. 3.

Off deactivates the Operation parameter. On activates automatic reclos-ing. Stand by enables On and Off Operation via input signal pulses.



Version 1.0-00

2.3 Function logic

2.3.1 Start and control of the auto-reclosing

The automatic operation of the auto-reclosing function is controlled bythe Operation parameter and the input signals as described above. When itis on, the AR01-SETON output is high (active). See Fig. 3.

The auto-reclosing function is started at a protection trip by the AR01-START input signal. At a repeated trip, this signal is also activated tomake the reclosing program continue.

There are a number of conditions for the start to be accepted and a newcycle started. After these checks, the starting signal is latched in, and theStarted state signal is activated. It can be interrupted by certain events.

AR01-CBCLOSED The circuit breaker (CB) must be closed for at least five seconds to allowa new AR cycle to start. It prevents start at closing onto a fault. It also pre-vents the reclosing of a breaker that is open at the protection trip, which ispossible in a multiple breaker arrangement.

AR01-CBREADYThe circuit breaker must have its operating gear charged and ready for aClose-Open (CO) or an Open-Close-Open (OCO) to allow the start of anauto-reclosing cycle. This input can also be connected to circuits thatmonitor the breaker pressure. If it is not ready at start, it is unlikely that itis ready by the end of the AR open time.

AR01-TRSOTF Protection trip switch-onto-fault. This signal alone does not start reclos-ing. But at a reclosing onto a permanent fault it may appear and let thefunction move on to AR01-UNSUC (unsuccessful) or second-shot reclos-ing as programmed.

Blocking and inhibit signals may be created at other parts of the programand are interrupting the reclosing cycle or prevent reclosing. One sourceof such a signal is activation of the input AR01-INHIBIT in Fig. 6.

AR01-READYThis AR ready for a new reclosing cycle output is high when the functionis On, at rest, and prepared for operation. This signal can be used by a pro-tection function to extend the reach before reclosing, when that function isrequired.

AR01-UNSUCThe Reclosing unsuccessful output is activated at a possible new trip afterthe selected number of reclosing shots, or at trip while reclosing isblocked. The output resets after the reclaim time.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 170-XENPage 5 - 62

2.3.2 Extended AR open time, shot 1

By setting the Extended t1 parameter (On/Off), this function can eitherbe selected or not. The purpose is to adapt the length of the AR Opentime to the possibility of non-simultaneous tripping at the two line ends.If a permissive communication scheme is used, and the permissive com-munication channel (for example, PLC, power-line carrier) is out of serv-ice at the fault, there is a risk of sequential, non-simultaneous tripping.To ensure a sufficient line dead time, the AR open time is extended by0,4 s. The input signal AR01-PLCLOST is checked at tripping. See Fig.4.

2.3.3 Long trip signal Under normal circumstances the trip command resets quickly, due to faultclearing. You can set a maximum trip pulse duration by tTrip. At a longertrip signal, the AR open dead time is extended by Extend_t1. If theExtended t1 = Off, a long trip signal interrupts the reclosing sequence inthe same way as AR01-INHIBIT.

2.3.4 Reclosing programs Select these reclosing programs to fit the application:

3ph 3-phase reclosing, 1 shot

2*3ph 3-phase reclosing, 2 shots



1ph 1-phase reclosing, 1 shot

1/3ph 1-phase or 3-phase reclosing, 1 shot

1ph + 3ph 1-phase followed by 3-phase reclosing, or just one 3-phase reclosing depending on fault

1/3ph + 3ph 1-phase or 3-phase reclosing, followed by 3-phasereclosing, 2 shots

2.3.4.1 1/3ph reclosing One-shot reclosing is used as an example of the operation for single-phaseor three-phase. See Figures 3, 5, and 8. Here, the AR function is assumedOn and Ready. The breaker is closed and charged.

AR01-START is received and sealed-in at operation of the line protec-tion. The AR01-READY output is reset (Ready for a new AR cycle).

If the AR01-TPTRIP (three-phase trip) is...

low, the timer for single-phase reclosing open time t1S is started and the AR01-SP1 output (auto-reclosing single-phase, shot 1, in progress) is activated. It can be used to suppress Pole disagreement and Earth-fault pro-tection during the single-phase open interval.



Version 1.0-00

Immediately after the start-up of the reclosing and tripping of thebreaker, the input (in Fig. 3) AR01-CBCLOSED is low (possibly alsoAR01-CBREADY at type OCO). The AR Open time timer, t1S or t1,keeps on running. At the end of the set AR open time, t1S or t1, the respective SPTO orTPTO (single-phase or three-phase AR time-out) is activated and goes onto the output module for further checks and to give a closing command tothe circuit-breaker.

2.3.5 Evolving fault A single-phase fault can result in a single-phase trip and start of t1S. Thefault may evolve into another phase. At such an evolving fault, the protec-tion must issue a three-phase trip for the second trip.

When the AR01-TPTRIP appears, the t1S-timer is stopped and the timerfor t1, the three-phase AR open time, starts.

2.3.6 AR01-P3PH, Prepare three-phase trip

This output signal ensures that a possible coming trip operation is a three-phase operation. This is, for example, the case if the AR is set off, orblocked, or if it has made the first reclosing shot.

Normally the signal is reset when the reclaim time after a reclosing hasexpired, and the function is once more ready for a single-phase reclosing Permit single-phase trip. It is the inverse of P3PH and should be con-nected to a binary output relay. Should the unit with the auto-reclosing beinoperative, single-phase trip is thus not released. The external circuit canbe connected to a make or break contact of an output relay depending onwhat is required: Permit single-phase or Prepare three-phase trip.

2.3.7 Blocking of a new reclosing cycle

A new start of a reclosing cycle is blocked for the reclaim time after theselected number of reclosing shots are made.

2.3.8 Reclosing checks and Reclaim timer

An AR open time time-out signal is received from a program module. At three-phase reclosing, a synchro-check and/or energizing check, orvoltage check, can be used. You can use an internal or an external syn-chro-check function, configured to AR01-SYNC. If reclosing without check is preferred, configure the input AR01-SYNCto FIXD-ON (set to 1).

high, the timer for three-phase AR open time, t1, is started (instead of t1S) and AR01-TP1 is set (auto-reclosing three-phase, shot 1, in progress). While either t1S or t1 is running, the output AR01-INPROGR is activated.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 170-XENPage 5 - 64

ulse

he

era-

l of

setheains = 1,

Another possibility is to set the output from the internal synchro-checkfunction to a permanently active signal. Set Operation = Release in thesynchro-check function. Then AR01-SYNC is configured to SYNC-CHECKOK. See Fig. 6.

At confirmation from the synchro-check, or if the reclosing is of single-phase type, the signal passes on.

At CBReady signal of the Close-Open (CO) type, it is checked that thissignal is present to allow for reclosing.

The synchronism and energizing check is allowed to be fulfilled for a cer-tain time, tSync. If it does not, or if the other conditions are not fulfilled,the reclosing is interrupted and blocked.

AR01-INHIBITShould this input signal appear, reclosing is inhibited. There is a tInhibitreset timer, to ensure blocking during a few seconds after the signal isremoved. The input can, for example, be activated by a shunt reactor, orby delayed back-up protection or breaker-failure protection.

Reclaim timerThis timer defines a period from the issue of a reclosing command, afterwhich the reclosing function is reset. Should a new tripping occur withinthis time, it is treated as a continuation of the first fault. When the signal to a closing command is given (Pulse AR), the reclaimtimer is started.

There is an AR State Control to track the actual state in the reclosingsequence.

2.3.9 Pulsing of CB closing command and incrementing the operation counters

• The AR01-CLOSECB, breaker closing command, is made as a pof length, as set by the tPulse 0,1-1 s parameter.

• For breakers without an anti-pumping function, the closing pulse cutting described below can be used. It is selected by means of tCutPulse = On parameter. A new tripping pulse, (Trip Int.), then interrupts the pulse. But the minimum length is always 50 ms.

• At the issue of a reclosing command, the associated reclosing option counter is also incremented. There is a counter for each type of reclosing and one for the totaall reclosings. See Fig. 7.

2.3.10Transient fault After the reclosing command, the reclaim timer keeps running for thetime. If no tripping occurs within this time, tReclaim = 10 to 300 s, tauto-reclosing function resets after the reclaim time. The breaker remclosed and the operating gear recharges too, and AR01-CBCLOSEDAR01-CBREADY = 1.



Version 1.0-00

After the reclaim time, the AR state control resets to the original rest state,with AR01-SETON = 1, AR01-READY = 1 and AR01-P1PH = 1 outputs(depending on the selected program). The other outputs are = 0.

2.3.11Permanent fault After reclosing, a new trip is made and a new AR01-START or AR01-TRSOTF signal appears, which means Trip Int. into the logic. It acti-vates AR01-UNSUC (Reclosing unsuccessful). The timers for the 1, t1Sand t1 reclosing shot cannot be started (Fig. 5). Depending on the setting of the parameter PulseCut, the closing commandmay be shortened at the second tripping command. After time-out of the reclaim timer, the function resets, but the breakerremains open (AR01-CBCLOSED = 0, AR01-CBREADY = 1), meaningthat the reclosing function is not ready for a new reclosing function. SeeFig. 3 and Fig. 8.

2.3.12More details about reclosing programs

3ph3-phase, single-shot reclosing. The output AR01-P3PH is always high (=1). A tripping operation is made as a three-phase trip at all fault types. The reclosing is as a three-phase reclosing in program 1/3ph, describedearlier.

2*3ph3-phase + 3-phase, two-shot reclosing. The operation is similar to that in program 3ph, but at a tripping after thefirst reclosing shot, a second reclosing shot is made.

3*3ph and 4*3phThey are as the 2-shot reclosing program 2*3ph, but 3 or 4 shots aremade.

1ph1-phase, single-shot reclosing. At 1-phase tripping, the operation is as described in program 1/3ph. Atreceipt of the three-phase trip signal AR01-TPTRIP, the reclosing is inter-rupted and blocked for the tInhibit set inhibit time.

1ph + 3ph1-phase+ 3-phase two-shot reclosing, or 3-phase single-shot reclosing. For a multi-phase fault and a three-phase tripping, the operation is as inprogram 1/3ph, one reclosing shot is made. But at a single-phase fault and a single-phase tripping and reclosing, asecond three-phase reclosing with a longer delay is made. Three separateAR open time timers are used, t1S or t1 for the first shot, and t2 for thesecond shot (1-300 s). Fig. 9 illustrates the sequence.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 170-XENPage 5 - 66

1/3ph + 3ph1-phase + 3-phase, or 3-phase + 3-phase, two-shot reclosing. The operation is similar to that in program 1/3ph, described above, but ata tripping after the first reclosing shot, a second reclosing shot is made.

3 SettingThe parameters for the auto-reclosing function are found in the built-inMMI at:

Settings Functions

Group nAutoRecloser n

3.1 Recommendations regarding input signals

The signals can be configured via the built-in MMI or with the CAP 531configuration tool.

MMI tree:


AutoRecloser n

AR01-ON and AR01-OFF may be connected to binary inputs for external control.

AR01-START should be connected to the protection function trip output for which it is tobe started. It can also be connected to a binary input for start from anexternal contact. A logical OR gate can be used to multiply the number ofstart sources.

AR01-INHIBIT can be connected to binary inputs, for example for AR blocking from acertain protection, such as a line connected shunt reactor, transfer tripreceive, or back-up protection or breaker-failure protection.

AR01-CBCLOSED and AR01-CBREADY must be connected to binary inputs, for pick-up of the breaker signals.Should the external signal be of Breaker not ready type (uncharged), aninverter can be configured before CBREADY.

AR01-SYNCis connected to the synchro-check internal function if needed. It can also beconnected to a binary input. If neither internal nor external synchronism orenergizing check (dead line check) is required, it can be connected to apermanent 1, by connection to FIXD-ON.

AR01-PLCLOST can be connected to a binary input, when it is to be used.



Version 1.0-00

AR01-TRSOTF is connected to the internal line protection, distance protection, tripswitch-onto-fault.

AR01-TPTRIP is connected to the internal function TRIP, or to a binary input. The protec-tion functions that give a three-phase trip are supposed to be routed via thatfunction.

3.2 Recommendations for output signals

AR01-READY can be connected to the Zone extension of a line protection. It can also beused for indication, if required.

AR01-SP1 single-phase reclosing in progress is used to temporarily block an Earth-fault protection and/or a Pole disagreement function during the single-phase open interval.

AR01-CLOSECBconnect to a binary output relay for breaker closing command.

AR01-P3PHprepare three-phase trip: Connect to TRIP-PTPTRIP.

AR01-P1PHpermit single-phase trip: Can be connected to a binary output for connec-tion to external protection or trip relays. In case of total loss of auxiliaryvoltage, the output relay drops, and does not allow single-phase tripping.If needed to invert the signal, it can be made by a break contact of the out-put relay.The other output signals can be connected for indication, disturbancerecording, and so on, as required.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 170-XENPage 5 - 68

y isFig.

tion.t the

aker

f the

lowigh.

tion

thetion

4 TestingYou can test the auto-reclosing function, for example, during commis-sioning or after a configuration change. You can test the function with, forexample, the protection and trip functions and the synchro-check function(with energizing check).

Fig. 10 illustrates a recommended testing scenario, where the circuitbreaker is simulated by an external bistable relay (BR) such as RXMVB2or RXMVE1. These manual switches are available:

• Switch close (SC)

• Switch trip (ST)

• Switch ready (SRY).

SC and ST can be push-button with spring return. If no bistable relaavailable, you can replace it with two self-reset auxiliary relays as in 10.

Use a secondary injection relay test set to operate the protection funcYou can use the BR to control the injected analogue quantities so thafault only appears when the BR is picked up—simulating a closed breposition.

To make the arrangement more elaborate, include the simulation oBreaker charged condition, or AR01-CBREADY for these sequences:

• Close-Open (CO), or

• Open-Close-Open (OCO)

The AR01-CBREADY condition at the CO sequence type is usually for a recharging time of 5-10 s after a closing operation. Then it is hThe example shows that it is simulated with SRY, a manual switch.

4.1 Suggested testing procedure:

4.1.1 Preparations 1.1 Check the settings of the auto-reclosing (AR) function. The operacan be set at Stand by (Off).

MMI tree:

SettingsFunctions

Group nAutoRecloser n

If any time settings are changed so as to speed-up or facilitatetesting, they must later be changed back to normal, and a verificatest must be made after that.



Version 1.0-00

1.2 Read and note the reclosing operate counters from the MMI tree:

Service reportAR Counters

AR01-Counters (for AR No. 1)Counters

1.3 Do the testing arrangements outlined above, for example, as in Fig.10.

1.4 The AR01-CBCLOSED breaker position, the commands Trip andClosing, AR01-CLOSECB, and other signals should preferably bearranged for event recording, which is providing time measurements.Otherwise, a separate timer or recorder can be used to check the ARopen time and other times.

4.1.2 Check that the AR function works

2.1 Ensure that the voltage inputs to Synchro-check are such that they aregiving accepted conditions at open breaker (BR). They can, for exam-ple, be Live busbar and Dead line.

2.2 Set the operation at On.

2.3 Make a BR pickup by a closing pulse, the SC-pulse.

2.4 Close SRY, Breaker ready and leave it closed.

2.5 Inject AC quantities to give a trip and start AR. Observe or record the BR operation. The BR relay should trip andreclose. After the closing operation, the SRY switch could be openedfor about 5 s, and then closed. The AR open time and the operating sequence should be checked, forexample, in the event recording. Check the operate indications and the operate counters.Should the operation not be as expected, the reason must be investi-gated. It could be due to an AR Off state or wrong program selection,or not accepted synchro-check conditions.

2.6 A few fault cases may be checked, for example, single-phase andthree-phase tripping, transient, and permanent fault. The signalsequence diagrams in Fig. 8 and 9 can be of guidance for the check.

4.1.3 Check that reclosing does not occur when it is not meant to

The number of cases can be varied according to the application. Examplesof selection cases are:

3.1 Inhibit input signal: Check that the function is operative and that thebreaker conditions are OK. Apply an AR01-INHIBIT input signaland start the reclosing function. No reclosing.

3.2 Breaker open, closing onto a fault: Put the breaker simulating relay,BR, in open position. Close it with the SC switch and start the ARwithin a second. No reclosing.

3.3 Breaker not ready: Close the BR breaker relay and see that everythingexcept for AR01-CBREADY is in normal condition; SRY is open.Start the AR function. No reclosing.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 170-XENPage 5 - 70

3.4 Lack of verification from synchro-check: Check the function at non-acceptable voltage conditions. Wait for time out, >5 s. No reclosing.

3.5 Operation Stand by and Off: Check that no reclosing can occur withthe function in Off state.

3.6 Depending on the program selection and the selected fault types thatstart and inhibit reclosing, a check of no unwanted reclosing can bemade. For example, if only single-phase reclosing is selected, a testcan verify that there is no reclosing after three-phase tripping.

4.1.4 Termination of the test

After the tests, restore the equipment to normal or desired state.

Especially check these items:

4.1 Reclosing operate counters: Check and record the counter contents.(Reset if it is the user’s preference.)

MMI tree:

Service reportAR Counters

AR01-Counters (for AR No. 1)Clear Counters

4.2 Setting parameters, and Operation as required.

4.3 Test switch or disconnected links of connection terminals.

4.4 Normal indications.

(If so preferred, the disturbance report may be cleared.)

MMI tree:

Disturb. ReportClear DistRep



Version 1.0-00

5 Diagrams

Fig. 3 Auto-reclosing On/Off control and start. Simplified logic. Details are left out

(X80170-3)

&t5s

AR-UNSUC

&

Operation:Off

& 1V

Operation:On

Operation:Standby

AR01-ON

AR01-OFF

AR01-START

AR01-TRSOTF

AR01-CBCLOSED

AR01-CBREADY

AR01-COUNT-0

AR01-INITIATE

AR-READY

AR-STARTAR

AR-INITIATE

AR-SETON

&

SR

& SR

Reclosing function reset

& 1V

&1V1V

&Blocked state

1Blocking andinhibit conditions (Fig. 5,6)

&

Additional condition


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 170-XENPage 5 - 72

Fig. 4 Control of extended “AR Open time, shot 1”(X80170-4)

AR-LONGDURA

&

AR01-PLCLOST & 1V &

tAR-tTRIP

AR-INITIATE

AR-INITIATE

AR-STARTAR

AR-STARTAR

Extend_t1

&t

AR-tTRIP



Version 1.0-00

Fig. 5 Reclosing program 1/3ph. 1-phase or 3-phase, 1-shot reclos-ing. Simplified logic. Details are left out

(X80170-5)

t

Extend t1AR01-TPTRIP

AR01-P3PH

&

1V1

tt1s

AR01-SP1

AR01-SPTO

0,4s

tt1

AR01-TP1

AR01-TPTO

AR01-INPROGR

AR01-P1PH

Block start

LogicAR State signal (Fig.6)

Started state (Fig.3)

EXTEND_t1 (Fig.4)

AR01-READY

Inhibit (Fig.6)

RMR (Fig.6)

AR State signal (Fig.6)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 170-XENPage 5 - 74

Fig. 6 Reclosing checks and “Reclaim” and “Inhibit” timers. Simplified logic. Details are left out

(X80170-6)

t

AR01-EXTSYNC

&1V

ttSync

AR---INPROGR

&

AR---INHIBIT

Blocking

Pulse AR (above)

TPTOT2TOT3TOT4TO

1V

SPTO (Fig.5)

“AR Open time” timers

&

&Trip int. (Fig.3)Additional condition

& 1V Blocking

Pulse AR

AR StateControl

Logic

1V

ttReclaim

&

AR Stateinf.

1V

Inhibit



Version 1.0-00

Fig. 7 Pulsing of close command and driving of operation counters(X80170-7)

tPulse

&

&

1V AR01-CLOSECB

1-ph Shot 1AR01-SP1

tPulse

& 3-ph Shot 1AR01-TP1




No of Reclosings

Pulse-AR

Trip int. (Fig.3)

*)

*) Only if “PulseCut” = On


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 170-XENPage 5 - 76

Fig. 8 Example of sequence. Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1ph or 1/3ph. Single-phase single-shot reclosing

Fig. 9 Example. Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1ph + 3ph or 1/3ph + 3ph, Two-shot reclosing

t1s

tReclaim

FaultAR01-CBCLOSEDAR01-CBREADY(CO)AR01-START(Trip)AR01-TPTRIPAR01-SYNCAR01-READYAR01-INPROGRAR01-SP1AR01-TP1AR01-TP2AR01-CLOSECBAR01-P3PHAR01-UNSUC

(X80170-8)

t1s

FaultAR01-CBCLOSED

AR01-CBREADY(CO)

AR01-START(Trip)AR01-TPTRIP

AR01-SYNC

AR01-READY

AR01-INPROGR

AR01-SP1

AR01-TP1

AR01-TP2

AR01-CLOSECB

AR01-P3PH

AR01-UNSUC tReclaim

t2

(X80170-1)



Version 1.0-00

Fig. 10 Simulating breaker operation with two auxiliary relays

(X80170-10)

Trip

Close

ST

OR

SC

SRY

+ -

To Test Set

AR01-CLOSECB

AR01-CBCLOSED

AR01-CBREADY

Trip

CR


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 170-XENPage 5 - 78

6 Appendix



(X80170-11)

AR01

AR

TRSOTFTPTRIPSTARTON

CLOSECBSETON

INPROGRWFMASTER

OFFCBREADYCBCLOSEDINHIBITPLCLOSTWAITSYNC

P1PHP3PH

READYSP1TP1TP2TP3TP4

UNSUC



Version 1.0-00

Fig. 12 Terminal diagram of the function(X80170-12)

S

R& 1V

1

Operation=Standby

Operation=On

Operation=Off

AR01-SYNC

t

AR1 1-ph/3-ph reclosing

AR01-ON

AR01-OFF

AR01-START

AR01-CBCLOSED

AR01-CBREADY

AR01-TRSOTF

AR01-TPTRIP

AR01-PLCLOST

AR01-WAIT

CBReady=CO

AR01-INHIBIT

AR01-SETON

AR01-READY

AR01-UNSUC

AR01-INPROGR

AR01-SP1

AR01-TP1

AR01-TP2

AR01-TP3

AR01-TP4

AR01-P1PH

AR01-P3PH

AR01-CLOSECB

& 1V

&

AR On/Off

Start

Reclosing programsAR open timers

Reclosing checks andsequence stepping

Reclaim timer

Pulsing

Drivingoperatecounters

Inhibit drop-out timer


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 170-XENPage 5 - 80

6.2 Signal list Signal list indicating the input and output signals which can be interfacedwith the auto-recloser 1. Data is same for other auto-recloser functions (2to 6) with signal prefix AR02- to AR06-.

IN: DESCRIPTION:

AR01-TRSOTF Trip from switch-onto-fault

AR01-TPTRIP Three phase trip

AR01-START Protection function trip to AR

AR01-ON Enable auto-recloser

AR01-OFF Disable auto-recloser

AR01-CBREADY CB Ready for operation

AR01-CBCLOSED CB closed

AR01-INHIBIT Inhibit auto-recloser

AR01-PLCLOST Permissive communication channel out of service

AR01-WAIT Wait from master for sequential reclosing

AR01-SYNC Permission from synchro-check/energizing check function

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

AR01-CLOSECB Closing command to breaker

AR01-SETON Auto-recloser set on

AR01-INPROGR Auto-reclose operation in progress

AR01-WFMASTER Wait from master for sequential reclosing

AR01-P1PH Permit 1 phase tripping

AR01-P3PH Prepare for 3 phase trip

AR01-READY Auto-reclose ready for new operation

AR01-SP1 1 phase reclosing in progress

AR01-TP1 3 phase, shot 1 in progress




AR01-UNSUC Auto-reclose unsuccessful



Version 1.0-00

6.3 Setting table


Operation Off, Stand by, On Auto-reclose operation

Program 3ph, 2*3ph, 3*3ph, 4*3ph, 1ph, 1/3 ph, 1ph+3ph, 1ph/3ph+3ph

Auto-reclosing function

Extendt1 Off, On Extended dead time in case of carrier channel failure

t1S (0.20 - 5.00)seconds Open time for single phase auto-reclos-ing

t1 (0.20 - 60.00)seconds Open time for 3 phase auto-reclosing

t2 (1 - 300)seconds Open time for second 3 phase auto-reclosing

t3 (1 - 300)seconds Open time for third 3 phase auto-reclos-ing

t4 (1 - 300)seconds Open time for fourth 3 phase auto-reclosing

tSync (0.5 - 5.0)seconds Auto-recloser maximum wait time for synchrocheck

tPulse (0.10 - 1.00)seconds Circuit breaker closing pulse length

CutPulse Off, On Shorten closing pulse at a new trip

tReclaim (10 - 300)seconds Auto-reclose reclaim time

tInhibit (5 - 30)seconds Inhibit reset time

CB Ready CO, OCO Select type of circuit breaker ready sig-nal

tTrip (0.2 - 1.0)seconds Block auto-reclosing for long trip dura-tion

Priority None, Low, High Priority selection for sequential reclosing

tWait (30 - 300)seconds Maximum wait time from master


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 170-XENPage 5 - 82


Function:

5Breaker-failure protection 1MRK 580 171-XEN


1 ApplicationThis function issues a back-up trip adjacent circuit breakers in case of atripping failure of the circuit breaker (CB), and clears the fault asrequested by the object protection.

The breaker-failure function is started by a protection trip command, fromthe line and busbar protection through the breaker-related trip relays. Thestart can be single-phase or three-phase. Correct fault current clearing orfailure is detected by a current check in each phase. The current level canbe set at 0,1 to 2 times the rated current.

One can either choose to refrain from a retrip of the breaker, use it as anunconditional retrip, or as a retrip with a current check. A short delay, 0-150 ms, can be set for the retrip.

The use of retrip limits the impact on the power system if the breaker-fail-ure protection function (BFP) is started by mistake during testing or othermaintenance work.

A second time step is used for the back-up trip command. It should beconnected to trip the adjacent breakers, to clear the busbar section andintertrip the opposite side of the object, if so required. The time settingrange is 50-400 ms.

By using separate timers for each phase, correct timing at evolving faultsis ensured.

The timer setting should be selected with a certain margin to allow forvariation in the normal fault clearing time. The properties of the BFPfunction allow the use of a small margin.

Fig. 1 Start and trip functions (X80171-1)

1V

TTRIP

STARTL1 BUTL1

RTL1

L1

RETRIPL1

1V

TTRIP

STARTL2 BUTL2

RTL2RETRIPL2

1V

TTRIP

STARTL3 BUTL3

RTL3RETRIPL3

IL1

StartL1

IL2

StartL2

StartL3

IL3

Start3ph

L2

L3

1V

TTRIP

BACK-UPTRIP

ABB Network Partner ABBreaker-failure protection

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 171-XENPage 5 - 84

e

e

The application functions of the protection are:

• Individual phase-current detection

• Two time steps, one for retrip of the related circuit breaker and onfor the back-up trip of the adjacent circuit breakers

• Selection of current controlled or unconditional retrip

• Phase separated timers correct timing at an evolving fault

• Accurate timers and current elements reset in 10 ms, allowing thuse of short back-up trip time

Fig. 2 Time sequence(X80171-2)

40ms 20ms

<10ms 40ms

20ms

<10ms

30ms

Relaytime

Start BFPNormalCB opening

CB opening time Marginal

BFPtime CB opening time

Marginal

BFPtime

110ms

Retriporiginal CB

150ms

General tripadjacent CB

Breaker-failure protectionABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 171-XENPage 5 - 85

Version 1.0-00

2 Theory of operationThe breaker-failure protection starts on a single-phase or three-phase con-dition, either from an external protection, or internally from a protectiontrip signal in the terminal.

The breaker receiving the original protection trip command can beretripped from the BFP. The retrip can be controlled by a current check, orcarried out as a direct retrip without any current check. The direct retripcan be used without inconvenience, because the breaker-to-trip hasalready received a tripping command, and the direct retrip does not causeany unselective tripping

The use of retrip limits the extent of unwanted power disconnection incase of an accidental start of the BFP at work in the initiating circuitry,with the primary circuit in service and the load above the set current level.

The back-up trip is sent to the adjacent circuit breaker to clear the faultand disconnect the failing circuit breaker.

Fig. 3 Logic diagram of breaker-failure protection, phase L1

(X80171-3)

t

t1

&

t

t

t1

t

t2

&

IL1

START L1

L1

ASDRMS

RET1

RET0

RET2

BUTL1

RTL1

RET0: No retripRET1: Retrip with current checkRET2: Unconditional retripRET1:


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 171-XENPage 5 - 86

utscta-the

ter-presetering

2.1 Input and output signals


The connectable inputs are connectable by configuration to the binaryinputs of the terminal or to other internal functions’ outputs. The outpare connectable by configuration to the binary output relays. “Connebles” and “outputs” can be connected to the free-logic functions of unit, OR gates, and in that way add connection links.

2.2 Start functions The breaker-failure protection can be started either internally or exnally. The start pulse is sealed-in as long as the current exceeds the current level, to prevent a restart of the BFP timers in case of a chattstarting contact.

The preset current level may be set to (0,1 - 2,0) . Ir where Ir is 1 or 5 A.

(X80171-4)

1V

Trip Logic

TRIPL1TRIPL2TRIPL3TPTRIP

STL1STL2STL3ST3PH

RETRIPL1RETRIPL2RETRIPL3

BUTRIP

Breaker-failureprotection

1V

1V

1V

External start

Input signals: Start of breaker-failure protection:

BFP--STL1 Phase L1BFP--STL2 Phase L2BFP--STL3 Phase L3BFP--ST3PH Three-phase start

Output signals: Trip:

BFP--BUTRIP Back-up tripBFP--RETRIPL1 Trip breaker-failure phase L1BFP--RETRIPL2 Trip breaker-failure phase L2BFP--RETRIPL3 Trip breaker-failure phase L3


Version 1.0-00

his nt in

, to

ievewithhisrent

esulte has

valueviouration

l isalue

on is

e it is

iz-ms

ated.

2.3 Measuring principles The current is filtered through a specially designed high-pass filter toobtain the required suppression of the dc components.

High-pass filtering is performed basically for two reasons; to remove the:

• dc component caused by saturated current transformers with a decaying current due to de-energizing of the secondary circuit. Tis done to achieve a more correct representation of the real currethe line.

• dc component that is a part of the fault current. This is done to achieve a correct base for both ASD and RMS calculations.

The frequency limit of the filter is very close to the service frequencyobtain a maximum suppression of the above dc components.

The intention of the adaptive signal detection (ASD) concept is to achindependence from the absolute filtering requirement, when dealing extremely high fault currents in combination with low preset values. Tis obtained by creating a new stabilizing signal to compare the curwith.

The ASD works continuously, regardless of if the BFP was started. Its ris but considered only when the BFP has started and the pre-set timelapsed.

As the current exceeds the previously stabilized sample, it adapts the of the current and when it does not, it decays. This adaptive behamakes it possible to rapidly and securely detect a breaker failure situafter the pre-set time has elapsed.

Continuously and in parallel, the RMS value of the post-filtered signacalculated and compared with a preset current level. As the RMS vdecreases below the preset current level, the breaker-failure functimomentarily reset.

At normal operation of the circuit breaker, the stabilizing signal exceeds thpost-filtered signal for a consecutive period of maximum 10 ms beforereset. Resetting occurs before the back-up trip timer t2 has timed out.

At a breaker failure situation, the post-filtered current exceeds the stabiling signal, resulting in a trip of the breaker-failure function within 10 after the trip timer t2 has elapsed.

The breaker-failure protection works with all three phases totally separBut a possibility exists to start all three phases simultaneously. The back-up trip is always three-phase.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 171-XENPage 5 - 88

Fig. 5 Breaker-failure protection

Fig. 6 Current detector, ASD and RMS measurement.

2.4 Retrip functions The retrip function of the original circuit breaker is set at one of threeoptions:

Setting: The retrip...

Off function is not executed.

I> check occurs with a current check.

No I> check occurs without a current check.

The retrip timer t1 can be set from 0 to 150 ms.

A trip pulse length of 150 ms is generated.

(X80171-5)

t

t1

&

t &

ASDRMS Back-up

trip

Currentdetector

Current

Start

(X80171-6)

High-passfiltering

Recti-fying

Creation ofstabilizingsignal

Decisionthroughcomparison

Decisionthroughcomparison

RMScalculation

Currentsamples ASD

RMS


Version 1.0-00

rna-

on

2.5 Back-up trip The back-up trip delay timer t2 can be set between 50 and 400 ms.

A trip pulse length of 150 ms is generated.

Fig. 7 Breaker-failure protection

3 Setting

3.1 Man-machine interface (MMI)

The configuration of alternatives or settings to the functions is made onthe built-in MMI:

SettingsFunctions

Group nBreaker Failure

The breaker-failure protection can be controlled from the man-machineinterface (MMI) by an “Operation” parameter, to be set between altetives Off/On.

When “Operation” is set to Off, the function becomes inoperative.

The configuration of input and output signals to the function is madethe built-in MMI:

ConfigurationFunction Inputs

Breaker Failure

(X80171-7)

1VTTRIP

STARTL1 BUTL1

RTL1

L1

RETRIPL1

1V

TTRIP

STARTL2 BUTL2

RTL2RETRIPL2

1V

TTRIP

STARTL3 BUTL3

RTL3RETRIPL3

IL1

StartL1

IL2

StartL2

StartL3

IL3

Start3ph

L2

L3

1V

TTRIP

BACK-UPTRIP


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 171-XENPage 5 - 90

di-b-

mi-

eci-

theal

ningnc-

nec-er-

otec-

The inputs and the outputs to and from the breaker-failure protection arepresented in the signal list.

Fixed valuesTrip pulse, tp 150 ms, fixed

4 Testing The function can be disabled during the testing mode under these condi-tions:

• When the function is selected to be blocked under the testing contions, select the functions, which should be blocked under the sumenu:

TestBlockFunctions

• Set the Operation parameter to On (Operation=On) to set the ternal in to testing mode. Select the operating mode under this sub-menu:

TestTestMode

Operation

• The terminal is switched to testing mode when the logical 1 is spfied for the TEST-INPUT functional input.

Note: The function is blocked if the corresponding setting under BlockFunctions submenu remains On and the TEST-INPUT signremains active.

5The breaker-failure protection can be tested, for example at commissioor after a changed configuration, in co-operation with some other futions, and in particular with the protection and trip functions.

The trip circuits to the breakers are opened at a test switch or at contion terminals with links. A secondary injection relay test is used to opate the protection function.

Suggested testing procedure:

5.1 Preparations 1.1 Check the settings and the alternatives of the breaker-failure prtion (BFP).

The operation can be set to Stand-by (Off).


Version 1.0-00

MMI submenu:

SettingsFunctions

Group nBreaker Failure

If the settings are changed to speed up times during the tests, theymust later be reset and verified.

5.2 Check that the protection does not trip when set passive

2.1 Set operation = Off.

2.2 Apply a stationary current over the set value.

2.3 Apply a start pulse to BFP--STL1.

2.4 Verify that neither retrip nor back-up trip is achieved.

5.3 Check that the protection can be started from all start inputs

3.1 Set RetripType = No I>check, I> = 100% Ir and t1 = 50 ms.

3.2 Apply a stationary three-phase current over the set value.


3.4 Verify that retrip in phase L1 is achieved.

3.5 Apply a stationary current over the set value.

3.6 Apply a start pulse to BFP--ST3PH.

3.7 Verify that all three retrips are achieved.

5.4 Check that the retrip function works

4.1 No retrip function

4.1.1 Set RetripType = Retrip Off and I> = 100% Ir.

4.1.2 Apply a stationary three-phase current over the set value.

4.1.3 Apply a start pulse to BFP--STL1.

4.1.4 Verify that retrip in phase L1 is not achieved.

4.2 Retrip function with current check

4.2.1 Set RetripType = I> check, t1 = 100 ms and I> = 100% Ir .



4.2.4 Verify that retrip is achieved.

4.3 Retrip function without current check

4.3.1 Set RetripType = No I> check, t1 = 100 ms and I> = 100% Ir .



4.3.4 Verify that retrip is achieved.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 171-XENPage 5 - 92

s

5.5 Check that the back-up trip function works

5.1 Set RetripType = Retrip Off, t2 = 200 ms and I> = 100% Ir .

5.2 Apply a stationary three-phase current over the set value.


5.4 Verify that back-up trip is achieved.

5.6 Terminate the test and restore the equipment to normal state

After the tests, restore the equipment to the normal or desired alternativesand settings!

Check especially that the:

• Setting parameters reset as required and that a verification test imade.

• Test switches or disconnected links of the connection terminals.

• Normal indications. (If preferred, the disturbance report can be cleared.)


Version 1.0-00

6 Appendix



Fig. 9 Terminal diagrams for the function

(X80171-8)

BFP

BFP

STL1STL2STL3ST3PH

BUTRIPRETRIPL1RETRIPL2RETRIPL3

(X80171-9)

t

t1

&

t

t

t1

t

t2

&

IL1

BFP--STL1

ASDRMS

RET1

RET0

RET2

BFP--BUTRIP

BFP--RETRIPL1

BFP--RETRIPL3

BFP--RETRIPL2

IL3

BFP--STL3

IL2

BFP--STL2

BFP--ST3PH

BFP FUNCTION


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 171-XENPage 5 - 94

6.2 Signal list

6.3 Setting table

IN: DESCRIPTION:

BFP--STL1 Start breaker-failure phase L1



BFP--ST3PH Start breaker-failure three-phase

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

BFP--BUTRIP Back-up trip

BFP--RETRIPL1 Trip breaker-failure phase L1




Operation Off, On Activation of the breaker-failure protection

I> (10 - 200)% of Ir Pick-up current level

t2 (50 - 400) ms Delay timer for back-up trip

Retrip Type Retrip off, I> Check, No I> Check Select type of retrip logic

t1 (0 - 150) ms Retrip time delay


Function:

ageof the

if

gnaling

temreeore

e fordi-

temnal

ircuit of theV--

low

5Loss of power system voltage 1MRK 580 153-XEN


1 ApplicationThe tripping of a circuit breaker at prolonged loss-of-voltage is normallyused in automatic restoration systems to facilitate the system restorationfollowing a major blackout. All three-phase voltages are checked to initi-ate a trip and an alarm when all phase voltages have been low for morethan seven seconds.

2 Measuring principleThe voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-phase and three phase-to-earth voltages and compare them with the setoperating values. Fourier’s recursive filter filters the measured-voltsignals, and a separate trip counter prevents a too high overreaching measuring elements.

The logical values of the following signals will be equal to logical 1,one of the measured voltages decreases under the pre-set value:

• UCHL1< corresponds to voltages UL1L2, UL3L1, and UL1N



3 DesignThe measurement of different analog signals occurs in different siprocessors within the REx 5xx terminals. Timing and logical processoccurs in the control processor.

Figure 1 shows a simplified block diagram for the loss-of-power sysvoltage function. Digital signal processors perform a check of all thmeasured voltages and their combinations. If all of them are low for mthan seven seconds, the LOV--TRIP signal changes to a logical on150 ms. After this, the logic remains blocked until normal voltage contions are established on the line for at least three seconds.

The LOV--VTSU connectable signal can block the loss-of-power sysvoltage logic. It is normally necessary to configure it to the output sigof FUSE-VTSU, the fuse failure supervision function.

The logic also remains blocked for at least three seconds after the cbreaker has been closed so it is necessary to connect the NC contactcircuit breaker to one of the binary inputs, and configure it to the LOBC.

The logic also gets blocked if only one or two-phase voltages remainfor more than 10 seconds.

ABB Network Partner ABLoss of power system voltage

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 153-XENPage 5 - 96

Fig. 1 Loss-of power-system voltage- simplified logic diagram

4 SettingThe set value of the operating level for the loss-of power-system voltagefunction is the same as for the undervoltage protection function, inde-pendent of whether the function is built in the terminal as an option. Thesetting of the operating value occurs under the sub menu:

SettingsFunctions

Group nUnderVoltage

The voltage criteria for the loss-of-voltage supervision function must beset lower than the minimum, expected-system operating voltage. It is sug-gested to consider an additional 10% safety margin during the setting cal-culations.

(X80153-1)

UCHL2 <

t7s

&

t10s

LOV--BC

1

UCHL3 <

V

&

& t3s

1V

UCHL1 <

1V

LOV--VTSU

LOV--TRIP

t150ms

&

Block LOV=Yes

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

1V

Loss of power system voltageABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 153-XENPage 5 - 97

Version 1.0-00

5 Testing

5.1 General The operating values of the current and voltage measuring elements andcorresponding functions within the REx 5xx protection, control and mon-itoring terminals must be checked during the commissioning and duringregular maintenance tests. ABB Network Partner recommends, although itdoes not absolutely request, the use of testing equipment of type RTS 21(FREJA) for purposes of secondary injection testing.

The test equipment used should be capable of providing an independentthree-phase supply of voltages and currents to the tested terminal. It mustbe possible to separately change the values of voltages, currents, andphase angles among the measuring quantities, independent of each other,for each phase. The test voltages and currents should have a commonsource, with a very small content of higher harmonics. If the test equip-ment cannot indicate the phase angles between the measured quantities, aseparate phase angle meter is needed.

Before testing, it is necessary to connect the testing equipment accordingto the valid terminal diagram of the particular REx 5xx terminal. Pay spe-cial attention to the correct connection of the input and output current ter-minals, and to the connection of the residual current. Follow these steps totest the loss-of-power system voltage function :

1.1 Activate the operation of the function under the submenu by settingthe parameter Operation = On:

SettingsFunctions

Group nLossOfVoltage

1.2 Check if the input and output logical signals as shown in Fig. 1 areconfigured to the corresponding binary inputs and outputs of thetested terminal. If not, configure them for testing purposes. Theconfiguration of the LOV--VTSU and LOV--BC functional inputs,respectively occurs under the submenu:


LossOfVoltage

The LOV--VTSU signal should be configured to the FUSE-VTSUoutput signal under the fuse failure supervision function. The LOV--BC signal should be configured to one of the available binaryinputs of the tested terminal.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 153-XENPage 5 - 98

The LOV--TRIP output signal should be configured to the corre-sponding binary output (relay contact) under the submenu

ConfigurationSlotnn-ZZZy

Where nn is the corresponding number of the I/O module, and y isthe number of the output on the module. ZZZ indicates the type ofI/O modulethat is installed in the terminal. Connect the indicationinstrument to the relevant output terminals.

1.3 Set the operation of the fuse failure function to off mode under thesub menu:

SettingsFunctions

Group nFuseFailure

1.4 Simultaneously increase the measured three-phase voltages for atleast 10 seconds to their rated value and consider the correct phaserelations between them. The LOV--TRIP signal should not appearon the output terminal after a time period longer than seven sec-onds.

1.5 Simultaneously disconnect the voltage in all three phases and notethe LOV--TRIP signal. It should appear approximately seven sec-onds after the voltage has been switched off. Its duration should beabout 150 ms.

1.6 Simultaneously increase the measured voltages to their rated valuesand decrease them again to zero within an interval shorter thanthreeseconds. No LOV--TRIP signal should appear.

1.7 Increase the measured voltages to their rated values for at least 10seconds. Disconnect one phase and, after a time longer than 10 sec-onds, also the remaining two phases. No LOV--TRIP signal shouldappear after a time period longer than seven seconds.

1.8 Increase the measured voltages to their rated values for at least 10seconds. Connect a nominal DC voltage to the binary input LOV--BC. Simultaneously disconnect all three voltages from the terminal.No LOV--TRIP signal should appear after a time period longer thanseven seconds.

1.9 Disconnect the DC voltage from the LOV--BC binary input.

1.10 Set the operation of the fuse-failure supervision function (if builtinto the terminal) to On mode. Increase the measured voltages andall three phase currents to their rated values for at least 10 seconds.Disconnect the voltage in one phase and about a half a second later,also in the remaining two phases. No LOV--TRIP signal shouldappear.


Version 1.0-00

1.11 Increase the measured voltages to their rated values for at least 10seconds. Simultaneously decrease all three voltages to a value thatis at least 10% higher than the set operating value (settings are per-formed under the under-voltage protection function). Simultane-ously decrease in small increments all three voltages and waitbetween each increment for at least eight seconds until the LOV--TRIP signal appears on the corresponding binary output. Recordthe measured operating voltage and compare it with the set value.The result should be within the accuracy limit of +2.5% of Ur withadditional accuracy of the testing equipment used.

1.12 Disconnect the testing equipment. Do not forget to configure theterminal, if necessary, to its normal operating configuration.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 153-XENPage 5 - 100

6 Appendix



Fig. 3 Terminal diagram of the function

(X80153-2)

LOV--BC LOV--TRIPLOV--VTSU

LOSS OF POWER SYSTEM VOLTAGE

U<, t

(X80153-3)

t7s

&

t10s

1V

&

& t3s

1V

1V

t150ms

&

L1

L2

L3

U<

LOV--BC

LOV--VTSU

LOV--TRIP

LOSS OF POWER SYSTEM VOLTAGE


Version 1.0-00

6.2 Signal list

6.3 Setting table

IN: DESCRIPTION:

LOV--BC Information on open/close position of an associated circuit breaker. Usualy configured via binary input of a terminal to NC auxiliary contact of a cicuit breaker.

LOV--VTSU The input signal, which blocks the operation of a function. It should normally be configured to the FUSE-VTSU output of a fuse failure supervision function.

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

LOV--TRIP The output signal of a function. Its duration is limited to 150 ms.


Operation Off, On Operation of the function disabled (Off) or enabled(On)

U< (20-80)% of Ur Set operating value of the undervoltage measuring elements used for the “Loss of power system voltage” function. The value must be set under the “Undervoltage protection” function.”


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 153-XENPage 5 - 102


Contents Page

Introduction............................................................................................. 6-1Application.............................................................................................. 6-2

General........................................................................................... 6-2Operator place................................................................................ 6-2Selection and reservation............................................................... 6-4Automatic functions ........................................................................ 6-6Manual updating of indications....................................................... 6-7Blockings ........................................................................................ 6-7Command supervision.................................................................... 6-7Supervision of operating apparatus................................................ 6-8Synchro-check................................................................................ 6-8

Design .................................................................................................... 6-9General........................................................................................... 6-9Standard modules ........................................................................ 6-10

BAYCON.............................................................................. 6-13COMCON ............................................................................ 6-18SWICON .............................................................................. 6-20BLKCON .............................................................................. 6-23Communication between modules....................................... 6-23

Configurations ...................................................................................... 6-25General......................................................................................... 6-25Connections to other functions..................................................... 6-26

Reservation function ............................................................ 6-26Operator place selection...................................................... 6-34Station MMI.......................................................................... 6-36Remote control .................................................................... 6-39Local panel (back-up panel) ................................................ 6-40Built-in MMI.......................................................................... 6-41Interlocking .......................................................................... 6-41Synchro-check ..................................................................... 6-42Autoreclosing ....................................................................... 6-45Protections........................................................................... 6-46Pole discordance protection ................................................ 6-46Automatic functions ............................................................. 6-47Command output module .................................................... 6-47

Setting .................................................................................................. 6-50Testing.................................................................................................. 6-50


Appendix...............................................................................................6-51Terminal diagrams........................................................................6-51

BAYCONA ...........................................................................6-51BAYCONB ...........................................................................6-52BAYCONC ...........................................................................6-53BAYCOND ...........................................................................6-54BAYCONE ...........................................................................6-55BAYCONF............................................................................6-56COMCON.............................................................................6-57SWICONA............................................................................6-58SWICONB............................................................................6-59SWICONC............................................................................6-60BLKCONK............................................................................6-61BLKCONL ............................................................................6-61

.......................................................................................Signal list6-62BAYCONA ...........................................................................6-62BAYCONB ...........................................................................6-65BAYCONC ...........................................................................6-68BAYCOND ...........................................................................6-71BAYCONE ...........................................................................6-76BAYCONF............................................................................6-80COMCON.............................................................................6-85SWICONA............................................................................6-88SWICONB............................................................................6-91SWICONC............................................................................6-94BLKCONK............................................................................6-96BLKCONL ............................................................................6-97

Setting table..................................................................................6-98BAYCONx ............................................................................6-98COMCON.............................................................................6-98SWICONA............................................................................6-98SWICONB............................................................................6-99SWICONC............................................................................6-99

Introduction .........................................................................................6-101Application ..........................................................................................6-102Design.................................................................................................6-105

General.......................................................................................6-105Standard modules ......................................................................6-105

Line for double and transfer busbars, ABC_LINE..............6-106Bus coupler for double and transfer busbars, ABC_BC.....6-107Transformer bay for double busbars, AB_TRAFO.............6-107Bus-section breaker for double busbars, A1A2_BS...........6-108Bus-section disconnector for double busbars, A1A2_DC ..6-108Busbar earthing switch, BB_ES .........................................6-108Double CB bay, DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE, DB_BUS_B ........6-109


Breaker and a half diameter, BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN, BH_LINE_B .............................. 6-110Communication between modules..................................... 6-110

Configurations .................................................................................... 6-111General....................................................................................... 6-111Project-specific logic................................................................... 6-111

Single breaker arrangement, line bay................................ 6-111Signals from bypass busbar..................................... 6-111Signals from bus coupler.......................................... 6-112Parameter setting..................................................... 6-116

Single breaker arrangement, bus-coupler bay................... 6-117Signals from all feeders............................................ 6-117Signals from bus coupler.......................................... 6-119Parameter setting..................................................... 6-121

Single breaker arrangement, transformer bay ................... 6-122Signals from bus coupler.......................................... 6-122Parameter setting..................................................... 6-123

Double-breaker arrangement............................................. 6-123Breaker and a half arrangement ........................................ 6-123

Parameter setting..................................................... 6-123Bus-section breaker........................................................... 6-124

Signals from all feeders............................................ 6-124Parameter setting..................................................... 6-128

Bus-section disconnector................................................... 6-128Signals in single breaker arrangement..................... 6-128Signals in double-breaker arrangement ................... 6-132Signals in breaker and a half arrangement .............. 6-135

Bus earthing switch............................................................ 6-136Signals in single breaker arrangement..................... 6-136Signals in double-breaker arrangement ................... 6-141Signals in breaker and a half arrangement .............. 6-142

Testing................................................................................................ 6-144Appendix............................................................................................. 6-145

Terminal diagram ....................................................................... 6-145ABC_LINE ......................................................................... 6-145ABC_BC ............................................................................ 6-152AB_TRAFO........................................................................ 6-158A1A2_BS ........................................................................... 6-163A1A2_DC........................................................................... 6-166BB_ES ............................................................................... 6-169DB_BUS_A ........................................................................ 6-169DB_BUS_B ........................................................................ 6-175BH_LINE_A ....................................................................... 6-178BH_CONN ......................................................................... 6-182BH_LINE_B ....................................................................... 6-184

Signal list .................................................................................... 6-188ABC_LINE ......................................................................... 6-188


ABC_BC.............................................................................6-191AB_TRAFO ........................................................................6-194A1A2_BS ...........................................................................6-196A1A2_DC ...........................................................................6-198BB_ES ...............................................................................6-199DB_BUS_A ........................................................................6-200DB_LINE ............................................................................6-201DB_BUS_B ........................................................................6-202BH_LINE_A........................................................................6-204BH_CONN .........................................................................6-206BH_LINE_B........................................................................6-207

Application ..........................................................................................6-211Design.................................................................................................6-211

General.......................................................................................6-211Single Command function ..........................................................6-211Multiple Command function ........................................................6-213

Configuration ......................................................................................6-214Commands .........................................................................................6-215Setting.................................................................................................6-216Testing................................................................................................6-216Appendix.............................................................................................6-217

Terminal diagrams......................................................................6-217Signal list ....................................................................................6-218Setting table................................................................................6-219

Application ..........................................................................................6-221Theory of operation.............................................................................6-221Design.................................................................................................6-222

General.......................................................................................6-222Double indication ........................................................................6-222Communication between terminals ............................................6-223

Setting.................................................................................................6-224Testing................................................................................................6-224Appendix.............................................................................................6-225

Terminal diagram........................................................................6-225Signal list ....................................................................................6-226Setting table................................................................................6-227


Function:

)

6Apparatus control 1MRK 580 150-XEN


1 IntroductionThe apparatus control function is a program supervising operation of a setof high-voltage apparatuses within a bay. Apparatuses in the form ofbreakers, disconnectors, and earthing switches.

Fig. 1 gives an overview from what places the apparatus control functionreceive commands. Orders to operate an apparatus can come from the CC(Control Centre), the station MMI, or the local back-up panel (via the I/O).

When operating from the local back-up panel, the apparatus control func-tion can be bypassed. The back-up panel is hard wired to the apparatusesfor this purpose.

Fig. 1 Overview of the apparatus control functions

Features in the apparatus control function:

• Supervision of valid operator place (one operator place at a time

• Each apparatus are prepared to be included in a sequence

• Each apparatus can be interlocked

• The breakers can be connected to synchro-check

• Reservation of bays

• Supervision of operating apparatus

GW

CC

back-up panel

REC 561

I/O

breakers,

ApparatusControl

REC 561

I/O

ApparatusControl

LON

disconnectors,earthing switches

Station MMI

(X80150-1)

ABB Network Partner ABApparatus control

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 2

can

localrator

an betheinput

2 Application

2.1 General A bay can handle, for examples a power line, a transformer, a reactor, or acapacitor bank. The different high-voltage apparatuses within the baylevel can be operated directly by the operator or indirectly by sequences.The different apparatuses can also be operated automatically.

Because a high-voltage apparatus can be allocated to many functionswithin a PYRAMID Substation Automation system, the object-orientedapproach with an internal module that handles the interaction and status ofeach process object ensures consistency in the process information usedby higher-level control functions.

High-voltage apparatuses such as breakers and disconnectors are control-led and supervised by one software module each. Because the number andtype of signals connected to a breaker and a disconnector are almost thesame, the same software is used to handle these two types of apparatuses.

The software module is connected to the physical process unit in theswitchyard by a number of digital inputs and outputs. Special functionblocks were created for making bay and apparatus control programs asefficient as possible. Four types of function blocks were created to covermost of the control and supervision within the bay.

The different functions included in the apparatus control are describedbelow.

2.2 Operator place The apparatus can be controlled from three different operator places:

• Remote• Station• Local

The operator places have different priorities:

• Local (highest)• Station• Remote (lowest)

Normally, only one operator place is valid at a time. But the user define that more than one operator place is valid at the same time.

The remote operator place is assigned by the station operator. Whenoperator place is deactivated (by the local operator) previous opeplace becomes valid.

When the operator place is established, a selection of the apparatus cmade. This is possible in two different ways only, depending on select/execute principle. Either there is one (close or open) selection set, followed by simultaneous setting of the execute inputs.

Apparatus controlABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 3

Version 1.0-00

ction

the

ders

romck-up

Or if the other principle is used, setting of both selection inputs (close andopen select) simultaneously followed by the direction (close or open) onthe execute input. Any other combination causes a reset of the operation.

Because both select/execute principles are supported from the operatorpoint of view, two selection and two execute inputs are implemented.

To inform operator(s) at the station MMI that the apparatus is selectedfrom another operator place, there are indications for each apparatus fromwhich operator place (remote, station or local) it is selected. This is toinform that the apparatus is already selected; so a selection from that oper-ator place is not possible.

When a selection is made, the apparatus control goes back into idle statefor one of these reasons:

• After a successful operation• No open or close command within specified time• When reservation failed• When an interlock occurred• In blocking state• Cancelling of the operation

When the apparatus is in idle state, it is possible to make a new selefrom the valid operator place.

The operator can override the interlocking and/or the reservation fromstation MMI and from the local operator place.

Of course arbitrarily orders can be sent to the REC 561, but only orinvolved with the apparatus control are described below.

The apparatus control handles different kind of commands coming fdifferent operator places. Interprete the local operator place as the bapanel.

Remote

These commands are supported from remote operator place:

• Select, open/close• Execute, open/close• Cancel the selection

Station

These commands are supported from the station MMI:

• Select, open/close• Execute, open/close• Cancel the selection


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 4

or

canted to

en

pera-n inineer

dge-

tartses a

• Block/deblock operation (per apparatus or bay)• Override of reservation, interlocking and/or synchro-check• Selection of operator place, station and/or remote• Block/deblock updating of the position indications (per apparatus

bay)• Setting of the position indication, open/close

Local

These commands are supported from the local MMI (back-up panel):

• Select, open/close• Execute, open/close• Override, reservation and/or interlocking• Set operator place to local (switch on the back-up panel)

Automatic functions

An automatic program (placed in REC 561 or in external equipment)be connected to the apparatus control. These signals can be connecthe apparatus control:

• Signals for select (open/close)• Signals for execute (open/close)• Cancel the selection• Signal to reserve the apparatus for automatic functions. Used wh

the apparatus is included in a sequence

2.3 Selection and reservation

The purpose of the reservation and selection is to prevent double otion, either in the bay itself or in the complete station. For an operatiothe bay, the reservation part always reserves the own bay. The engcan include or exclude the part that reserves other bays.

The selection and reservation function consists of four parts:

1. Reservation of the own bay

2. Requesting reservation of other bays and handling of the acknowlement signals

3. Replying to reservation requests

4. Permitting selection of apparatuses, depending on reservations

The selection and reservation function has two ways of starting. It swhen a request select signal is set in the own bay or when it receivrequest for reservation from another bay.


Version 1.0-00

The basic part of the reservation function is the reservation of the ownbay. When the reservation is made, no acceptance of selections from otherapparatuses can occur until all selection requests and reservations are can-celled.

Reservation of the other bays can also be made. A request for reservationis sent to these other bays. All bays should respond with an acknowledge-ment that they have reserved the own bay for operations. After receptionof these signals, the reservation is considered successful and selection canproceed.

To prevent that a reservation is not reset when the reserve requestbecomes invalid, the reservation in the own bay and the acknowledgementto the other bays are cancelled when the cancel reservation timer hasexpired. The engineer should set this time to the operating time of theslowest not hand driven disconnector.

One timer supervises the reservation. If the time until a successful reser-vation is too long, the command sequence is stopped and an error messageis generated.

It is possible to ignore failing reservation of other bays, if the operatorwants to operate the apparatus. There is an override signal for this pur-pose.

Blocking of the reservation function is possible. With an override, theblocking of reservation on requests from inside the bay can be bypassed.

The reservation method is briefly explained in Fig. 2 and follows thesesteps:

1. Select close/open from the station MMI

2. Reservation signal from the bay, which is to be operated

3. Transfer of acknowledgement and actual position indications from theother bays

4. Performed selection is presented on the station MMI

5. Execution of the command from the station MMI

6. Release (cancel) of the reservation


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 6

uto-

Fig. 2 The reservation method

2.4 Automatic functions The apparatus control has inputs to be connected to automatic functions,for example, slow autoreclose. When an automatic operation programmust take control of an apparatus, it must check if this is permitted. Auto-matic operations are permitted when these conditions are fulfilled:

• Operator place is not local• The apparatus is not selected• The apparatus is not reserved• The concerned apparatus is not blocked for operation• Position indications are not blocked

The function, which operates automatically, also first determines if amatic operation is permitted.

Apparatus

Control

REC 561

1. Select

5. Execute

2. Reserve

3. Indication

2. Reserve

3. Indication

6. Release 6. Release

Apparatus

Control

REC 561

Select Reserve Execute Release

1 52 6

Apparatus

Control

REC 561

Bay 1 Bay 2 Bay 3

3

Indication

4

Selected

(X80150-2)


Version 1.0-00

e

-

on

era-

dica-le to and

epa-

sta-ing.

of a error

l-

fol-

sig-e-

.

2.5 Manual updating of indications

The position indications can be set manually. This feature is only operablefrom the station operator place.

There are two different independent functions given:

• Blocking of position updating from bay level (for all apparatus in thbay) and apparatus level (for each separate apparatus)

• Setting the drive position indication to a defined position by the operator. Mainly this is used in cases where the drive is in maintenance or is disturbed and a defined end position is required. Thisfunction should cause an automatic update blocking of the positiindication.

It can be chosen if blocked position indications cause a blocking of option.

The supervision of the positions of an apparatus is based on the intions from the program and not the process status. This is to be absimulate the positions when operating. In most cases, the processindication status are identical.

2.6 Blockings There are two bay-oriented blocking functions:

• Blocking of operation• Blocking of updating of the position indication

Both of these different blockings are applicable for each apparatus srately and for the complete bay.

Blocking of operations can be separately performed for open/close.

Commands for the above described blockings are executed from thetion MMI. Of course, arbitrary signals can be used to cause a blockBut the explicit orders come from the station MMI.

2.7 Command supervision Supervision functions stops the program from hanging in the middle command sequence. When the operation time is too long there is anindication, and the command sequence resets. Such functions are:

• Supervision of the time between the selection is made and the folowing execute command. Adjustable time.

• Supervision of the time between the request to override and the lowing selection. The same timer as above.

• Supervision of abnormal status between the select and execute nals. If select is given for one direction, it must be followed by excute for both directions. Or, if the other principle is used, both selection inputs are followed by execute for the desired direction


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 8

2.8 Supervision of operating apparatus

The control part should check the start conditions (for example, if there isa select for open when the position is open) for a valid selection, themovement itself, and correct completion. The corresponding status sig-nals are given. The operation depends on the interlocking and blockingsignals.

The supervision of the command output is made by the microcontroller onthe output board.

A timer supervises the start of the drive. If the drive does not succeed instarting within a specified time, the command sequence resets, and anerror indication is generated.

A timer supervises the movement of the drive. The maximum time can beset between the start and until the new position is reached.

When three phase indications are included, the pole-discordance functionis included.

If blockings and interlocking allow operation, the drive can be operatedwhen the starting-point is in the intermediate position.

2.9 Synchro-check Synchro-check conditions can be considered when manually closing abreaker. The closing command is released via the apparatus control, as forordinary operations with the synchro-check function excluded.

A timer supervises the synchro-check function. If there is no synchronismwithin a specified time (after a closing command is given), there is afailed synchronisation.

The REC 561 can use a built-in synchro-check function (also called inter-nal synchro-check) or use an external synchro-check or synchronisingequipment, which are separate devices outside the REC 561. Two solu-tions are supported. The explicit closing command can come from theapparatus control itself (activated by the synchro-check) or from the exter-nal synchro-check equipment (activated by the apparatus control).


Version 1.0-00

as

nds er-

ing

3 Design

3.1 General The apparatus control function contains several function blocks. Thesefunction blocks are interconnected to form a control program reflectingthe switchyard configuration.

A control program contains four main types of function blocks. The totalnumber used depends on the switchyard configuration. Beside the maintypes of function blocks the program contains simple logic like AND/ORgates.

These four main types are called BAYCON, COMCON, SWICON, andBLKCON.

BAYCON:

• BAY CONtrol, used for bay-oriented functions (one per bay) suchreservation, valid operator place, and supervision of select relays(when used).

COMCON:

• COMmand CONtrol, used for each apparatus. Supervises commacoming from the different operator places. The interface to the opator places.

SWICON:

• SWItching CONtrol, used for each apparatus. Supervises operatapparatuses. The interface to the process.

BLKCON:

• BLocK CONtrol, universal element used for different kinds of blockings. One per bay and one per apparatus.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 10

The Fig. 3 shows how the modules are combined:

Fig. 3 Overview of the interaction between the apparatus control modules

3.2 Standard modules In REC 561, several standard function blocks are available. Below the dif-ferent standard modules are described. The appendix describes input andoutput functions.

The BAYCON element consists of six variants, BAYCONA - BAY-CONF.

BAYCONA: The normal version to be used.

BAYCONB: The same as A, but used when more than eight apparatusesare included in one bay, that is, when more than one BAYCON is used perbay.

BAYCONC: Is used if external selection relays with common feedbacksignals are used.

BAYCOND: The same as C, but used when more than eight apparatusesare included in one bay, that is, when more than one BAYCON is used perbay.

BAYCONE: Is used if external selection relays with individual feedbacksignals are used.

BAYCONF: The same as E, but used when more than eight apparatusesare included in one bay, that is, when more than one BAYCON is used perbay.

COMCON consists of only one variant.

BAYCON

COMCON SWICON BLKCON

BLKCON

Apparatus Bay(X80150-3)


Version 1.0-00

The SWICON element consists of three variants, SWICONA -SWICONC.

SWICONA: Used for internal synchro-check function and three phaseposition indication. Normally used for circuit breakers.

SWICONB: Used for external synchro-check function and three phaseposition indication. Normally used for circuit breakers.

SWICONC: Used for single phase position indication. Normally used fordisconnectors and earthing switches.

The BLKCON element consists of two variants, BLKCONL and BLK-CONK.

BLKCONL: Normally used for the apparatuses.

BLKCONK: Normally used for the bays.

In the three types of REC 561, these standard modules are available:

Type 1 (basic):

Normal use:

• 1 BAYCONA or

• 2 BAYCONB or

with external selection relays with common feedback signals:

• 1 BAYCONC or

• 2 BAYCOND or

with external selection relays with individual feedback signals:

• 1 BAYCONE or

• 2 BAYCONF and either

• 2 SWICONA (internal synchro-check) or

• 2 SWICONB (external synchro-check) and

• 14 SWICONC and

• 14 COMCON and

• 14 BLKCONL and

• 1 BLKCONK


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 12


Normal use:

• 3 BAYCONA or

• 2 BAYCONA and 3 BAYCONB or



• 3 BAYCONC or

• 2 BAYCONC and 3 BAYCOND or



• 3 BAYCONE or

• 2 BAYCONE and 3 BAYCONF or

• 1 BAYCONE and 4 BAYCONF and either



• 24 SWICONC and

• 24 COMCON and

• 24 BLKCONL and

• 3 BLKCONK


Normal use:

• 12 BAYCONA or




• 12 BAYCONC or




• 12 BAYCONE or

• 11 BAYCONE and 3 BAYCONF or


Version 1.0-00

lec-e by

rs,m. Ittion,nal-mcanhe

the

ratorSta-ore

putsl. Fig.

• 6 BAYCONE and 4 BAYCONF and either



• 14 SWICONC and

• 24 COMCON and

• 24 BLKCONL and

• 12 BLKCONK

The selection of software type is made during manufacturing. The setion of standard modules within the different types of REC 561 is mada Function Selector tool included in the CAP 531 Configuration tool.

3.2.1 BAYCON BAYCON handles bay control functions for operation of circuit breakedisconnectors, or earthing switches in a Substation Automation systecontains functionality for operator place choice, selection and reservaselection relay supervision, and automatic functions. The total functioity depends on the variant of BAYCON. BAYCON handles maximueight apparatuses. When a higher number is required, BAYCON cooperate via information exchange with more BAYCON elements. Tappendix contains the terminal diagrams for the different variants withname of the input and outputs and describes these signals.

Operator place choice

The operator place has three possibilities:

• Remote for control via remote communication• Station MMI• Local for control from a local panel

With the inputs (S_R, S_S, L_L) that are obtained, the desired opeplace can be selected. It has a built-in priority with Local as highest, tion as intermediate, and Remote as lowest priority. When two or minputs are set at the same time, the higher priority prevails. The inS_R and S_S have pulse inputs, but the L_L requires a steady signa4 shows the logic:

Fig. 4 The operator place selection represented by logic

&S

R

&

REMOTE

STATION

LOCAL

S_R

S_S

L_L

&

&

(X80150-4)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 14

ans-tionion”d out-

ontusese ele-

questan

p to

If the operator place selection is used without any priority and if the out-puts REMOTE/STATION/LOCAL can be set independent of each other,the inputs REMOTE/STATION/LOCAL on COMCON can be used. Seeconfiguration example in the “Operator place selection” on page 34.

Reservation and selection

The purpose of the reservation and selection function is primarily to trfer interlocking information in a safe way and to prevent double operain a bay, switchgear, or complete substation. The “Reservation functon page 26 describes the method and the meaning of the inputs anputs of BAYCON.

Information exchange

The input EXCH_IN and output EXCH_OUT are used for informatiexchange between BAYCON elements, when more than eight apparain the same bay are used for control. The inputs and outputs of thesments are connected to each other in a loop as shown in Fig. 5.

The reservation and selection function has several bits available to reother BAYCONs to be reserved. These BAYCONs reply with acknowledge through the same information exchange.

Only BAYCONB, BAYCOND, and BAYCONF have this functionality.

Fig. 5 shows the information exchange connections for one bay with u24 apparatuses.

Fig. 5 Connections between three BAYCONs intended to control up to 24 apparatuses

BAYCON

EXCH_IN

EXCH_OUT

BAYCON

EXCH_IN

EXCH_OUT

BAYCON

EXCH_IN

EXCH_OUT(X80150-5)


Version 1.0-00

d toactsallelelaycan thendera-g of

pa-ndi-lid relay feed-thecom-

Selection relay supervision

The normal use of the command output module does not require anyexternal relays. The supervision of the command relays on the outputmodule is performed on the circuit board. The output module is normallyconnected directly to the switchyard without any extra relays.

To meet requirements of supervision of external selection relays, it is pos-sible to connect these relays and supervise them by BAYCON in twoways:

• With common feedback signals from the selection relays (BAY-CONC and BAYCOND) shown in Fig. 6

• With individual feedback signals (BAYCONE and BAYCONF) shown in Fig. 7

In the version in Fig. 6, the auxiliary contacts of the relays are wiretwo inputs SEL_CH1 and SEL_CH2. A series connection of NC contconnected to SEL_CH1 indicates that no relay is energized. A parconnection of NO contacts connected to SEL_CH2 indicates that a ris energized. BAYCON can now determine two types of errors. It indicate that there is an error most probably at the system inputs withBINPERR. BOUTERR indicates that the error is more likely to be fouat the system outputs. When an error occurs, BAYCON cancels all options. It lets the reservation go into a fail state, which causes resettinthe selection or acknowledgement.

In the other version in Fig. 7, BAYCON also checks every relay serately. It can then also determine if the wrong relay is energized. It icates this with the BRLYERR output. When BAYCON has a vareservation for a selection request and no error occurs, the selectionsupervision also sets an output to the requesting apparatus. This is aback selection (FDB_SELx), which indicates that the energizing of relay was correct. Now other software parts can give a close or open mand.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 16

Fig. 6 External-selection relays with common feedback signals

BAYCONC(D)

SEL_ACT1..SEL_ACT8SEL_CH1SEL_CH2

FDB_SEL1..

FDB_SEL8

SWICON

&

&

≥1

≥1..

SEL_OPENSEL_CLOS

EXE_OPEN

EXE_CLOS

FDB_SEL

FromotherSWICON

Apparatus 1

≥1..FromotherSWICON

FromotherSWICON

+

-

-open

close

open

closeopen

close

+

Breaker

Disconnector 1

Disconnector 2

Externalcommandrelays

Common execution relays for open/close

(X80150-6)


Version 1.0-00

Fig. 7 External-selection relays with individual feedback signals

BAYCONE(F)

SEL_ACT1..SEL_ACT8SEL_CH1SEL_CH2

FDB_SEL1..

FDB_SEL8

SWICON

&

&

≥1

≥1..

SEL_OPENSEL_CLOS

EXE_OPEN

EXE_CLOS

FDB_SEL

FromotherSWICON

Apparatus 1

≥1..FromotherSWICON

FromotherSWICON

+

-

-open

close

open

closeopen

close

+

Breaker

Disconnector 1

Disconnector 2

Externalcommandrelays

SEL_FDB1..SEL_FDB8

Common execution relays for open/close

(X80150-7)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 18

theen as to

cu-

MI or

out- itugh.

CT istion

Automatic operation check

BAYCON has an amount of information that concerns the permission forautomatic operation. This information is made available at theAU_OP_Vx outputs. Other elements can combine this information to asignal to an automatic function indicating permission for operation.

Parameters

T_CAN_RE Timeout when the reset of the reservation acknowledgement is not doneby the requesting bays, for example, because of communication error.

3.2.2 COMCON COMCON acts as an interface between the possible operator places andthe bay and the apparatus-control program. The validity of operator placesis indicated on the REMOTE, STATION and LOCAL inputs. See theconfiguration example in “Operator place selection” on page 34. Onlysignals from the operator place(s) that are valid are executed. Whchange occurs, COMCON checks validity and forwards the commandthe outputs, if they are correct.

From station level, COMCON supports two ways of command exetions:

1. From station MMI.

2. From remote gateway.

In the first way, that is normally used as standard from the station M(see item 1 in Fig. 8), only one selection input is activated, S_SEL_OS_SEL_C. COMCON sets the RQ_SEL and the concerning direction put, OPEN or CLOSE. After the SELECT input is set by BAYCON,allows the execute command S_OPEN and S_CLOSE to pass throThese execution inputs can be set at the same time or before SELEactivated. Then the EXECUTE output is also activated. The “Reservafunction” on page 26 describes the reservation method.


Version 1.0-00

Fig. 8 Example of different ways to connect the select and execute signals in COMCON

In the other way to select that is normally used as standard from remotegateway (see item 2 in Fig. 8), both selection inputs R_SEL_O andR_SEL_C are set at the same time. It sets only the RQ_SEL output. Atreception of the SELECT, it allows the execute command R_OPEN orR_CLOSE to pass through. But now only one execute commandR_OPEN or R_CLOSE can be given and COMCON passes the EXE-CUTE command with the OPEN/CLOSE directions.

The operation from a local operator place works in the same way as theboth alternatives from station MMI and remote gateway, and can conse-quently be connected in a corresponding way.

When the operation has ended or failed, COMCON receives an input indi-cation SEL_RES from SWICON. On reception of this input, it resets thestored commands and outputs.

An operation, which has already started with a selection, can be cancelled.The R/S_CANCEL inputs handle this. The output CANCEL is connectedto the CANCEL input on SWICON to reset the started selection. COM-CON also has an S/L_IR_OVR override input for station and local and anOVERRIDE output, which overrides the selection and reservation in otherprogram parts.

COMCON also supports commands for blocking of operation and com-mands for manual position updating. These signals can come from stationonly and are being sent through to the rest of the program.

Besides from the three operator places, commands can also come fromautomatic functions. These inputs are handled in the same way as the nor-mal operator place signals. For sequence switching, the apparatus can bereserved with the SEL_SEQ input.

R_SEL_OR_SEL_C

S_SEL_OS_SEL_C

R_OPENR_CLOSE

S_OPENS_CLOSE

RQ_SEL

OPENCLOSE

EXECUTE

2.

1.

SELECT

COMCON

SEL_RES

To SWICON

To BAYCONFrom SWICONFrom BAYCON

From station

From remote gateway

S_CANCEL

R_CANCEL

CANCELMMI

(X80150-8)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 20

For command supervision, COMCON has two time parameters. Thesupervision checks the time between select and execute signals andchecks the response on a request for selection including reservation ofother bays. When any of them is incorrect, COMCON indicates this withthe LO_OP_T and RES_ERR outputs. Also, the CANCEL output gives asignal (pulse) to reset the selected command in SWICON.

Parameters

T_LO_OPMaximum time between a select and the execute command coming fromthe operator. Also the maximum time between the request to override andthe following select.

T_RESAllowed time (for BAYCON) to make the reservation.

3.2.3 SWICON SWICON handles basically two functions, indication and supervision ofoperation. The indication inputs can either be three phase including thepole discordance check (SWICONA and SWICONB) or the single phase(SWICONC). The indication part checks the position indication informa-tion and gives indications (OX, CX) on the results. The POSIND_V inputis used at external evaluations of the positions or at board error.POSIND_V = True means valid positions. The result of (OX, CX) is (0, 0)(for intermediate position or when POSIND_V = False). It also includesthe function for manual position updating. The position indication can beset manually, and the updating from the process is stopped. Manual updat-ing is indicated by MA_UPD_P.

The indication part has two timer parameters. The POS_ERR is activatedmomentary at the intermediate position (1, 1) but is delayed theT_POSERR time at the position (0, 0). The POL_DISC output is activatedwhen a pole discordance is detected and the T_POL timer expires.

SWICON has inputs and outputs for selection and execution. In case theSWICON assumes the select-open or -close-before-execute principle (thatis, either OPEN or CLOSE is set), the SELx (SELECT) signal from BAY-CON energizes the selection outputs of a given direction, SEL_OPEN orSEL_CLOS. After it has received the FDB_SEL signal, it proceeds withan EXECUTE command, which activates both EXE_OPEN andEXE_CLOS.

In case of the select-before-execute-open or -close principle, SWICONreceives only a SELECT signal (that is, without the OPEN and CLOSEdirections). Now it activates both the SEL_OPEN and SEL_CLOS selec-tion outputs. After receiving a FDB_SEL feedback select, it waits for the


Version 1.0-00

EXECUTE command. This must now come together with the OPEN orCLOSE direction to activate either EXE_OPEN or EXE_CLOS. The con-nections between SWICON and the output board are shown in Fig. 9.

Fig. 9 Connection of select and execute signals to the command out-put board from SWICON

Before a selection output is activated, SWICON checks the blocking(BLK_OPEN/CLOS) and interlocking (INT_LOCK) inputs. After activa-tion of the selection outputs, the selection timer (T_SEL) starts. When thefeedback select signal does not come in time, SWICON sets theSEL_ERR output. After the execute outputs are activated, it sets theCMD_ERR if the position indication does not indicate a start in the posi-tion change, before the time T_START has elapsed.

Automatic operation is included in SWICON. It has an input for bayinformation concerning permission for automatic operation (AU_OP_V).It also has an output that indicates permission per apparatus (AU_OP_P).

For synchro-check, SWICON has two versions. One version (SWICONA)is for a synchro-check relay that checks the synchronisation conditioncontinuously and gives a signal on SY_OK if there is synchronism, seeFig. 28. This is the normal application when the internal synchro-checkfunction is used. To close the breaker, SWICON can activate theEXE_CLOS output at the activation of the SY_OK signal, when theCLOSE and EXECUTE inputs are already set and also when theSEL_CLOS output is set. The SY_RUN input is set to FIXD-ON. If not,the SY_OK input is used; it also sets to FIXD-ON.

SWICON

&

&

≥1SEL_OPENSEL_CLOS

EXE_OPEN

EXE_CLOS

FDB_SEL

Apparatus 1

SELECTED

OPEN

CLOSE

To MMI

OPENCLOSEEXECUTECANCEL

To output boardFromCOMCON

SELECTFrom BAYCON

(X80150-9)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 22

The other version (SWICONB) is used for an external synchro-check orsynchronising relay. The close command from this relay is handled out-side REC 561, see Fig. 29 and Fig. 30. At the close command from theoperator, SWICON activates the SEL_CLOS and EXE_CLOS outputs.SWICON now has two inputs SY_RUN and SY_FAIL that must haveinformation on the state of the synchronising relay. The SY_RUN signalis connected to the synchronising relay, so it is activated when the syn-chronising is in progress and waiting for its close command. This signalstops the command supervision given by the T_START time, so that theEXE_CLOS can be activated until the synchronising relay gives its com-mand to close the breaker. Also other timers in SWICONB are stoppedwhen SY_RUN is activated. If not, the SY_RUN input is used; it sets toFIXD-OFF.

The SY_FAIL must be activated if the synchro-check does not reach syn-chronism within a certain time. SY_FAIL resets the complete operationsequence.

The auto reclose function closes the breaker via an OR logic (OR with thesame cyclicity as the autoreclose function) with the normal close orderfrom SWICON. For fast autoreclose function used with external selectionrelays, the AR_SEL input is used to select the apparatus without anychecks of the selection conditions. To block the autoreclose function atthe moment the apparatus is under operation, SWICON gives a BLK_ARoutput.

Parameters

T_POSERRAllowed time for middle position.

T_POLTime parameter for pole discordance. Allowed time to have discrepancybetween the poles.

T_SELAllowed time from selection to feedback select.

T_STARTAllowed time from execute to position indication change.

T_PULSETime parameter for command output pulse length. T_PULSE = 0 gives asteady command output signal.


Version 1.0-00

3.2.4 BLKCON BLKCON is used for blocking of functions in a bay and in an apparatuscontrol program. BLKCONL (x=1) contains one blocking function andBLKCONK (x=1, 2 and 3) contains three blocking functions. The block-ing function can be controlled with both steady and pulse signals. Thefunctionality can be represented by logic as in the Fig. 10 below.

Fig. 10 The function of BLKCON represented by logic

3.2.5 Communication between modules

Fig. 11 is used as starting-point when explaining the signal flow betweenthe different function block in the apparatus-control function. The controlprogram in Fig. 11 handles one bay, which includes two apparatuses. Thedetailed connections between the modules can be seen in the type solu-tions in the “Configurations” on page 25.

Fig. 11 The signal flow between different modules in a bay

&BLK_x_1

BLK_x_2

BLK_x_3

BLKCMDx

DBLCMDx

BYPASSx

BLK_OUTx

S

R

x = 1,2, or 3

≥1

(X80150-10)

3

Apparatus 2

Bay control

BAYCON BLKCON

COMCON

COMCON

SWICON

BLKCON

SWICON

BLKCON

Apparatus 1 5

6

4

1

2

(X80150-11)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 24

-

When operating apparatus 1, the general procedure is as follow:

1. Command to set valid operator place for the complete bay. This com-mand can come from station MMI or the local back-up panel. Thecommand is given when there is need to change the operator placeonly.

2. COMCON receives commands to operate the apparatus. Only com-mands from the valid operator place are accepted. The first commandis a request to select the apparatus.

3. The BAYCON element receives the request from COMCON.

4. The BAYCON element sends a signal to other control programs toreserve their bays (if necessary). That is, no operation is allowed there.Acknowledgement signals should be received.

Other control programs can be placed in the same REC 561 or in otherREC 561s (bay-bay communication).

5. If everything is OK, the select signal is passed through to the SWICONelement and is displayed on the station MMI.

6. The program is now prepared to receive the execute command from theoperator.

7. The closing or opening command is sent to the selected apparatus.

Different kinds of errors can be detected.

Operator related errors, if too long time between:

• The select and the execute commands• A request to override (reservation and/or interlocking) and the fol

lowing select command

Apparatus-related errors, if too long time between:

• The apparatus starts to move• The apparatus reaches the new position

Other apparatus-related errors:

• Pole discordance• Command error (for example, when the apparatus is blocked or

interlocked)

Other errors:

• Reservation failure• Binary output board error


Version 1.0-00

61”er ORyclic-

and

4 Configurations

4.1 General This part describes type solutions for connection to other applicationfunctions. All functions are described in separate chapters. A standardconfiguration for a single-breaker bay with double busbars including fivehigh-voltage apparatus can be found in “Default configuration REC 51MRK 580 188-XEN. Fig. 12 shows an overview of a circuit breakmodule that includes breaker-related optional functions. Note that thegates for the open and close signals must have the same execution city as related protection function, that is, the breaker failure protectionautoreclosing functions.

.

Fig. 12 Overview of a breaker configuration including optional func-tions within REC 561

COMCON SWICONA(B)

AR

SYNx

LOV

TRIP

BI/BO

Operator

Open

Close

FUSE

command

POL_DISC

BFP

SY_OK

Interlocking

INT_LOCK

≥1

≥1

(X80150-12)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 26

us-

hownnc-

nalatus

inentele-cceptble in

Fig. 13 shows an overview of a disconnector/earthing switch module.

Fig. 13 Overview of a disconnector/earthing switch configuration

4.2 Connections to other functions

4.2.1 Reservation function The reservation function is primarily a method to transfer interlockinginformation from other bays in a safe way.

To reserve other bays, the BAYCON bay control module needs interac-tion with the bays that must be reserved. Note that only bays that must bereserved or need to reserve other bays must have these connections.

The question of which bays that should be reserved by this bay is deliveryspecific. In general there are three ways:

• Only the bays that influence the interlocking conditions must be reserved.

• The whole voltage level must be reserved. All other bays on this bbar voltage level must be blocked.

• The whole station must be reserved. All other bays in the stationmust be blocked.

The connections to reserve the apparatuses within the own bay are sin Fig. 14. The timing diagram is shown in Fig. 15. The reservation fution follows the steps below:

1. The op_SEL_O selection signal or op_SEL_C selection sig(op=operator place R/S/L) in COMCON is activated when an apparis selected for operation. COMCON sets the RQ_SEL output.

2. The signal RQ_SEL activates the RE_BAYS output via RQ_SELxBAYCON for reserving other bays. After successful acknowledgemfrom other bays, the select output (SELx) is set to inform other ments that it has reached a reserved state. In this state, it will not aother requests, which ensures that no other operations are possithis bay.

COMCON SWICONCBI/BO

OperatorOpen

Closecommand

Interlocking

INT_LOCK

(X80150-13)


Version 1.0-00

3. After acknowledgement from all bays, the select output (SELx) fromBAYCON activates the SELECT in COMCON and allows the executecommand to pass through.

4. When SELECT in SWICON is activated, SWICON with the signalsOPEN/CLOSE/EXECUTE from COMCON gives an execution signal(open/close) using the output signals SEL_OPEN/CLOS andEXE_OPEN/CLOS.

5. The signal SEL_RES is resetting the selection request (RQ_SEL) aftersuccessful operation (that is, new position reached) or command error.SEL_RES is active until SELECT is reset.

.

Fig. 14 The reservation function within the own bay

BAYCON

RQ_SEL1RQ_SEL2

SEL1SEL2

COMCON

SEL_RESSELECT RQ_SEL

S_SEL_O

SWICON

SELECT

SEL_RES

From MMI1

2

3

4

5

COMCON

SEL_RESSELECT RQ_SEL

S_SEL_O

SWICON

SELECT

SEL_RES

From MMI

ACK_F_BRE_BAYS

Acknowledgement from other baysReserveother baysANY_ACK

Reset

(X80150-14)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 28

on”

ithives

t allalso

s (inut-ent

gnallid

wl-ppli-

to fromnly

n benaryrator bay

Fig. 15 Timing diagram for the reservation function

For reservation of other bays, signal exchange between the bays is neces-sary. The signals to reserve other bays and signals to reserve the own bayfrom other bays are shown in Fig. 16, which describes the receiving partof the reservation function. Multiple Command Function blocks are usedto receive the information from other bays (see “Command functi1MRK 580 165-XEN).

The module BAYCON requests the reservation of other bays wRE_BAYS and needs to know if other bays are reserved or not. It recethe acknowledgements on the ACK_F_B inputs, which specifies thabays are reserved and on ANY_ACK that any bay is reserved. It checks the communication status (V_TX).

The logic to gather these signals from the requested number of baythis example from three bays X, Y, Z) is delivery specific and made oside the BAYCON module. This is because the BAYCON is independof the number of bays to communicate with.

When the request is coming from another bay, there is one si(RE_RQ_B) for reservation request. V_RE_RQ is the signal for varequest from any bay.

The EX_DA_UP input signal indicates that the program that acknoedges the reservation is running. This signal is not applicable in this acation and can be set to 1=FIXD-ON.

With the inputs RE_Bx (x = 1,...8) set to 1= FIXD-ON, it is possiblesuppress the reservation of other bays at a request select (RQ_SEL)a specific apparatus (1,...8) in the own bay. That is, the BAYCON oreserves the own bay.

The signal BLK_RE blocks the reservation. That is, no reservation camade from the own bay or any other bay. This can be set via a biinput from an external device to prevent operations from another opeplace at the same time. This function can be overridden in the ownwith the OVERRIDE signal, for example, from the MMI.

1. RQ_SEL (COMCON)

2. RE_BAYS (BAYCON)

ANY_ACK

ACK_F_B (from all bays)

3. SELx (BAYCON)/SELECT (COMCON)

4. OPEN/CLOSE (SWICON)

5. SEL_RES (SWICON)(X80150-15)


Version 1.0-00

Fig. 16 The receiving part of the reservation function between bays

MultCmdFunc

From bay X

OUT1OUT2

OUT3..

OUT16

X_RE_BAYS

X_ACK_T_B

X_V_TX

MultCmdFunc

From bay Y

OUT1OUT2

OUT3..

OUT16

Y_RE_BAYS

Y_ACK_T_B

Y_V_TX

MultCmdFunc

From bay Z

OUT1OUT2

OUT3..

OUT16

Z_RE_BAYSZ_ACK_T_B

Z_V_TX

&

&

&

≥1

X_RE_BAYS

Y_RE_BAYS

Z_RE_BAYS

X_V_TX

Y_V_TX

Z_V_TX

≥1

&Z_ACK_T_BY_ACK_T_BX_ACK_T_B

≥1X_RE_BAYSY_RE_BAYSZ_RE_BAYS

&X_V_TXY_V_TXZ_V_TX

BAYCON

ACK_F_BANY_ACKV_TXEX_DA_UP

RE_RQ_B

V_RE_RQ

RE_BAYS

ACK_T_B

FIXD-ON

RE_BAYS

ACK_T_B

Interlocking information



(To sending part:)

Signals used toreserve this bay:

Signals used toreserve other bays:

VALID

VALID

VALID

(X80150-16)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 30

esowl-

castd toget

estquals

nt bit can

(forhe

s are

f not

Fig. 17 shows the sending part of the reservation function. From this part,the request (RE_BAYS) from BAYCON to reserve other bays(RE_RQ_B) are sent to other bays by broadcast, that is, to all bays at thesame time. Event Function blocks are used to send the information toother bays (see “Event function” 1MRK 580 140-XEN).

The connection for acknowledgement (ACK_T_B) from BAYCON givthe result that only the bay that asked for reservation gets the acknedgement back.

Fig. 17 The sending part of the reservation function between bays

In REC561, one or more event function blocks are used to broadinformation from one REC561. One or several REC561s are configurereceive this information. Each command function block can only information from one event function block.

The first bit in the event function block is used for reserve requ(RE_RQ_B). This signal must be steady, so the reserve request etrue means reserve and equals false means release.

After this reserve request bit, there is one reserve acknowledgeme(ACK_T_Bx) for each bay that can reserve the bay. So if three baysreserve the bay, three signals are used.

ACK_T_B is reset after RE_RQ_B is reset. If the RE_RQ_B remains example due to communication error), ACK_T_B is reset. TT_CAN_RE time after V_RE_RQ is reset.

After the reserve acknowledgement signals, the apparatus positionneeded for the interlocking. This information can be of these types:

• Busbar A and busbar B is connected• Busbar A and busbar B is disconnected

This means that the position for each apparatus is not distributed, ineeded.

&

&

&

X_RE_BAYS

Y_RE_BAYS

Z_RE_BAYS

ACK_T_B

EVENT

INPUT1 (RE_RQ_B)

INPUT2 (ACK_T_B_X)

INPUT3 (ACK_T_B_Y)

INPUT4 (ACK_T_B_Z)

INPUT16

.

.

RE_BAYS


Broadcast sending to other bays

(X80150-17)


Version 1.0-00

r

the

in

and

he

t sig- do

r-e

n all erve

y that ent

-new

ution

bus

pler

If this interlocking information needs additional event blocks for sending,the first bit of all the extra blocks is a reserve acknowledgement signal toacknowledge any bays, see Fig. 18.

These steps can be defined for the complete execution:

• The command execution bay receives a request for operation, foexample by a selection from MMI.

• If the bay is reserved the command is cancelled.

• If other bays should be reserved, the reserve request bit is set inevent function block.

• The request information is broadcasted to all other bays.

• The receiving bays put the data to the command function blocks the different bays.

• The bays that must be reserved, read the request from the commfunction block, block all commands in the own bay, evaluate the apparatus positions, and set the interlocking information and thereserve acknowledgement on the event function block.

• The response is broadcasted to all other bays.

• The other bays configured to read this message put the data to tcommand function blocks.

• The command executing bay receives reserve acknowledgemennals from all the bays that were requested. If one or several baysnot respond within a predefined time, the command is cancelled.

• When all reserve acknowledgement signals are received, the intelocking condition is evaluated. If the command is allowed, it will bperformed.

• When the command is executed, the reserve request bit is reset oevent function blocks and broadcasted in the same way as the resrequest.

• The reset reserve request bit is interpreted as a release in the bawas reserved. So the bay is free, and the reserve acknowledgembit is reset on the event function block and broadcasted back.

• The command executing bay waits until all reserve acknowledgement signals are reset. When this is done, the bay is ready for a command.

Example:

Fig. 18 illustrates the above described step-by-step command execand bay-to-bay communication.

The example station is a double busbar with only two lines and onecoupler. The bus coupler also handles the busbar earthing switches.

In this station, Line 1 and Line 2 need information from the bus couand the bus coupler need information from Line 1 and Line 2.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 32

Fig. 18 illustrates the station-wide communication. The signals not usedin the figure are removed.

The bus coupler has information for two event function blocks. But for thetwo lines, one block is enough.

Besides these outputs, a valid bit is available on the command functionblocks.


Version 1.0-00

.

OUT2OUT3

OUT4..

OUT16

OUT1

MultCmdFunc

OUT2OUT3

OUT4..

OUT16

OUT1

EVENT

INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4

INPUT16

.

.

EVENT


INPUT16

.

.

RE_BAYS

ACK_T_B

RE_RQ_BACK_T_B1

≥1

ACK_T_B2

RE_BAYS

ACK_T_B

OUT2OUT3

OUT4..

OUT16

OUT1

OUT2OUT3

OUT4..

OUT16

OUT1

EVENT


INPUT16

.

.

RE_BAYS

ACK_T_B1

RE_RQ_BACK_T_B

1 2 3To next page

Bus coupler bay

Line bay 1

& ACK_T_B1

= Interlocking information

MultCmdFunc

MultCmdFunc

MultCmdFunc


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 34

Fig. 18 The principle of the communication between bays

4.2.2 Operator place selection

The connections to the operator place selectors can be done as shown inFig. 19, where the remote/station selection is performed from the stationMMI, and the selection for the local control is performed from a switch ona local panel. It has a built-in priority with Local as highest, Station asintermediate, and Remote as lowest priority. When two or more inputs areset at the same time, the higher priority prevails. The S_R and S_S inputshave pulse inputs. But the L_L requires a steady signal.

Fig. 19 Connection of operator place selection

OUT2OUT3

OUT4..

OUT16

OUT1

OUT2OUT3

OUT4..

OUT16

OUT1

EVENT


INPUT16

.

.

RE_BAYS

ACK_T_B2

RE_RQ_BACK_T_B

Line bay 2

& ACK_T_B2

1 2 3From previous page:

MultCmdFunc

MultCmdFunc

(X80150-18)

MultCmdFunc

OUT13OUT14

BAYCON

S_RS_S

STATION

L_L

REMOTE

LOCAL

Bay commandsfrom stationMMI

Defined as pulseoutputs

Fromlocalswitch

STATIONREMOTE

LOCAL

COMCON

To other COMCONin the bay

(X80150-19)


Version 1.0-00

Some applications require that the operator place selection must be per-formed without any priority, that is, the desired operator places must beable to be set independent of each other.

Fig. 20 shows an application example, where the operator from a switchon a local panel can select either the position Off, Local, or Remote/Sta-tion/Local. If Off is selected, it is not possible to operate from any place.If Local is selected, it is possible to operate only from the local panel.

If the switch is set to position Remote/Station/Local, it is always possibleto operate from the local panel, and also from Remote or Station - inde-pendent of each other. In this example, it is possible to operate fromremote, station, and local operator places, if the position Remote is set inthe station MMI. If the position Station is set in the station MMI, it is pos-sible to operate only from the station MMI and from the local panel.

The pulse timer in the figure below sets automatically the operator placeselection to position Remote at start up of the terminal, if the switch on thelocal panel is set to position Remote/Station/Local. That means, in thisexample, that operation from all three operator places is possible.

Fig. 20 Application example of operator place selection without priority

&S

R

&

&

MultCmdFunc

OUT13

OUT14


Defined as pulseoutputs

&S

R

&

&

Remote

Station

EVENT

INPUT13INPUT14

STATION

REMOTE

LOCAL

COMCON

INPUT15

≥1

To other COMCONin the bay

LOCALREM/STA/LOC

OFF

(X80150-20)

≥1

≥1


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 36

4.2.3 Station MMI The connection to the station MMI is made via EVENT-block and MultC-mdFunc-block in a standardized way. Fig. 21 shows the command con-nections between the command blocks and the apparatus control modules.Fig. 21 also shows how the BLKCON modules are used.

Fig. 21 Command connections between the station MMI and apparatus control modules

Fig. 22 shows the signals from the apparatus control modules for oneapparatus that will be sent to the station MMI. The event input 7 can beconnected to the tripping logic to indicate on the station MMI that the cir-cuit breaker was opened due to a trip from the protection. The inputs 3 and

MultCmdFunc

OUT1OUT2OUT3OUT4OUT5OUT6

BAYCON

S_RS_S

&

STATION

&

&

&

BLK_OP

DBLK_OP

BLK_UPD

DBLK_UPD

BLKCMD1

DBLCMD1

BLKCMD2

DBLCMD2

BLK_OUT1

BLK_OUT2

BLKCONK

SWICON

Apparatus1

BLKCONL

Apparatus1

BLK_1_1BLK_1_2BLK_1_3

BLK_OUT1

MA_UPD_P

UPD_BLK

BLK_OPENBLK_CLOS

I/O error

MultCmdFunc COMCON

S_BLK_OPS_DBL_OPS_BL_UPDS_PR_UPD

S_MA_U_OS_MA_U_CS_CANCELS_SEL_OS_SEL_CS_OPENS_CLOSES_IR_OVR

Apparatus1Apparatus commands


from station MMI

BLKCMD1DBLCMD1

BLK_OPDBL_OP

OUT7OUT8OUT9

OUT10

Defined as pulse outputs


OUT11OUT12OUT13OUT14OUT15OUT16

OUT1OUT2OUT3OUT4OUT5OUT6OUT7OUT8OUT9

OUT10OUT11OUT12

OUT13OUT14OUT15OUT16

(X80150-21)


Version 1.0-00

4 are used only for event handling of the positions for one pole of the cir-cuit breaker. For event handling of all three poles separately, an additionalEvent Function block is needed.

Fig. 22 Event connections between the station MMI and apparatus control modules for one apparatus

SWICON

CXOX

MA_UPD_PSEL_OPENSEL_CLOSSEL_ERR

CMD_ERRPOS_ERR

POL_DISC

COMCON

OVERRIDELO_OP_T

BLKCONL

BLK_OUT1

≥1

Apparatus 1

Interlocking

ITL &


EVENT

POS_CL

POS_OPFrominputboard

RES_ERR

Interlocked

To station MMI

Tripped

(X80150-22)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 38

Fig. 23 shows bay-related signals that can be presented on the stationMMI.

Fig. 23 Event connections between station MMI and bay-related sig-nals


EVENT

To station MMI

BLK_OUT1BLK_OUT2

BAYCON

STATIONREMOTE

LOCALACK_T_B

BLKCONK

Deliveryspecificlogic

Bay connected to busbar

FIXD-OFF

Abnormal status for bay

Control blocked for bay

Update blocked for bay

Bay reserved

Apparatus 1

BLKCONL

BLK_OUT1

SWICON

MA_UPD_PPOS_ERR

POL_DISC

≥1

COMCON

OVERRIDE

.

.

.

Fromotherapp. inthe bay

(X80150-23)


Version 1.0-00

4.2.4 Remote control The command signals from the remote-control gateway are transferred toREC 561 via Single Command function blocks and can be arranged in away shown in Fig. 24. All or some of the events defined for the stationMMI can also be sent to the remote control gateway.

Fig. 24 Control commands from remote-control gateway

SingleCmdFunc

R_SEL_OR_SEL_C

R_OPENR_CLOSE

COMCON

R_CANCEL

Apparatus 1

To other apparatusin the bay

From remote-control gateway

.

.

.

.



OUT10OUT11OUT12OUT13OUT14OUT15OUT16

(X80150-24)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 40

4.2.5 Local panel (back-up panel)

The connection of an external local panel to the apparatus control mod-ules is done via binary inputs. Fig. 25 shows one example of a solution.This solution of local control considers the interlocking function. Thepanel can also be used as an back-up panel, but the outputs from the panelare then connected directly to the high-voltage apparatuses. The positionindications are normally directly connected to the panel to get independ-ent information about the apparatus positions. At use as back-up panel,the select and execute inputs into the control terminal must be blocked, forexample, with AND gates with the condition no back-up.

Fig. 25 Connection of an external local panel via binary input board to apparatus control modules

BAYCON

S_RS_S

L_LLOCAL

Station/RemoteLocal COMCON

Apparatus 1

L_SEL_O

L_SEL_C

L_OPEN

L_CLOSE

LOCAL

Local panel

To other

apparatusin the bay

Inputboard

From station MMI

Selection app. 1

Common open

Common close

(X80150-25)


Version 1.0-00

para-nter-al

aree 26

4.2.6 Built-in MMI The high-voltage apparatus can be operated from the built-in MMI via theSingleCmdFunc block. The SingleCmdFunc block, which must be acces-sible from the built-in MMI, can be defined from the SMS. The naming ofthe signals in the SingleCmdFunc block can be defined from the SMS andthe CAP 531 configuration tool. Fig. 26 shows an example how to con-nect a SingleCmdFunc block to the apparatus control modules. The com-mand dialogue from the built-in MMI is performed in two steps, see“Command function” 1MRK 580 165-XEN.

Fig. 26 Connections between a SingleCmdFunc-block controlled from the built-in MMI and the apparatus control modules

4.2.7 Interlocking Fig. 27 shows the connection between an interlocking module and aptus control modules. The input is activated when the apparatus is ilocked. The interlocking information within the REC 561 control terminare taken from the binary input boards. Information from other baystransferred over the station bus. The “Reservation function” on pagdescribes the method for transferring these data.

Fig. 27 Connection of an interlocking module to apparatus control modules

COMCON

Apparatus 1

L_SEL_OL_SEL_C

L_OPEN

L_CLOSE

LOCAL

SingleCmdFunc

OUT1OUT2OUT3OUT4

OUT16

PulseINPUT OUT

.

.

≥1

PulseINPUT OUT

Pulse length = 1 s

Apparatus 1 open

Apparatus 1 close


LOCALFrom BAYCON

≥1

(X80150-26)

COMCON

OVERRIDE

Interlocking

ITL &Interlocked

SWICON

INT_LOCK

.

.

.

Signals frombinary inputboards andfrom otherbays

(X80150-27)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 42

4.2.8 Synchro-check Connections between the apparatus control modules and the synchro-check function can be made either for the built-in synchro-check moduleor for an external synchro-check relay, for example, type RASC. Externalsynchronising equipment can also be connected to the apparatus controlmodules. Fig. 28 shows the connections for a synchro-check function thatchecks the synchronisation condition continuously and gives a signal onSY_OK if there is synchronism. This is the normal application when thebuilt-in synchro-check function is used. To close the breaker, SWICONcan activate the EXE_CLOS output at the activation of the SY_OK signalwhen the CLOSE and EXECUTE inputs are already set and also when theSEL_CLOS output is set. The input SY_RUN is set to FIXD-ON. Fig. 28also shows an example of how to bypass the synchro-check function by acommand from the station MMI.

Fig. 28 Connections between the built-in synchro-check module and the apparatus control modules

Fig. 29, Fig. 30, and Fig. 31, show three alternatives of configurations forthe SWICONB module when an external synchro-check or synchronisingrelay is used. For alternative 1 in Fig. 29, the synchronising starts whenthe line and busbar voltages are connected to the synchro-check relay. Foralternative 2 in Fig. 30, the synchro-check relay continuously checks thesynchronisation condition. Alternative 2 can also use the solution in Fig.28 if the close command from the synchro-check relay is connected via abinary input to the SY_OK input on SWICONA. Alternative 3 in Fig. 31shows the connection to an external synchronising equipment, for exam-ple, type RES 010.

SWICONA

SY_RUNSY_FAILSY_OK

&

SEL_CLOSEXE_CLOS

Timer

ONINPUT FIXD_ON

SynchroCheck

MANOK

To&

COMCON

CLOSEEXECUTE

CLOSEEXECUTE

MultCmdFunc

OUT14 S

R ≥1

outputboard

Bypasssynch-check To Event

function block

(X80150-28)


Version 1.0-00

For the external synchro-check relay, the close command is handled out-side REC 561. At the close command from the operator, SWICONB acti-vates the SEL_CLOS and EXE_CLOS outputs. SWICONB now has twoinputs SY_RUN and SY_FAIL, which must have information on the stateof the synchro-check relay. The SY_RUN signal is connected from thesynchro-check relay, so it is activated when the synchro-check is inprogress and waiting for its close command. This signal stops the com-mand supervision, so that the EXE_CLOS can be activated until the syn-chro-check relay gives its command to close the breaker.

Fig. 29 Connections between external synchro-check equipment and the apparatus control modules, alternative 1

SWICONB

SY_RUN

SY_FAIL

&SEL_CLOSEXE_CLOS

&U1

U2 CLOSE

+

+ -

External synchro-checkor synchronising equipment

CBclosecoil

TimerINPUT

ON

BI/BO

SYNCH

COMCON

CLOSEEXECUTE

CLOSEEXECUTE

&

(X80150-29)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 44

Fig. 30 Connections between external synchro-check equipment and the apparatus control modules, alternative 2

SWICONB

SY_RUN

SY_FAIL

&SEL_CLOSEXE_CLOS

&

CLOSE

+

-

External synchro-check equipment

CBclosecoil

TimerINPUT

ON

BI/BO

SYNCH

COMCON

CLOSEEXECUTE

CLOSEEXECUTE

&

(X80150-30)


Version 1.0-00

Fig. 31 Connections between external synchronising equipment and the apparatus control modules, alternative 3

In Fig. 28 to Fig. 31, the SY_FAIL input supervises the synchronisationtime. If the relay does not reach synchronism within a certain time,SY_FAIL is activated and resets the complete operation sequence.

4.2.9 Autoreclosing Fig. 32 shows the interaction between the autoreclosing (AR) module andthe apparatus control modules. The OR gate for the close signal must havethe same execution cyclicity as the autoreclosing module. The signalBLK_AR from SWICON is used to block the autoreclose function at themoment the circuit breaker is under operation.

Fig. 32 Connections between autoreclosing (AR) module and appara-tus control modules

SWICONB

SY_RUN

SY_FAIL

&SEL_CLOSEXE_CLOS

CLOSE

+ -

External synchronising equipment

CBclosecoil

TimerINPUT

ON

BI/BO

SYNCH

COMCON

CLOSEEXECUTE

CLOSEEXECUTE

&

IN

FAULT

≥1

PROGRESS

START

(X80150-31)

SWICONA(B)

&SEL_CLOSEXE_CLOS ≥1

AR

INHIBIT

CLOSECB

BLK_AR

CLOSE

Circuit Breaker

To output board

(AR_SEL)

(X80150-32)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 46

13,anycti-on-

ara-les

If a the

anualate

oncon-tput” onfaultal,pen

If the autoreclose function is used with external selection relays accordingto the principles described in Fig. 6 and Fig. 7 in “BAYCON” on pagethe input AR_SEL in SWICON is used to select the breaker without condition checks. When AR_SEL is set, the output SEL_CLOS is avated directly. The close signal from the auto-reclose function is cnected via the OR gate for close commands in a normal way.

4.2.10Protections The protection functions are normally running independent of the apptus control modules. The trip signals from the protection moduincluded in REC 561 are connected via the tripping logic function. three-phase circuit breaker is used, the GTRIP general trip signal fromtripping logic can be connected to the same open output as for the mcontrol from SWICON via an OR gate (see Fig. 33). Here, the OR gmust have the same execution cyclicity as the tripping logic module.

Fig. 33 Connections between the tripping logic and the apparatus con-trol modules

4.2.11Pole discordance protection

The pole discordance function included in the SWICONA(B) is basedchecking the positions of the auxiliary contacts on the breaker. The nection of the trip signal is made according to Fig. 34 and to the ouboard in the same way as for other protections (See “Protectionspage 46.). The T_POL time delay to trip is set to 2 seconds as a devalue. Since only one tripping logic is available in the control terminthe POL_DISC output is connected directly to the OR gate for the ocommand, if more than one circuit breaker is included in the terminal.

Fig. 34 Connection of the pole discordance trip from SWICON via the tripping logic

SWICON

&SEL_OPENEXE_OPEN ≥1 OPEN

Circuit breaker

To output board

GTRIP

Trip_Logic

(X80150-33)

SWICON

&SEL_OPENEXE_OPEN ≥1 OPEN

Circuit Breaker

To output board

GTRIP

Trip_Logic

POL_DISC

EXTTRIP

T_POL2

(X80150-34)


Version 1.0-00

4.2.12Automatic functions Using the same methods as for ordinary commands that come from differ-ent operator places, there are inputs (select/execute/cancel) to be con-nected from other application programs in the form of automaticfunctions. These programs can be located in the same REC 561, inanother terminal, or in a station computer.

One usage for automatic programs is when the apparatuses are included ina sequence, for example, a busbar transfer.

Fig. 35 shows the signals connected to the COMCON module.

Fig. 35 Connections to automatic functions

4.2.13Command output module

The command outputs from the apparatus control modules can be con-nected to the output module in different ways depending on functionality.The output module has supervised outputs. That is, the output relays arecontinuously supervised in a way that an unwanted activation is detected,which stops the continuation of the operation. This is performed by usingthe ERROR signal connected to BLKCONL for blocking the command.To get a secure command, two contacts are connected in serial. The fol-

COMCON

AU_SEL_OAU_SEL_CAU_OPENAU_CLOSEAU_CANCSEL_SEQ

For example, outputs from

AU_MODESEQ_STA

.

.

.

To sequence

program or/andthe station MMI

a sequence program

(X80150-35)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 48

lowing figures show examples of different configurations. The terminaldiagram for the binary output module shows detailed information aboutthe terminal numbering.

Fig. 36 Single pole command outputs with supervision

Fig. 36 and Fig. 37 are the standard configurations during operation ofhigh-voltage apparatuses. The double pole command is normally used toavoid an unwanted operation of the apparatuses, due to an earth fault inthe switchyard. The output module is very flexible. So users can mostlyfind solutions for their own requirements.

Fig. 37 Double pole command outputs with supervision

I/O-module

BO1BO2BO3BO4

CLOSE& BO.01

BO.02

BinaryOutputModule

XA1

2

3

Closecoil

SwitchyardApplication software

FromSWI-CON

+

-

.

.

.BO24

OPEN&

BO.03

BO.04

4

5

6

Opencoil

+

-

ERROR

To BLKCONL

(X80150-36)

I/O-module

BO1BO2BO3BO4

+-

CLOSE

OPEN

&

&

BO.01

BO.03

BO.04

BO.02

BinaryOutputModule

XA1

4

2

5

6

3

Closecoil

Opencoil

SwitchyardApplication software

FromSWI-CON

.

.

.BO24

ERROR

To BLKCONL

(X80150-37)


Version 1.0-00

Fig. 38 shows the configuration of single outputs used for purposes otherthan operating high-voltage apparatuses. Here the ERROR signal is con-nected to an event function block for alarming or as a condition foranother application. The security is limited compared to the solutionsabove - with two contacts in serial.

Fig. 38 Single output commands

I/O-module

BO1BO2BO3BO4

BO.01

BO.02

BinaryOutputModule

XA1

2

3

Switchyard/Application software

+

-

.

.

.BO24

-

On/OffOn/Off

control room

ERROR

For alarming

(X80150-38)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 50

5 SettingThe setting parameters are accessible through the CAP 531 configurationtool. The parameters for the apparatus control modules consist only oftime settings.

The appendix shows the parameters and their setting ranges.

6 TestingThe apparatus control function consists of four types of function blocks,which are connected in a delivery-specific way between bays and to thestation level. For that reason, test the total function in a system, that is,either in a complete delivery system as an acceptance test (FAT/SAT) oras parts of that system.


Version 1.0-00

7 Appendix


7.1.1 BAYCONA

Fig. 39 Simplified terminal diagram of BAYCONA

BAYCONAS_RS_S

RQ_SEL2RQ_SEL3RQ_SEL4RQ_SEL5RQ_SEL6RQ_SEL7RQ_SEL8BLK_REOVERRIDERE_B1RE_B2RE_B3RE_B4RE_B5RE_B6RE_B7

REMOTESTATION

LOCALSEL1SEL2SEL3SEL4

RE_B8ACK_F_BANY_ACKV_TXEX_DA_UPRE_RQ_BV_RE_RQT_CAN_RE

SEL5SEL6SEL7SEL8

RERE_BAYSACK_T_B

AU_OP_V1AU_OP_V2AU_OP_V3AU_OP_V4AU_OP_V5AU_OP_V6AU_OP_V7AU_OP_V8

RQ_SEL1L_L

(X80150-39)

BAxx


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 52

7.1.2 BAYCONB

Fig. 40 Simplified terminal diagram of BAYCONB

BAYCONBS_RS_S


REMOTESTATION

LOCAL

SEL1SEL2SEL3SEL4

RE_B8ACK_F_BANY_ACKV_TXEX_DA_UPRE_RQ_BV_RE_RQT_CAN_RE

SEL5SEL6SEL7SEL8

RERE_BAYSACK_T_B


RQ_SEL1

L_LEXCH_IN EXCH_OUT

(x80150-40)

BBxx


Version 1.0-00

7.1.3 BAYCONC

Fig. 41 Simplified terminal diagram of BAYCONC

BAYCONCS_RS_S


REMOTESTATION


RE_B8ACK_F_BANY_ACKV_TXEX_DA_UPRE_RQ_BV_RE_RQ

T_CAN_RE

SEL5SEL6SEL7SEL8

RERE_BAYSACK_T_B


RQ_SEL1L_L

FDB_SEL1FDB_SEL2FDB_SEL3FDB_SEL4FDB_SEL5FDB_SEL6FDB_SEL7FDB_SEL8

BINPERRBOUTERR

SEL_ACT1SEL_ACT2SEL_ACT3SEL_ACT4SEL_ACT5SEL_ACT6SEL_ACT7SEL_ACT8SEL_CH1SEL_CH2INPBOERROUTBOERR

(X80150-41)

BCxx


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 54

7.1.4 BAYCOND

Fig. 42 Simplified terminal diagram of BAYCOND

BAYCONDS_RS_S


REMOTESTATION

LOCAL

SEL1SEL2SEL3SEL4


T_CAN_RE

SEL5SEL6SEL7SEL8

RERE_BAYSACK_T_B


RQ_SEL1

L_L


BINPERRBOUTERR

SEL_ACT1SEL_ACT2SEL_ACT3SEL_ACT4SEL_ACT5SEL_ACT6SEL_ACT7SEL_ACT8SEL_CH1SEL_CH2INPBOERROUTBOERR

EXCH_IN EXCH_OUT

(X80150-42)

BDxx


Version 1.0-00

7.1.5 BAYCONE

Fig. 43 Simplified terminal diagram of BAYCONE

BAYCONES_RS_S


REMOTESTATION



T_CAN_RE

SEL5SEL6SEL7SEL8

RERE_BAYSACK_T_B


RQ_SEL1L_L


BINPERRBOUTERR

SEL_ACT1SEL_ACT2SEL_ACT3SEL_ACT4SEL_ACT5SEL_ACT6SEL_ACT7SEL_ACT8SEL_CH1SEL_CH2INPBOERROUTBOERRSEL_FDB1SEL_FDB2SEL_FDB3SEL_FDB4SEL_FDB5SEL_FDB6SEL_FDB7SEL_FDB8

BRLYERR

(X80150-43)

BExx


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 56

7.1.6 BAYCONF

Fig. 44 Simplified terminal diagram of BAYCONF

BAYCONFS_RS_S


REMOTESTATION

LOCAL

SEL1SEL2SEL3SEL4


T_CAN_RE

SEL5SEL6SEL7SEL8

RERE_BAYSACK_T_B


RQ_SEL1

L_L


BINPERRBOUTERR

SEL_ACT1SEL_ACT2SEL_ACT3SEL_ACT4SEL_ACT5SEL_ACT6SEL_ACT7SEL_ACT8SEL_CH1SEL_CH2INPBOERROUTBOERRSEL_FDB1SEL_FDB2SEL_FDB3SEL_FDB4SEL_FDB5SEL_FDB6SEL_FDB7SEL_FDB8

BRLYERR

EXCH_IN EXCH_OUT

(X80150-44)

BFxx


Version 1.0-00

7.1.7 COMCON

Fig. 45 Simplified terminal diagram of COMCON

COMCONSEL_RESSELECT

R_OPENR_CLOSER_CANCELREMOTES_SEL_OS_SEL_CS_OPENS_CLOSES_CANCELS_BLK_OPS_DBL_OPS_IR_OVRS_BL_UPDS_PR_UPDS_MA_U_OS_MA_U_C

RQ_SELOPEN

CLOSEEXECUTE

CANCELOVERRIDE

LO_OP_T

STATIONL_SEL_OL_SEL_CL_OPENL_CLOSEL_IR_OVRLOCAL

RES_ERRR_OPS_OP

BLK_OPDBL_OP

L_OPBLK_UPD

R_SEL_CR_SEL_O

PROC_UPDMA_UPD_OMA_UPD_CAU_MODE

SEQ_STA

AU_SEL_OAU_SEL_CAU_OPENAU_CLOSEAU_CANCSEL_SEQT_LO_OPT_RES (X80150-45)

COxx


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 58

7.1.8 SWICONA

Fig. 46 Simplified terminal diagram of SWICONA

SWICONA

POSIND_VPOS_L1_OPOS_L2_OPOS_L3_OPOS_L1_CPOS_L2_CPOS_L3_CBLK_UPDPROC_UPDMA_UPD_OMA_UPD_CUPD_BLKSELECTFDB_SELOPENCLOSEAU_OP_VEXECUTECANCELBLK_OPENBLK_CLOSINT_LOCKSY_RUNSY_FAIL

AR_SELT_POSERRT_POLT_SELT_STARTT_PULSE

OXCX

POS_ERRPOL_DISC

MA_UPD_PSEL_OPENSEL_CLOSEXE_OPENEXE_CLOS

SEL_RESSEL_ERR

CMD_ERRAU_OP_PBLK_AR

SY_OK

(X80150-46)

SAxx


Version 1.0-00

7.1.9 SWICONB

Fig. 47 Simplified terminal diagram of SWICONB

SWICONB

POSIND_VPOS_L1_OPOS_L2_OPOS_L3_OPOS_L1_CPOS_L2_CPOS_L3_CBLK_UPDPROC_UPDMA_UPD_OMA_UPD_CUPD_BLKSELECTFDB_SELOPENCLOSEAU_OP_VEXECUTECANCELBLK_OPENBLK_CLOSINT_LOCKSY_RUNSY_FAILAR_SELT_POSERRT_POLT_SELT_STARTT_PULSE

OXCX

POS_ERRPOL_DISC

MA_UPD_PSEL_OPENSEL_CLOSEXE_OPENEXE_CLOS

SEL_RESSEL_ERR

CMD_ERRAU_OP_PBLK_AR

(X80150-47)

SBxx


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 60

7.1.10SWICONC

Fig. 48 Simplified terminal diagram of SWICONC

SWICONC

POSIND_VPOS_OPOS_CBLK_UPDPROC_UPDMA_UPD_OMA_UPD_CUPD_BLKSELECTFDB_SELOPENCLOSEEXECUTECANCELBLK_OPENBLK_CLOSINT_LOCKAU_OP_VT_POSERRT_PULSET_SELT_START

OXCX

POS_ERRMA_UPD_PSEL_OPENSEL_CLOSEXE_OPENEXE_CLOS

SEL_RESSEL_ERR

CMD_ERRAU_OP_P

(X80150-48)

SCxx


Version 1.0-00

7.1.11BLKCONK

Fig. 49 Simplified terminal diagram of BLKCONK

7.1.12BLKCONL

Fig. 50 Simplified terminal diagram of BLKCONL

BLKCONK

BLK_1_1BLK_1_2BLK_1_3BLKCMD1DBLCMD1BYPASS1BLK_2_1BLK_2_2BLK_2_3BLK_CMD2BLK_CMD2BYPASS2BLK_3_1BLK_3_2BLK_3_3BLKCMD3DBLCMD3BYPASS3

BLK_OUT1BLK_OUT2BLK_OUT3

(X80150-49)

BKxx

BLKCONL

BLK_1_1BLK_1_2BLK_1_3BLKCMD1DBLCMD1BYPASS1

BLK_OUT1

(X80150-50)

BLxx


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 62

7.2 Signal list

7.2.1 BAYCONATable 1: Input signals for BAYCONA

IN: DESCRIPTION:

BAxx-S_R Input to change operator place to Remote (pulse input)

BAxx-S_S Input to change operator place to Station (pulse input)

BAxx-L_L Input to change operator place to Local

BAxx-RQ_SEL1 Request for selection and reservation of apparatus 1








BAxx-BLK_RE Input for blocking all reservations

BAxx-OVERRIDE Input for overriding the reservation function including the blocking by BLK_RE

BAxx-RE_B1 Reservation of the own bay only (i.e. not other bays) at selection from apparatus 1








BAxx-ACK_F_B Input for acknowledging the reservation of other bays


Version 1.0-00

BAxx-ANY_ACK Input indicating that at least one acknowl-edge is still active

BAxx-V_TX Indication for valid transmission of the reser-vation signals

BAxx-EX_DA_UP Input is 1 if the program that acknowledged the reservation is running

BAxx-RE_RQ_B Request for reservation from other bays

BAxx-V_RE_RQ Input is 1 for valid request of reservation from any bay

Table 2: Output signals for BAYCONA

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

BAxx-REMOTE Indication of Remote operator place

BAxx-STATION Indication of Station operator place

BAxx-LOCAL Indication of Local operator place

BAxx-SEL1 Apparatus 1 is selected after reservation acknowledgement from other bays








BAxx-RE A reservation has been made in this bay

BAxx-RE_BAYS Request for reservation of other bays

BAxx-ACK_T_B Acknowledgement to other bays that this bay is reserved

BAxx-AU_OP_V1 Automatic operation permitted, i.e. the oper-ator place selector is not in Local position, the apparatus is not reserved or not manual selected for apparatus 1


Table 1: Input signals for BAYCONA

IN: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 64







Table 2: Output signals for BAYCONA

OUT: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

7.2.2 BAYCONB

Table 3: Input signals for BAYCONB

IN: DESCRIPTION:

BBxx-S_R Input to change operator place to Remote (pulse input)

BBxx-S_S Input to change operator place to Station (pulse input)

BBxx-L_L Input to change operator place to Local

BBxx-EXCH_IN Input for information exchange with other BAYCON:s in bays with more than 8 appa-ratuses

BBxx-RQ_SEL1 Request for selection and reservation of apparatus 1








BBxx-BLK_RE Input for blocking all reservations

BBxx-OVERRIDE Input for overriding the reservation function including the blocking by BLK_RE

BBxx-RE_B1 Reservation of the own bay only (i.e. not other bays) at selection from apparatus 1









Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 66

BBxx-ACK_F_B Input for acknowledging the reservation of other bays

BBxx-ANY_ACK Input indicating that at least one acknowl-edge is still active

BBxx-V_TX Indication for valid transmission of the reser-vation signals

BBxx-EX_DA_UP Input is 1 if the program that acknowledged the reservation is running

BBxx-RE_RQ_B Request for reservation from other bays

BBxx-V_RE_RQ Input is 1 for valid request of reservation from any bay

Table 4: Output signals for BAYCONB

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

BBxx-REMOTE Indication of Remote operator place

BBxx-STATION Indication of Station operator place

BBxx-LOCAL Indication of Local operator place

BBxx-EXCH_OUT Output for information exchange with other BAYCON:s in bays with more than 8 appa-ratuses

BBxx-SEL1 Apparatus 1 is selected after reservation acknowledgement from other bays








BBxx-RE A reservation has been made in this bay

BBxx-RE_BAYS Request for reservation of other bays

BBxx-ACK_T_B Acknowledgement to other bays that this bay is reserved

Table 3: Input signals for BAYCONB

IN: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

BBxx-AU_OP_V1 Automatic operation permitted, i.e. the oper-ator place selector is not in Local position, the apparatus is not reserved or not manual selected for apparatus 1








Table 4: Output signals for BAYCONB

OUT: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 68

7.2.3 BAYCONC

Table 5: Input signals for BAYCONC

IN: DESCRIPTION:

BCxx-S_R Input to change operator place to Remote (pulse input)

BCxx-S_S Input to change operator place to Station (pulse input)

BCxx-L_L Input to change operator place to Local

BCxx-RQ_SEL1 Request for selection and reservation of apparatus 1








BCxx-BLK_RE Input for blocking all reservations

BCxx-OVERRIDE Input for overriding the reservation function including the blocking by BLK_RE

BCxx-RE_B1 Reservation of the own bay only (i.e. not other bays) at selection from apparatus 1








BCxx-ACK_F_B Input for acknowledging the reservation of other bays

BCxx-ANY_ACK Input indicating that at least one acknowl-edge is still active


Version 1.0-00

BCxx-V_TX Indication for valid transmission of the reser-vation signals

BCxx-EX_DA_UP Input is 1 if the program that acknowledged the reservation is running

BCxx-RE_RQ_B Request for reservation from other bays

BCxx-V_RE_RQ Input is 1 for valid request of reservation from any bay

BCxx-SEL_ACT1 Selection of apparatus 1 is activated by the program and the selection relay should be energized








BCxx-SEL_CH1 Indication that no selection or execution relay is energized

BCxx-SEL_CH2 Indication that at least one selection or exe-cution relay is energized

BCxx-INPBOERR Input for binary input board error

BCxx-OUTBOERR Input for binary output board error

Table 6: Output signals for BAYCONC

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

BCxx-REMOTE Indication of Remote operator place

BCxx-STATION Indication of Station operator place

BCxx-LOCAL Indication of Local operator place

Table 5: Input signals for BAYCONC

IN: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 70

BCxx-SEL1 Apparatus 1 is selected after reservation acknowledgement from other bays








BCxx-RE A reservation has been made in this bay

BCxx-RE_BAYS Request for reservation of other bays

BCxx-ACK_T_B Acknowledgement to other bays that this bay is reserved

BCxx-FDB_SEL1 Correct selection relay is energized for apparatus 1








BCxx-BINPERR Indication for binary input board error

BCxx-BOUTERR Indication for binary output board error

BCxx-AU_OP_V1 Automatic operation permitted, i.e. the oper-ator place selector is not in Local position, the apparatus is not reserved or not manual selected for apparatus 1



OUT: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

7.2.4 BAYCOND








OUT: DESCRIPTION:

Table 7: Input signals for BAYCOND

IN: DESCRIPTION:

BDxx-S_R Input to change operator place to Remote (pulse input)

BDxx-S_S Input to change operator place to Station (pulse input)

BDxx-L_L Input to change operator place to Local

BDxx-EXCH_IN Input for information exchange with other BAYCON:s in bays with more than 8 appa-ratuses

BDxx-RQ_SEL1 Request for selection and reservation of apparatus 1





Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 72





BDxx-BLK_RE Input for blocking all reservations

BDxx-OVERRIDE Input for overriding the reservation function including the blocking by BLK_RE

BDxx-RE_B1 Reservation of the own bay only (i.e. not other bays) at selection from apparatus 1








BDxx-ACK_F_B Input for acknowledging the reservation of other bays

BDxx-ANY_ACK Input indicating that at least one acknowl-edge is still active

BDxx-V_TX Indication for valid transmission of the reser-vation signals

BDxx-EX_DA_UP Input is 1 if the program that acknowledged the reservation is running

BDxx-RE_RQ_B Request for reservation from other bays

BDxx-V_RE_RQ Input is 1 for valid request of reservation from any bay

BDxx-SEL_ACT1 Selection of apparatus 1 is activated by the program and the selection relay should be energized



IN: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00







BDxx-SEL_CH1 Indication that no selection or execution relay is energized

BDxx-SEL_CH2 Indication that at least one selection or exe-cution relay is energized

BDxx-INPBOERR Input for binary input board error

BDxx-OUTBOERR Input for binary output board error

Table 8: Output signals for BAYCOND

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

BDxx-REMOTE Indication of Remote operator place

BDxx-STATION Indication of Station operator place

BDxx-LOCAL Indication of Local operator place

BDxx-EXCH_OUT Output for information exchange with other BAYCON:s in bays with more than 8 appa-ratuses

BDxx-SEL1 Apparatus 1 is selected after reservation acknowledgement from other bays






IN: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 74




BDxx-RE A reservation has been made in this bay

BDxx-RE_BAYS Request for reservation of other bays

BDxx-ACK_T_B Acknowledgement to other bays that this bay is reserved

BDxx-FDB_SEL1 Correct selection relay is energized for apparatus 1








BDxx-BINPERR Indication for binary input board error

BDxx-BOUTERR Indication for binary output board error

BDxx-AU_OP_V1 Automatic operation permitted, i.e. the oper-ator place selector is not in Local position, the apparatus is not reserved or not manual selected for apparatus 1





OUT: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00






OUT: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 76

7.2.5 BAYCONE

Table 9: Input signals for BAYCONE

IN: DESCRIPTION:

BExx-S_R Input to change operator place to Remote (pulse input)

BExx-S_S Input to change operator place to Station (pulse input)

BExx-L_L Input to change operator place to Local

BExx-RQ_SEL1 Request for selection and reservation of apparatus 1








BExx-BLK_RE Input for blocking all reservations

BExx-OVERRIDE Input for overriding the reservation function including the blocking by BLK_RE

BExx-RE_B1 Reservation of the own bay only (i.e. not other bays) at selection from apparatus 1








BExx-ACK_F_B Input for acknowledging the reservation of other bays

BExx-ANY_ACK Input indicating that at least one acknowl-edge is still active


Version 1.0-00

BExx-V_TX Indication for valid transmission of the reser-vation signals

BExx-EX_DA_UP Input is 1 if the program that acknowledged the reservation is running

BExx-RE_RQ_B Request for reservation from other bays

BExx-V_RE_RQ Input is 1 for valid request of reservation from any bay

BExx-SEL_ACT1 Selection of apparatus 1 is activated by the program and the selection relay should be energized








BExx-SEL_CH1 Indication that no selection or execution relay is energized

BExx-SEL_CH2 Indication that at least one selection or exe-cution relay is energized

BExx-INPBOERR Input for binary input board error

BExx-OUTBOERR Input for binary output board error

BExx-SEL_FDB1 Input for individual selection relay energiz-ing of apparatus 1






IN: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 78




Table 10: Output signals for BAYCONE

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

BExx-REMOTE Indication of Remote operator place

BExx-STATION Indication of Station operator place

BExx-LOCAL Indication of Local operator place

BExx-SEL1 Apparatus 1 is selected after reservation acknowledgement from other bays








BExx-RE A reservation has been made in this bay

BExx-RE_BAYS Request for reservation of other bays

BExx-ACK_T_B Acknowledgement to other bays that this bay is reserved

BExx-FDB_SEL1 Correct selection relay is energized for apparatus 1






IN: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00




BExx-BINPERR Indication for binary input board error

BExx-BOUTERR Indication for binary output board error

BExx-BRLYERR Indication for external relay error

BExx-AU_OP_V1 Automatic operation permitted, i.e. the oper-ator place selector is not in Local position, the apparatus is not reserved or not manual selected for apparatus 1








Table 10: Output signals for BAYCONE

OUT: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 80

7.2.6 BAYCONF

Table 11: Input signals for BAYCONF

IN: DESCRIPTION:

BFxx-S_R Input to change operator place to Remote (pulse input)

BFxx-S_S Input to change operator place to Station (pulse input)

BFxx-L_L Input to change operator place to Local

BFxx-EXCH_IN Input for information exchange with other BAYCON:s in bays with more than 8 appa-ratuses

BFxx-RQ_SEL1 Request for selection and reservation of apparatus 1








BFxx-BLK_RE Input for blocking all reservations

BFxx-OVERRIDE Input for overriding the reservation function including the blocking by BLK_RE

BFxx-RE_B1 Reservation of the own bay only (i.e. not other bays) at selection from apparatus 1









Version 1.0-00

BFxx-ACK_F_B Input for acknowledging the reservation of other bays

BFxx-ANY_ACK Input indicating that at least one acknowl-edge is still active

BFxx-V_TX Indication for valid transmission of the reser-vation signals

BFxx-EX_DA_UP Input is 1 if the program that acknowledged the reservation is running

BFxx-RE_RQ_B Request for reservation from other bays

BFxx-V_RE_RQ Input is 1 for valid request of reservation from any bay

BFxx-SEL_ACT1 Selection of apparatus 1 is activated by the program and the selection relay should be energized








BFxx-SEL_CH1 Indication that no selection or execution relay is energized

BFxx-SEL_CH2 Indication that at least one selection or exe-cution relay is energized

BFxx-INPBOERR Input for binary input board error

BFxx-OUTBOERR Input for binary output board error

BFxx-SEL_FDB1 Input for individual selection relay energiz-ing of apparatus 1




IN: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 82






Table 12: Output signals for BAYCONF

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

BFxx-REMOTE Indication of Remote operator place

BFxx-STATION Indication of Station operator place

BFxx-LOCAL Indication of Local operator place

BFxx-EXCH_OUT Output for information exchange with other BAYCON:s in bays with more than 8 appa-ratuses

BFxx-SEL1 Apparatus 1 is selected after reservation acknowledgement from other bays








BFxx-RE A reservation has been made in this bay

BFxx-RE_BAYS Request for reservation of other bays

BFxx-ACK_T_B Acknowledgement to other bays that this bay is reserved

BFxx-FDB_SEL1 Correct selection relay is energized for apparatus 1


IN: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00








BFxx-BINPERR Indication for binary input board error

BFxx-BOUTERR Indication for binary output board error

BFxx-BRLYERR Indication for external relay error

BFxx-AU_OP_V1 Automatic operation permitted, i.e. the oper-ator place selector is not in Local position, the apparatus is not reserved or not manual selected for apparatus 1








OUT: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 84



OUT: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

7.2.7 COMCON

Table 13: Input signals for COMCON

IN: DESCRIPTION:

COxx-SEL_RES Input for reset of selection after operation

COxx-SELECT Input stating that a correct selection and reservation is made in the bay

COxx-R_SEL_O Selection for opening the apparatus from Remote (pulse input)

COxx-R_SEL_C Selection for closing the apparatus from Remote (pulse input)

COxx-R_OPEN Execute command for opening the appara-tus from Remote (pulse input)

COxx-R_CLOSE Execute command for closing the apparatus from Remote (pulse input)

COxx-R_CANCEL Input for cancelling an operation from Remote (pulse input)

COxx-REMOTE Input for indicating Remote as valid operator place

COxx-S_SEL_O Selection for opening the apparatus from Station (pulse input)

COxx-S_SEL_C Selection for closing the apparatus from Station (pulse input)

COxx-S_OPEN Execute command for opening the appara-tus from Station (pulse input)

COxx-S_CLOSE Execute command for closing the apparatus from Station (pulse input)

COxx-S_CANCEL Input for cancelling an operation from Sta-tion (pulse input)

COxx-S_BLK_OP Input for blocking operation from Station (pulse input)

COxx-S_DBL_OP Input for deblocking operation from Station (pulse input)

COxx-S_IR_OVR Input for overriding selection and reserva-tion from Station (pulse input)

COxx-S_BL_UPD Input for blocking process updating from Station (pulse input)

COxx-S_PR_UPD Input for resuming process updating from Station (pulse input)

COxx-S_MA_U_O Input for manual entry of open position from Station (pulse input)

COxx-S_MA_U_C Input for manual entry of close position from Station (pulse input)

COxx-STATION Input for indicating Station as valid operator place

COxx-L_SEL_O Selection for opening the apparatus from Local


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 86

COxx-L_SEL_C Selection for closing the apparatus from Local

COxx-L_OPEN Execute command for opening the appara-tus from Local

COxx-L_CLOSE Execute command for closing the apparatus from Local

COxx-L_IR_OVR Input for overriding selection and reserva-tion from Local

COxx-LOCAL Input for indicating Local as valid operator place

COxx-AU_SEL_O Selection for opening the apparatus from an automatic function (pulse input)

COxx-AU_SEL_C Selection for closing the apparatus from an automatic function (pulse input)

COxx-AU_OPEN Execute command for opening the appara-tus from an automatic function (pulse input)

COxx-AU_CLOSE Execute command for closing the apparatus from an automatic function (pulse input)

COxx-AU_CANC Input for cancelling an operation from an automatic function (pulse input)

COxx-SEL_SEQ A sequence program is performing an oper-ation

Table 14: Output signals for COMCON

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

COxx-RQ_SEL Request selection output

COxx-OPEN Open direction output

COxx-CLOSE Close direction output

COxx-EXECUTE Output signal to execute the operation

COxx-CANCEL Output signal to cancel any operation before an execute command

COxx-OVERRIDE Output signal to override an interlocking and reservation

COxx-LO_OP_T Indication of a long operation time

COxx-RES_ERR Indication of a failure in the reservation

COxx-R_OP MMI indication stating that Remote is valid operator place

COxx-S_OP MMI indication stating that Station is valid operator place

COxx-BLK_OP Output signal for blocking the operation (pulse output)

Table 13: Input signals for COMCON

IN: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

COxx-DBL_OP Output signal for deblocking the operation (pulse output)

COxx-L_OP MMI indication stating that Local is valid operator place

COxx-BLK_UPD Output signal for blocking the process updating (pulse output)

COxx-PROC_UPD Output signal for resuming the process updating (pulse output)

COxx-MA_UPD_O Output signal for manual setting of open position, when the updating is blocked (pulse output)

COxx-MA_UPD_C Output signal for manual setting of close position, when the updating is blocked (pulse output)

COxx-AU_MODE MMI indication that an automatic function is performing an operation i.e. input AU_SEL_O/C is set

COxx-SEQ_STA Indicate that the apparatus is reserved by the input SEL_SEQ and is not in Local position

Table 14: Output signals for COMCON

OUT: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 88

7.2.8 SWICONA

Table 15: Input signals for SWICONA

IN: DESCRIPTION:

SAxx-POSIND_V Input for external position check function, i.e. valid position of the apparatus

SAxx-POS_L1_O Input for open position indication in phase L1



SAxx-POS_L1_C Input for close position indication in phase L1



SAxx-BLK_UPD Blocking of updating of the position indica-tion (pulse input from COMCON)

SAxx-PROC_UPD Resuming of updating of the position indica-tion (pulse input from COMCON)

SAxx-MA_UPD_O Input for manual setting of open position (pulse input from COMCON)

SAxx-MA_UPD_C Input for manual setting of close position (pulse input from COMCON)

SAxx-UPD_BLK Input for blocking of updating (from BLK-CONK at blocking of all apparatuses in a bay)

SAxx-SELECT Selection input (from BAYCON, signal SELx)

SAxx-FDB_SEL Feedback selection input

SAxx-OPEN Open direction for operation (pulse input from COMCON)

SAxx-CLOSE Close direction for operation (pulse input from COMCON)

SAxx-AU_OP_V Automatic operation permitted (signal from BAYCON)

SAxx-EXECUTE Execution of operation (pulse input from COMCON)

SAxx-CANCEL Cancelling of the selected operation (pulse input from COMCON)

SAxx-BLK_OPEN Blocking input for open direction

SAxx-BLK_CLOS Blocking input for close direction

SAxx-INT_LOCK Operation blocked by conditions from the interlocking module

SAxx-SY_RUN To be set to true when the synchro-check is running


Version 1.0-00

SAxx-SY_FAIL To be set to true when the synchro-check fails and the command execution will stop

SAxx-SY_OK Closing will be permitted at set to true by the synchro-check and when SY_RUN is true

SAxx-AR_SEL Selection input for fast autoreclosing. It is used only with external selection relays

Table 16: Output signals for SWICONA

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

SAxx-OX Indication that the apparatus is in open posi-tion. Result of the three single phase indica-tions or blocking of the process updating or by the manually entered open position

SAxx-CX Indication that the apparatus is in close position. Result of the three single phase indications or blocking of the process updat-ing or by the manually entered close posi-tion

SAxx-POS_ERR Position error. Result of that at least one of following conditions are fulfilled: One phase is both open and closed, one phase is in middle position longer than T_POSERR, the input POSIND_V is false

SAxx-POL_DISC Output indicating pole discordance, after that the time T_POL has elapsed

SAxx-MA_UPD_P Output indicating manual control of position updating

SAxx-SEL_OPEN Selection output for open direction

SAxx-SEL_CLOS Selection output for close direction

SAxx-EXE_OPEN Execute output for open direction (settable pulse length)

SAxx-EXE_CLOS Execute output for close direction (settable pulse length)

SAxx-SEL_RES Reset the selection after successful or failed operation (pulse output)

SAxx-SEL_ERR Output indicating a failure in the selection, if no feedback select signal FDB_SEL is acti-vated before the time T_SEL has elapsed

SAxx-CMD_ERR Output indicating a command error. That is done if the position indication of the exe-cuted apparatus does not indicate a start in the position change before the time T_START has elapsed

Table 15: Input signals for SWICONA

IN: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 90

SAxx-AU_OP_P Automatic operation is permitted, i.e. the operator place selector is not in Local posi-tion, the apparatus is not reserved, not man-ual selected or not blocked (neither operation nor update of position). The inter-locking conditions are not considered

SAxx-BLK_AR Output is activated when reservation is made. It is used to block autoreclosing when an operation is in progress

Table 16: Output signals for SWICONA

OUT: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

7.2.9 SWICONB

Table 17: Input signals for SWICONB

IN: DESCRIPTION:

SBxx-POSIND_V Input for external position check function, i.e. valid position of the apparatus

SBxx-POS_L1_O Input for open position indication in phase L1



SBxx-POS_L1_C Input for close position indication in phase L1



SBxx-BLK_UPD Blocking of updating of the position indica-tion (pulse input from COMCON)

SBxx-PROC_UPD Resuming of updating of the position indica-tion (pulse input from COMCON)

SBxx-MA_UPD_O Input for manual setting of open position (pulse input from COMCON)

SBxx-MA_UPD_C Input for manual setting of close position (pulse input from COMCON)

SBxx-UPD_BLK Input for blocking of updating (from BLK-CONK at blocking of all apparatuses in a bay)

SBxx-SELECT Selection input (from BAYCON, signal SELx)

SBxx-FDB_SEL Feedback selection input

SBxx-OPEN Open direction for operation (pulse input from COMCON)

SBxx-CLOSE Close direction for operation (pulse input from COMCON)

SBxx-AU_OP_V Automatic operation permitted (signal from BAYCON)

SBxx-EXECUTE Execution of operation (pulse input from COMCON)

SBxx-CANCEL Cancelling of the selected operation (pulse input from COMCON)

SBxx-BLK_OPEN Blocking input for open direction

SBxx-BLK_CLOS Blocking input for close direction

SBxx-INT_LOCK Operation blocked by conditions from the interlocking module


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 92

SBxx-SY_RUN Connected to the synchro-check module (equipment). At true all timers in SWICONB are stopped

SBxx-SY_FAIL To be set to true when the synchro-check fails and the command execution will stop

SBxx-AR_SEL Selection input for fast autoreclosing. It is used only with external selection relays

Table 18: Output signals for SWICONB

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

SBxx-OX Indication that the apparatus is in open posi-tion. Result of the three single phase indica-tions or blocking of the process updating or by the manually entered open position

SBxx-CX Indication that the apparatus is in close position. Result of the three single phase indications or blocking of the process updat-ing or by the manually entered close posi-tion

SBxx-POS_ERR Position error. Result of that at least one of following conditions are fulfilled: One phase is both open and closed, one phase is in middle position longer than T_POSERR, the input POSIND_V is false

SBxx-POL_DISC Output indicating pole discordance, after that the time T_POL has elapsed

SBxx-MA_UPD_P Output indicating manual control of position updating

SBxx-SEL_OPEN Selection output for open direction

SBxx-SEL_CLOS Selection output for close direction

SBxx-EXE_OPEN Execute output for open direction (settable pulse length)

SBxx-EXE_CLOS Execute output for close direction (settable pulse length)

SBxx-SEL_RES Reset the selection after successful or failed operation (pulse output)

SBxx-SEL_ERR Output indicating a failure in the selection, if no feedback select signal FDB_SEL is acti-vated before the time T_SEL has elapsed

SBxx-CMD_ERR Output indicating a command error. That is done if the position indication of the exe-cuted apparatus does not indicate a start in the position change before the time T_START has elapsed

Table 17: Input signals for SWICONB

IN: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

SBxx-AU_OP_P Automatic operation is permitted, i.e. the operator place selector is not in Local posi-tion, the apparatus is not reserved, not man-ual selected or not blocked (neither operation nor update of position). The inter-locking conditions are not considered

SBxx-BLK_AR Output is activated when reservation is made. It is used to block autoreclosing when an operation is in progress

Table 18: Output signals for SWICONB

OUT: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 94

7.2.10SWICONC

Table 19: Input signals for SWICONC

IN: DESCRIPTION:

SCxx-POSIND_V Input for external position check function, i.e. valid position of the apparatus

SCxx-POS_O Input for open position indication

SCxx-POS_C Input for close position indication

SCxx-BLK_UPD Blocking of updating of the position indica-tion (pulse input from COMCON)

SCxx-PROC_UPD Resuming of updating of the position indica-tion (pulse input from COMCON)

SCxx-MA_UPD_O Input for manual setting of open position (pulse input from COMCON)

SCxx-MA_UPD_C Input for manual setting of close position (pulse input from COMCON)

SCxx-UPD_BLK Input for blocking of updating (from BLK-CONK at blocking of all apparatuses in a bay)

SCxx-SELECT Selection input (from BAYCON, signal SELx)

SCxx-FDB_SEL Feedback selection input

SCxx-OPEN Open direction for operation (pulse input from COMCON)

SCxx-CLOSE Close direction for operation (pulse input from COMCON)

SCxx-EXECUTE Execution of operation (pulse input from COMCON)

SCxx-CANCEL Cancelling of the selected operation (pulse input from COMCON)

SCxx-BLK_OPEN Blocking input for open direction

SCxx-BLK_CLOS Blocking input for close direction

SCxx-INT_LOCK Operation blocked by conditions from the interlocking module

SCxx-AU_OP_V Automatic operation permitted (signal from BAYCON)

Table 20: Output signals for SWICONC

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

SCxx-OX Indication that the apparatus is in open posi-tion. Result of the input indication or block-ing of the process updating or by the manually entered open position


Version 1.0-00

SCxx-CX Indication that the apparatus is in close position. Result of the input indication or blocking of the process updating or by the manually entered close position

SCxx-POS_ERR Position error, i.e. the position indication is both open and closed or is in middle posi-tion longer than T_POSERR or the input POSIND_V is false

SCxx-MA_UPD_P Output indicating manual control of position updating

SCxx-SEL_OPEN Selection output for open direction

SCxx-SEL_CLOS Selection output for close direction

SCxx-EXE_OPEN Execute output for open direction (settable pulse length)

SCxx-EXE_CLOS Execute output for close direction (settable pulse length)

SCxx-SEL_RES Reset the selection after successful or failed operation (pulse output)

SCxx-SEL_ERR Output indicating a failure in the selection, if no feedback select signal FDB_SEL is acti-vated before the time T_SEL has elapsed

SCxx-CMD_ERR Output indicating a command error. That is done if the position indication of the exe-cuted apparatus does not indicate a start in the position change before the time T_START has elapsed

SCxx-AU_OP_P Automatic operation is permitted, i.e. the operator place selector is not in Local posi-tion, the apparatus is not reserved, not man-ual selected or not blocked (neither operation nor update of position). The inter-locking conditions are not considered

Table 20: Output signals for SWICONC

OUT: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 96

7.2.11BLKCONK

Table 21: Input and output signals for BLKCONK

IN: DESCRIPTION:

BKxx-BLK_1_1 First blocking input for the first blocking function

BKxx-BLK_1_2 Second blocking input for the first blocking function

BKxx-BLK_1_3 Third blocking input for the first blocking function

BKxx-BLKCMD1 Setting of the first blocking function (pulse input)

BKxx-DBLCMD1 Resetting of the first blocking function (pulse input)

BKxx-BYPASS1 Bypass input for the blocking inputs i.e. sets the first output to 0 (false) if activated

BKxx-BLK_2_1 First blocking input for the second blocking function

BKxx-BLK_2_2 Second blocking input for the second block-ing function

BKxx-BLK_2_3 Third blocking input for the second blocking function

BKxx-BLKCMD2 Setting of the second blocking function (pulse input)

BKxx-DBLCMD2 Resetting of the second blocking function (pulse input)

BKxx-BYPASS2 Bypass input for the blocking inputs i.e. sets the second output to 0 (false) if activated

BKxx-BLK_3_1 First blocking input for the third blocking function

BKxx-BLK_3_2 Second blocking input for the third blocking function

BKxx-BLK_3_3 Third blocking input for the third blocking function

BKxx-BLKCMD3 Setting of the third blocking function (pulse input)

BKxx-DBLCMD3 Resetting of the third blocking function (pulse input)

BKxx-BYPASS3 Bypass input for the blocking inputs i.e. sets the third output to 0 (false) if activated

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

BKxx-BLK_OUT1 Blocking output for the first blocking function

BKxx-BLK_OUT2 Blocking output for the second blocking function

BKxx-BLK_OUT3 Blocking output for the third blocking func-tion


Version 1.0-00

7.2.12BLKCONL

Table 22: Input and output signals for BLKCONL

IN: DESCRIPTION:

BLxx-BLK_1_1 First blocking input for the blocking function

BLxx-BLK_1_2 Second blocking input for the blocking func-tion

BLxx-BLK_1_3 Third blocking input for the blocking function

BLxx-BLKCMD1 Setting of the blocking function (pulse input)

BLxx-DBLCMD1 Resetting of the blocking function (pulse input)

BLxx-BYPASS1 Bypass input for the blocking inputs i.e. sets the output to 0 (false) if activated

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

BLxx-BLK_OUT1 Blocking output for the blocking function


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 98

7.3 Setting table

7.3.1 BAYCONx

7.3.2 COMCON

7.3.3 SWICONA

Table 23: Setting table for BAYCONx


T_CAN_RE 0.0-200.0 s Timeout when the reset of the reservation acknowledgement is not done by the requesting bays, for example, because of communication error. To be set from CAP 531

Table 24: Setting table for COMCON


T_LO_OP 0.0-200.0 s Maximum time between a select and the execute command coming from the opera-tor. Also the maximum time between the request to override and the following select. To be set from CAP 531

T_RES 0.0-200.0 s Allowed time (for BAYCON) to make the reservation. To be set from CAP 531

Table 25: Setting table for SWICONA

PARAMETER:SETTING RANGE:

DESCRIPTION:

T_POSERR 0.0-200.0 s Allowed time for middle position. To be set from CAP 531

T_POL 0.0-200.0 s Time parameter for pole discordance. Allowed time to have discrepancy between the poles. To be set from CAP 531

T_SEL 0.0-200.0 s Allowed time from selection to feedback select. To be set from CAP 531

T_START 0.0-200.0 s Allowed time from execute to position indi-cation change. To be set from CAP 531

T_PULSE 0.0-200.0 s Time parameter for command output pulse length. T_PULSE = 0 gives a steady com-mand output signal. To be set from CAP 531


Version 1.0-00

7.3.4 SWICONB

7.3.5 SWICONC

Table 26: Setting table for SWICONB



T_POL 0.0-200.0 s Time parameter for pole discordance. Allowed time to have discrepancy between the poles. To be set from CAP 531




Table 27: Setting table for SWICONC







Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 150-XENPage 6 - 100

ABB Network Partner AB-101Page

Function:

ch-e

e igh

ithntrol-t part

city.

s a A) aci-

he

iso-omeome

ng is the

ngfromually nots ane tor

are istion oring.r dis-te is

6Interlocking 1MRK 580 151-XEN


1 IntroductionThe interlocking of switchgear operation can have two main purposes to:

• Avoid dangerous or damaging operation of switchgear

• Put restrictions on the configuration of the substation or total switgear for operational reasons. Examples of the latter are to limit thnumber of parallel transformers to a maximum of two or to assurthat energizing is always made from one side, for example, the hvoltage side of a transformer.

This interlocking document only deals with the first point, and only wrestrictions caused by switching devices other than that one to be coled. This means that switch interlock, because of device alarms, is noof this document.

Disconnectors and earthing switches have a limited switching capaDisconnectors are allowed to operate:

• With basically zero current. The circuit is open at one side and hasmall extension. The capacitive current is small (for example < 5and power transformers with inrush current are not allowed. Captive and magnetic voltage transformers (VT) are allowed.

• To connect or disconnect a parallel circuit carrying load current. Tswitching voltage across the open contacts is thus virtually zero,thanks to the parallel circuit (for example < 1% of rated voltage). Paralleling of power transformers is not allowed.

Earthing switches are allowed to connect and disconnect earthing oflated points. Due to capacitive or inductive coupling there may be svoltage (for example < 40% of rated voltage) before earthing and scurrent (for example < 100A) after earthing of a line.

Circuit breakers are usually not interlocked to prevent damage. Closionly interlocked against running disconnectors in the same bay, andbus-coupler opening is interlocked during a busbar transfer.

As conditions for operational interlocking, the positions of all switchidevices of a bay and from some other bays are used. Conditions other stations are usually not available. So a line earthing switch is usnot fully interlocked. The operator must be convinced that the line isenergized from the other side before closing the earthing switch. Aoption, a voltage indication can be used for interlocking. Take caravoid a dangerous enable condition at loss of VT secondary voltage, foexample, because of a blown fuse.

The switch positions used in the operational interlocking logic obtained from auxiliary contacts. For each position an indicationneeded - thus forming a double indication. The apparatus control funccontinuously checks its consistency. If neither condition is high (1TRUE), the switch may be in intermediate position, for example, movThis moving state may last a certain time, for example, 10 seconds foconnectors. Should both indications stay low for a longer time, the sta

ABB Network Partner ABInterlocking

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 102

interpreted as unknown (it may be in an intermediate position, or theremay be a control system error, such as bad contact). If both indicationsstay high, then there is something wrong, and the state is again treated asunknown. In both cases an alarm is given to the operator. In the interlock-ing logic, the signals are used to avoid dangerous enable or release ofoperation conditions. Unknown positions are not allowed to release opera-tion.

For switches with individual operation gear per phase, the evaluation mustconsider possible phase discrepancies. This is done by ANDing all threephases of open and close state. This leads to an unknown state doubleindication in case of phase discrepancies.

Because circuit breaker closing is usually not interlocked take care toavoid energizing onto earthed parts by CB closing. So the open discon-nectors rather than open CB are used to release the earthing switch (ES)closing.

2 ApplicationThe interlocking function consists of software modules located in eachcontrol terminal. The function is distributed and not dependent on anycentral function. Communication between modules in different bays isperformed via the station bus.

The basic method is the use of the reservation function (see the section ofapparatus control). This method ensures that the position of the HV appa-ratuses are not changed during the time gap, which arises between theposition updatings. This can occur by reserving all of those HV appara-tuses by means of the communication system, which might influence theinterlocking condition of the intended operation. The reservation isintended to remain until the operation is performed.

After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has fullinformation on all positions of the apparatuses in the switchyard that areaffected by the selection. This status cannot be affected by other operatorsbecause the selection is blocked for all apparatuses of which the status isimportant for the selected one.

The positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules dis-tributed in the control terminals. Each module contains the interlockinglogic for a bay. The interlocking logic in a module is different, dependingon the bay function and the switchyard arrangements, that is, double-breaker or 1 1/2 breaker bays have different modules. Specific interlock-ing conditions and connections between standard interlocking modulesare performed by an engineering tool. The signals involved in the bay-level interlocking can consist of these types:

• Positions of HV apparatuses (sometimes per phase)• Valid positions (if evaluated in the control module)• External release (to add special conditions for release)• Line voltage (to block operation of line earthing switch)• Output signals to release the HV apparatus

InterlockingABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 103

Version 1.0-00

onsHV, loss

The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions withina bay as shown in Fig. 1.

Fig. 1 Interlocking module on bay level

The communication between different bays is performed via the stationbus and can consist of signals of these types:

• Unearthed busbars

• The busbars are connected together

• Other bays connected to a busbar

• Received data from other bays are valid

Fig. 2 shows the principle of data exchange.

Fig. 2 Data exchange between interlocking modules

The interlocking function in a bay that uses invalid data as conditidoes not give a release for command. Invalid data of positions of apparatuses can be obtained, for example, at intermediate positionsof a control terminal, or at input board error.

Control module

Control module

Control module

Interlockingmodule

Interlockingmodules inother bays

(X80151-1)

Disc QA and QB closed

A not earthedB not earthedA and B interconnected

A unearthedB unearthed

A and B interconnected

A and B interconn in other bay

QA QB

Q0QL

QA QB

Q0

QA QB

Q0QL

QAE QBE

Bay 1 Bay n Bus coupler

Station bus

AB

Disc QA and QB closed

A not earthedB not earthedA and B interconnected

(X80151-2)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 104

rs

a th r-d n

d if hing r

olt-nly

ec-

-dis-er,

if a

On the station MMI an override function exists, which can be used tobypass the interlocking function if not all available data for the conditionare valid.

For all interlocking modules these general rules apply:

• The interlocking conditions for opening or closing of disconnectoand earthing switches are always identical.

• Earthing switches, which can earth an incoming line directly or vicircuit breakers (rapid earthing switches), are interlocked only wireference to the conditions in the associated station, not with refeence to the state of the line. So a line voltage indication is includeinto line interlocking modules. If there is no line voltage supervisiowithin the bay, then the appropriate inputs must be set to no voltage, and the operator must take care about this manually.

• Earthing switches near a circuit breaker (CB) can only be operatedisconnectors on both sides of the CB are open. Otherwise, eartswitches can only be operated on isolated points (that is, no otheswitch is connected).

• Disconnectors cannot break power current or connect different vage systems. Disconnectors in series with a circuit breaker can obe operated if the circuit breaker is open, or if the disconnectors close a loop (uninterrupted bus bar transfer), or if they are com-pletely earthed on both sides of the circuit breaker. Other disconntors can be operated if one side is completely isolated, or if they close a loop, or if they are earthed on both sides.

• Circuit breaker closing is only interlocked against running disconnectors in its bay or additionally in a transformer bay against the connectors and earthing switch on the other side of the transformif there is no disconnector between CB and transformer.

• Circuit breaker opening is only interlocked at a bus-coupler bay, bus bar transfer is in progress.


Version 1.0-00

3 Design

3.1 General The implementation of the interlocking is decentralized to each bay.There are different interlocking modules dependent on the topology kindof the substation (breaker and a half or various bus bar arrangements) andthe bay types. The interlocking logic for each module is specified inboolean algebra for the switch states. To keep their amount easy to han-dle, only operating sequences in normal service are permitted. For otheruncommon operations, the command handling has an interlock overridefeature.

3.2 Standard modules To make the implementation of the interlocking function easy, severalstandard modules are available. The modules also have inputs that can beused for delivery-specific interlocking conditions. The switchyardarrangements are described below, to which the standard modules can beused. The appendix describes input and output details.

In REC 561, these standard modules are available:

Type 1 (basic):

• A1A2_DC and

• 3 BB_ES and either

• AB_TRAFO or

• ABC_LINE or

• ABC_BC or

• A1A2_BS or

• DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE, DB_BUS_B


• 2 A1A2_DC and

• 6 BB_ES and

• DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE, DB_BUS_B and

• BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN, BH_LINE_B and either

• AB_TRAFO or

• ABC_LINE or

• ABC_BC or

• A1A2_BS or

• DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE, DB_BUS_B and either

• AB_TRAFO or

• ABC_LINE or


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 106

lec-e by

us-ingle

• ABC_BC or

• A1A2_BS and either

• AB_TRAFO or

• ABC_LINE or

• ABC_BC or

• A1A2_BS


• 2 A1A2_DC and

• 6 BB_ES and either

• AB_TRAFO or

• ABC_LINE or

• ABC_BC or

• A1A2_BS or

• DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE, DB_BUS_B and

• 2 BH_LINE_A, 2 BH_CONN, 2 BH_LINE_B

The selection of software type is made during manufacturing. The setion of standard modules within the different types of REC 561 is mada Function Selector tool included in the Configuration tool CAP 531.

3.2.1 Line for double and transfer busbars, ABC_LINE

ABC_LINE contains the interlocking for a line connected to a double bbar configuration and a bypass bus. This module is also used for sbusbar configurations and with no bypass bus.

Fig. 3 Switchyard layout ABC_LINE

Q51

A (BB1)

B (BB2)

Q15 Q25Q1 Q2

Q52

Q0

Q75Q7

Q8

ModuleABC_LINE

Q9

C (TB)

(X80151-3)


Version 1.0-00

3.2.2 Bus coupler for double and transfer busbars, ABC_BC

ABC_BC contains the interlocking for a bus-coupler bay that is connectedto a double busbar configuration and a bypass bus. This module is alsoused for single busbar with bypass bus or double busbar without bypassbusbar.

Fig. 4 Switchyard layout ABC_BC

3.2.3 Transformer bay for double busbars, AB_TRAFO

AB_TRAFO contains the interlocking for a transformer bay that is con-nected to a double busbar configuration.This module is used if there is nodisconnector between circuit breaker and transformer. Otherwise, themodule ABC_LINE can be used. For safety reasons, the module assumesthat the other side of the transformer is not interlocked. This module isalso used for single busbar configuration.

Fig. 5 Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO

Q51

A (BB1)

B (BB2)

Q15 Q25Q1 Q20

Q0

Q75Q7

Q52

ModuleABC_BC

Q2

C (TB)

(X80151-4)

Q51

A (BB1)

B (BB2)Q15 Q25Q1 Q2

Q52

TQ51

TQ1 TQ2

Q0

Module AB_TRAFOT

TQ0

TQ52 TQ0 and TQ52 are not used in interlocking

(X80151-5)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 108

3.2.4 Bus-section breaker for double busbars, A1A2_BS

A1A2_BS contains the interlocking for one, bus-section circuit breakerbetween section A1 and A2. This module is used for different busbars,which includes a bus-section circuit breaker, that is, not only busbar A.

Fig. 6 Switchyard layout A1A2_BS

3.2.5 Bus-section disconnector for double busbars, A1A2_DC

A1A2_DC contains the interlocking for one, bus-section disconnectorbetween section A1 and A2. This module is used for different busbarswhich includes a bus-section disconnector, that is, not only busbar A.

Fig. 7 Switchyard layout A1A2_DC

3.2.6 Busbar earthing switch, BB_ES

BB_ES contains the interlocking for one, busbar earthing switch on anybusbar parts.

Fig. 8 Switchyard layout BB_ES

A1 (BB1A) A2 (BB1B)

A1_Q15 Q11

Q51

Q0

Q52

Q12 A2_Q15

Module A1A2_BS (X80151-6)

Module A1A2_DC

A1 (BB1A) A2 (BB1B)Q11

A1_Q15 A2_Q15

(X80151-7)

Q15

(X80151-8)


Version 1.0-00

3.2.7 Double CB bay, DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE, DB_BUS_B

Two types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay aredefined. DB_LINE is the connection from the line to the circuit breakerparts that are connected to the busbar. DB_BUS is the connection fromDB_LINE to one busbar and is used for each busbar. The busbar earthingswitches must also be interlocked as described in the BB_ES chapter.

Fig. 9 Switchyard layout double circuit breaker

Q15 Q25 Q1

Q51

Q01

Q52

Q61 Q62

Q53

Q02

Q55

Q2

Q54

A (BB1)

B (BB2)

Q9

Q8

DB_BUS

DB_LINE

(X80151-9)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 110

the

3.2.8 Breaker and a half diameter, BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN, BH_LINE_B

Two types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE isthe connection from one line to the busbar and is used twice per diameter.BH_CONN is the connection between the two lines of a diameter. Thebusbar earthing switches must also be interlocked as described in theBB_ES chapter.

Fig. 10 Switchyard layout breaker-and-a-half

3.2.9 Communication between modules

The interlocking module is implemented per bay, which needs the statusindication of all switching devices of the own bay itself and some switch-ing devices of other bays. The communication between modules in differ-ent bays is performed via the station bus. For each bay-baycommunication direction, there is a need for two communication ele-ments, one for sending and one for receiving. For sending, an Event Func-tion block is used, and for receiving, a Multiple Command Function blockis used.

The command function block supervises the transmission itself. Eachcommunication error results in a deactivation of the data valid signal inthe command function block, which is used as a condition in the interlock-ing logic.

The User’s Guide for “Apparatus Control”, 1MRK 580 150-XENdescribes how the interlocking information is exchanged betweenbays and also the reservation mechanism.

Q15 Q25 Q1

Q51

Q0

Q52

Q6

Q53

Q61 Q0 Q62

Q9

Q8

Q51 Q52 Q9

Q8

Q6

Q53

Q0

Q52

Q2

Q51

L1 L2

A (BB1)

B (BB2)

BH_LINE

BH_CONN(X80151-10)


Version 1.0-00

are

bus-

bay

the the

4 Configurations

4.1 General This section describes how the interlocking for a certain switchgear con-figuration can be realized by using standard interlocking modules andtheir interconnections. It also describes the parameter settings. TheEXVVA_xx input signals, which are normally not used, are always set to1=FIXD-ON. The inputs for delivery specific conditions (QxEXy) are setto 1=FIXD-ON, if they are not used except:

• Q9EX2 and Q9EX4 in modules BH_LINE_A and BH_LINE_B

• Q0EX3 in module AB_TRAFO

which are set to 0=FIXD-OFF.

4.2 Project-specific logic

4.2.1 Single breaker arrangement, line bay

The signals from other bays connected to the module ABC_LINE described below.

4.2.1.1 Signals from bypass busbar

To derive the signals:

C_DC_OPAll line disconnectors on bypass C except in the own bay are open.

VP_C_DCThe switch status of C_DC is valid.

EXDU_BPBSignal if no transmission error from any bay connected to a bypass bar.

These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE) except that of the own are needed:

Q7OPTRQ7 is open

VPQ7TRThe switch status Q7 is valid.

EXDU_BPBSignal if there is no transmission error from the bay that containsabove information. This signal is taken from the data valid output oncommand function block.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 112

For bay n, these conditions are valid:

Fig. 11 Signals from bypass busbar in line bay n

4.2.1.2 Signals from bus coupler

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus sections, thebusbar-busbar connection could exist via the bus-section disconnector andbus-coupler within the other bus section.

Fig. 12 Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit break-ers)


BC_AB_CLSignal if a bus-coupler connection exists between busbar A and B.

BC_AC_OPSignal if there is no bus-coupler connection between busbar A and C.

BC_AC_CL Signal if a bus-coupler connection exists between busbar A and C.

BC_BC_OPSignal if there is no bus-coupler connection between busbar B and C.

BC_BC_CLSignal if a bus-coupler connection exists between busbar B and C.

&Q7OPTR (bay 1)Q7OPTR (bay 2)

Q7OPTR (bay n-1)

C_DC_OP

. . .

. . .

&VPQ7TR (bay 1)VPQ7TR (bay 2)

VPQ7TR (bay n-1)

VP_C_DC

. . .

. . .

&EXDU_BPB (bay 1)EXDU_BPB (bay 2)

EXDU_BPB (bay n-1)

EXDU_BPB

. . .

. . .

(X80151-11)

Section 1 Section 2A1B1C

A2

B2C

ABC_LINE ABC_BC ABC_LINE ABC_BC

A1A2_DC(BS)B1B2_DC(BS)

(X80151-12)


Version 1.0-00

VP_BC_ABThe switch status of BC_AB is valid.

VP_BC_ACThe switch status of BC_AC is valid.

VP_BC_BCThe switch status of BC_BC is valid.

EXDUP_BCSignal if there is no transmission error from bay BC (bus-coupler bay).

These signals from each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:

BCABCLTRSignal if a bus-coupler connectionthrough the own bus coupler existsbetween busbar A and B.

BCACOPTRSignal if there is no bus-coupler connectionthrough the own bus couplerbetween busbar A and C.

BCACCLTRSignal if a bus-coupler connectionthrough the own bus coupler existsbetween busbar A and C.

BCBCOPTRSignal if there is no bus-coupler connection through the own bus couplerbetween busbar B and C.

BCBCCLTRSignal if a bus-coupler connection through the own bus coupler existsbetween busbar B and C.

VPBCABTRThe switch status of BC_AB is valid.

VPBCACTRThe switch status of BC_AC is valid.

VPBCBCTRThe switch status of BC_BC is valid.

EXDUP_BCSignal if there is no transmission error from the bay that contains theabove information. This signal is taken from the data valid output on thecommand function block.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 114

These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) arealso needed. For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B areused. The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars,that is, for both bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.

DCOPTRSignal if the bus-section disconnector is open.

DCCLTRSignal if the bus-section disconnector is closed.

VPDCTRThe switch status of A1A2_DC is valid.

EXDUP_DCSignal if there is no transmission error from the bay that contains theabove information. This signal is taken from the data valid output on thecommand function block.

If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals fromthe bus-section coupler bay (A1A2_BS), rather than the bus-section dis-connector bay (A1A2_DC) must be used. For B1B2_BS, correspondingsignals from busbar B are used. The same type of module (A1A2_BS) isused for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section circuit breakersA1A2_BS and B1B2_BS.

A1A2OPTRSignal if there is no bus-section coupler connection between bus sectionsA1 and A2.

A1A2CLTRSignal if a bus-section coupler connection exists between bus sections A1and A2.

VPA1A2TRThe switch status of A1A2_DC is valid.

EXDUP_BSSignal if there is no transmission error from the bay that contains theabove information. This signal is taken from the data valid output on thecommand function block.


Version 1.0-00

For a line bay in section 1, these conditions are valid:

Fig. 13 Signals to a line bay in section 1 from the bus-coupler bays in each section

≥1BCABCLTR (sect.1)

BCABCLTR (sect.2)

BC_AB_CL

DCCLTR (A1A2)

&VPBCABTR (sect.1)VPDCTR (A1A2)

VP_BC_AB

VPDCTR (B1B2)

&DCCLTR (B1B2)

VPBCABTR (sect.2)

≥1BCACCLTR (sect.1)

BCACCLTR (sect.2)

BC_AC_CL

DCCLTR (A1A2)

&VPBCACTR (sect.1)VPDCTR (A1A2)

VP_BC_AC

&

VPBCACTR (sect.2)

BCACOPTR (sect.1)

BCACOPTR (sect.2)

BC_AC_OP

DCOPTR (A1A2) ≥1&

≥1BCBCCLTR (sect.1)

BCBCCLTR (sect.2)

BC_BC_CL

DCCLTR (B1B2)

&VPBCBCTR (sect.1)VPDCTR (B1B2)

VP_BC_BC

&

VPBCBCTR (sect.2)

BCBCOPTR (sect.1)

BCBCOPTR (sect.2)

BC_BC_OP

DCOPTR (B1B2) ≥1&

&EXDUP_BC (sect.1)EXDUP_DC (A1A2)

EXDUP_BC

EXDUP_DC (B1B2)EXDUP_BC (sect.2)

(X80151-13)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 116

n theBCn theand

For a line bay in section 2, the same conditions as above are valid bychanging section 1 to section 2 and vice versa.

4.2.1.3 Parameter setting If there is no bypass busbar and therefore no Q7 disconnector, then theinterlocking for Q7 is not used. The states for Q7, Q75, C_DC, BC_AC,BC_BC are set to open by setting the appropriate module inputs as fol-lows. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FIXD-OFF and 1=FIXD-ON:

• Q7_OP = 1

• Q7_CL = 0

• Q75_OP = 1

• Q75_CL = 0

• C_DC_OP = 1

• C_DC_CL = 0

• BC_AC_OP = 1

• BC_AC_CL = 0

• BC_BC_OP = 1

• BC_BC_CL = 0

• EXDU_BPB = 1

• VP_C_DC = 1

• VP_BC_AC = 1

• VP_BC_BC = 1

If there is no second busbar B and therefore no Q2 disconnector, theinterlocking for Q2 is not used. The state for Q2, Q25, BC_AB, BC_are set to open by setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. Ifunctional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FIXD-OFF 1=FIXD-ON:

• Q2_OP = 1

• Q2_CL = 0

• Q25_OP = 1

• Q25_CL = 0

• BC_AB_CL = 0

• BC_BC_OP = 1

• BC_BC_CL = 0

• VP_BC_AB = 1


Version 1.0-00

4.2.2 Single breaker arrangement, bus-coupler bay

4.2.2.1 Signals from all feed-ers

The signals from other bays connected to the bus-coupler moduleABC_BC are described below.


BBTR_OPSignal if no busbar transfer is in progress concerning this bus coupler.

VP_BBTRThe switch status of BBTR is valid.

EXDUP_ABSignal if there is no transmission error from any bay connected to the ABbusbars.

These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay(ABC_TRAFO), and bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC), except the own bus-coupler bay are needed:

Q1Q2OPTRSignal if Q1 or Q2 or both are open.

VPQ1Q2TRThe switch status of Q1 and Q2 are valid.

EXDUP_ABSignal if there is no transmission error from the bay that contains theabove information. This signal is taken from the data valid output on thecommand function block.

For bus-coupler bay n, these conditions are valid:

Fig. 14 Signals from any bays in bus-coupler bay n

&Q1Q2OPTR (bay 1)Q1Q2OPTR (bay 2)

Q1Q2OPTR (bay n-1)

BBTR_OP

. . .

. . .

&VPQ1Q2TR (bay 1)VPQ1Q2TR (bay 2)

VPQ1Q2TR (bay n-1)

VP_BBTR

. . .

. . .

&EXDUP_AB (bay 1)EXDUP_AB (bay 2)

EXDUP_AB (bay n-1)

EXDUP_AB

. . .

. . .(X80151-14)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 118

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus sections, thesignals BBTR are connected in parallel - if both bus-section disconnectorsare closed. So for the basic project-specific logic for BBTR above, addthis logic:


The following signals from each bus-section disconnector bay(A1A2_DC) are needed. For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from bus-bar B are used. The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for differentbusbars, that is, for both bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC andB1B2_DC.




If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals fromthe bus-section coupler bay (A1A2_BS), rather than the bus-section dis-connector bay (A1A2_DC), have to be used. For B1B2_BS, correspond-ing signals from busbar B are used. The same type of module (A1A2_BS)is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section circuit breakersA1A2_BS and B1B2_BS.




A2

B2C

ABC_LINE ABC_BC ABC_LINEABC_BC


AB_TRAFO

(X80151-15)


Version 1.0-00


For a bus-coupler bay in section 1, these conditions are valid:

Fig. 16 Signals to a bus-coupler bay in section 1 from any bays in each section

For a bus-coupler bay in section 2, the same conditions as above are validby changing section 1 to section 2 and vice versa.

4.2.2.2 Signals from bus coupler

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus sections, thesignals BC_AB from the busbar coupler of the other busbar section mustbe transmitted to the own busbar coupler if both disconnectors are closed.


BBTR_OP (sect.1)

BBTR_OP (sect.2)

BBTR_OP

DCOPTR (A1A2)

&VP_BBTR (sect.1)VPDCTR (A1A2)

VP_BBTR

VPDCTR (B1B2)

DCOPTR (B1B2)

VP_BBTR (sect.2)

≥1&

&EXDUP_AB (sect.1)EXDUP_DC (A1A2)

EXDUP_AB

EXDUP_DC (B1B2)EXDUP_AB (sect.2)

(X80151-16)


A2

B2C

ABC_BC ABC_BC


(X80151-17)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 120


BC_AB_CLSignal if an other bus-coupler connection exists between busbar A and B.



These signals from each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC), except the own bayare needed:

BCABCLTRSignal if a bus-coupler connection through the own bus coupler existsbetween busbar A and B.



These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) arealso needed. For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B areused. The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars,that is, for both bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.

DCCLTRSignal if the bus-section disconnector is closed.



If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals fromthe bus-section coupler bay (A1A2_BS), rather than the bus-section dis-connector bay (A1A2_DC), must be used. For B1B2_BS, correspondingsignals from busbar B are used. The same type of module (A1A2_BS) isused for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section circuit breakersA1A2_BS and B1B2_BS.


Version 1.0-00

A1A2CLTRSignal if a bus-section coupler connection exists between bus sections A1and A2.


EXDUP_BSSignal if no transmission error from the bay containing the above infor-mation. This signal is taken from the data valid output on the commandfunction block.

For a bus-coupler bay in section 1, these conditions are valid:

Fig. 18 Signals to a bus-coupler bay in section 1 from a bus-coupler bay in an other section

For a bus-coupler bay in section 2, the same conditions as above are validby changing section 1 to section 2 and vice versa.

4.2.2.3 Parameter setting If there is no bypass busbar and therefore no Q20 and Q7 disconnectors,then the interlocking for Q20 and Q7 is not used. The states for Q20, Q7,Q75, BC_AB are set to open by setting the appropriate module inputs asfollows. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FIXD-OFF and 1=FIXD-ON:

• Q20_OP = 1

• Q20_CL = 0

• Q7_OP = 1

• Q7_CL = 0

• Q75_OP = 1

• Q75_CL = 0

• BC_AB_CL = 0

BCABCLTR (sect.2)

BC_AB_CLDCCLTR (A1A2)

&VPDCTR (A1A2)

VP_BC_ABVPDCTR (B1B2)

&DCCLTR (B1B2)

VPBCABTR (sect.2)

&EXDUP_DC (A1A2)

EXDUP_BCEXDUP_DC (B1B2)EXDUP_BC (sect.2)

(X80151-18)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 122

, ther and

the

If there is no second busbar B and therefore no Q20 and Q2 disconnectors,then the interlocking for Q20 and Q2 are not used. The states for Q20, Q2,Q25, BC_AB, BBTR are set to open by setting the appropriate moduleinputs as follows. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated0=FIXD-OFF and 1=FIXD-ON:

• Q20_OP = 1

• Q20_CL = 0

• Q2_OP = 1

• Q2_CL = 0

• Q25_OP = 1

• Q25_CL = 0

• BC_AB_CL = 0

• BBTR_OP = 1

4.2.3 Single breaker arrangement, transformer bay

4.2.3.1 Signals from bus cou-pler

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus sectionsbusbar-busbar connection could exist via the bus-section disconnectobus coupler within the other bus section.


The project-specific logic for input signals concerning bus coupler aresame as the specific logic for the line bay (ABC_LINE):

BC_AB_CLSignal if a bus-coupler connection exists between busbar A and B.



A2

B2C

AB_TRAFO ABC_BC AB_TRAFO ABC_BC


(X80151-19)


Version 1.0-00

n thet to

onal:

andn by

E

_A,

pennd 1

tting


See “Signals from bus coupler” on page 112.

4.2.3.2 Parameter setting If there is no second busbar B and therefore no Q2 disconnector, theinterlocking for Q2 is not used. The state for Q2, Q25, BC_AB are seopen by setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functiblock diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FIXD-OFF and 1=FIXD-ON

• Q2_OP = 1

• Q2_CL = 0

• Q25_OP = 1

• Q25_CL = 0

• BC_AB_CL = 0

If there is no second busbar B at the other side of the transformertherefore no TQ2 disconnector, then the state for TQ2 is set to opesetting the appropriate module inputs as follows:

• TQ2_OP = 1

• TQ2_CL = 0

4.2.4 Double-breaker arrangement

For a double, circuit-breaker bay, the modules DB_BUS_A, DB_LINand DB_BUS_B must be used.

4.2.5 Breaker and a half arrangement

For a breaker-and-a-half arrangement, the modules BH_LINEBH_CONN and BH_LINE_B must be used.

4.2.5.1 Parameter setting For application without Q9 and Q8, just set the appropriate inputs to ostate and disregard the outputs. In the functional block diagram, 0 aare designated 0=FIXD-OFF and 1=FIXD-ON:

• Q9_OP = 1

• Q9_CL = 0

• Q8_OP = 1

• Q8_CL = 0

If, in this case, a line voltage supervision is added, then rather than seQ9 to open state, specify the state of the voltage supervision:

• Q9_OP = VOLT_OP

• Q9_CL = VOLT_CL


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 124

ionsmustB onnsfer

.

AB

bay

If there is no voltage supervision, then set the corresponding inputs as fol-lows:

• VOLT_OP = 1

• VOLT_CL = 0

4.2.6 Bus-section breaker

4.2.6.1 Signals from all feed-ers

If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers into bus sectand both circuit breaker are closed, the opening of the circuit breaker be blocked if a bus-coupler connection exists between busbar A and one bus-section side and if on the other bus-section side a busbar trais in progress:

Fig. 20 Busbars divided by bus-section circuit breakers


BBTR_OPSignal if no busbar transfer is in progress concerning this bus section

VP_BBTRThe switch status of BBTR is valid.

EXDUP_ABSignal if there is no transmission error from any bay connected to thebusbars.

These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer (ABC_TRAFO), and bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:

Q1Q2OPTRSignal if Q1 or Q2 or both are open.

VPQ1Q2TRThe switch status of Q1 and Q2 are valid.


A2

B2C

ABC_LINEABC_BC

ABC_LINEABC_BC

A1A2_BSB1B2_BS

AB_TRAFOAB_TRAFO

(X80151-20)


Version 1.0-00

EXDUP_ABSignal if there is no transmission error from the bay that contains theabove information. This signal is taken from the data valid output on thecommand function block.

These signals from each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:

BCABOPTRSignal if there is no bus-coupler connection through the own bus couplerbetween busbar A and B.



These signals from the bus-section circuit breaker bay (A1A2_BS,B1B2_BS) are needed.


VPA1A2TRThe switch status of A1A2_BS is valid.



Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 126

For a bus-section circuit breaker between A1 and A2 section busbars,these conditions are valid:

Fig. 21 Signals from any bays for a bus-section circuit breaker between sections A1 and A2

&Q1Q2OPTR (bay 1/sect 2)

Q1Q2OPTR (bay n/sect 2)

BBTR_OP. . .. . .

&

VPQ1Q2TR (bay 1/sect 2)

VPQ1Q2TR (bay n/sect 2)VP_BBTR

. . .

. . .

≥1BCABOPTR (sect 1)A1A2OPTR (B1B2)



. . .

. . .

≥1BCABOPTR (sect 2)A1A2OPTR (B1B2)

&

VPA1A2TR (B1B2)VPBCABTR (sect 1)


VPQ1Q2TR (bay n/sect 1)

. . .

. . .

VPBCABTR (sect 2)

&

EXDUP_AB (bay 1/sect 2)

EXDUP_AB (bay n/sect 2)

. . .

. . .

EXDUP_BS (B1B2)EXDUP_BC (sect 1)



. . .

. . .

EXDUP_BC (sect 2)

EXDUP_AB

(X80151-21)


Version 1.0-00

For a bus-section circuit breaker between B1 and B2 section busbars,these conditions are valid:

Fig. 22 Signals from any bays for a bus-section circuit breaker between sections B1 and B2



BBTR_OP. . .. . .

&


VPQ1Q2TR (bay n/sect 2)VP_BBTR

. . .

. . .

≥1BCABOPTR (sect 1)A1A2OPTR (A1A2)



. . .

. . .

≥1BCABOPTR (sect 2)A1A2OPTR (A1A2)

&

VPA1A2TR (A1A2)VPBCABTR (sect 1)


VPQ1Q2TR (bay n/sect 1)

. . .

. . .

VPBCABTR (sect 2)

&



. . .

. . .

EXDUP_BS (A1A2)EXDUP_BC (sect 1)



. . .

. . .

EXDUP_BC (sect 2)

EXDUP_AB

(X80151-22)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 128

-

thatfor

the

4.2.6.2 Parameter setting If there is no other busbar via the busbar loops that are possible, theneither the interlocking for the Q0 open circuit breaker is not used or thestate for BBTR is set to open. That is, no busbar transfer is in progress inthis bus section:

• BBTR_OP = 1

4.2.7 Bus-section disconnector

4.2.7.1 Signals in single breaker arrangement

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors, the signal no otherdisconnector connected to the bus section must be made by a project-specific logic.

The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, is, for both bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC. But B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used.



A1DC_OPSignal if all disconnectors on busbar A1 are open.


VPA1_DCThe switch status of A1_DC is valid.


EXDUP_BBSignal if there is no transmission error from any bay that containsabove information.


A2B2

C

ABC_LINE AB_TRAFO ABC_LINEABC_BC


AB_TRAFO

...

...

...

A3

B3

(X80151-23)


Version 1.0-00

These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay(AB_TRAFO), and each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:

Q1OPTRSignal if Q1 is open.

Q2OPTRSignal if Q2 (AB_TRAFO, ABC_LINE) is open.

Q20OPTRSignal if Q20 (ABC_BC) is open.

VPQ1TRThe switch status of Q1 is valid.


VPQ20TRThe switch status of Q2 and Q20 are valid.

EXDUP_BBSignal if there is no transmission error from the bay that contains theabove information. This signal is taken from the data valid output on thecommand function block.

If there is an additional bus-section disconnector, the signal from the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) must be used:




If there is an additional bus-section circuit breaker rather than an addi-tional bus-section disconnector the signals from the bus-section, circuit-breaker bay (A1A2_BS) rather than the bus-section disconnector bay(A1A2_DC) must be used:





Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 130


EXDUP_BSSignal if there is no transmission error from the bay BS (bus-section cou-pler bay) that contains the above information. This signal is taken fromthe data valid output on the command function block.

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the A1 busbar sec-tion are valid:

Fig. 24 Signals from any bays in section A1 to a bus-section discon-nector

&Q1OPTR (bay 1/sect A1)

Q1OPTR (bay n/sect A1)

A1DC_OP

. . .

. . .

&VPQ1TR (bay 1/sect A1)

VPQ1TR (bay n/sect A1)

VPA1_DC

. . .

. . .

&EXDUP_BB (bay 1/sect A1)

EXDUP_BB (bay n/sect A1)

EXDUP_BB

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

(X80151-24)


Version 1.0-00


Fig. 25 Signals from any bays in section A2 to a bus-section discon-nector

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the B1 busbar sec-tion are valid:

Fig. 26 Signals from any bays in section B1 to a bus-section discon-nector



A2DC_OP

. . .

. . .



VPA2_DC

. . .

. . .



EXDUP_BB

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

DCOPTR (A2/A3)

VPDCTR (A2/A3)

EXDUP_DC (A2/A3)(X80151-25)

&Q2(20)OPTR (bay 1/sect B1)

Q2(20)OPTR (bay n/sect B1)

B1DC_OP (A1DC_OP)

. . .

. . .

&VPQ2(20)TR (bay 1/sect B1)

VPQ2(20)TR (bay n/sect B1)

VPB1_DC (VPA1_DC)

. . .

. . .

&EXDUP_BB (bay 1/sect B1)

EXDUP_BB (bay n/sect B1)

EXDUP_BB

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

(X80151-26)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 132


Fig. 27 Signals from any bays in section B2 to a bus-section discon-nector

4.2.7.2 Signals in double-breaker arrangement

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors, the signal for thebusbar disconnector bay no other disconnector connected to the bus sec-tion must be made by a project-specific logic.

The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, thatis, for both bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC. But forB1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used.




B2DC_OP (A2DC_OP)

. . .

. . .



VPB2_DC (VPA2_DC)

. . .

. . .



EXDUP_BB

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

DCOPTR (B2/B3)

VPDCTR (B2/B3)

EXDUP_DC (B2/B3)(X80151-27)

Section 1 Section 2A1B1

A2

B2

DB_BUS DB_BUS DB_BUS DB_BUS


(X80151-28)


Version 1.0-00






EXDUP_BBSignal if there is no transmission error from bay DB (double-breaker bay)that contains the above information.

These signals from each double-breaker bay (DB_BUS) are needed:





EXDUP_DBSignal if there is no transmission error from the bay that contains theabove information. This signal is taken from the data valid output on thecommand function block.

The logic is identical to the double busbar configuration described in“Signals in single breaker arrangement” on page 28.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 134


Fig. 29 Signals from double-breaker bays in section A1 to a bus-sec-tion disconnector


Fig. 30 Signals from double-breaker bays in section A2 to a bus-sec-tion disconnector



A1DC_OP

. . .

. . .



VPA1_DC

. . .

. . .

&EXDUP_DB (bay 1/sect A1)

EXDUP_DB (bay n/sect A1)

EXDUP_BB

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

(X80151-29)



A2DC_OP

. . .

. . .



VPA2_DC

. . .

. . .

&EXDUP_DB (bay 1/sect A2)

EXDUP_DB (bay n/sect A2)

EXDUP_BB

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

(X80151-30)


Version 1.0-00


Fig. 31 Signals from double-breaker bays in section B1 to a bus-sec-tion disconnector


Fig. 32 Signals from double-breaker bays in section B2 to a bus-sec-tion disconnector

4.2.7.3 Signals in breaker and a half arrangement

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors, the signal for thebusbar disconnector bay no other disconnector connected to the bus sec-tion must be made by a project-specific logic.

&Q2OPTR (bay 1/sect B1)

Q2OPTR (bay n/sect B1)

B1DC_OP (A1DC_OP). . .. . .

&VPQ2TR (bay 1/sect B1)

VPQ2TR (bay n/sect B1)

VPB1_DC (VPA1_DC)

. . .

. . .

&EXDUP_DB (bay 1/sect B1)

EXDUP_DB (bay n/sect B1)

EXDUP_BB

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

(X80151-31)

&Q2OPTR (bay 1/sect B2)

Q2OPTR (bay n/sect B2)

B2DC_OP (A2DC_OP)

. . .

. . .

&VPQ2TR (bay 1/sect B2)

VPQ2TR (bay n/sect B2)

VPB2_DC (VPA2_DC)

. . .

. . .

&EXDUP_DB (bay 1/sect B2)

EXDUP_DB (bay n/sect B2)

EXDUP_BB

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

(X80151-32)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 136

” on

alf)

tors

The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, thatis, for both bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC. But forB1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used.


The project-specific logic are the same as for the logic for the double-breaker configuration. See “Signals in double-breaker arrangementpage 132.





EXDUP_BBSignal if there is no transmission error from bay BH (breaker and a hthat contains the above information.

4.2.8 Bus earthing switch

4.2.8.1 Signals in single breaker arrangement

The busbar earthing switch is only allowed to operate if all disconnecof the bus section are open.

Fig. 34 Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)


A2

B2

BH_LINE BH_LINE BH_LINE BH_LINE


(X80151-33)


A2

B2C

ABC_LINE

ABC_BC

ABC_LINE


AB_TRAFOBB_ES BB_ES

(X80151-34)


Version 1.0-00


ABCDC_OPSignal if all disconnectors of this busbar section are open.

VP_ABCDCThe switch status of ABCDC is valid.

EXDUP_BBSignal if no transmission error from any bay containing the above infor-mation.

These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay(AB_TRAFO), and each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:


Q2OPTRSignal if Q2 (AB_TRAFO, ABC_LINE) is open.

Q20OPTRSignal if Q2 and Q20 (ABC_BC) are open.




VPQ20TRThe switch status of Q2 and Q20 are valid.


EXDUP_BBSignal if there is no transmission error from the bay that contains theabove information.This signal is taken from the data valid output on thecommand function block.

These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) arealso needed. For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B areused. The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars,that is, for both bus-section disconnectors A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.




Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 138


If no bus-section disconnector exists the signal DCOPTR, VPDCTR andEXDUP_DC are set to 1 (FIXD-ON).

If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals fromthe bus-section coupler bay (A1A2_BS) rather than the bus-section dis-connector bay (A1A2_DC) must be used. For B1B2_BS, correspondingsignals from busbar B are used. The same type of module (A1A2_BS) isused for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section circuit breakersA1A2_BS and B1B2_BS.





EXDUP_BSSignal if there is no transmission error from the bay (bus-section couplerbay) that contains the above information. This signal is taken from thedata valid output on the command function block.


Version 1.0-00

For a busbar earthing switch, these conditions from the A1 busbar sectionare valid:

Fig. 35 Signals from any bays in section A1 to a busbar earthing switch in the same section

For a busbar earthing switch, these conditions from the A2 busbar sectionare valid:

Fig. 36 Signals from any bays in section A2 to a busbar earthing switch in the same section



ABCDC_OP

. . .

. . .



VP_ABCDC

. . .

. . .



EXDUP_BB

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

DCOPTR (A1/A2)

VPDCTR (A1/A2)

EXDUP_DC (A1/A2)(X80151-35)



ABCDC_OP

. . .

. . .



VP_ABCDC

. . .

. . .



EXDUP_BB

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

DCOPTR (A1/A2)

VPDCTR (A1/A2)

EXDUP_DC (A1/A2) (X80151-36)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 140

For a busbar earthing switch, these conditions from the B1 busbar sectionare valid:

Fig. 37 Signals from any bays in section B1 to a busbar earthing switch in the same section

For a busbar earthing switch, these conditions from the B2 busbar sectionare valid:

Fig. 38 Signals from any bays in section B2 to a busbar earthing switch in the same section



ABCDC_OP

. . .

. . .



VP_ABCDC

. . .

. . .



EXDUP_BB

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

DCOPTR (B1/B2)

VPDCTR (B1/B2)

EXDUP_DC (B1/B2) (X80151-37)



ABCDC_OP

. . .

. . .



VP_ABCDC

. . .

. . .



EXDUP_BB

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

DCOPTR (B1/B2)

VPDCTR (B1/B2)

EXDUP_DC (B1/B2)(X80151-38)


Version 1.0-00

For a busbar earthing switch on bypass busbar C, these conditions arevalid:

Fig. 39 Signals from bypass busbar to busbar earthing switch

4.2.8.2 Signals in double-breaker arrangement

The busbar earthing switch is only allowed to operate if all disconnectorsof the bus section are open.





EXDUP_BBSignal if there is no transmission error from any bay that contains theabove information.

&Q7OPTR (bay 1)

Q7OPTR (bay n)

ABCDC_OP

. . .

. . .

&VPQ7TR (bay 1)

VPQ7TR (bay n)

VP_ABCDC

. . .

. . .

&EXDUP_BB (bay 1)

EXDUP_BB (bay n)

EXDUP_BB

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

(X80151-39)


A2

B2

DB_BUS DB_BUS

A1A2_DC(BS)B1B2_DC(BS)BB_ES BB_ES

(X80151-40)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 142

tors

These signals from each double-breaker bay (DB_BUS) are needed:





EXDUP_DBSignal if there is no transmission error from the bay that contains theabove information. This signal is taken from the data valid output on thecommand function block.

These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) arealso needed. For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B areused. The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars,that is, for both bus-section disconnectors A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.




The logic is identical to the double busbar configuration described in“Signals in single breaker arrangement” on page 36.

4.2.8.3 Signals in breaker and a half arrange-ment

The busbar earthing switch is only allowed to operate if all disconnecof the bus section are open.



A2

B2

BH_LINE BH_LINE

A1A2_DC(BS)B1B2_DC(BS)BB_ES BB_ES

(X80151-41)


Version 1.0-00

on

the

The project-specific logic are the same as for the logic for the double bus-bar configuration. See “Signals in single breaker arrangement” page 36.



EXDUP_BBSignal if there is no transmission error from any bay that containsabove information.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 144

5 TestingThe interlocking function consists of a bay-level part and a station-levelpart. The interlocking is delivery specific and is realized by bay-to-baycommunication over the station bus. For that reason, test the function in asystem, that is, either in a complete delivery system as an acceptance test(FAT/SAT) or as parts of that system.


Version 1.0-00

6 Appendix


6.1.1 ABC_LINE

Fig. 42 Simplified terminal diagram of ABC_LINE

ABC_LINEQ0_OPQ0_CLQ9_OPQ9_CLQ1_OPQ1_CLQ2_OPQ2_CLQ7_OPQ7_CLQ51_OPQ51_CLQ52_OPQ52_CLQ8_OPQ8_CLQ15_OPQ15_CLQ25_OP

Q0CLRELQ0CLITL

Q9RELQ9ITL

Q1RELQ1ITL

Q2REL

(X80151-42)

Q25_CLQ75_OPQ75_CLC_DC_OPBC_AB_CLBC_AC_OPBC_AC_CLBC_BC_OPBC_BC_CLVOLT_OPVOLT_CLVP_C_DCVP_BC_ABVP_BC_ACVP_BC_BCEXDUP_ESEXVVA_ESEXDU_BPBEXVV_BPBEXDUP_BCEXVVA_BCQ9EX1Q9EX2Q1EX1Q1EX2Q1EX3Q2EX1Q2EX2Q2EX3Q7EX1Q7EX2Q7EX3Q7EX4

Q2ITLQ7RELQ7ITL

Q51RELQ51ITL

Q52RELQ52ITLQ8RELQ8ITL

Q1OPTRQ1CLTRQ2OPTRQ2CLTRQ7OPTRQ7CLTR

Q1Q2OPTRQ1Q2CLTR

VPQ1TRVPQ2TRVPQ7TR

VPQ1Q2TR

IFxx


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 146

Q0_OPQ0_CL

Q0_OP

=1

VPQ0

VPQ51

VPQ52

VPQ8

Q8_OP

Q9EX1

VPQ52

VPQ8

&≥1

VPQ0

Q51_OP

Q52_OP

Q9_OPQ9_CL =1 VPQ9Q1_OPQ1_CL =1 VPQ1Q2_OPQ2_CL =1 VPQ2Q7_OPQ7_CL =1 VPQ7Q51_OPQ51_CL =1 VPQ51Q52_OPQ52_CL =1 VPQ52Q8_OPQ8_CL =1 VPQ8Q15_OPQ15_CL =1 VPQ15Q25_OPQ25_CL =1 VPQ25Q75_OPQ75_CL =1 VPQ75VOLT_OPVOLT_CL =1 VPVOLT

1

Q9REL

Q9ITL

&

Q52CL

Q8CL

Q9EX2

1

Q0CLREL

Q0CLITL&

ABC_LINE


Version 1.0-00

VPQ15

VPQ0

VPQ2

VPQ51

VPQ52

Q2_OP

&≥1

Q0_OP

EXDUP_ES

Q51_OP

Q52_OP

Q15_OP

&VP_BC_AB

EXVVA_ES

Q1EX1

VPQ2

BC_AB_CL

Q2_CL

EXDUP_BC

EXVVA_BC

Q1EX2

VPQ51

&

Q51_CL

VPQ15

Q15_CL

EXDUP_ES

EXVVA_ES

Q1EX3

1

Q1REL

Q1ITL


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 148

VPQ25

VPQ0

VPQ1

VPQ51

VPQ52

Q1_OP

&≥1

Q0_OP

EXDUP_ES

Q51_OP

Q52_OP

Q25_OP

&VP_BC_AB

EXVVA_ES

Q2EX1

VPQ1

BC_AB_CL

Q1_CL

EXDUP_BC

EXVVA_BC

Q2EX2

VPQ51

&

Q51_CL

VPQ25

Q25_CL

EXDUP_ES

EXVVA_ES

Q2EX3

1

Q2REL

Q2ITL


Version 1.0-00

VP_BC_BC

VPQ8

VPQ75

VP_C_DC

VP_BC_AC

EXDUP_ES

&≥1

Q8_OP

EXVV_BPB

EXVVA_ES

C_DC_OP

EXDU_BPB

&

EXVVA_BC

BC_AC_OP

BC_BC_OP

EXDUP_BC

Q7EX1

VPQ0

VPQ1

VPQ8

VPQ9

VP_C_DC

VPQ75

VP_BC_AC

Q0_CL

Q1_CL

Q8_OP

1

Q7REL

Q7ITL

Q75_OP

Q9_CL

EXDUP_ES

Q75_OP

EXVVA_ES

C_DC_OP

EXDU_BPB

EXVV_BPB

EXVVA_BC

BC_AC_CL

EXDUP_BC

Q7EX2


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 150

&VPQ0

VPQ2

VPQ8

VPQ9

VP_C_DC

VPQ75

VP_BC_BC

Q0_CL

Q2_CL

Q8_OP

Q9_CL

EXDUP_ES

Q75_OP

EXVVA_ES

C_DC_OP

EXDU_BPB

EXVV_BPB

EXVVA_BC

BC_BC_CL

EXDUP_BC

Q7EX3

≥1

1

Q51REL

Q51ITL

1

Q52REL

Q52ITL

&

VPQ1

VPQ2

VPQ9

Q1_OP

Q2_OP

Q9_OP

1

Q8REL

Q8ITL

&VPQ7

VPQ9

VPVOLT

Q7_OP

VPQ8

VPQ75

Q8_CL

Q75_CL

Q7EX4

&

EXDUP_ES

EXVVA_ES

Q9_OP

VOLT_OP


Version 1.0-00

Fig. 43 Terminal diagram of ABC_LINE

≥11

Q1Q2OP

Q1Q2CL

Q1_OP

Q2_OP

Q1_OP

Q1_CL

VPQ1

Q1OPTR

Q1CLTR

VPQ1TR

VPQ1

VPQ2 &VPQ1Q2TR

Q2_OP

Q2_CL

VPQ2

Q2OPTR

Q2CLTR

VPQ2TR

Q7_OP

Q7_CL

VPQ7

Q7OPTR

Q7CLTR

VPQ7TR

(X80151-43)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 152

6.1.2 ABC_BC

Fig. 44 Simplified terminal diagram of ABC_BC

ABC_BCQ0_OPQ0_CL

Q1_CLQ20_OPQ20_CLQ7_OPQ7_CLQ2_OPQ2_CLQ51_OPQ51_CLQ52_OPQ52_CLQ15_OPQ15_CLQ25_OPQ25_CLQ75_OP

Q0OPRELQ0OPITL

Q0CLRELQ0CLITL

Q1RELQ1ITL

Q20REL

Q75_CLBBTR_OPBC_AB_CLVP_BBTRVP_BC_ABEXDUP_ESEXVVA_ESEXDUP_ABEXVVA_ABEXDUP_BCEXVVA_BCQ0_O_EX1Q0_O_EX2

Q1EX1Q1EX2Q1EX3Q20EX1Q20EX2Q20EX3Q2EX1Q2EX2Q7EX1Q7EX2

Q20ITLQ7RELQ7ITL

Q2RELQ2ITL

Q51RELQ51ITL

Q52RELQ52ITL

Q1OPTRQ1CLTR

Q20OPTRQ20CLTRQ7OPTRQ7CLTR

Q1Q20OPTQ1Q20CLT

BCABOPTRBCABCLTRBCACOPTRBCACCLTR

Q1_OP

Q0_O_EX3

BCBCOPTRBCBCCLTR

VPQ20TRVPQ7TR

VPQ1Q20TVPBCABTRVPBCACTRVPBCBCTR

(X80151-44)

IGxx


Version 1.0-00

Q0_OPQ0_CL =1 VPQ0Q1_OPQ1_CL =1 VPQ1Q2_OPQ2_CL =1 VPQ2Q7_OPQ7_CL =1 VPQ7Q20_OPQ20_CL =1 VPQ20Q51_OPQ51_CL =1 VPQ51

Q52_OPQ52_CL =1 VPQ52Q15_OPQ15_CL =1 VPQ15Q25_OPQ25_CL =1 VPQ25Q75_OPQ75_CL =1 VPQ75

BBTR_OP

VPQ2

Q2_OP

Q0_O_EX2

VP_BBTR

&

Q0_O_EX3

&

≥11

Q0OPREL

Q0OPITL

EXDUP_AB

EXVVA_AB

VPQ1

Q1_OP

Q0_O_EX1

&1

Q0CLREL

Q0CLITL

VPQ1

VPQ2

&

VPQ7

VPQ20

ABC_BC


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 154

VPQ15

VPQ0

VPQ20

VPQ51

VPQ52

Q20_OP

&≥1

Q0_OP

EXDUP_ES

Q51_OP

Q52_OP

Q15_OP

&VP_BC_AB

EXVVA_ES

Q1EX1

VPQ20

BC_AB_CL

Q20_CL

EXDUP_BC

EXVVA_BC

Q1EX2

VPQ51

&

Q51_CL

VPQ15

Q15_CL

EXDUP_ES

EXVVA_ES

Q1EX3

1

Q1REL

Q1ITL


Version 1.0-00

VPQ25

VPQ0

VPQ1

VPQ51

VPQ52

Q1_OP

&≥1

Q0_OP

EXDUP_ES

Q51_OP

Q52_OP

Q25_OP

&VP_BC_AB

EXVVA_ES

Q20EX1

VPQ1

BC_AB_CL

Q1_CL

EXDUP_BC

EXVVA_BC

Q20EX2

VPQ51

&

Q51_CL

VPQ25

Q25_CL

EXDUP_ES

EXVVA_ES

Q20EX3

1

Q20REL

Q20ITL


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 156

VPQ75

VPQ0

VPQ2

VPQ51

VPQ52

Q2_OP

&≥1

Q0_OP

EXDUP_ES

Q51_OP

Q52_OP

Q75_OP

&VPQ75

EXVVA_ES

Q7EX1

VPQ52

Q75_CL

Q52_CL

EXDUP_ES

EXVVA_ES

Q7EX2

1

Q7REL

Q7ITL

VPQ25

VPQ0

VPQ7

VPQ51

VPQ52

Q7_OP

&≥1

Q0_OP

EXDUP_ES

Q51_OP

Q52_OP

Q25_OP

&VPQ25

EXVVA_ES

Q2EX1

VPQ52

Q25_CL

Q52_CL

EXDUP_ES

EXVVA_ES

Q2EX2

1

Q2REL

Q2ITL


Version 1.0-00

Fig. 45 Terminal diagram of ABC_BC

VPQ0

VPQ1 &VPBCABTR

VPQ2

≥1

Q0_OP

Q1_OP

Q7_OP1

BCACOPTR

BCACCLTR

VPQ0

VPQ1 &VPBCACTR

VPQ7

≥1

Q0_OP

Q20_OP

Q7_OP1

BCBCOPTR

BCBCCLTR

VPQ0

VPQ20 &VPBCBCTR

VPQ7

1

Q51REL

Q51ITL

1

Q52REL

Q52ITL

&

VPQ1

VPQ2

VPQ7

VPQ20

Q1_OP

Q2_OP

Q7_OP

Q20_OP

Q1_OP

Q1_CL

VPQ1

Q1OPTR

Q1CLTR

VPQ1TR

Q7_OP

Q7_CL

VPQ7

Q7OPTR

Q7CLTR

VPQ7TR

≥1

1

Q20OPTR

Q20CLTR

Q0_OP

Q1_OP

Q2_OP

Q2_OP

Q20_OP &

VPQ1

VPQ2 & VPQ1Q20T

VPQ2

VPQ20 & VPQ20TR

1

BCABOPTR

BCABCLTR

≥1Q1_OP

Q20_OP1

Q1Q20OPT

Q1Q20CLT

(x80151-45)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 158

6.1.3 AB_TRAFO

Fig. 46 Simplified terminal diagram of AB_TRAFO

AB_TRAFOQ0_OPQ0_CL

Q1_CLQ2_OPQ2_CLQ51_OPQ51_CLQ52_OPQ52_CLTQ1_OPTQ1_CLTQ2_OPTQ2_CLTQ51_OPTQ51_CLQ15_OPQ15_CLQ25_OP

Q0CLRELQ0CLITL

Q1RELQ1ITL

Q2RELQ2ITL

Q51REL

Q25_CLBC_AB_CLVP_BC_ABEXDUP_ESEXVVA_ESEXDUP_BCEXVVA_BCQ0EX1Q0EX2

Q1EX1Q1EX2Q1EX3Q2EX1Q2EX2Q2EX3

Q51ITLQ52RELQ52ITL


Q1Q2OPTRQ1Q2CLTR

VPQ1TRVPQ2TR

VPQ1Q2TR

Q1_OP

Q0EX3

IExx

(X80151-46)


Version 1.0-00

Q0_OPQ0_CL =1 VPQ0Q1_OPQ1_CL =1 VPQ1Q2_OPQ2_CL =1 VPQ2Q51_OPQ51_CL =1 VPQ51Q52_OPQ52_CL =1 VPQ52TQ1_OPTQ1_CL =1 VPTQ1

TQ2_OPTQ2_CL =1 VPTQ2TQ51_OPTQ51_CL =1 VPTQ51Q15_OPQ15_CL =1 VPQ15Q25_OPQ25_CL =1 VPQ25

≥1

TQ51_OP

Q0EX3

Q51_CLQ52_CL

TQ51_CL

Q0EX1

&

&1

Q0CLREL

Q0CLITL

VPQ1

VPQ2

VPTQ51

VPQ51

VPQ52

VPTQ1

VPTQ2

Q0EX2

AB_TRAFO


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 160

VPTQ51

VPQ0

VPQ2

VPQ51

VPQ52

Q2_OP

&≥1

VPQ15

Q0_OP

EXDUP_ES

Q51_OP

Q52_OP

TQ51_OP

Q15_OP

&

VP_BC_AB

EXVVA_ES

Q1EX1

VPQ2

VPTQ51

BC_AB_CL

Q2_CL

TQ51_OP

VPQ52

EXDUP_BC

EXVVA_BC

Q1EX2

VPQ51

&

Q51_CL

VPTQ51

VPQ15

Q15_CL

Q52_CL

TQ51_CL

EXDUP_ES

EXVVA_ES

Q1EX3

1

Q1REL

Q1ITL


Version 1.0-00

VPTQ51

VPQ0

VPQ1

VPQ51

VPQ52

Q1_OP

&≥1

VPQ25

Q0_OP

EXDUP_ES

Q51_OP

Q52_OP

TQ51_OP

Q25_OP

&

VP_BC_AB

EXVVA_ES

Q2EX1

VPQ1

VPTQ51

BC_AB_CL

Q1_CL

TQ51_OP

VPQ52

EXDUP_BC

EXVVA_BC

Q2EX2

VPQ51

&

Q51_CL

VPTQ51

VPQ25

Q25_CL

Q52_CL

TQ51_CL

EXDUP_ES

EXVVA_ES

Q2EX3

1

Q2REL

Q2ITL


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 162

Fig. 47 Terminal diagram of AB_TRAFO

1

Q51REL

Q51ITL

1

Q52REL

Q52ITL

&

VPQ1

VPQ2

VPTQ1

VPTQ2

Q1_OP

Q1_CL

VPQ1

Q1OPTR

Q1CLTR

VPQ1TR

Q2_OP

Q2_CL

VPQ2

Q2OPTR

Q2CLTR

VPQ2TR

≥11

Q1Q2OPTR

Q1Q2CLTR

Q1_OP

Q2_OP

VPQ2

VPQ1

&

VPQ1Q2TR

Q1_OP

Q2_OP

TQ1_OP

TQ2_OP

(X80151-47)


Version 1.0-00

6.1.4 A1A2_BS

Fig. 48 Simplified terminal diagram of A1A2_BS

A1A2_BSQ0_OPQ0_CL

Q11_CLQ12_OPQ12_CLQ51_OPQ51_CLQ52_OPQ52_CLA1Q15_OPA1Q15_CLA2Q15_OPA2Q15_CLBBTR_OPVP_BBTR

Q0OPRELQ0OPITL

Q0CLRELQ0CLITLQ11RELQ11ITL

Q12REL

(X80151-48)

EXDUP_ABEXVVA_ABEXDUP_ESEXVVA_ESQ0_O_EX1Q0_O_EX2

Q11EX1Q11EX2Q12EX1Q12EX2

Q12ITLQ51RELQ51ITL

Q52RELQ52ITL

A1A2OPTRA1A2CLTR


VPA1A2TR

Q11_OP

Q0_O_EX3

VPQ11TRVPQ12TR

IHxx


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 164

Q11_OPQ11_CL =1 VPQ11Q12_OPQ12_CL =1 VPQ12Q51_OPQ51_CL =1 VPQ51Q52_OPQ52_CL =1 VPQ52A1Q15_OPA1Q15_CL =1 VPA1Q15A2Q15_OPA2Q15_CL =1 VPA2Q15

Q0_OPQ0_CL =1 VPQ0

BBTR_OP

VPQ12

Q12_OP

Q0_O_EX2

VP_BBTR

&

Q0_O_EX3

&

≥11

Q0OPREL

Q0OPITL

EXDUP_AB

EXVVA_AB

VPQ11

Q11_OP

Q0_O_EX1

&1

Q0CLREL

Q0CLITL

VPQ11

VPQ12

&

Q0_OP

VPQ0

VPQ51

VPQ52

VPA1Q15

EXDUP_ES

VPQ51

VPA1Q15

&≥1

Q51_OP

Q52_OP

1

Q11REL

Q11ITL

Q51_CL

A1Q15_CL

Q11EX2

A1Q15_OP

EXVVA_ES

Q11EX1

&

EXDUP_ES

EXVVA_ES

A1A2_BS


Version 1.0-00

Fig. 49 Terminal diagram of A1A2_BS

Q0_OP

VPQ0

VPQ51

VPQ52

VPA2Q15

EXDUP_ES

VPQ52

VPA2Q15

&≥1

Q51_OP

Q52_OP

1

Q12REL

Q12ITL

Q52_CL

A2Q15_CL

Q12EX2

A2Q15_OP

EXVVA_ES

Q12EX1

&

EXDUP_ES

EXVVA_ES

1

Q51REL

Q51ITL

1

Q52REL

Q52ITL

&

VPQ11

VPQ12

Q11_OP

Q12_OP

Q11_OP

Q11_CL

VPQ11

Q11OPTR

Q11CLTR

VPQ11TR

Q12_OP

Q12_CL

VPQ12

Q12OPTR

Q12CLTR

VPQ12TR

≥11

A1A2OPTR

A1A2CLTR

Q11_OP

Q12_OP

Q0_OPVPQ11

VPQ12

VPQ0

& VPA1A2TR

(X80151-49)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 166

6.1.5 A1A2_DC

Fig. 50 Simplified terminal diagram of A1A2_DC

A1A2_DCQ11_OPQ11_CLA1Q15_OPA1Q15_CLA2Q15_OPA2Q15_CLA1DC_OPA2DC_OPVPA1_DCVPA2_DCEXDUP_ESEXVVA_ESEXDUP_BBEXVVA_BBQ11C_EX1Q11C_EX2Q11O_EX1Q11O_EX2Q11O_EX3

Q11OPRELQ11OPITL

Q11CLRELQ11CLITL

DCOPTRDCCLTRVPDCTR

(X80151-50)

IIxx


Version 1.0-00

Q11O_EX1

Q11_OP

Q11_CL

A1Q15_OP

A1Q15_CL

A2Q15_OP

A2Q15_CL

A1DC_OP

A2DC_OP

VPA1_DC

VPA2_DC

EXDUP_ES

EXVVA_ES

EXDUP_BB

Q11O_EX2

Q11O_EX3

EXVVA_BB

=1

=1

=1

A1Q15_OP

A2Q15_OP

&

EXDUP_ES

EXVVA_ES

EXDUP_BB

EXVVA_BB

&

A1Q15_CL

A2Q15_CL

EXDUP_ES

EXVVA_ES

&

≥1

1

Q11OPREL

Q11OPITL

DCOPTR

DCCLTR

VPDCTR

VPA1Q15

VPA2Q15

VPA1Q15

VPA2Q15

VPQ11

A1Q15_CL

A2Q15_CL

VPA1Q15

VPA2Q15

VPA1Q15VPA2Q15

A1A2_DC


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 168

Fig. 51 Terminal diagram of A1A2_DC

A1DC_OP

VPA1_DC

VPA2_DC

EXDUP_ES

EXVVA_ES

EXDUP_BB

Q11C_EX1

Q11C_EX2

EXVVA_BB

A1Q15_OP

A2Q15_OP

&

&

≥1

1

Q11CLREL

Q11CLITL

A2DC_OP

A1Q15_CL

EXDUP_ES

EXVVA_ES

A2Q15_CL

VPA1Q15

VPA2Q15

VPA1Q15VPA2Q15

(X80151-51)


Version 1.0-00

6.1.6 BB_ES

Fig. 52 Simplified terminal diagram of BB_ES

Fig. 53 Terminal diagram of BB_ES

6.1.7 DB_BUS_A

Fig. 54 Simplified terminal diagram of DB_BUS_A

BB_ESQ15_OPQ15_CLABCDC_OPVP_ABCDCEXDUP_BBEXVVA_BB

Q15RELQ15ITL

BBESOPTRBBESCLTR

(X80151-52)

IJxx

1

Q15REL

Q15ITL

&VP_ABCDC

ABCDC_OP

EXDUP_BB

EXVVA_BB

Q15_OP

Q15_CL

BBESOPTR

BBESCLTR

(X80151-53)

BB_ES

DB_BUS_AQ01_OPQ01_CL

Q1_CLQ61_OPQ61_CLQ51_OPQ51_CLQ52_OPQ52_CLQ53_OPQ53_CLQ15_OPQ15_CLEXDUP_ESEXVVA_ES

Q01CLRELQ01CLITL


Q51REL

(X80151-54)


Q51ITLQ52RELQ52ITL

Q1OPTRQ1CLTRVPQ1TR

Q1_OP

IBxx


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 170

Q01_OP

VPQ01

VPQ51

VPQ52

VPQ53

&

Q53_OP

Q61EX1

VPQ52

VPQ53

&≥1

1

Q01CLREL

Q01CLITL

Q51_OP

Q52_OP


1

Q61REL

Q61ITL

VPQ61

VPQ1

&

Q52_CL

Q53_CL

Q61EX2

Q01_OPQ01_CL =1 VPQ01

Q01_OP

VPQ01

VPQ51

VPQ52

VPQ15

EXDUP_ES

VPQ51

VPQ15

&≥1

Q51_OP

Q52_OP

1

Q1REL

Q1ITL

Q51_CL

Q15_CL

Q1EX2

Q15_OP

EXVVA_ES

Q1EX1

&

EXDUP_ES

EXVVA_ES

DB_BUS_A


Version 1.0-00

Fig. 55 Terminal diagram of DB_BUS_-A

Fig. 56 Simplified terminal diagram of DB_LINE

DB_LINEQ01_OPQ01_CL

Q02_CLQ61_OPQ61_CLQ51_OPQ51_CLQ52_OPQ52_CLQ62_OPQ62_CLQ54_OPQ54_CLQ55_OPQ55_CLQ9_OPQ9_CLQ53_OP

Q9RELQ9ITL


Q53_CLQ8_OPQ8_CLVOLT_OPVOLT_CLQ9EX1Q9EX2Q9EX3Q9EX4

Q02_OP

Q9EX5

(X80151-55)

IAxx

&1

Q51REL

Q51ITL

VPQ61

VPQ1

Q61_OP

Q1_OP 1

Q52REL

Q52ITL

Q1_OP

Q1_CL

VPQ1

Q1OPTR

Q1CLTR

VPQ1TR

(x80151-55)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 172

VPQ53

VPQ01

VPQ02

VPQ51

VPQ52

VPQ8

Q9EX1

&≥1

VPQ54

VPQ55


Q54_OPQ54_CL =1 VPQ54Q55_OPQ55_CL =1 VPQ55Q9_OPQ9_CL =1 VPQ9Q53_OPQ53_CL =1 VPQ53Q8_OPQ8_CL =1 VPQ8VOLT_OPVOLT_CL =1 VPVOLT

1

Q9REL

Q9ITL

&

Q53_OP

Q01_OP

Q02_OP

Q51_OP

Q52_OP

Q8_OP

Q54_OP

Q55_OP

DB_LINE


Version 1.0-00

VPQ8

VPQ01

VPQ51

VPQ52

VPQ53

Q51_OP

&≥1

VPQ62

Q01_OP

Q9EX2

Q52_OP

Q53_OP

Q8_OP

Q62_OP

&

VPQ55

VPQ02

VPQ61

VPQ53

VPQ54

Q61_OP

VPQ8

Q02_OP

Q9EX3

Q53_OP

Q54_OP

Q55_OP

Q8_OP

&

VPQ61

VPQ53

VPQ8

Q8_OP

VPQ62

Q53_OP

Q61_OP

Q62_OP

Q9EX4

&VPQ53

Q8_CL

VPQ8

Q53_CL

Q9EX5


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 174

Fig. 57 Terminal diagram of DB_LINE

1

Q53REL

Q53ITL

&VPQ61

VPQ62

VPQ9

Q61_OP

1

Q8REL

Q8ITL

&VPQ9

VPVOLT

Q9_OP

VOLT_OP

Q62_OP

Q9_OP

(X80151-56)


Version 1.0-00

6.1.8 DB_BUS_B

Fig. 58 Simplified terminal diagram of DB_BUS_B

DB_BUS_BQ02_OPQ02_CL

Q62_CLQ2_OPQ2_CLQ54_OPQ54_CLQ55_OPQ55_CLQ53_OPQ53_CLQ25_OPQ25_CLEXDUP_ESEXVVA_ES

Q02CLRELQ02CLITL


Q54REL

(X80151-57)


Q54ITLQ55RELQ55ITL

Q2OPTRQ2CLTRVPQ2TR

Q62_OP

ICxx


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 176

Q02_OP

VPQ02

VPQ54

VPQ55

VPQ53

&

Q53_OP

Q62EX1

VPQ55

VPQ53

&≥1

1

Q02CLREL

Q02CLITL

Q54_OP

Q55_OP


1

Q62REL

Q62ITL

VPQ62

VPQ2

&

Q55_CL

Q53_CL

Q62EX2

Q02_OPQ02_CL =1 VPQ02

Q02_OP

VPQ02

VPQ54

VPQ55

VPQ25

EXDUP_ES

VPQ54

VPQ25

&≥1

Q54_OP

Q55_OP

1

Q2REL

Q2ITL

Q54_CL

Q25_CL

Q2EX2

Q25_OP

EXVVA_ES

Q2EX1

&

EXDUP_ES

EXVVA_ES

DB_BUS_B


Version 1.0-00

Fig. 59 Terminal diagram of DB_BUS_B

&1

Q54REL

Q54ITL

VPQ62

VPQ2

Q62_OP

Q2_OP 1

Q55REL

Q55ITL

Q2_OP

Q2_CL

VPQ2

Q2OPTR

Q2CLTR

VPQ2PTR

(X80151-58)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 178

6.1.9 BH_LINE_A

Fig. 60 Simplified terminal diagram of BH_LINE_A

BH_LINE_AQ0_OPQ0_CL

Q6_CLQ1_OPQ1_CLQ51_OPQ51_CLQ52_OPQ52_CLQ53_OPQ53_CLQ9_OPQ9_CLQ8_OPQ8_CLCQ0_OPCQ0_CLCQ61_OP

Q0CLRELQ0CLITL

Q6RELQ6ITL

Q1RELQ1ITL

Q51REL

(X80151-59)

CQ61_CLCQ51:OPCQ51_CLCQ52_OPCQ52_CLQ15_OPQ15_CLVOLT_OPVOLT_CLEXDUP_ESEXVVA_ESQ6EX1Q6EX2

Q1EX2Q9EX1Q9EX2Q9EX3Q9EX4Q9EX5Q9EX6Q9EX7

Q51ITLQ52RELQ52ITL


Q8RELQ8ITL

Q1OPTRQ1CLTRVPQ1TR

Q6_OP

Q1EX1

ILxx


Version 1.0-00

Q0_OPQ0_CL

Q0_OP

=1

VPQ0

VPQ51

VPQ52

VPQ53

&

Q53_OP

Q6EX1

VPQ52

VPQ53

&≥1

1

Q0CLREL

Q0CLITL

VPQ0

Q51_OP

Q52_OP

Q1_OPQ1_CL =1 VPQ1Q6_OPQ6_CL =1 VPQ6Q8_OPQ8_CL =1 VPQ8Q9_OPQ9_CL =1 VPQ9Q51_OPQ51_CL =1 VPQ51Q52_OPQ52_CL =1 VPQ52Q53_OPQ53_CL =1 VPQ53

CQ0_OPCQ0_CL =1 VPCQ0CQ51_OPCQ51_CL =1 VPCQ51CQ52_OPCQ52_CL =1 VPCQ52CQ61_OPCQ61_CL =1 VPCQ61Q15_OPQ15_CL =1 VPQ15VOLT_OPVOLT_CL =1 VPVOLT

1

Q6REL

Q6ITL

VPQ1

VPQ6

VPQ9

&

Q52_CL

Q53_CL

Q6EX2

BH_LINE_A


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 180

Q0_OP

VPQ0

VPQ51

VPQ52

VPQ15

Q15_OP

Q1EX1

EXDUP_ES

EXVVA_ES

&≥1

Q51_OP

Q52_OP

1

Q1REL

Q1ITL

&

VPQ51

VPQ15

Q51_CL

EXDUP_ES

EXVVA_ES

Q15_CL

Q1EX2

1

Q51REL

Q51ITL

&VPQ1

VPQ6

Q1_OP

Q6_OP

1

Q52REL

Q52ITL

1

Q53REL

Q53ITL

&VPQ6

VPQ9

VPCQ61

Q6_OP

Q9_OP

CQ61_OP

Q52_OP

Q6_OP

Q9EX2

Q0_OP

Q51_OP &

≥1

Q9EX3

VPQ52

VPQ0

VPQ6

VPQ8

VPQ51

&≥1

VPQ53

1

Q9REL

Q9ITL

VPCQ0

VPCQ61

VPCQ51

Q9EX1

VPCQ52


Version 1.0-00

Fig. 61 Terminal diagram of BH_LINE_A

1

Q8REL

Q8ITL

&VPQ9

VPVOLT

Q9_OP

VOLT_OP

CQ52_OP

CQ61_OP

Q9EX4

CQ0_OP

CQ51_OP &

≥1

Q9EX5

VPQ53

Q8_OP

Q53_OP

Q9EX6

VPQ8

& ≥1

Q8_CL

Q53_CL

Q9EX7

&

Q1_OP

Q1_CL

VPQ1

Q1OPTR

Q1CLTR

VPQ1TR

(X80151-60)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 182

6.1.10BH_CONN

Fig. 62 Simplified terminal diagram of BH_CONN

BH_CONNQ0_OPQ0_CL

Q61_CLQ62_OPQ62_CLQ51_OPQ51_CLQ52_OPQ52_CL1Q53_OP1Q53_CL2Q53_OP2Q53_CLQ61EX1Q61EX2

Q0CLRELQ0CLITLQ61RELQ61ITL

Q62RELQ62ITL

Q51REL

(X80151-61)

Q62EX1Q62EX2

Q51ITLQ52RELQ52ITL

Q61_OP

IKxx


Version 1.0-00

Fig. 63 Terminal diagram of BH_CONN

Q0_OP

VPQ0

VPQ51

VPQ52

VP1Q53

&

1Q53_OP

Q61EX1

VPQ51

VP1Q53

&≥1

1

Q0CLREL

Q0CLITL

(X80151-62)

Q51_OP

Q52_OP

Q61_OPQ61_CL =1 VPQ61Q62_OPQ62_CL =1 VPQ62Q51_OPQ51_CL =1 VPQ51Q52_OPQ52_CL =1 VPQ521Q53_OP1Q53_CL =1 VP1Q532Q53_OP2Q53_CL =1 VP2Q53

1

Q61REL

Q61ITL

VPQ61

VPQ62

&

Q51_CL

1Q53_CL

Q61EX2

Q0_OPQ0_CL =1 VPQ0

Q0_OP

VPQ0

VPQ51

VPQ52

VP2Q53

Q62EX1

VPQ52

VP2Q53

&≥1

Q51_OP

Q52_OP

1

Q62REL

Q62ITL

&

Q52_CL

2Q53_CL

Q62EX2

2Q53_OP

&1

Q51REL

Q51ITL

VPQ61

VPQ62

Q61_OP

Q62_OP 1

Q52REL

Q52ITL

BH_CONN


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 184

6.1.11BH_LINE_B

Fig. 64 Simplified terminal diagram of BH_LINE_B

BH_LINE_BQ0_OPQ0_CL

Q6_CLQ2_OPQ2_CLQ51_OPQ51_CLQ52_OPQ52_CLQ53_OPQ53_CLQ9_OPQ9_CLQ8_OPQ8_CLCQ0_OPCQ0_CLCQ62_OP

Q0CLRELQ0CLITL

Q6RELQ6ITL

Q2RELQ2ITL

Q51REL

(X80151-63)

CQ62_CLCQ51:OPCQ51_CLCQ52_OPCQ52_CLQ25_OPQ25_CLVOLT_OPVOLT_CLEXDUP_ESEXVVA_ESQ6EX1Q6EX2

Q2EX2Q9EX1Q9EX2Q9EX3Q9EX4Q9EX5Q9EX6Q9EX7

Q51ITLQ52RELQ52ITL


Q8RELQ8ITL

Q2OPTRQ2CLTRVPQ2TR

Q6_OP

Q2EX1

IMxx


Version 1.0-00

Q0_OPQ0_CL

Q0_OP

=1

VPQ0

VPQ51

VPQ52

VPQ53

&

Q53_OP

Q6EX1

VPQ52

VPQ53

&≥1

1

Q0CLREL

Q0CLITL

VPQ0

Q51_OP

Q52_OP

Q2_OPQ2_CL =1 VPQ2Q6_OPQ6_CL =1 VPQ6Q8_OPQ8_CL =1 VPQ8Q9_OPQ9_CL =1 VPQ9Q51_OPQ51_CL =1 VPQ51Q52_OPQ52_CL =1 VPQ52Q53_OPQ53_CL =1 VPQ53

CQ0_OPCQ0_CL =1 VPCQ0CQ51_OPCQ51_CL =1 VPCQ51CQ52_OPCQ52_CL =1 VPCQ52CQ62_OPCQ62_CL =1 VPCQ62Q25_OPQ25_CL =1 VPQ25VOLT_OPVOLT_CL =1 VPVOLT

1

Q6REL

Q6ITL

VPQ2

VPQ6

VPQ9

&

Q52_CL

Q53_CL

Q6EX2

BH_LINE_B


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 186

Q0_OP

VPQ0

VPQ51

VPQ52

VPQ25

Q25_OP

Q2EX1

EXDUP_ES

EXVVA_ES

&≥1

Q51_OP

Q52_OP

1

Q2REL

Q2ITL

&

VPQ51

VPQ25

Q51_CL

EXDUP_ES

EXVVA_ES

Q25_CL

Q2EX2

1

Q51REL

Q51ITL

&VPQ2

VPQ6

Q2_OP

Q6_OP

1

Q52REL

Q52ITL

1

Q53REL

Q53ITL

&VPQ6

VPQ9

VPCQ6

Q6_OP

Q9_OP

CQ6_OP

Q52_OP

Q6_OP

Q9EX2

Q0_OP

Q51_OP &

≥1

Q9EX3

VPQ52

VPQ0

VPQ6

VPQ8

VPQ51

&≥1

VPQ53

1

Q9REL

Q9ITL

VPCQ0

VPCQ62

VPCQ51

Q9EX1

VPCQ52


Version 1.0-00

Fig. 65 Terminal diagram of BH_LINE_B

1

Q8REL

Q8ITL

&VPQ9

VPVOLT

Q9_OP

VOLT_OP

CQ52_OP

CQ62_OP

Q9EX4

CQ0_OP

CQ51_OP &

≥1

Q9EX5

VPQ53

Q8_OP

Q53_OP

Q9EX6

VPQ8

& ≥1

Q8_CL

Q53_CL

Q9EX7

&

Q2_OP

Q2_CL

VPQ2

Q2OPTR

Q2CLTR

VPQ2TR

(X80151-64)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 188

6.2 Signal list

6.2.1 ABC_LINETable 1: Input signals for ABC_LINE

IN: DESCRIPTION:

IFxx-Q0_OP Signal is 1 if Q0 is open

IFxx-Q0_CL Signal is 1 if Q0 is closed















IFxx-Q15_OP Signal is 1 if Q15 on busbar A is open

IFxx-Q15_CL Signal is 1 if Q15 on busbar A is closed

IFxx-Q25_OP Signal is 1 if Q25 on busbar B is open

IFxx-Q25_CL Signal is 1 if Q25 on busbar B is closed

IFxx-Q75_OP Signal is 1 if Q75 on busbar C is open

IFxx-Q75_CL Signal is 1 if Q75 on busbar C is closed

IFxx-C_DC_OP All line disconnectors on bypass busbar C except in the own bay are open

IFxx-BC_AB_CL There exists a bus coupler connection between busbar A and B

IFxx-BC_AC_OP There is no bus coupler connection between busbar A and C

IFxx-BC_AC_CL There exists a bus coupler connection between busbar A and C

IFxx-BC_BC_OP There is no bus coupler connection between busbar B and C

IFxx-BC_BC_CL There exists a bus coupler connection between busbar B and C

IFxx-VOLT_OP There is no voltage on the line and not fuse failure

IFxx-VOLT_CL There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure


Version 1.0-00

IFxx-VP_C_DC Switch status of the disconnectors on bypass busbar C are valid (open or closed)

IFxx-VP_BC_AB Switch status of the bus coupler appara-tuses connected between busbar A and B are valid (open or closed)

IFxx-VP_BC_AC Switch status of the bus coupler appara-tuses connected between busbar A and C are valid (open or closed)

IFxx-VP_BC_BC Switch status of the bus coupler appara-tuses connected between busbar B and C are valid (open or closed)

IFxx-EXDUP_ES Signal is 1 if there is no transmission error from any bay containing earthing switches Q15, Q25 or Q75

IFxx-EXVVA_ES Signal is 1 if the interlocking programs in all bays containing earthing switches Q15, Q25 or Q75 are running

IFxx-EXDU_BPB Signal is 1 if there is no transmission error from any bay containing disconnectors on bypass busbar C

IFxx-EXVV_BPB Signal is 1 if the interlocking programs in all bays containing disconnectors on bypass busbar C are running

IFxx-EXDUP_BC Signal is 1 if there is no transmission error from any bus coupler bay

IFxx-EXVVA_BC Signal is 1 if the interlocking programs in all bus coupler bays are running

IFxx-Q9EX1 Input for an external condition for apparatus Q9










Table 1: Input signals for ABC_LINE

IN: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 190



Table 2: Output signals for ABC_LINE

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

IFxx-Q0CLREL Closing of Q0 is allowed

IFxx-Q0CLITL Closing of Q0 is forbidden

IFxx-Q9REL Switching of Q9 is allowed

IFxx-Q9ITL Switching of Q9 is forbidden













IFxx-Q1OPTR Signal is 1 if Q1 is open

IFxx-Q1CLTR Signal is 1 if Q1 is closed





IFxx-Q1Q2OPTR Signal is 1 if Q1 or Q2 or both are open

IFxx-Q1Q2CLTR Signal is 1 if Q1 and Q2 are closed

IFxx-VPQ1TR Switch status of Q1 is valid (open or closed)



IFxx-VPQ1Q2TR Switch status of Q1 and Q2 are valid (open or closed)

Table 1: Input signals for ABC_LINE

IN: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

6.2.2 ABC_BCTable 3: Input signals for ABC_BC

IN: DESCRIPTION:

IGxx-Q0_OP Signal is 1 if Q0 is open

IGxx-Q0_CL Signal is 1 if Q0 is closed













IGxx-Q15_OP Signal is 1 if Q15 on busbar A is open

IGxx-Q15_CL Signal is 1 if Q15 on busbar A is closed

IGxx-Q25_OP Signal is 1 if Q25 on busbar B is open

IGxx-Q25_CL Signal is 1 if Q25 on busbar B is closed

IGxx-Q75_OP Signal is 1 if Q75 on busbar C is open

IGxx-Q75_CL Signal is 1 if Q75 on busbar C is closed

IGxx-BBTR_OP Signal is 1 if no busbar transfer is in progress concerning this bus coupler

IGxx-BC_AB_CL There exists a bus coupler connection between busbar A and B

IGxx-VP_BBTR Switch status are valid for all apparatuses involved in the busbar transfer

IGxx-VP_BC_AB Switch status of the bus coupler appara-tuses connected between busbar A and B are valid (open or closed)

IGxx-EXDUP_ES Signal is 1 if there is no transmission error from any bay containing earthing switches Q15, Q25 or Q75

IGxx-EXVVA_ES Signal is 1 if the interlocking programs in all bays containing earthing switches Q15, Q25 or Q75 are running

IGxx-EXDUP_AB Signal is 1 if there is no transmission error from any bay connected to the AB busbars

IGxx-EXVVA_AB Signal is 1 if the interlocking programs in all bays connected to the AB busbars are run-ning

IGxx-EXDUP_BC Signal is 1 if there is no transmission error from any bay connected to the BC busbars


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 192

IGxx-EXVVA_BC Signal is 1 if the interlocking programs in all bays connected to the BC busbars are run-ning

IGxx-Q0_O_EX1 Input for an external open condition for apparatus Q0



IGxx-Q1EX1 Input for an external condition for apparatus Q1










Table 4: Output signals for ABC_BC

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

IGxx-Q0OPREL Opening of Q0 is allowed

IGxx-Q0OPITL Opening of Q0 is forbidden

IGxx-Q0CLREL Closing of Q0 is allowed

IGxx-Q0CLITL Closing of Q0 is forbidden

IGxx-Q1REL Switching of Q1 is allowed

IGxx-Q1ITL Switching of Q1 is forbidden





Table 3: Input signals for ABC_BC

IN: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00







IGxx-Q1OPTR Signal is 1 if Q1 is open

IGxx-Q1CLTR Signal is 1 if Q1 is closed

IGxx-Q20OPTR Signal is 1 if Q2 and Q20 are open

IGxx-Q20CLTR Signal is 1 if Q2 or Q20 or both are closed

IGxx-Q7OPTR Signal is 1 if Q7 is open

IGxx-Q7CLTR Signal is 1 if Q7 is closed

IGxx-Q1Q20OPT Signal is 1 if Q1 or Q20 or both are open

IGxx-Q1Q20CLT Signal is 1 if Q1 and Q20 are closed

IGxx-BCABOPTR No bus coupler connection via the the own buscoupler between busbar A and B

IGxx-BCABCLTR Bus coupler connection via the the own bus-coupler between busbar A and B

IGxx-BCACOPTR No bus coupler connection via the the own buscoupler between busbar A and C

IGxx-BCACCLTR Bus coupler connection via the the own bus-coupler between busbar A and C

IGxx-BCBCOPTR No bus coupler connection via the the own buscoupler between busbar B and C

IGxx-BCBCCLTR Bus coupler connection via the the own bus-coupler between busbar B and C

IGxx-VPQ1TR Switch status of Q1 is valid (open or closed)

IGxx-VPQ20TR Switch status of Q2 and Q20 are valid (open or closed)

IGxx-VPQ7TR Switch status of Q7 is valid (open or closed)

IGxx-VPQ1Q20T Switch status of Q1 and Q20 are valid (open or closed)

IGxx-VPBCABTR Switch status of the bus coupler appara-tuses (Q0, Q1 and Q2) connected between busbar A and B are valid (open or closed)

IGxx-VPBCACTR Switch status of the bus coupler appara-tuses (Q0, Q1 and Q7) connected between busbar A and C are valid (open or closed)

IGxx-VPBCBCTR Switch status of the bus coupler appara-tuses (Q0, Q20 and Q7) connected between busbar B and C are valid (open or closed)

Table 4: Output signals for ABC_BC

OUT: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 194

6.2.3 AB_TRAFOTable 5: Input signals for AB_TRAFO

IN: DESCRIPTION:

IExx-Q0_OP Signal is 1 if Q0 is open

IExx-Q0_CL Signal is 1 if Q0 is closed









IExx-TQ1_OP Signal is 1 if TQ1 is open

IExx-TQ1_CL Signal is 1 if TQ1 is closed





IExx-Q15_OP Signal is 1 if Q15 on busbar A is open

IExx-Q15_CL Signal is 1 if Q0 on busbar A is closed

IExx-Q25_OP Signal is 1 if Q0 on busbar B is open

IExx-Q25_CL Signal is 1 if Q0 on busbar B is closed

IExx-BC_AB_CL There exists a bus coupler connection between busbar A and B

IExx-VP_BC_AB Switch status of the bus coupler appara-tuses are valid (open or closed)

IExx-EXDUP_ES Signal is 1 if there is no transmission error from any bay containing earthing switches Q15 or Q25

IExx-EXVVA_ES Signal is 1 if the interlocking programs in all bays containing earthing switches Q15 or Q25 are running

IExx-EXDUP_BC Signal is 1 if there is no transmission error from any bus coupler bay

IExx-EXVVA_BC Signal is 1 if the interlocking programs in all bus coupler bays are running

IExx-Q0EX1 Input for an external condition for apparatus Q0





Version 1.0-00






Table 6: Output signals for AB_TRAFO

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

IExx-Q0CLREL Closing of Q0 is allowed

IExx-Q0CLITL Closing of Q0 is forbidden

IExx-Q1REL Switching of Q1 is allowed

IExx-Q1ITL Switching of Q1 is forbidden







IExx-Q1OPTR Signal is 1 if Q1 is open

IExx-Q1CLTR Signal is 1 if Q1 is closed

IExx-Q2OPTR Signal is 1 if Q2 is open

IExx-Q2CLTR Signal is 1 if Q2 is closed

IExx-Q1Q2OPTR Signal is 1 if Q1 or Q2 or both are open

IExx-Q1Q2CLTR Signal is 1 if Q1 and Q2 are closed

IExx-VPQ1TR Switch status of Q1 is valid (open or closed)

IExx-VPQ2TR Switch status of Q2 is valid (open or closed)

IExx-VPQ1Q2TR Switch status of Q1 and Q2 are valid (open or closed)

Table 5: Input signals for AB_TRAFO

IN: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 196

6.2.4 A1A2_BSTable 7: Input signals for A1A2_BS

IN: DESCRIPTION:

IHxx-Q0_OP Signal is 1 if Q0 is open

IHxx-Q0_CL Signal is 1 if Q0 is closed









IHxx-A1Q15_OP Signal is 1 if Q15 on busbar A1 is open

IHxx-A1Q15_CL Signal is 1 if Q15 on busbar A1 is closed

IHxx-A2Q15_OP Signal is 1 if Q15 on busbar A2 is open

IHxx-A2Q15_CL Signal is 1 if Q15 on busbar A2 is closed

IHxx-BBTR_OP Signal is 1 if no busbar transfer is in progress concerning this bus section

IHxx-VP_BBTR Switch status are valid for all apparatuses involved in the busbar transfer

IHxx-EXDUP_AB Signal is 1 if there is no transmission error from any bay connected to the AB busbars

IHxx-EXVVA_AB Signal is 1 if the interlocking programs in all bays connected to the AB busbars are run-ning

IHxx-EXDUP_ES Signal is 1 if there is no transmission error from any bay containing earthing switches Q15 in section A1 and A2

IHxx-EXVVA_ES Signal is 1 if the interlocking programs in all bays containing earthing switches Q15 in section A1 and A2 are running

IHxx-Q0_O_EX1 Input for an external open condition for apparatus Q0



IHxx-Q11EX1 Input for an external condition for apparatus Q11





Version 1.0-00

Table 8: Output signals for A1A2_BS

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

IHxx-Q0OPREL Opening of Q0 is allowed

IHxx-Q0OPITL Opening of Q0 is forbidden

IHxx-Q0CLREL Closing of Q0 is allowed

IHxx-Q0CLITL Closing of Q0 is forbidden

IHxx-Q11REL Switching of Q11 is allowed

IHxx-Q11ITL Switching of Q11 is forbidden







IHxx-A1A2OPTR No bus coupler connection between bus section A1 and A2

IHxx-A1A2CLTR Bus coupler connection between bus sec-tion A1 and A2

IHxx-Q11OPTR Signal is 1 if Q11 is open

IHxx-Q11CLTR Signal is 1 if Q11 is closed

IHxx-Q12OPTR Signal is 1 if Q12 is open

IHxx-Q12CLTR Signal is 1 if Q12 is closed

IHxx-VPA1A2TR Switch status of Q0, Q11 and Q12 are valid (open or closed)

IHxx-VPQ11TR Switch status of Q11 is valid (open or closed)

IHxx-VPQ12TR Switch status of Q12 is valid (open or closed)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 198

6.2.5 A1A2_DCTable 9: Input signals for A1A2_DC

IN: DESCRIPTION:

IIxx-Q11_OP Signal is 1 if Q11 is open

IIxx-Q11_CL Signal is 1 if Q11 is closed

IIxx-A1Q15_OP Signal is 1 if Q15 on busbar A1 is open

IIxx-A1Q15_CL Signal is 1 if Q15 on busbar A1 is closed

IIxx-A2Q15_OP Signal is 1 if Q15 on busbar A2 is open

IIxx-A2Q15_CL Signal is 1 if Q15 on busbar A2 is closed

IIxx-A1DC_OP Signal is 1 if all disconnectors on busbar A1 are open

IIxx-A2DC_OP Signal is 1 if all disconnectors on busbar A2 are open

IIxx-VPA1_DC Switch status of disconnectors on busbar A1 are valid

IIxx-VPA2_DC Switch status of disconnectors on busbar A2 are valid

IIxx-EXDUP_ES Signal is 1 if there is no transmission error from any bay containing earthing switches Q15 in section A1 and A2

IIxx-EXVVA_ES Signal is 1 if the interlocking programs in all bays containing earthing switches Q15 in section A1 and A2 are running

IIxx-EXDUP_BB Signal is 1 if there is no transmission error from any bay containing disconnectors con-nected to the busbar sections A1 and A2

IIxx-EXVVA_BB Signal is 1 if the interlocking programs in all bays containing disconnectors connected to the busbar sections A1 and A2

IIxx-Q11C_EX1 Input for an external close condition for apparatus Q11

IIxx-Q11C_EX2 Input for an external close condition for apparatus Q11

IIxx-Q11O_EX1 Input for an external open condition for apparatus Q11



Table 10: Output signals for A1A2_DC

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

IIxx-Q11OPREL Switching of Q11 is allowed. For GIS open-ing of Q11 is allowed

IIxx-Q11OPITL Switching of Q11 is forbidden. For GIS opening of Q11 is forbidden


Version 1.0-00

6.2.6 BB_ES

IIxx-Q11CLREL For GIS closing of Q11 is allowed

IIxx-Q11CLITL For GIS closing of Q11 is forbidden

IIxx-DCOPTR Signal is 1 if the bus section disconnector is open

IIxx-DCCLTR Signal is 1 if the bus section disconnector is closed

IIxx-VPDCTR Switch status of Q11 is valid (open or closed)

Table 10: Output signals for A1A2_DC

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

Table 11: Input signals for BB_ES

IN: DESCRIPTION:

IJxx-Q15_OP Signal is 1 if Q15 on this busbar part is open

IJxx-Q15_CL Signal is 1 if Q15 on this busbar part is closed

IJxx-ABCDC_OP Signal is 1 if all disconnectors on this busbar part are open

IJxx-VP_ABCDC The switch status of all disconnectors on this busbar part are valid.

IJxx-EXDUP_BB Signal is 1 if no transmission error from any bay containing all disconnectors on this bus-bar part

IJxx-EXVVA_BB Signal is 1 if the interlocking programs in all bays containing all disconnectors on this busbar part are running

Table 12: Output signals for BB_ES

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

IJxx-Q15REL Switching of Q15 is allowed

IJxx-Q15ITL Switching of Q15 is forbidden

IJxx-BBESOPTR Signal is 1 if Q15 on this busbar part is open

IJxx-BBESCLTR Signal is 1 if Q15 on this busbar part is closed


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 200

6.2.7 DB_BUS_ATable 13: Input signals for DB_BUS_A

IN: DESCRIPTION:

IBxx-Q01_OP Signal is 1 if Q01 is open

IBxx-Q01_CL Signal is 1 if Q01 is closed











IBxx-Q15_OP Signal is 1 if Q15 on busbar A is open

IBxx-Q15_CL Signal is 1 if Q15 on busbar A is closed

IBxx-EXDUP_ES Signal is 1 if there is no transmission error from any bay containing earthing switches Q15

IBxx-EXVVA_ES Signal is 1 if the interlocking programs in all bays containing earthing switches Q15 are running

IBxx-Q61EX1 Input for an external condition for apparatus Q61




Table 14: Output signals for DB_BUS_A

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

IBxx-Q01CLREL Closing of Q01 is allowed

IBxx-Q01CLITL Closing of Q01 is forbidden

IBxx-Q61REL Switching of Q61 is allowed

IBxx-Q61ITL Switching of Q61 is forbidden







Version 1.0-00

6.2.8 DB_LINE


IBxx-Q1OPTR Signal is 1 if Q1 is open

IBxx-Q1CLTR Signal is 1 if Q1 is closed

IBxx-VPQ1TR Switch status of Q1 is valid (open or closed)

Table 14: Output signals for DB_BUS_A

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

Table 15: Input signals for DB_LINE

IN: DESCRIPTION:

IAxx-Q01_OP Signal is 1 if Q01 is open

IAxx-Q01_CL Signal is 1 if Q01 is closed





















IAxx-VOLT_OP There is no voltage on the line and no fuse failure

IAxx-VOLT_CL There is voltage on the line and or a VT (fuse) failure

IAxx-Q9EX1 Input for an external condition for apparatus Q9




Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 202

6.2.9 DB_BUS_B



Table 16: Output signals for DB_LINE

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

IAxx-Q9REL Switching of Q9 is allowed

IAxx-Q9ITL Switching of Q9 is forbidden





Table 15: Input signals for DB_LINE

IN: DESCRIPTION:

Table 17: Input signals for DB_BUS_B

IN: DESCRIPTION:

ICxx-Q02_OP Signal is 1 if Q02 is open

ICxx-Q02_CL Signal is 1 if Q02 is closed











ICxx-Q25_OP Signal is 1 if Q25 on busbar B is open

ICxx-Q25_CL Signal is 1 if Q25 on busbar B is closed

ICxx-EXDUP_ES Signal is 1 if there is no transmission error from any bay containing earthing switches Q25

ICxx-EXVVA_ES Signal is 1 if the interlocking programs in all bays containing earthing switches Q25 are running

ICxx-Q62EX1 Input for an external condition for apparatus Q62


Version 1.0-00




Table 18: Output signals for DB_BUS_B

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

ICxx-Q02CLREL Closing of Q02 is allowed

ICxx-Q02CLITL Closing of Q02 is forbidden

ICxx-Q62REL Switching of Q62 is allowed

ICxx-Q62ITL Switching of Q62 is forbidden







ICxx-Q2OPTR Signal is 1 if Q2 is open

ICxx-Q2CLTR Signal is 1 if Q2 is closed

ICxx-VPQ2TR Switch status of Q2 is valid (open or closed)

Table 17: Input signals for DB_BUS_B

IN: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 204

6.2.10BH_LINE_ATable 19: Input signals for BH_LINE_A

IN: DESCRIPTION:

ILxx-Q0_OP Signal is 1 if Q0 is open

ILxx-Q0_CL Signal is 1 if Q0 is closed















ILxx-CQ0_OP Signal is 1 if Q0 in module BH_CONN is open

ILxx-CQ0_CL Signal is 1 if Q0 in module BH_CONN is closed







ILxx-Q15_OP Signal is 1 if Q15 on busbar A is open

ILxx-Q15_CL Signal is 1 if Q15 on busbar A is closed

ILxx-VOLT_OP There is no voltage on the line and not fuse failure

ILxx-VOLT_CL There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure

ILxx-EXDUP_ES Signal is 1 if there is no transmission error from any bay containing earthing switches Q15

ILxx-EXVVA_ES Signal is 1 if the interlocking programs in all bays containing earthing switches Q15


Version 1.0-00

ILxx-Q6EX1 Input for an external condition for apparatus Q6











Table 20: Output signals for BH_LINE_A

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

ILxx-Q0CLREL Closing of Q0 is allowed

ILxx-Q0CLITL Closing of Q0 is forbidden

ILxx-Q6REL Switching of Q6 is allowed

ILxx-Q6ITL Switching of Q6 is forbidden













Table 19: Input signals for BH_LINE_A

IN: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 206

6.2.11BH_CONN

ILxx-Q1OPTR Signal is 1 if Q1 is open

ILxx-Q1CLTR Signal is 1 if Q1 is closed

ILxx-VPQ1TR Switch status of Q1 is valid (open or closed)

Table 20: Output signals for BH_LINE_A

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

Table 21: Input signals for BH_CONN

IN: DESCRIPTION:

IKxx-Q0_OP Signal is 1 if Q0 is open

IKxx-Q0_CL Signal is 1 if Q0 is closed









IKxx-1Q53_OP Signal is 1 if Q53 on line 1 is open

IKxx-1Q53_CL Signal is 1 if Q53 on line 1 is closed

IKxx-2Q53_OP Signal is 1 if Q53 on line 2 is open

IKxx-2Q53_CL Signal is 1 if Q53 on line 2 is closed

IKxx-Q61EX1 Input for an external condition for apparatus Q61




Table 22: Output signals for BH_CONN

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

IKxx-Q0CLREL Closing of Q0 is allowed

IKxx-Q0CLITL Closing of Q0 is forbidden

IKxx-Q61REL Switching of Q61 is allowed

IKxx-Q61ITL Switching of Q61 is forbidden




Version 1.0-00

6.2.12BH_LINE_B





Table 22: Output signals for BH_CONN

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

Table 23: Input signals for BH_LINE_B

IN: DESCRIPTION:

IMxx-Q0_OP Signal is 1 if Q0 is open

IMxx-Q0_CL Signal is 1 if Q0 is closed















IMxx-CQ0_OP Signal is 1 if Q0 in module BH_CONN is open

IMxx-CQ0_CL Signal is 1 if Q0 in module BH_CONN is closed







IMxx-Q25_OP Signal is 1 if Q25 on busbar B is open


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 208

IMxx-Q25_CL Signal is 1 if Q25 on busbar B is closed

IMxx-VOLT_OP There is no voltage on the line and not fuse failure

IMxx-VOLT_CL There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure

IMxx-EXDUP_ES Signal is 1 if there is no transmission error from any bay containing earthing switches Q25

IMxx-EXVVA_ES Signal is 1 if the interlocking programs in all bays containing earthing switches Q25

IMxx-Q6EX1 Input for an external condition for apparatus Q6











Table 24: Output signals for BH_LINE_B

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

IMxx-Q0CLREL Closing of Q0 is allowed

IMxx-Q0CLITL Closing of Q0 is forbidden

IMxx-Q6REL Switching of Q6 is allowed

IMxx-Q6ITL Switching of Q6 is forbidden




Table 23: Input signals for BH_LINE_B

IN: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00










IMxx-Q2OPTR Signal is 1 if Q2 is open

IMxx-Q2CLTR Signal is 1 if Q2 is closed

IMxx-VPQ2TR Switch status of Q2 is valid (open or closed)

Table 24: Output signals for BH_LINE_B

OUT: DESCRIPTION:


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 151-XENPage 6 - 210


Function:

6

Command function 1MRK 580 165-XEN

Version 1.0-00November 1996 Optional

1 ApplicationThe REC 561 and REL 531 terminals may be provided with output func-tions that can be controlled either from a Substation Automation Systemor from the built-in MMI. The output functions can be used, for example,to control high-voltage apparatuses in switchyards. For local control func-tions, the built-in MMI can be used. Together with the configuration logiccircuits, the user can govern pulses or steady output signals for controlpurposes within the terminal or via binary outputs. In the REC 561 controlterminal it is also possible to receive data from other contol terminals viathe LON bus.

2 Design

2.1 General Two types of command function blocks are available, Single Commandand Multiple Command. Eleven Single Command function blocks and 80Multiple Command function blocks are available in the REC 561 controlterminal. One Single Command function block is available in the REL531 line terminal.

The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. The setting isdone on the MODE input, common for the whole block, from the CAP531 configuration tool (for REC 561) or from SMS (for REL 531).

0=Off sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the stationlevel, that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway.

1=Steady sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the val-ues sent from the station level.

2=Pulse gives a pulse with one execution cycle of typical 200 ms dura-tion, if a value sent from the station level is changed from 0 to 1. Thatmeans that the configured logic connected to the command functionblocks may not have a cycle time longer than 200 ms.

2.2 Single Command function

The Single Command function block has 16 outputs. The outputs can beindividually controlled from the operator station, remote-control gateway,or from the built-in MMI. Each output signal can be given a name with amaximum of 13 characters from the CAP 531 configuration tool (for REC561) or from SMS (for REL 531).

The output signals, here CDxx-OUT1 to CDxx-OUT16, are then availablefor configuration to built-in functions or via the configuration logic cir-cuits to the binary outputs of the terminal.

The command functions can be connected according to the applicationexamples in Fig. 1 to Fig. 3. Note that the execution cyclicity of the con-figured logic connected to the command function block cannot have acycle time longer than the command function block.

ABB Network Partner ABCommand function

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 165-XENPage 6 - 212

Fig. 1 shows an example of how the user can, in an easy way, connect thecommand function via the configuration logic circuit to control a high-voltage apparatus. This type of command function is normally performedby a pulse via the binary outputs of the terminal. Fig. 1 shows a closeoperation, but an open operation is performed in a corresponding waywithout the synchro-check condition.

Fig. 1 Application example showing a logic diagram for control of a circuit breaker via configuration logic circuits

Fig. 2 and Fig. 3 show other ways to control functions, which requiresteady signals On and Off. The output can be used to control built-in func-tions or external equipment.

Fig. 2 Application example showing a logic diagram for control of built-in functions

&User-definedconditions

SingleCommandfunction

Configuration logic circuits

200 ms

Synchro-check

SingleCmdFunc

OUTy

MODE

CmdOuty

CDxx

2

Close CB1

(X80165-1)


SingleCmdFunc

OUTy

MODE

CmdOuty

CDxx

1

Function n

Function n

(X80165-2)

Command functionABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 165-XENPage 6 - 213

Version 1.0-00

tus

for-he

fer-sendck. ineork

ter-

theLni-

AL

Fig. 3 Application example showing a logic diagram for control of external equipment via configuration logic circuits

2.3 Multiple Command function

The Multiple Command function block, available in REC 561, has 16 out-puts combined in one block, which can be controlled from the operatorstation, that is, the whole block is sent at the same time from the operatorstation. One common name, with a maximum of 19 characters for theblock, is set from the configuration tool CAP 531.

The output signals, here CMxx-OUT1 to CMxx-OUT16, are then availa-ble for configuration to built-in functions or via the configuration logiccircuits to the binary outputs of the terminal.

The normal way to control circuit breakers, disconnectors, and earthingswitches with full functionality from the operator station is to connect thecommand function via the apparatus control function (see “ApparaControl”, 1MRK 580 150-XEN).

This Multiple Command function block can also be used to receive inmation over the LON bus from other REC 561 control terminals . Tmost common use is to transfer interlocking information between difent bays. That can be performed by an Event function block as the block and with a Multiple Command function block as the receive bloDetailed information of how to transfer the interlocking information is“Apparatus Control”, 1MRK 580 150-XEN. The configuration for thcommunication between control terminals is made by the LON NetwTool.

The MODE input is set to Steady at communication between controlminals and then the data are mapped between the terminals.

The command function also has a supervision function, which setsoutput VALID to 0 if the block did not receive data within an INTERVAtime, that could be set. This function is applicable only during commucation between control terminals over the LON bus. The INTERV

&User-definedconditions


Configuration logic circuitsSingleCmdFunc

OUTy

MODE

CmdOuty

CDxx

1

Device 1

(X80165-3)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 165-XENPage 6 - 214

input time is set a little bit longer than the interval time set on the Eventfunction block (see Event function, (1MRK 580 140-XEN)). If INTER-VAL=0, then VALID will be 1, that is, not applicable.

3 ConfigurationFor REL 531, the configuration of the signal outputs of the Single Com-mand function block to the inputs of the configuration logic circuits ismade in the built-in MMI under the menu:


AND (OR, Timer, Pulse, INV, SR)Command

The signal outputs of the command function can, of course, also be con-nected directly to the binary outputs of the terminal or to built-in functions.

MMI tree for configuration to binary outputs:

ConfigurationSlotxx-IOMy (BOMy)

Command

MMI tree for configuration to a built-in function:


Function nCommand

The configuration of the signal outputs of the Single Command functionand Multiple Command function in REC 561 is made by the CAP 531 con-figuration tool.


Version 1.0-00

4 CommandsThe outputs of the Single Command function block can be activated fromthe built-in MMI. This can be performed under the menu:

CommandCDxx (xx=01 for REL 531, xx=01-11 for REC 561)

Fig. 4 shows the dialogue box for the built-in MMI after the selection ofthe command menu above. The display shows the name of the output tocontrol (CmdOut1) and the present status (Old) and proposes a new value(New).

Fig. 4 Command dialogue to control an output from the Single Com-mand function block

The dialogue to operate an output from the Single Command functionblock is performed from different states as follows:

1. Selection active; select the:

• C button, and then the No box activates.• Up arrow, and then New: 0 changes to New: 1. The up arrow

changes to the down arrow.• E button, and then the Yes box activates.

2. Yes box active; select the:

• C button to cancel the action and return to the CMD/CDxx menuwindow.

• E button to confirm the action and return to the CMD/CDxx menuwindow.

• Right arrow to activate the No box.

E

C


green yellow red

LEDs



push buttons

(X80165-4)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 165-XENPage 6 - 216

are

ipletion

om-out-Off ,

onAL

theera-by by

-intions.

er-s ancom-een

3. No box active; select the:

• C button to cancel the action and return to the CMD/CDxx menu window.

• E button to confirm the action and return to the CMD/CDxx menuwindow.

• Left arrow to activate the Yes box.

5 SettingThe setting parameters for the Single Command function in REL 531accessible through the SMS.

The setting parameters for the Single Command function and MultCommand function in REC 561 are set from the CAP 531 configuratool.

Parameters to be set for the Single Command function are MODE, cmon for the whole block, and CmdOuty - including the name for each put signal. The MODE input sets the outputs to be one of the types Steady, or Pulse.

The Multiple Command function, available in REC 561, has a commname setting (CmdOut) for the block, MODE as above and INTERVused for the supervision of the cyclical receiving of data.


6 TestingFor each Single Command function block, it is necessary to configureoutput signal to corresponding binary output of the terminal. The option of each separate block is then checked from the built-in MMI applying the commands with the MODE Off, Steady, or Pulse andobserving the logic statuses of the corresponding binary output.

Command function blocks included in the operation of different builtfunctions must be tested at the same time as their corresponding func

Test of the Multiple Command function block is recommended to be pformed in a system, that is, either in a complete delivery system aacceptance test (FAT/SAT) or as parts of that system, because the mand function blocks are connected in a delivery-specific way betwbays and the station level.


Version 1.0-00

7 Appendix


Fig. 5 Simplified terminal diagram of the Single Command function

Fig. 6 Simplified terminal diagram of the Multiple Command function



SingleCmdFunc

CmdOut1CmdOut2CmdOut3CmdOut4CmdOut5CmdOut6CmdOut7CmdOut8CmdOut9CmdOut10CmdOut11CmdOut12CmdOut13CmdOut14CmdOut15CmdOut16MODE

(X80165-5)

CDxx



MultCmdFunc

CmdOutMODE

VALID

INTERVAL

(X80165-6)

CMxx


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 165-XENPage 6 - 218

7.2 Signal listTable 1: Signal list for Single Command function No. xx

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

CDxx-OUT1 Command output 1 for single command block No xx
















Table 2: Signal list for Multiple Command function No. xx

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

CMxx-OUT1 Command output 1 for multiple command block No xx





Version 1.0-00

7.3 Setting table













CMxx-VALID Received data is valid=1 or invalid=0

Table 2: Signal list for Multiple Command function No. xx

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

Table 3: Setting table for Single Command function No. xx


CMDOUT1 13 characters string User name for Output 1, to be set from CAP 531 or from SMS for REL 531








Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 165-XENPage 6 - 220










MODE 0=Off, 1=Steady, 2=Pulse

Output mode common for the command block, to be set from CAP 531 or from SMS for REL 531

Table 3: Setting table for Single Command function No. xx


Table 4: Setting table for Multiple Command function No. xx


CMDOUT 19 characters string Common user name for the outputs in the multiple command block, to be set from CAP 531

MODE 0=Off, 1=Steady, 2=Pulse

Output mode common for the command block, to be set from CAP 531

INTERVAL 0-60 s Time interval for supervision of received data

ABB Network Partner AB-Page

Function:

6Event function 1MRK 580 140-XEN


1 ApplicationWhen using a Substation Automation system, events can be continu-ously sent or polled from the terminal. These events can come from anyavailable signal in the terminal that is connected to the Event functionblock. The Event function block can also handle double indication, that isnormally used to indicate positions of high-voltage apparatus. With thisEvent function block in the REC 561 control terminal, data can be sent toother control terminals over the LON bus.

2 Theory of operationThe events can come from both internal logical signals and binary inputchannels. The internal signals are time tagged in the main processingmodule, while the binary input channels are time tagged directly on eachI/O module. The events are produced according to the set-event masks.The event masks are treated commonly for both the LON and SPA chan-nels. All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, whichcontains up to 1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event inthe buffer is read, the oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarmappears.

The outputs from the Event function block are formed by the reading ofstatus and events by the station MMI on either every input (single or dou-ble input) or on the whole function block (16-bit word). The user-definedname for each input is intended to be used by the station MMI.

The Event function block is executed with the same cyclicity as the fastconfigurable logic. That means that the time-tagging resolution on theevents that are emerging from internal logical signals have correspondingfigures. The time tagging resolution on the events that are emerging frombinary input signals have a resolution of 1 ms.

Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the ter-minal, Terminal restarted and Event buffer overflow.

ABB Network Partner ABEvent function

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 140-XENPage 6 - 222

at an of odd indi- odd

from

.

station

3 Design

3.1 General As basic, 36 Event function blocks are available in REC 561. Optionally,eight additional event blocks can be used in REC 561 type 3 (basic +option 2). In REL 531, six event blocks are available.

Each Event function block has 16 connectables corresponding to 16inputs EVxx-INPUT1 to EVxx-INPUT16. Every input can be given aname with up to 19 characters from the CAP 531 configuration tool.

The inputs can be used as individual events or can be defined as doubleindication events.

The inputs can be set individually from the Station Monitoring System(SMS) under the Mask-Event function as:

• No events

• OnSet, at

• OnReset, at

• OnChange, at

3.2 Double indication Double indications are used to handle a combination of two inputs time, for example, one input for the open and one for the close positioa circuit breaker or disconnector. The double indication consists of anand an even input number. When the odd input is defined as a doublecation, the next even input is considered to be the other input. Theinputs has a suppression timer to suppress events at 00 states.

To be used as double indications the odd inputs are individually set the SMS under the Mask-Event function as:

• Double indication• Double indication with midposition suppression

Here, the settings of the corresponding even inputs have no meaning

These states of the inputs generate events. The status is read by the MMI on the status indication for the odd input:

• 00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0• 01 generates an close event with the read status 1• 10 generates an open event with the read status 2• 11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3

Event functionABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 140-XENPage 6 - 223

Version 1.0-00

n”,is

ON

3.3 Communication between terminals

The BOUND and INTERVAL inputs are available on the Event functionblock in REC 561 control terminal.

The BOUND input set to 1 means that the output value of the event blockis bound to another control terminal on the LON bus. The Event functionblock is then used to send data over the LON bus to other REC 561 con-trol terminals. The most common use is to transfer interlocking informa-tion between different bays. That can be performed by an Event functionblock used as a send block and with a Multiple Command function blockused as a receive block. In Apparatus Control, (1MRK 580 150-XEN)describes how to transfer the interlocking information. The configurationof the communication between control terminals is made by the LON Net-work Tool.

The INTERVAL input is applicable only when the BOUND input is set to1. The INTERVAL is intended to be used for cyclic sending of data toother control terminals via the LON bus with the interval time as set. Thiscyclic sending of data is used as a backup of the event-driven sending,which is always performed. With cyclic sending of data, the communica-tion can be supervised by a corresponding INTERVAL input on the Mul-tiple Command function block in another control terminal connected tothe LON bus. This INTERVAL input time is set a little bit longer than theinterval time set on the Event function block (see “Command functio1MRK 580 165-XEN). With INTERVAL=0, only event-driven sending performed.

The event-driven sending of data to other control terminals over the Lbus is performed with a resolution of typical 200 ms.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 140-XENPage 6 - 224

are

ter- the

ion

set/ of theventked.

.

n theean-

TheMS

4 SettingThe event reporting can be set from the SMS as:

• Use event masks• Report no events• Report all events

Use of event masks is the normal reporting of events, that is, the events reported as defined in the database.

An event mask can be set individually for each available signal in theminal. The setting of the event mask can only be performed fromSMS.

All event mask settings are treated commonly for all communicatchannels of the terminal.

Report no events means blocking of all events in the terminal.

Report all events means that all events, that are set to OnSet/OnReOnChange are reported as OnChange, that is, both at set and resetsignal. For double indications when the suppression time is set, the eignores the timer and is reported directly. Masked events are still mas

Parameters to be set for the Event function block are:

• NAMEyy including the name for each input.• T_SUPRyy including the suppression time for double indications• INTERVAL used for the cyclic sending of data.• BOUND telling that the block has connections to other terminals

over the LON bus.

These parameters are set from the CAP 531 configuration tool. WheBOUND parameter is set, the settings of the event masks have no ming. The INTERVAL and BOUND inputs are not available in REL 531.

The appendix describes the parameters and their setting ranges.

5 TestingDuring testing, the terminal can be set in Test Mode from the SMS. functionality of the event reporting during Test Mode is set from the Sas follows:

• Use event masks• Report no events• Report all events

See the explanation in section “Setting” on page 224.


Version 1.0-00

6 Appendix


Fig. 1 Simplified terminal diagram of the Event function

EVENT


INTERVALBOUND

T_SUPR01T_SUPR03T_SUPR05T_SUPR07T_SUPR09T_SUPR11T_SUPR13T_SUPR15NAME01NAME02NAME03NAME04NAME05NAME06NAME07NAME08NAME09NAME10NAME11NAME12NAME13NAME14NAME15NAME16

(X80140-1)

EVxx


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 140-XENPage 6 - 226

6.2 Signal list

Table 1: Signal list for Event function No. xx

IN: DESCRIPTION:

EVxx-INPUT1 Event input 1 for event block No xx

















Version 1.0-00

6.3 Setting table

Table 2: Setting table for Event function No. xx


EventMask1 No Events, OnSet, OnReset, OnChange, Double Ind., Double Ind. with midpos supr

Event mask for input 1, to be set from SMS

EventMask2 No Events, OnSet, OnReset, OnChange





























Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 140-XENPage 6 - 228



T_SUPR01 0-60 s Suppression time for Input 1, to be set from CAP 531








NAME01 19 characters string User name of signal connected to Input 1, to be set from CAP 531

















Version 1.0-00



INTERVAL 0-60 s Interval time for cyclic sending of data, to be set from CAP 531

BOUND 0=Off, 1=On Connected to other terminals on the net-work, to be set from CAP 531




Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 140-XENPage 6 - 230


Contents Page

Introduction............................................................................................. 7-1Information subgroups............................................................................ 7-1

Mean values ................................................................................... 7-1Differential values........................................................................... 7-1Phasors .......................................................................................... 7-2Synchronising values ..................................................................... 7-2Logical signals................................................................................ 7-2Different I/O units ........................................................................... 7-2Counters within the autoreclosing function..................................... 7-3Communication channel for the line differential protection function7-3Directionality................................................................................... 7-3Disturbance report.......................................................................... 7-3Active group ................................................................................... 7-4Internal time.................................................................................... 7-4

Application.............................................................................................. 7-5User-defined measuring ranges ............................................................. 7-5Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity ................................... 7-6Continuous supervision of the measured quantity.................................. 7-6

Amplitude dead-band supervision .................................................. 7-7Integrating dead-band supervision ................................................. 7-7Periodic reporting ........................................................................... 7-8Periodic reporting with the dead-band supervision in parallel ........ 7-8Periodic reporting with the dead-band supervision in series .......... 7-8

Design and measuring principle ............................................................. 7-9Setting .................................................................................................. 7-11Testing.................................................................................................. 7-12Appendix............................................................................................... 7-13

Terminal diagram ......................................................................... 7-13Signal list ...................................................................................... 7-14Setting table ................................................................................. 7-15

Application............................................................................................ 7-17User-defined measuring ranges ................................................... 7-18Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity......................... 7-18Continuous supervision of the measured quantity ....................... 7-19

Amplitude dead-band supervision ....................................... 7-19Integrating dead-band supervision ...................................... 7-19Periodic reporting................................................................. 7-20Periodic reporting with the dead-band supervision in parallel7-20


Periodic reporting with the dead-band supervision in series 7-20Design and measuring principle ...........................................................7-21Setting...................................................................................................7-22Testing..................................................................................................7-24Appendix...............................................................................................7-25


Application ............................................................................................7-33Theory of operation...............................................................................7-33Design...................................................................................................7-34Setting...................................................................................................7-35Testing..................................................................................................7-36Appendix...............................................................................................7-37


Application ............................................................................................7-39Theory of operation...............................................................................7-39Setting...................................................................................................7-40Appendix...............................................................................................7-41

Terminal diagrams........................................................................7-41Signal list ......................................................................................7-41Setting table..................................................................................7-41

Application ............................................................................................7-43Theory of operation...............................................................................7-44

SPA operation ..............................................................................7-44LON operation ..............................................................................7-44

Design...................................................................................................7-45SPA design...................................................................................7-45LON design...................................................................................7-45

Setting...................................................................................................7-46SPA setting...................................................................................7-46LON setting...................................................................................7-47

Appendix...............................................................................................7-48Setting table..................................................................................7-48

Internal events ......................................................................................7-49General overview..................................................................................7-51

General disturbance information ..................................................7-52Indications ....................................................................................7-52Event recorder ..............................................................................7-52


Fault locator.................................................................................. 7-53Trip values.................................................................................... 7-53Disturbance recorder.................................................................... 7-53

Recording times.................................................................................... 7-54Analogue signals .................................................................................. 7-55Binary signals ....................................................................................... 7-55

Trig signals ................................................................................... 7-56Manual trig ........................................................................... 7-56Binary trig............................................................................. 7-56Analogue trig........................................................................ 7-56

Settings, introduction............................................................................ 7-57Settings during normal conditions ................................................ 7-58

Operation.............................................................................................. 7-58Recording times ........................................................................... 7-59Binary signals ............................................................................... 7-59Analogue signals .......................................................................... 7-59Fault locator.................................................................................. 7-60Sequence number ........................................................................ 7-60

Settings during test............................................................................... 7-61Test mode .................................................................................... 7-61Activation of manual triggering ..................................................... 7-61

Appendix............................................................................................... 7-62Signal list ...................................................................................... 7-62Setting table ................................................................................. 7-63

Application........................................................................................... 7-65Theory of operation .............................................................................. 7-65Setting .................................................................................................. 7-65Testing.................................................................................................. 7-66Application............................................................................................ 7-67Theory of operation .............................................................................. 7-67Setting .................................................................................................. 7-68Testing.................................................................................................. 7-68Application............................................................................................ 7-69

Recording capacity....................................................................... 7-69Memory capacity .......................................................................... 7-69Recording times ........................................................................... 7-69Triggers ........................................................................................ 7-69Time tagging................................................................................. 7-70

Theory of operation .............................................................................. 7-70Design .................................................................................................. 7-72Setting .................................................................................................. 7-73Testing.................................................................................................. 7-74


Function:

and

theese

s

c-

uredlateds of

7Service report 1MRK 580 137-XEN


1 IntroductionThe Service report menu lets you display information about the:

• Operation conditions for protected objects in the power systems

• Terminal

The amount of available information depends on the number of basicoptional functions in a specific REx 5xx terminal.

The way in which different subgroup information is displayed on MMI depends on if the corresponding function is in the terminal. Thsubgroups describe possible types of information:

• Mean values

• Differential values (only if the line differential protection function iincluded in the terminal)

• Phasors

• Synchronising values

• Logical signals

• Different I/O units

• Counters within the auto-reclosing function

• Communication channel (only if the line differential protection funtion is included in the terminal)

• Directionality

• Disturbance report

• Active group

• Internal time

2 Information subgroups

2.1 Mean values MMI branch:

Service ReportMean Values

Line-distance protection terminals display the mean values of meascurrent, voltage, active and reactive power and frequency. That is reto phase L1, L2 and L3. The amount of this information in other typeterminals depends on the built-in optional functions.

2.2 Differential values MMI branch:

Service ReportDiff Values

ABB Network Partner ABService report

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 137-XENPage 7 - 2

Line-protection terminals, which have built-in line differential protectionfunctions, separately display (for each phase) the values of the differentialand bias currents in phases L1, L2, and L3.

2.3 Phasors MMI branch:

Service ReportPhasors

Primary (Secondary)

The appearance of phasors of analogue input quantities as they enter theterminal from the current and voltage instrument transformers, dependson the type of terminal and on the built-in options.

The line protection terminals displays primary and secondary phasors ofmeasured currents and voltages only if they have an optional fault loca-tion function builtin.

Other terminals in the REx 5xx-series have this function builtin as anoption, which also depends on the number of built-in current and voltageinputs and their role within the terminals.

2.4 Synchronising values MMI branch:

Service ReportSync Values1 (2,3,4)

A control terminal with a built-in synchro-check option displays theactual measured values of phase angle difference (DiffPhase), voltage dif-ference (DiffVoltage), and frequency difference (DiffFreq).

2.5 Logical signals MMI branch:

Service ReportLogical Signals

The current values of all internal logical signals, except those related tothe apparatus control and interlocking functional blocks, are always avail-able under the above submenu.

2.6 Different I/O units MMI branch:

Service ReportSlotxx (xx=12,14,....,36)

Different REx 5xx terminals can comprise different I/O units, which servelike an interface between the terminal and external elements of the powersystem, such as circuit breakers, isolators, and measuring converters.

Service reportABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 137-XENPage 7 - 3

Version 1.0-00

s-

intodis-ome

ent

The current values of input logical signals, logical signals configured todifferent output elements (relays) and analogue direct current measuringinputs are available under the Slotxx submenu.

2.7 Counters within the autoreclosing function

MMI branch:

Service ReportARCounters

Counters1 (2,3,...,6)

Various types of auto-reclosing functions are available for different typesof terminals as an option. They also comprise different counters and theiractual values are available under this submenu. Counters can be re-sethere.

2.8 Communication channel for the line differential protection function

MMI branch:

Service ReportDiffCommunic

The information available under this submenu consists of:

• Actual transmission time delay of a communication channel as measured by the differential protection function.

• The number of short, medium, and long communication interrup-tions calculated by built-in counters. These counters can also becleared to the initial 0 value.

• Status of the communication link together with the number of tranmitted and received frames.

2.9 Directionality MMI branch:

Service ReportDirection

This submenu is available when a distance protection function is builtthe terminal. The function enables testing of the directionality of the tance protection function during the commissioning period and after swork in the secondary circuits between the current and voltage instrumtransformers and terminal.

2.10Disturbance report MMI branch:

Service ReportDisturbReport

The service report on the disturbance report function contains the:

ABB Network Partner ABService report

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 137-XENPage 7 - 4

of

e day

the

data

• Percentage of the used dedicated memory capacity for purposesthe disturbance recording when it is built into the terminal.

• Sequence numbers of the disturbances recorded during the sam

• Status of built-in analogue triggers that can start the operation ofdisturbance recorder

2.11 Active group MMI branch:

Service ReportActive Group

The current active setting group is displayed under this submenu.

2.12Internal time MMI branch:

Service ReportInternal Time

The internal terminal time can be checked under this submenu. Thecomprises information on the date and on the time down to 1 second.


Function:

ur-n onowereasur-

andture,

values usu- of

iffer-andthe

t-inrentde- input

od-

user

S)

set-n -20 the

7Direct current measuring unit 1MRK 580 154-XEN


1 ApplicationFast, reliable supervision of different analogue quantities is of vital impor-tance during the normal operation of a power system. Operators in thecontrol centres can, for example:

• Continuously follow active and reactive power flow in the network

• Supervise the busbar voltages

• Check the temperature of power transformers, shunt reactors

• Monitor pressure in circuit breakers

Different measuring methods are available for different quantities. Crent and voltage instrument transformers provide the basic informatiomeasured phase currents and voltages in different points within the psystem. At the same time, currents and voltages serve as the input ming quantities to power and energy meters.

Different measuring transducers provide information on electrical non-electrical measuring quantities such as voltage, current, temperaand pressure. In most cases, the measuring transducers change theof the measured quantities into the direct current. The current valueally changes within the specified mA range—in proportion to the valuethe measured quantity.

Further processing of the direct currents obtained on the outputs of dent measuring converters occurs within different control, protection, monitoring terminals and within the higher hierarchical systems in secondary power system.

The REC 561 control, protection and monitoring terminal have a builoption to measure and further process information about up to 36 diffedirect current information from different measuring transducers. Six inpendent measuring channels are located on each independent mAmodule. Each REC 561can accept up to six independent mA input mules.

Information about the measured quantities are then available to theon different locations:

• Locally by means of a built-in man-machine-interface (MMI)

• Locally by means of a front-connected personal computer (PC)

• Remotely over the LON bus to the station control system (SCS)

• Remotely over the SPA port to the station monitoring system (SM

2 User-defined measuring rangesThe measuring range of different direct current measuring channels istable by the user independent on each other within the range betweemA and +20 mA in steps of 0.01 mA. It is necessary only to selectupper operating limit I_max higher than the lower one I_min.

ABB Network Partner ABDirect current measuring unit

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 154-XENPage 7 - 6

OS).

n theeachating

andately. the

User can this way select for each measuring quantity on each monitoredobject of a power system the most suitable measuring range and this wayoptimise a complete functionality together with the characteristics of theused measuring transducer.

3 Continuous monitoring of the measured quantityThe user can continuously monitor the measured quantity in each channelby means of six built-in operating limits, see Fig. 1. Two of them aredefined by the selection of operating range: I_Max as the upper andI_Min as the lower operating limit. The other four operating limits oper-ate in two different modes of operation:

• Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the HiWarn or HiAlarm pre-set values

• Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low-Warn or LowAlarm pre-set values

Fig. 1 Presentation of the operating range and operating limits

Each operating level has its corresponding functional output signal (FIts logical value changes according to Fig. 1.

You can set the hysteresis, which determines the difference betweeoperating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for measuring channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all opervalues within one channel.

4 Continuous supervision of the measured quantityThe actual value of the measured quantity is available locally remotely. The measurement is continuous for each channel separBut the reporting of the value to the higher levels (control processor inmodule, MMI and SCS) depends on the selected reporting mode.

I_Max

HiAlarm

HiWarn

LowWarn

LowAlarm

I_Min

RMAXAL=1HIALARM=1

HIWARN=1

RMAXAL=0

HIALARM=0

HIWARN=0

LOWWARN=0

LOWALARM=0

RMINAL=0

RMINAL=1

LOWALARM=1

LOWWARN=1

Hysteresis

Y

t

(X80154-1)

Direct current measuring unitABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 154-XENPage 7 - 7

Version 1.0-00

than by newi-

eas-

o notlue is, seed the

rtherd the the

These reporting modes are available:

• Periodic reporting

• Periodic reporting with dead-band supervision in parallel

• Periodic reporting with dead-band supervision in series

Users can select between two types of dead-band supervision:

• Amplitude dead-band supervision(ADBS)

• Integrating dead-band supervision (IDBS)

4.1 Amplitude dead-band supervision

If the changed value—compared to the last reported value—is largerthe ± ∆Y predefinied limits that are set by users, and if this is detecteda new measuring sample, then the measuring channel reports thevalue to a higher level (Fig. 2). This limits the information flow to a minmum necessary.

Fig. 2 Amplitude dead-band supervision

After the new value is reported, the new + ∆Y limits for dead-band areautomatically set around it. The new value is reported only if the mured quantity changes more than defined by the new +∆Y set limits.

4.2 Integrating dead-band supervision

The value of the measured quantity is updated even if the changes dexceed the amplitude dead-band supervision limits. The measured vaupdated if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set limitsFig. 3. The shadowed areas represent the time integrals which exceepre-set value of the integrating dead-band supervision.

The last value reported (Y1 in Fig. 3) serves as a basic value for fumeasurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported annewly measured value during the new sample and is multiplied by

1 2 3 4 5 6

Y

t

∆Y

∆Y

∆Y

∆Y

Y1 Y2 Y3

new values reported

(x80154-2)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 154-XENPage 7 - 8

nc-

band.sec-

ion.riodime.

r thedence of a

time increment. These products are added until the pre-set value isexceeded. The last measured value (Y2 in Fig. 3) is reported and set as anew base for the following measurements.

Fig. 3 Integrating dead-band supervision

4.3 Periodic reporting Uses can select the periodic reporting of measured value in time intervalsbetween 1 and 3600 s. The measuring channel reports the value even if ithas not changed for more than the set limits of amplitude or integratingdead-band supervision. To disable periodic reporting, set the reportingtime interval to 0 s.

4.4 Periodic reporting with the dead-band supervision in parallel

The newly measured value is reported:

• After each time interval for the periodic reporting expired, or

• When the new value is detected by the dead-band supervision fution

You can select the amplitude dead-band and the integrating dead-You can set periodic reporting in time intervals between 1 and 3600 onds.

4.5 Periodic reporting with the dead-band supervision in series

Periodic reporting can operate serially with the dead-band supervisThis means that the new value is reported only if the set time peexpired and if the dead-band limit was exceeded during the observed t

The reporting of the new value depends on setting parameters fodead-band and for the periodic reporting. Table 1 presents the depenbetween different settings and the type of reporting for the new valuemeasured quantity.

1 2 3 4 5 6

Y1 Y2 Y3

reported values

Y

t

(x80154-3)


Version 1.0-00

* please, refer to the setting table for the explanation

5 Design and measuring principleThe design of the mA input modules follows the design of all 500-seriesprotection, control, and monitoring terminals that have distributed func-tionality, where the decision levels are placed as closely as possible to theprocess.

Each independent measuring module contains all necessary circuirity andfunctionality for measurement of six independent measuring quantitiesrelated to the corresponding measured direct currents.

On the accurate input shunt resistor, the direct input current (from themeasuring converter) forms a voltage drop that is in proportion to themeasured current. Later, the voltage drop is processed within one differ-ential type of measuring channel (Fig. 4).

The measured voltage is filtered by the low-pass analogue filter beforeentering the analogue to digital converter (A/D). Users can set the sam-pling frequency of the A/D converter between 5 Hz and 255 Hz to adaptto different application requirements as best as possible.

Table 1: Dependence of reporting on different setting parameters

En

Dea

dB

*

En

IDea

dB

*

En

Dea

dB

P*

Rep

Int*

Reporting of the new value

Off Off Off 0 No measured values is reported

Off On On t>0 The new measured value is reported only if the time t period expired and if, during this time, the integrating dead-band limits were exceeded

On Off On t>0 The new measured value is reported only if the time t period expired and if, during this time, the amplitude dead-band limits were exceeded

On On On t>0 The new measured value is reported only if the time t period expired and if at least one of the dead-band limits were exceeded

Off On Off 0 The new measured value is reported only when the integrated dead-band limits are exceeded

On Off Off 0 The new measured value is reported only when the amplitude dead-band limits were exceeded

On On Off 0 The new measured value is reported only if one of the dead-band limits was exceeded

x x Off t>0 The new measured value is updated at least after the time t period expired. If the dead-band supervision is additionally selected, the updating also occurs when the corresponding dead-band limit was exceeded.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 154-XENPage 7 - 10

ringo the

thatd to theured dif-

duc-tionali-but

hich other

orted

Fig. 4 Block diagram of measuring channel

The digital information is filtered by the digital low-pass filter with the(sinx/x)3 response. The filter notch frequency automatically follows theselected sampling frequency. The relation between the frequency corre-sponding to the suppression of -3 dB and the filter notch frequency corre-sponds to the equation:

Using optocouplers and DC/DC conversion elements that are used sepa-rately for each measuring channel, the input circuirity of each measuringchannel is galvanically separated from:

• The internal measuring circuits

• The control microprocessor on the board

A microprocessor collects the digitized information from each measuchannel. The microprocessor serves as a communication interface tmain processing module (MPM).

All processing of the measured signal is performed on the module soonly the minimum amount of information is necessary to be transmitteand from the MPM. The measuring module receives information fromMPM on setting and the command parameters; it reports the measvalues and additional information—according to needs and values offerent parameters.

Each measuring channel is calibrated very accurately during the protion process. The continuous internal zero offset and full-scale calibraduring the normal operation is performed by the A/D converter. The cbration covers almost all analogue parts of the A/D conversion, neglects the shunt resistance.

Each measuring channel has built in a zero-value supervision, wgreatly rejects the noise generated by the measuring transducers andexternal equipment. The value of the measured input current is repequal to zero (0) if the measured primary quantity does not exceed +0.5%of the maximum measuring range.

DC

DC

ADU

Udc

I

(x80154-4)

f 3dB– 0 262, fnotch⋅=


Version 1.0-00

ling

The complete measuring module is equipped with advanced self-supervi-sion. Only the outermost analogue circuits cannot be monitored. The A/Dconverter, optocouplers, digital circuitry, and DC/DC converters, are allsupervised on the module. Over the CAN bus, the measuring modulesends a message to the MPM for any detected errors on the supervised cir-cuitry.

6 SettingYou must use the SMS and the CAP 531 configuration tool to set allremaining parameters that are related to different alternating measuringquantities.

Users can set the 13 character name for each measuring channel.

Set all monitoring operating values and the hysteresis directly in the mAof the measured input currents from the measuring transducers.

You can display local and remote measured quantities according to thecorresponding modules that are separately set for each measuring channelby the users (five characters).

The relation between the measured quantity in power system and the set-ting range of the direct current measuring channel corresponds to thisequation:

Where:

is a set value for the minimum operating current of a channel in mA

is a set value for a maximum operating current of a channel in mA

is a value of a primary measuring quantity corresponding to the set value of minimum operating current of a channel

is a value of a primary measuring quantity corresponding to the set value of maximum operating current of a channel

.......is the actual value of the primary measured quantity

Set the dead-band limits directly in the mA of the input direct current for:

• Amplitude dead-band supervision

• Integrating dead-band supervision

You must observe the dependency of the [mAs] on the sampfrequency, which corresponds to this equation:

where:

Value ValueMin I IMin–( )ValueMax ValueMin–

IMax IMin–-----------------------------------------------------------⋅+=

IMin

IMax

ValueMinIMin

ValueMaxIMax

Value

IDBS

IDBSIDeadB

SampRate-------------------------- IDeadB ts⋅= =


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 154-XENPage 7 - 12

is a set value of the current level for IDBS in mA

is a set value of sampling rate (frequency) in Hz

time between two samples in s

Users can change the polarity of connected direct current input signal bysetting the ChSign to On or Off. This way, users can compensate by set-ting for the wrong connection of the direct current leeds between themeasuring converter and the input terminals of the 500 series unit.

The setting table lists all setting parameters with additional explanation.

7 TestingYou need stabilized current generator and mA meter with very high accu-racy for measurement of direct current to test the measuring module. Thegenerator operating range and the measuring range of the mA meter mustbe between -20 and 20 mA.

Connect the current generator and mA meter to the corresponding directcurrent input terminals. Check that the values presented on the MMI mod-ule corresponds to the magnitude of input direct current within the limitsof declared accuracy. The service value is available under the submenu:

Service ReportSlotnm-MIMx

MIxy-Value

where:

nm represents the serial number of a slot with tested mA input module

x represents the serial number of a mA input module in a terminal

y represents the serial number of a measuring channel on module x.

The operation of ADBS or IDBS function can be checked separately withthe setting of RepInt = 0. The value on the MMI must change only whenthe changes in input current (compared to the present value) are higherthan the set value for both dead bands.

Configure the monitoring output signals (see the signal list) to the corre-sponding output relays. Check the operating monitoring levels by chang-ing the magnitude of input current and observing the operation of thecorresponding output relays.

IDeadB

SampRate

ts1

SampRate--------------------------=


Version 1.0-00

8 Appendix


Fig. 5 Simplified terminal diagram for the measuring channel 1 on the mA input module (m=1...6)

Fig. 6 Simplified terminal diagram for the measuring channels 2 to 6 on the mA input module (m=1...6)

MIM (mA input module) m channel 1

MImn-ERROR

MImn-INPUTERR

MIm1-POSITION

MIm1-BLOCK

MImn-RMAXAL

MImn-RMINAL

MImn-HIALARM

MImn-HIWARN

MImn-LOWWARN

MImn-LOWALARM(x80154-5)

MIM (mA input module) m channel n

MImn-INPUTERRMImn-BLOCK

MImn-RMAXAL

MImn-RMINAL

MImn-HIALARM

MImn-HIWARN

MImn-LOWWARN

MImn-LOWALARM

(x80154-6)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 154-XENPage 7 - 14

8.2 Signal list

Table 2

IN: DESCRIPTION:

MIn1-BLOCK Blocks the reporting of new measured value by measuring channel No.1 on measuring module n (n = 1...6)






MIn1-POSITION Defines the position of the measuring module n (n = 1...6) within the terminal. It must be configured to the corresponding output signal of the positioning block IOP.

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

MIn1-ERROR Represent the fault detected on complete measuring module n (n = 1...6). It signalises also the wrong module on specified position. The signal is common for the complete measuring module

MInm-LOWALARM Has the value equal to logical 1 when the measured input current on the measuring mod-ule n (n = 1...6) for the measuring channel m (m = 1...6) decreases under the correspond-ing set value LowAlarm.

MInm-LOWWARN Has the value equal to logical 1 when the measured input current on the measuring mod-ule n (n = 1...6) for the measuring channel m (m = 1...6) decreases under the correspond-ing set value LowWarn.

MInm-HIWARN Has the value equal to logical 1 when the measured input current on the measuring mod-ule n (n = 1...6) for the measuring channel m (m = 1...6) increases over the corresponding set value HiWarn.

MInm-HIALARM Has the value equal to logical 1 when the measured input current on the measuring mod-ule n (n = 1...6) for the measuring channel m (m = 1...6) increases over the corresponding set value HiAlarm.

MInm-RMINAL Has the value equal to logical 1 when the measured input current on the measuring mod-ule n (n = 1...6) for the measuring channel m (m = 1...6) decreases under the correspond-ing minimum set reach I_Min.

MInm-RMAXAL Has the value equal to logical 1 when the measured input current on the measuring mod-ule n (n = 1...6) for the measuring channel m (m = 1...6) increases over the corresponding maximum set reach I_Max.

MInm-INPUTERR Informs about the detected error within the measuring channel m (m = 1...6) on the meas-uring module n (n = 1...6).


Version 1.0-00

8.3 Setting table

Table 3:


Name 13 character string Up to 13 characters long name for the measuring channel

Operation Off, On Operation of the measuring channel enabled (On) or disabled (Off)

Calib Off, On Activation (On) or deactivation (Off) of a production calibration. In a moment only possible to read. The production calibration is always On.

ChSign Off, On Changes the polarity of connected input current (On)

Unit 5 character string Up to 5 characters long name for the unit of the measuring con-verter input measuring quantity

Hysteres (0.0-20.0)mA Hysteresis for the set values of the monitoring measuring elements in one measuring channel.

AlRemove Off, On When On produces an immediate event when any of alarm moni-toring measuring elements resets.

I_Max (-20.00 - 20.00)mA Determines the maximum permitted input current to the measuring channel

SampRate (5 - 255)Hz Sampling frequency for the measuring channel

EnAlarm Off, On When On produces an immediate event at operation of any alarm monitoring measuring elements

MinValue (-1000.00- 1000.00)(a) Determines the minimum value of the measuring transducer pri-mary measuring quantity, which corresponds to the minimum per-mitted input current I_Min

HiAlarm (-20.00 - 20.00)mA Determines the operating value of the monitoring measuring ele-ment, which produces logical signal MInm-HIALARM (n = 1...6 and m = 1...6)

HiWarn (-20.00 - 20.00)mA Determines the operating value of the monitoring measuring ele-ment, which produces logical signal MInm-HIWARN (n = 1...6 and m = 1...6)

LowWarn (-20.00 - 20.00)mA Determines the operating value of the monitoring measuring ele-ment, which produces logical signal MInm-LOWWARN (n = 1...6 and m = 1...6)

LowAlarm (-20.00 - 20.00)mA Determines the operating value of the monitoring measuring ele-ment, which produces logical signal MInm-LOWALARM (n = 1...6 and m = 1...6)

RepInt (0-3600)Seconds Duration of time interval between two reports at periodic reporting function. Setting equal to 0 disables the periodical reporting

EnDeadB Off, On Enables (On) or disables (Off) the amplitude dead band supervision function

DeadBand (0.00-20.00)mA Width of the amplitude dead band within the ADBS function

EnIDeadB Off, On Enables (On) or disables (Off) the integrating dead band supervi-sion function

IDeadB (0.00-1000.00)mA Determines the width of the current band within the IDBS function. Be aware of the sampling frequency.

EnDeadBP Off, On Enables (On) or disables (Off) the periodic dead band reporting


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 154-XENPage 7 - 16

Note: (a) is referred to the user-defined parameter Unit, where the usercan write the unit of the measuring converter input measuring quantity.

The setting parameters are the same for all measuring channels (m = 1...6)on all mA input modules (n = 1...6).

MaxValue (-1000.00 - 1000.00)(a) Determines the maximum value of the measuring transducer pri-mary measuring quantity, which corresponds to the maximum per-mitted input current I_Max

I_Min (-20.00 - 20.00)mA Determines the minimum permitted input current to the measuring channel

Table 3:



Function:

ur-n onowereasur- on.

ol,ical

t-innput

eas-ns.

a-

ea-

nt-

rent-

accu-tion whento the

er on

S)

7Measurement of alternating quantities

1MRK 580 159-XEN


1 ApplicationFast, reliable supervision of different analogue quantities is of vital impor-tance during the normal operation of a power system.

Operators in the control centres can, for example:

• Continuously follow active and reactive power flow in the network

• Supervise the busbar voltages

• Check the temperature of power transformers, shunt reactors

• Monitor pressure in circuit breakers

Different measuring methods are available for different quantities. Crent and voltage instrument transformers provide the basic informatiomeasured phase currents and voltages in different points within the psystem. At the same time, currents and voltages serve as the input ming quantities to power and energy meters, protective devices and so

Further processing of this information occurs within different contrprotection, and monitoring terminals and within the higher hierarchsystems in the secondary power system.

The REx 5xx protection, control, and monitoring terminals have a builoption to measure and further process information about up to five icurrents and five input voltages. The number of processed alternate muring quantities depends on the type of terminal and built-in optioAdditional information is also available:

• Mean values of measured currents I in the first, three current-mesuring channels

• Mean values of measured voltages U in the first, three voltage-msuring channels

• Three-phase active power P as measured by the first, three curreand voltage-measuring channels

• Three-phase reactive power Q as measured by the first, three curand voltage-measuring channels

• Frequency f

The accuracy of measurement depends on the requirements. Basicracy satisfies the operating (information) needs. An additional calibraof measuring channels is necessary and must be ordered separatelythe requirements on accuracy of the measurement are higher. Refer technical data and ordering particulars, for the particular terminal.

The information on measured quantities are then available to the usdifferent locations:

• Locally by means of a built-in, man-machine interface (MMI) unit• Locally by means of a front-connected personal computer (PC)• Remotely over the LON bus to the station control system (SCS)• Remotely over the SPA port to the station monitoring system (SM

ABB Network Partner ABMeasurement of alternating quantities

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 159-XENPage 7 - 18

nde-

suringthey

el bye in

OS).

n theeachating

Further processing, monitoring, and supervision of different alternatemeasuring quantities is possible only in the REC 561 control terminal.

1.1 User-defined measuring ranges

You can set measuring range for different measuring channels—ipendent of each other in wide setting ranges.

So users can select the most suitable measuring range for each meaquantity on each monitored object of a power system. In doing so, optimize the functionality of the power system.

1.2 Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity

Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity in each channmeans of four built-in operating limits, see Fig. 1. The monitors operattwo different modes of operation:

• Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the HiWarn or HiAlarm pre-set values

• Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low-Warn or LowAlarm pre-set values

Fig. 1 Presentation of the operating limits

Each operating level has its corresponding functional output signal (FIts logical value changes according to Fig. 1.

You can set the hysteresis, which determines the difference betweeoperating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for measuring channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all opervalues within one channel.

HiAlarm

HiWarn

LowWarn

LowAlarm

HIALARM=1

HIWARN=1

HIALARM=0

HIWARN=0

LOWWARN=0

LOWALARM=0

LOWALARM=1

LOWWARN=1

Hysteresis

Y

t

(x80159-1)

Measurement of alternating quantities


Version 1.0-00

than by newi-

eas-

s douredt lim-

hich

1.3 Continuous supervision of the measured quantity

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally andremotely. The measurement is continuous for each channel separately.But the reporting of the value to the higher levels (control processor in theunit, MMI and SCS) depends on the selected reporting mode. Thesereporting modes are available:

• Periodic reporting

• Periodic reporting with dead-band supervision in parallel

• Periodic reporting with dead-band supervision in series

Users can select between two types of dead-band supervision:

• Amplitude dead-band supervision(ADBS)

• Integrating dead-band supervision (IDBS)

1.3.1 Amplitude dead-band supervision

If the changed value—compared to the last reported value—is largerthe ± ∆Y predefinied limits that are set by users, and it this is detecteda new measuring sample, then the measuring channel reports thevalue to a higher level (Fig. 2). This limits the information flow to a minmum necessary.

Fig. 2 Amplitude dead-band supervision

After the new value is reported, the new + ∆Y limits for dead-band areautomatically set around it. The new value is reported only if the mured quantity changes more than defined by the new +∆Y set limits.

1.3.2 Integrating dead-band supervision

The value of the measured quantity is updated—even if the changenot exceed the amplitude dead-band supervision limits. The measvalue is updated if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-seits, see Fig. 3. The shadowed areas represent the time integrals wexceed the pre-set value of the integrating dead-band supervision.

1 2 3 4 5 6

Y

t

∆Y

∆Y

∆Y

∆Y

Y1 Y2 Y3

new values reported

(x80159-2)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 159-XENPage 7 - 20

nc-

band.sec-

ion.riodime.

r thedence of a

The last value reported (Y1 in Fig. 3) serves as a basic value for furthermeasurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and thenewly measured value during new sample and is multiplied by the timeincrement. These products are added until the pre-set value is exceeded.The last measured value (Y2 in Fig. 3) is reported and set as a new basefor the following measurements.

Fig. 3 Integrating dead-band supervision

1.3.3 Periodic reporting Users can select the periodic reporting of measured value in time intervalsbetween 1 and 3600 s. The measuring channel reports the value even if ithas not changed for more than the set limits of amplitude or integratingdead-band supervision. To disable periodic reporting, set the reportingtime interval to 0 s.

1.3.4 Periodic reporting with the dead-band supervision in parallel

The newly measured value is reported:

• After each time interval for the periodic reporting expired, or

• When the new value is detected by the dead-band supervision fution

You can select the amplitude dead-band and the integrating dead-You can set periodic reporting in time intervals between 1 and 3600 onds.

1.3.5 Periodic reporting with the dead-band supervision in series

Periodic reporting can operate serially with the dead-band supervisThis means that the new value is reported only if the set time peexpired and if the dead-band limit was exceeded during the observed t

The reporting of the new value depends on setting parameters fodead-band and for the periodic reporting. Table 1 presents the depenbetween different settings and the type of reporting for the new valuemeasured quantity.

1 2 3 4 5 6

Y1 Y2 Y3

reported values

Y

t

(x80159-3)



Version 1.0-00

* please, refer to the setting table for the explanation

2 Design and measuring principleThe design of the alternating quantities measuring function follows thedesign of all 500-series protection, control, and monitoring terminals thathave distributed functionality, where the decision levels are placed asclosely as possible to the process.

The measuring function uses the same input current and voltage signals asother protection and monitoring functions within the terminals; see Fig. 4.The number of input current and voltage transformers depends on the typeof terminal and options included. The maximum possible configurationcomprises five current and five voltage input channels.

Measured input currents and voltages are first filtered in analogue filtersand then converted to numerical information by an A/D convertor, whichoperates with a sampling frequency of 2 kHz.

The numerical information on measured currents and voltages continuesover a serial link to one of the built-in digital signal processors (DSP). Anadditional Fourier filter numerically filters the received information, andthe DSP calculates the corresponding RMS values for:

Dependence of reporting on different setting parameters:

EnD

eadB

*

EnI

Dea

dB*

EnD

eadB

P*

Rep

Int* Reporting of the new value

Off Off Off 0 No measured values is reported

Off On On t>0 The new measured value is reported only if the time t period expired and if, dur-ing this time, the integrating dead-band limits were exceeded

On Off On t>0 The new measured value is reported only if the time t period has expired and if,during this time, the amplitude dead-band limits were exceeded

On On On t>0 The new measured value is reported only if the time t period expired and if at leastone of the dead-band limits were exceeded

Off On Off 0 The new measured value is reported only when the integrated dead-band limitsare exceeded

On Off Off 0 The new measured value is reported only when the amplitude dead-band limitswere exceeded

On On Off 0 The new measured value is reported only if one of the dead-band limits wasexceeded

x x Off t>0 The new measured value is updated at least after the time t period expired. If thedead-band supervision is additionally selected, the updating also occurs when thecorresponding dead-band limit was exceeded.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 159-XENPage 7 - 22

)

cur-

d

nd

ddi-theent.

ls

d

• Five input measured currents (I1, I2,..., I5)

• Five input measured voltages (U1, U2,...,U5)

• Mean value of the first, three measured currents (I1, I2, and I3)

• Mean value of the first, three measured voltages (U1, U2, and U3

• Three-phase, active power P related to the first, three measuredrents and voltages

• Three-phase, reactive power Q related to the first, three measurecurrents and voltages

• Mean value of frequencies as measured with voltages U1, U2, aU3

Fig. 4 Simplified block diagram for the function

This information is available to the user for operational purposes. Ational processing (filtering and calibration) is necessary to obtain accuracy sufficient for the purposes of accurate remote measuremThis additional functionality is optional for the control termina(REC 5xx) only.

3 SettingSet the basic terminal parameters under the submenu:

ConfigurationAnalogInputs

GeneralUr (Ir, fr, CTEarth)

So users can determine the rated parameters for the terminal:

• Rated ac voltage Ur

• Rated ac current Ir (settable only on the terminal)

• Rated frequency fr

• Position of the earthing point of the main CTs (CTEarth), which determines whether the CT earthing point is towards the protecteobject or the busbar.

AD

5I

5U

PROCESSING

CALIBRATION

SCS

MMI

SMS

LOGIC

DSP

(x80159-4)



Version 1.0-00

nds

n.

You can enter the user-defined name for each of the 15 analogue measur-ing quantities. Each name can consist of up to 13 characters and can be setunder the submenu:


U1 (U2,..U5, I1,..,I5, U, I, P, Q, f)

The names of first 10 quantities automatically appear in the REVAL eval-uation program for each reported disturbance.

You can set the rated primary values of the corresponding voltage andcurrent instrument transformers for the first 10 quantities under the samesubmenu.

You must use the SMS and the CAP 531 configuration tool to set allremaining parameters that are related to different alternating measuringquantities.

Separately set all monitoring operating values and the hysteresis directlyin the basic units of the measured quantities for each channel and for eachquantity.

Set the dead-band limits directly in the corresponding units of theobserved quantity for the:

• Amplitude dead-band supervision

• Integrating dead-band supervision

You must observe the dependency of the IDBS [mAs], which correspoto this equation:

where:

is a set operating value for IDBS in corresponding unit

is a reading frequency. It has a constant value of 1Hz

time between two samples in s

The setting table lists all setting parameters with additional explanatio

IDBSIDeadB

ReadFreq-------------------------- IDeadB ts⋅= =

IDeadB

ReadFreq

ts1

ReadFreq--------------------------=


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 159-XENPage 7 - 24

4 TestingStabilized ac current and voltage generators and corresponding current,voltage, power and frequency meters with very high accuracy are neces-sary for testing the alternating quantity measuring function. The operatingranges of the generators must correspond to the rated alternate current andvoltage of each terminal.

Connect the generators and instruments to the corresponding input termi-nals of a unit under test. Check that the values presented on the MMI unitcorrespond to the magnitude of input measured quantities within the lim-its of declared accuracy. The mean service values are available under thesubmenu:

Service ReportMean Values

The phasors of up to five input currents and voltages are available underthe submenu:

Service ReportPhasors

Primary

The operation of ADBS or IDBS function can be checked separately withthe RepInt = 0 setting. The value on the MMI follows the changes in theinput measuring quantity continuously.

Configure the monitoring output signals (see the signal list) to the corre-sponding output relays. Check the operating monitoring levels by chang-ing the magnitude of input current and observing the operation of thecorresponding output relays. The output contact changes its state onlywhen the changes in input measuring quantity compared to the presentvalue are higher than the set values for both dead-bands.



Version 1.0-00

5 Appendix


Fig. 5 Simplified terminal diagram for the alternate analogue quan-tity measuring

5.2 Signal list

DIrAnalog In_U1

DAxx-BLOCK DAxx-HIALARMDAxx-HIWARN

DAxx-LOWWARNDAxx-LOWALARM

DAxx (Alternate quantity measuring unit No.1..15)

(x80159-5)

IN: DESCRIPTION:

DA01-BLOCK

Blocks the reporting of new measured value by analoguemeasuring channel U1, when active

DA02-BLOCK


DA03-BLOCK


DA04-BLOCK


DA05-BLOCK


DA06-BLOCK

Blocks the reporting of new measured value by analoguemeasuring channel I1, when active

DA07-BLOCK


DA08-BLOCK


DA09-BLOCK


DA10-BLOCK


DA11-BLOCK

Blocks the reporting of new measured value by analoguemeasuring channel U, when active

DA12-BLOCK

Blocks the reporting of new measured value by analoguemeasuring channel I, when active

DA13-BLOCK

Blocks the reporting of new measured value by analoguemeasuring channel P, when active


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 159-XENPage 7 - 26

*1) The nn within the signal name corresponds to the following measur-ing quantities:

nn = 01 input measuring voltage U1





nn = 06 input measuring current I1





nn = 11 mean value U of first three phaes voltages U1, U2 and U3, multiplied by

nn = 12 mean value I of first three currents I1, I2 and I3

nn = 13 three phase active power P measured by first three voltage and current inputs

nn = 14 three phase reactive power Q measured by first three voltage and current inputs

nn = 15 mean value of frequency f as measured by first three voltage inputs U1, U2 and U3

DA14-BLOCK

Blocks the reporting of new measured value by analoguemeasuring channel Q, when active

DA15-BLOCK

Blocks the reporting of new measured value by analoguemeasuring channel f, when active

OUT: *1) DESCRIPTION:

DAnn-LOW-ALARM

Has the value equal to logical 1 when the measured ana-logue input quantity decreases under the correspondingset value LowAlarm

DAnn-LOW-WARN

Has the value equal to logical 1 when the measured ana-logue input quantity decreases under the correspondingset value LowWarn

DAnn-HIWARN

Has the value equal to logical 1 when the measured ana-logue input quantity increases over the corresponding setvalue HiWarn

DAnn-HIALARM

Has the value equal to logical 1 when the measured ana-logue input quantity increases over the corresponding setvalue HiAlarm

IN: DESCRIPTION:

3



Version 1.0-00

5.3 Setting table


Voltage input channels U1 - U5:


RepInt (0-3600)Seconds Duration of time interval between two reports at periodic reportingfunction. Setting to 0 disables the periodic reporting.

EnAlarms Off, On Produces an immediate event at operation of any alarm monitoring ele-ment, when On

EnAlRem Off, On Produces an immediate event at reset of any alarm monitoring element,when On.

Hysteres (0.0-1999.9)kV Hysteresis for the set values of the monitoring elements in one measur-ing channel.

LowAlarm (0.0-1999.9)kV Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA0n-LOWALARM (n=1..5)

LowWarn (0.0-1999.9)kV Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA0n-LOWARN (n=1..5)

HiWarn (0.0-1999.9)kV Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA0n-HIWARN (n=1..5)

HiAlarm (0.0-1999.9)kV Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA0n-HIALARM (n=1..5)

EnDeadB Off, On Enables (On) or disables (Off) the amplitude dead-band supervisionfunction

DeadBand (0.0-1999.9)kV Width of the amplitude dead-band within the ADBS function

EnIDeadB Off, On Enables (On) or disables (Off) the integrating dead-band supervisionfunction.

IDeadB (0.0-1999.9)kV Determines the width of the band within the IDBS function. Be aware ofthe sampling frequency

EnDeadBP Off, On Enables (On) or disables (Off) the periodic dead-band reporting

Current input channels I1 - I5:





Hysteres (0-99999)A Hysteresis for the set values of the monitoring elements in one measur-ing channel.

LowAlarm (0-99999)A Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA0n-LOWALARM (n=6..10)

LowWarn (0-99999)A Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA0n-LOWARN (n=6..10)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 159-XENPage 7 - 28

HiWarn (0-99999)A Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA0n-HIWARN (n=6..10)

HiAlarm (0-99999)A Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA0n-HIALARM (n=6..10)


DeadBand (0-99999)A Width of the amplitude dead-band within the ADBS function


IDeadB (0-99999)A Determines the width of the band within the IDBS function. Be aware ofthe sampling frequency


Mean voltage measuring channel





Hysteres (0.0-1999.9)kV Hysteresis for the set values of the monitoring elements in one measur-ing channel.

LowAlarm (0.0-1999.9)kV Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA11-LOWALARM

LowWarn (0.0-1999.9)kV Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA11-LOWARN

HiWarn (0.0-1999.9)kV Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA11-HIWARN

HiAlarm (0.0-1999.9)kV Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA11-HIALARM


DeadBand (0.0-1999.9)kV Width of the amplitude dead-band within the ADBS function


IDeadB (0.0-1999.9)kV Determines the width of the band within the IDBS function. Be aware ofthe sampling frequency





Version 1.0-00

Mean current measuring channel





Hysteres (0-99999)A Hysteresis for the set values of the monitoring elements in one measur-ing channel.

LowAlarm (0-99999)A Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA12-LOWALARM

LowWarn (0-99999)A Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA12-LOWARN

HiWarn (0-99999)A Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA12-HIWARN

HiAlarm (0-99999)A Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA12-HIALARM


DeadBand (0-99999)A Width of the amplitude dead-band within the ADBS function


IDeadB (0-99999)A Determines the width of the band within the IDBS function. Be aware ofthe sampling frequency


Active power measuring channel





Hysteres (0.0-9999.9)MW Hysteresis for the set values of the monitoring elements in one measur-ing channel.

LowAlarm (0.0-9999.9)MW Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA13-LOWALARM

LowWarn (0.0-9999.9)MW Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA13-LOWARN

HiWarn (0.0-9999.9)MW Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA13-HIWARN



Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 159-XENPage 7 - 30

HiAlarm (0.0-9999.9)MW Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA13-HIALARM


DeadBand (0.0-9999.9)MW Width of the amplitude dead-band within the ADBS function


IDeadB (0.0-9999.9)MW Determines the width of the band within the IDBS function. Be aware ofthe sampling frequency


Reactive power measuring channel





Hysteres (0.0-9999.9)Mvar Hysteresis for the set values of the monitoring elements in one measur-ing channel.

LowAlarm (0.0-9999.9)Mvar Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA14-LOWALARM

LowWarn (0.0-9999.9)Mvar Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA14-LOWARN

HiWarn (0.0-9999.9)Mvar Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA14-HIWARN

HiAlarm (0.0-9999.9)Mvar Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA14-HIALARM


DeadBand (0.0-9999.9)Mvar Width of the amplitude dead-band within the ADBS function


IDeadB (0.0-9999.9)Mvar Determines the width of the band within the IDBS function. Be aware ofthe sampling frequency





Version 1.0-00

Frequency measuring channel





Hysteres (0.0-99.9)Hz Hysteresis for the set values of the monitoring elements in one measur-ing channel.

LowAlarm (0.0-99.9)Hz Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA15-LOWALARM

LowWarn (0.0-99.9)Hz Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA15-LOWARN

HiWarn (0.0-99.9)Hz Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA15-HIWARN

HiAlarm (0.0-99.9)Hz Determines the operating value of the monitoring element which pro-duces logical signal DA15-HIALARM


DeadBand (0.0-99.9)Hz Width of the amplitude dead-band within the ADBS function


IDeadB (0.0-99.9)Hz Determines the width of the band within the IDBS function. Be aware ofthe sampling frequency


Reporting of events to the station control system (SCS) via LONport

EventMask f No Events, ReportEvents

Enables (Report Events) or disables (No Events) reporting of eventsfrom channel DA15 to the SCS

EventMask Q No Events, ReportEvents


EventMask P No Events, ReportEvents


EventMask I No Events, ReportEvents


EventMask U No Events, ReportEvents


EventMask I5 No Events, ReportEvents






Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 159-XENPage 7 - 32







EventMask U5 No Events, ReportEvents










The following parameters are settable under the Configuration-AnalogInputs submenu. Settings are possible also by means of theMMI module

Name 13 character name Name of the analogue measuring channel.Enter up to 13 characters forthe name of measured quantity. the name appears automatically in dis-turbance evaluation program REVAL. The default names are:U1,..,U5,I1,..I5,U,I,P,Q,f

VTPrim (1-9999) kV Rated primary voltage of the voltage instrument transformer connectedto the Un (n = 1 to 5) measuring channel

CTPrim (1-9999) A Rated primary current of the current instrument transformer connectedto the In (n = 1 to 5) measuring channel



Function:

rvice the the

vatestedtion

the

7Pulse counter 1MRK 580 187-XEN


1 ApplicationThe Pulse Counter function provides the Substation Automation systemwith the number of pulses, which have been accumulated in the REC 561control terminal during a defined period of time, for calculation of, forexample, energy values. The pulses are captured on the Binary input mod-ule (BIM) that is read by the Pulse Counter function. The number ofpulses in the counter is then reported via LON to the station MMI or readvia SPA as a service value.

The normal use for this function is the counting of energy pulses for kWhand kvarh in both directions from external energy meters. Up to 12 binaryinputs in a REC 561 can be used for this purpose with a frequency of up to40 Hz.

2 Theory of operationThe registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0−>1) on one ofthe 16 binary input channels located on the Binary input module (BIM).Pulse Counter values are read from the station MMI with predefinedcyclicity without reset, and an analogue event is created.

The integration time period can be set in the range from 30 seconds to 60minutes and is synchronized with absolute system time. That means, acycle time of one minute will generate a Pulse Counter reading every fullminute. Interrogation of additional Pulse Counter values can be done witha command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All activecounters can also be read by the LON General Interrogation command(GI).

The Pulse Counter in REC 561 supports unidirectional incrementalcounters. That means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a32 bit format, that is, the reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with arange 0...+2147483647. The counter is reset at initialization of the controlterminal or by turning the Pulse Counter operation parameter Off/On.

The reported value to station MMI over the LON bus contains Identity,Value, Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality con-sists of:

• Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error)• Wrapped around• Blocked• Adjusted

The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a sevalue, that is, the value frozen in the last integration cycle is read bystation MMI from the database. The Pulse Counter function updatesvalue in the database when an integration cycle is finished and actithe NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can be connecto an Event function block, be time tagged, and transmitted to the staMMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value was frozen byfunction.

ABB Network Partner ABPulse counter

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 187-XENPage 7 - 34

3 DesignThe function can be regarded as a function block with a few inputs andoutputs. The inputs are divided into two groups: settings and connectables(configuration). The outputs are divided into three groups: signals(binary), service value for SPA, and analogue event for LON.

Fig. 1 shows the Pulse Counter function block with connections of theinputs and outputs.

Fig. 1 Overview of the Pulse Counter function

The BLOCK and TMIT_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Com-mand blocks, which are intended to be controlled either from the stationMMI or/and the built-in MMI. As long as the BLOCK signal is set, thePulse Counter is blocked. The signal connected to TMIT_VAL performsone additional reading per positive flank. The signal must be a pulse witha length >1 second.

The BIM_CONN input is connected to the used input of the functionblock for the Binary input module (BIM). If BIM_CONN is connected toanother function block, the INVALID signal is activated to indicate theconfiguration error.

The NAME input is used for a user-defined name with up to 19 charac-ters.

Each Pulse Counter function block has four output signals: INVALID,RESTART, BLOCKED, and NEW_VAL. These signals can be connectedto an Event function block for event recording.

PulseCounterBLOCK

TMIT_VAL

BIM_CONN

NAME

SingleCmdFunc

OUTx

SingleCmdFunc

OUTx INPUTPulse

OUT

I/O-moduleBIx

“PCxx-name”

EVENT

INVALID

RESTART

BLOCKED

NEW_VAL

INPUT1

INPUT2

INPUT3

INPUT4Pulse length > 1 s

DatabasePulse Counter value:0...2147483647

LON analogue event data msg(M_PC_T)*Identity*Value*Time*Pulse Counter Quality

SMS settings1. Operation = Off/On2. Cycle time = 30s...60min3. Analogue Event Mask = No/Report

(X80187-1)

Pulse counterABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 187-XENPage 7 - 35

Version 1.0-00

ter

eters

/

gue

tion

ms, 5 ms.ansaterSMShet the, ifoun-

pulse

The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary input mod-ule, where the Pulse Counter input is located, fails or has wrong configu-ration.

The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported valuedoes not comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first mes-sage after terminal start-up, in the first message after deblocking, and afterthe counter has wrapped around during last integration cycle.

The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter isblocked. There are two reasons why the counter is blocked:

• The BLOCK input is set, or • The Binary input module, where the counter input is situated, is

inoperative.

The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counvalue was updated since last report.

4 SettingFrom SMS under the “Set Pulse Counter 1...12” menu, these paramcan be set individually for each Pulse Counter:

• Operation = Off/On• Cycle Time = 30s / 1min / 1min30s / 2min / 2min30s / 3min / 4min

5min / 6min / 7min30s / 10min / 12min / 15min / 20min / 30min / 60min.

Under “Mask - Analogue Events” in SMS, the reporting of the analoevents can be masked:

• Event Mask = No Events/Report Events

The configuration of the inputs and outputs of the Pulse Counter funcblock is made by the CAP 531 configuration tool.


On the Binary input module, the debounce filter time is fixed set to 5 that is, the counter suppresses pulses with a pulse length less thanThe input oscillation blocking frequency is preset to 40 Hz. That methat the counter finds the input oscillating if the input frequency is grethan 40 Hz. The oscillation suppression is released at 30 Hz. From under the “Configure I/O-modules” menu and from the built-in MMI, tvalues for blocking/release of the oscillation can be changed. Note thasetting is common for all channels on a Binary input module, that ischanges of the limits are made for inputs not connected to the Pulse Cter, the setting also influences the inputs on the same board used forcounting.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 187-XENPage 7 - 36

5 TestingThe test of the Pulse Counter function requires at least a SPA (or LON)connection to a station MMI including corresponding functionality. Aknown number of pulses are with different frequency connected to thepulse-counter input. The test should be performed for the settings opera-tion = Off/On and for blocked/deblocked function. The Pulse Countervalue is then read by the station MMI.

Pulse counterABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 187-XENPage 7 - 37

Version 1.0-00

6 Appendix


Fig. 2 Simplified terminal diagram of the Pulse Counter function

6.2 Signal list

PulseCounter

BLOCKTMIT_VALBIM_CONNNAME

INVALIDRESTART

BLOCKEDNEW_VAL

(X80187-2)

PCxx

Table 1: Input and output signals for Pulse Counter No. xx

IN: DESCRIPTION:

PCxx-BLOCK Input to block the counter

PCxx-TMIT_VAL Pulse input to perform an additional reading of the counter value. The reading is per-formed on the positive flank of the pulse

PCxx-BIM_CONN Input to be connected to the used input of the function block for the Binary input mod-ule (BIM)

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

PCxx-INVALID The output is set if the Binary input module (BIM), where the pulse input is located, fails or has wrong configuration

PCxx-RESTART The output is set when the reported value does not comprise a complete integration cycle.

PCxx-BLOCKED The output is set when the BLOCK input is set or the Binary input module (BIM), where the pulse input is located, is inoperative.

PCxx-NEW_VAL The output is set if the counter value was updated since the last report (pulse output)


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 187-XENPage 7 - 38

6.3 Setting table

Table 2: Setting table for Pulse Counter No. xx


Operation Off, On Pulse Counter xx in operation. To be set from SMS

CycleTime 30s, 1min, 1min30s, 2min, 2min30s, 3min, 4min, 5min, 6min, 7min30s, 10min, 12min, 15min, 20min, 30min, 60min.

Cycle time for reporting the counter value xx. To be set from SMS

EventMaskxx No Events, Report Events Mask for analogue events from Pulse Counter xx, to be set from SMS

PCxx-NAME 19 characters string User name of Pulse Counter xx. To be set from from CAP 531


Function:

7Time synchronisation 1MRK 580 135-XEN


1 ApplicationTime-tagging of internal events and disturbances is an excellent helpwhen evaluating faults. Without time synchronisation, only the eventswithin the terminal can be compared to one another. With time synchroni-sation, events and disturbances within the entire station, and even betweenline ends, can be compared during an evaluation.

If external time synchronisation is applied, there are two main alterna-tives. Either the synchronisation message is applied via one of the com-munication ports (Station Monitoring System (SMS) or SubstationControl System (SCS)) as a telegram message, or a minute pulse, con-nected to a binary input.

2 Theory of operationThe terminal has its own internal clock with date, hour, minute, secondand millisecond. It has a resolution of 1 ms.

The clock has a built-in calendar for 30 years that handles leap years. Anychange between summer and winter time must be handled manually orthrough external time synchronisation. The clock is powered by a capaci-tor, to bridge interruptions in power supply without malfunction.

The internal clock is used for time-tagging disturbances, events in SMSand SCS, and internal events.

ABB Network Partner ABTime synchronisation

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 135-XENPage 7 - 40

andute

sed

lled

r vian-lock

3 SettingThe internal time can be set on the built-in, man-machine interface (MMI) at:

SettingsTime

The time is set with year, date and time. See Local man machine commu-nication (1MRK 580 156-XEN), for more information.

The source of time synchronisation is set on the built-in MMI at:

ConfigurationTime

When the setting is performed on the built-in MMI, the parameter iscalled TimeSyncSource. The time synchronisation source can also be setin the CAP 531 tool. The setting parameter is then called Synsourc. Thesetting alternatives are:

• None (no synchronisation)

• SPA or LON

• Minute pulse, positive or negative flank

SPA is set when the time synchronisation is performed via SMS, LON is set when the time synchronisation is performed via SCS. Minpositive flank or Minute negative flank is set when a binary input is ufor minute pulse synchronisation.

The function input to be used for minute-pulse synchronisation is caTIME-MINSYNC.

The internal time can be set manually down to the minute level, eithethe built-in MMI or via any of the communication ports. The time sychronisation fine tunes the clock (seconds and milliseconds). If no csynchronisation is active, the time can be set down to milliseconds.

Time synchronisationABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 135-XENPage 7 - 41

Version 1.0-00

4 Appendix


Fig. 1 Simplified terminal diagram for the function

4.2 Signal list

4.3 Setting table

TIME-MINSYNCTIME-SYNSOURC

TIME

TIME-RTCERRTIME-SYNCERR

(X80135-1)

IN: DESCRIPTION:

TIME-MINSYNC Minute-pulse synchronisation input

OUT: DESCRIPTION:

TIME-SYNCERR Loss of synchronisation

TIME-RTCERR Internal clock error


Synsourc None, LON, SPA, BI pos flank, BI neg flank LON=Time synchronisation via the rear LON port SPA=Time synchronisation via the rear SPA port BI pos flank=Minute pulse, positive flankBI neg flank=Minute pulse, negative flank

ABB Network Partner ABTime synchronisation

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 135-XENPage 7 - 42


Function:

7Remote communication 1MRK 580 142-XEN

Version 1.0-00November 1996 Optional

1 ApplicationThe remote communication can be used for different purposes, which ena-ble better access to the information stored in the terminals. For control ter-minals, the remote communication is also used for communicationdirectly between terminals (bay-to-bay communication).

The remote communication can be used with a station monitoring system(SMS), via substation automation (SA) or a SCADA system. Normally,SPA communication is used for SMS and SA; LON communication isused for SA. SPA communication is also applied when using the frontcommunication port, but for this purpose, no special Remote communica-tion function is required in the terminal. Only the software in the PC and aspecial cable for front connection is needed.

Fig. 1 Example of SPA communication structure for a station moni-toring system

Fig. 2 Example of LON communication structure for substation auto-mation

(X80142-1)

REL 511

Bus connection units

REOR 100

REL 531

REC 561

SPA busFibre opticloop

Opto/electricalconverter

(Minute pulsefrom station clock)

Telephone Telephonemodem modem

SMS-BASESM/REL 511SM/REL 531SM/REC 561SM/REOR 100RECOMREVAL

REC 561

REL 531

REL 531

REC 561

Micro SCADA Gateway

LON-bus

(X80142-2)

ABB Network Partner ABRemote communication

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 142-XENPage 7 - 44

2 Theory of operationAll remote communication to and from the terminal (including the frontPC port communication) uses either the SPA-bus V 2.4 protocol or theLonTalk protocol.

2.1 SPA operation The SPA protocol is an ASCII-based protocol for serial communication.The communication is based on a master-slave principle, where the termi-nal is a slave, and the PC is the master. Only one master can be applied oneach fibre optic loop. A program is needed in the master computer forinterpretation of the SPA-bus codes, and for translation of the settings sentto the terminal. This program is called SMS-BASE with the appropriateSM/REx 5xx-modules.

2.2 LON operation The LON protocol is specified in the LonTalkProtocol SpecificationVersion 3 from Echelon Corporation. This protocol is designed forcommunication in control networks and is a pier-to-pier protocolwhere all the devices connected to the network can communicate witheach other directly. For more information on the bay-to-bay commu-nication, refer to Event function (1MRK 580 140-XEN) and Com-mand function (1MRK 580 165-XEN).

Remote communicationABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 142-XENPage 7 - 45

Version 1.0-00

the

are in a

ne r

the and

3 DesignThe remote communication use optical fibres for transfer of data within astation. For this purpose, a fibre optic bus input can be available on therear of the terminal, one for LON communication, and one for SPA com-munication. The principle of two independent communication ports isused.

3.1 SPA design When communicating locally with a PC in the station, using the rear SPAport, the only hardware needed for a station monitoring system is:

• Optical fibres• Opto/electrical converter• PC

When communicating remotely with a PC using the rear SPA port,same hardware is needed plus telephone modems.

The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is:

• SMS-BASE (Ver 2.0 or higher)

• SM/REx 5xx for the terminal in question

• RECOM (Ver 1.3 or higher) if disturbance recorder data is trans-ferred to a PC

• REVAL (Ver 1.1 or higher) for evaluation of this disturbance recorder data

When communicating to a front-connected PC, the only hardwrequired is the special front-connection cable. The software neededfront connected PC is:

• SMS-BASE (Ver 2.0 or higher)

• SM/REx 5xx for the current terminal. The SM/REx 5xx includes osmall part of RECOM, which lets you collect disturbance recordedata via the front port.

• REVAL (Ver 1.1 or higher) is also required if the same PC is usedfor evaluation of the disturbance recorder data.

3.2 LON design The hardware needed for applying LON communication depends onapplication, but one very central unit needed is the LON Star Coupleroptic fibres connecting the star coupler to the terminals.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 142-XENPage 7 - 46

4 Setting

4.1 SPA setting The most important settings in the terminal for SPA communication arethe slave number and baud rate (communication speed). These settings areabsolutely essential for all communication contact to the terminal.

These settings can only be done on the built-in MMI for rear channelcommunication at:


Rear

and for front connection at:


Front

The slave number can be set to any value from 1 to 899, as long as theslave number is unique within the used SPA loop.

The baud rate, that is, the communication speed, can be set to between300 and 38400 bits/s. The baud rate should be the same for the whole sta-tion, although different baud rates in a loop are possible. If different baudrates in the same fibre optical loop are used, consider this when makingthe communication setup in the communication master, that is, the PC.The maximum baud rate of the front connection is limited to 9600 bit/s.

For local communication, 19200 or 38400 is the normal setting. If tele-phone communication is used, the communication speed depends on thequality of the connection and on the type of modem used. But rememberthat the terminal does not adapt its speed to the actual communicationconditions, because the speed is set on the MMI of the terminal.

Remote communicationABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 142-XENPage 7 - 47

Version 1.0-00

4.2 LON setting Use the LNT, LON Network Tool to set the LON communication. This isa software tool that is applied as one node on the LON bus. In order tocommunicate via LON, the terminals need to know which node addressesthe other connected terminals have, and which network variable selectorsshould be used. This is organised by the LNT.

The node address is transferred to the LNT via the built-in MMI at:

ConfigurationLONComm

ServicePinMsg

By setting YES, the node address is sent to the LNT via the LON bus. Or,the LNT can scan the network for new nodes.

The speed of the LON bus is set to the default of 1,25 MHz. This can bechanged by the LNT.

If the LON communication from the terminal stops, caused by setting ofillegal communication parameters (outside the setting range) or byanother disturbance, it is possible to reset the LON port of the terminal.This is performed at the built-in MMI at:

ConfigurationLONComm

LONDefault

By setting YES, the LON communication is reset in the terminal, and theaddressing procedure can start from the beginning again.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 142-XENPage 7 - 48

5 Appendix

5.1 Setting table


Rear:

SlaveNo (1 - 899) SPA-bus identification number

BaudRate 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 Baud

Communication speed

RemoteChActgrp Open, Block Open=Access right to change between active groups (both rear ports)

RemoteChSet Open, Block Open=Access right to change any parame-ter (both rear ports)

Front:

SlaveNo (1 - 899) SPA-bus identification number

BaudRate 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 Baud

Communication speed


Function:

ed in prin- be

be

xx front

7Internal events 1MRK 580 134-XEN


1 Internal eventsInternal events are generated by the built-in supervisory functions. Thesupervisory functions supervise the status of the various modules in theterminal and, in case of failure, a corresponding event is generated. Simi-larly, when the failure is corrected, a corresponding event is generated.

Apart from the built-in supervision of the various modules, events are alsogenerated when these functions change status:

• Built-in real time clock (in operation/out of order)• External time synchronization (in operation/out of order)

Events are also generated on these occasions:

• Whenever any setting in the terminal is changed• When the content of the Disturbance report is erased

The internal events are time tagged with a resolution of 1 ms and stora list. The list can store up to 40 events. The list is based on the FIFOciple, when it is full, the oldest event is overwritten. The list cannotcleared; its content cannot be erased.

The list of internal events provides valuable information, which canused during commissioning and during fault tracing.

The information can only be retrieved with the aid of the SM/REx 5software package. The PC can be connected either to the port at theor at the rear of the terminal.

The internal events list is available under the:

Part of unit: TRM-STAT TermStatus - Internal Events

Installation and commissioning, “1MRK 580 166-XEN” contains a detailedlist of the signals that can be generated.

ABB Network Partner ABInternal events

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 134-XENPage 7 - 50


Function:

dis-ove,ce

for-

to beittenncerded, dis-

7Disturbance report - Introduction 1MRK 580 132-XEN


1 General overviewThe aim of the Disturbance Report is to contribute to the highest possiblequality of electrical supply. This is done by a continuous collection of sys-tem data and, upon occurrence of a fault, by storing a certain amount ofpre-fault, fault, and post-fault data.

The stored data can be used for analysis and decision making to find andeliminate possible system and equipment weaknesses.

The Disturbance report is a common name for several facilities to supplythe operator with more information about the disturbances and the system.Some of the facilities are basic and some are optional in the differentproducts. For some products not all facilities are available.

The facilities included in the Disturbance report are:

• General disturbance information• Indications• Event Recorder• Fault locator • Trip values (phase values)• Disturbance Recorder

The whole Disturbance Report can contain information for up to 10 turbances, each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned abdepending on the options installed. All information in the DisturbanReport is stored in non-volatile flash memories. This implies that no inmation is lost in case of loss-of-power supply.

Fig. 1 Disturbance report structure

Up to 10 disturbances can always be stored. If a new disturbance is recorded when the memory is full, the oldest disturbance is over-wrby the new one. The nominal memory capacity for the DisturbaRecorder is measured with 10 analogue and 48 binary signals recowhich means that in the case of long recording times, fewer than 10

Disturbance Report

Disturbance no.2Disturbance no.1 Disturbance no.10

(X80132-1)

General dist.information Indication

Faultlocator

Tripvalues

EventRecorder

DisturbanceRecorder

ABB Network Partner ABDisturbance report - Introduction

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 132-XENPage 7 - 52

ey 1,test)

, therre-

ofally

theur-

turbances are stored. If fewer analogue signals are recorded, a longer totalrecording time is available. This memory limit does not affect the rest ofthe disturbance report.

1.1 General disturbance information

Disturbance overview is a summary of all the stored disturbances. Theoverview is available only on a front-connected PC or via the StationMonitoring System (SMS). The overview contains:

• Disturbance index

• Date and time

• Trip signals

• Trig signal that activated the recording

• Distance to fault (requires Fault locator)

• Fault loop selected by the Fault locator (requires Fault locator)

Disturbance Summary is automatically scrolled on the man-machininterface (MMI). Here the two latest disturbances (DisturbSummarwhich is the latest one and DisturbSummary 2 which is the second laare presented with:

• Date and time

• Selected indications (set with the Indication mask)

• Distance to fault and fault loop selected by the Fault locator

Disturbance data on the MMI presented at:

DisturbReportDisturbances

Disturbance n (1 - 10)

The date and time of the disturbance, the trig signal, the indicationsfault locator result and the trip values are available providing the cosponding functions are installed.

1.2 Indications Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the fault timethe disturbance. A part (or all) of these signals are automaticscrolled on the built-in MMI after a disturbance. See “Indications”, in“1MRK 580 136-XEN”.

1.3 Event recorder The event recorder contains an event list with time-tagged events. InStation Monitoring System, this list is directly connected to a distbance. See “Event recorder - Station Monitoring System”, in “1MRK580 139-XEN”.

Disturbance report - IntroductionABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 132-XENPage 7 - 53

Version 1.0-00

during

efore,

li-anceith

1.4 Fault locator The Fault locator contains information about the distance to the fault andabout which measuring loop that was selected for the calculation. Afterchanging the system parameters in the protection, a recalculation of thefault distance can be made in the protection. See “Fault locator”, in“1MRK 580 138-XEN”.

1.5 Trip values Trip values includes phasors of currents and voltages before the fault and the fault. See “Measurement of alternating quantities”, 1MRK 580 159-XEN.

1.6 Disturbance recorder The Disturbance recorder registers analogue and binary signal data bduring, and after the fault. See “Disturbance recorder”, in “1MRK 580 141-XEN”.

On the built-in MMI, the indications, the fault locator result (when appcable), and the trip values are available. For a complete DisturbReport, front communication with a PC or remote communication wSMS is required.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 132-XENPage 7 - 54

2 Recording timesThe recording times are valid for the whole Disturbance Report. The Dis-turbance Recorder and the Event Recorder register disturbance data andevents during tRecording, the total recording time. But indications areonly registered during the fault time.

The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:

tRecording = tPre + tFault + tPost, or tPre + tLim, depending on whichcriterion stops the current disturbance recording.

Fig. 2 Recording times relationship.

The different time periods are described below:

Period Is the ...

tPre Pre-fault recording time. More correctly it should be called pre-triggering time, because it consists of not only a pre-fault timebut also the operating time for the trigger itself.

tFault Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set andcontinues as long as any valid trigger condition, binary or ana-logue, persists (unless limited by tLim the limit time, seebelow).

tPost Post-fault recording time. When all activated triggers during thefault time are reset, the current disturbance recording continuesaccording to the set post-fault time.

tLim Limit time, which is the maximum recording time after the dis-turbance recording was triggered. The limit time is used to elim-inate the consequences of a faulty trigger that does not resetwithin a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum record-ing time of a recording and prevents subsequent overwriting ofalready stored disturbances.

(X80132-2)

tLim

tPost

Pre-fault Fault Post-fault

tPre

Disturbance report - IntroductionABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 132-XENPage 7 - 55

Version 1.0-00

3 Analogue signalsUp to 10 analogue signals (five voltages and five currents from the trans-former module) can be selected for recording and trig if the DisturbanceRecorder function is installed. If fewer than 10 signals are selected, themaximum storing capacity in the flash memories, regarding total record-ing time are increased.

A user-defined name for each of the signals can be programmed in the ter-minal.

For each of the 10 analogue signals, Operation = On means that it isrecorded by the Disturbance recorder. The triggering itself is independentof the setting of Operation, and triggers even if operation is set to Off.Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as trig condition. Thesame applies for the current signals.

The check of the trig condition is based on peak-to-peak values. Whenthis is found, the absolute average value of these two peak values is calcu-lated. If the average value is above the threshold level for an overvoltageor overcurrent trig, this trig is indicated with a greater than (>) sign withthe user-defined name.

If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage orundercurrent trig, this trig is indicated with a less than (<) sign with itsname. The procedure is separately performed for each channel.

This method of checking the analogue start conditions gives a functionwhich is insensitive to dc offset in the signal. The operating time for thisstart is typically in the range of one cycle, 20 ms for a 50 Hz network.

The analogue signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, butthey affect the entire Disturbance Report when being used for triggering.

4 Binary signalsUp to 48 binary signals can be selected from the signal list, where allavailable signals are grouped under each function. The 48 signals can beselected from among internal-logical signals and binary-input signals. Foreach of the 48 signals, it is also possible to selected if the signal is to beused as a trigger of the Disturbance Report, and if the trig should be acti-vated on a 1 or a 0.

A user-defined name for each of the signals can be programmed in the ter-minal.

The selected 48 signals are presented in the event list and the disturbancerecording. But they affect the whole Disturbance Report when they areused for triggering.

The indications that are to be automatically scrolled on the MMI when adisturbance has been recorded are also selected from these 48 signals withthe MMI Indication Mask.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 132-XENPage 7 - 56

or

r ar at

this

theynce

4.1 Trig signals The trig conditions affect the entire disturbance report. As soon as a trigcondition is fulfilled, a complete disturbance report is recorded. On theother hand, if no trig condition is fulfilled, there is no disturbance report,no calculation of distance to fault, no indications, and so on. This impliesthe importance of choosing the right signals as trig conditions.

A trig can be of type:

• Manual trig• Binary-signal trig• Analogue-signal trig (over/under function)

4.1.1 Manual trig Manual trig starts from the built-in MMI or from a front-connected PC (SMS). This is found on the MMI menu tree at:

DisturbReportManual Trig

4.1.2 Binary trig A trig on a binary signal can be activated on either a logical 1 ological 0. When a binary input is used as trig, the signal must stay foleast 15 ms to be picked up.

Note that when a binary signal is programmed to trig on a logical 0, signal is not presented as an indication in the disturbance report.

4.1.3 Analogue trig All analogue signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if are recorded in the disturbance recorder or not. But the DisturbaRecorder function must be installed in the terminal.


Function:

7Disturbance report - Settings 1MRK 580 133-XEN


1 Settings, introductionThe main part of the settings for the Disturbance Report is found on thebuilt-in, man-machine interface (MMI) at:

SettingsDisturbReport

The settings include:

Operation Disturbance Report (On/Off)

RecordingTimes Recording times for the Disturbance Recorder andthe event/indication logging, including pre-faulttime, post-fault time, and limit time for the entiredisturbance

BinarySignals Selection of binary signals, trig conditions andMMI indication mask

AnalogSignals Recording mask and trig conditions

FaultLocator Filter time and distance measurement unit (km/miles/%)

User-defined names of analogue signals can be set at:


The user-defined names of binary signals can be set at:

ConfigurationDisturbReport

Input n (1-48)

The analogue and binary signals appear with their user-defined names.

An additional setting is found at:

Service ReportDisturbReport

This parameter can be read and set:

SequenceNo Sequence number (0-255) (normally not necessaryto set)

ABB Network Partner ABDisturbance report - Settings

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 133-XENPage 7 - 58

d.

uilt--

n

1.1 Settings during normal conditions

2 OperationMMI submenu:


Operation

Operation can be set to On or Off. If Off is selected, note that no Distur-bance Report is registered, including Indications, Fault locator, EventRecorder, and Disturbance Recorder.

Operation = Off:• Disturbances are not stored.

• LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) is not stored or change

• No Disturbance Summary is scrolled on the built-in MMI.

Operation = On:• Disturbances are stored, disturbance data can be read from the b

in MMI and from a front-connected PC or Station Monitoring System (SMS).


• The Disturbance Summary is automatically scrolled on the built-iMMI for the two latest registered disturbances, until cleared.

Table 1: How the settings affect different functions in the Disturbance Report

MMI Setting menu

Function Disturbance Summary (scrolled on MMI)

Disturbance Recorder

Indications Event list (SMS)

Trip values

Fault locator

Operation Operation (On/Off) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Recording times

Recording times (tPre, tPost, tLim)

No Yes No Yes No No

Binary sig-nals

Trig operation and trig level

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Indication mask (for automatic scrolling)

Yes No No No No No

Analogue signals

Operation (On/Off) No Yes No No No No

Trig over/under function

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Fault Loca-tor

Fault locator set-tings (tFilter, Dis-tance Unit)

No No No No No Yes

Disturbance report - SettingsABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 133-XENPage 7 - 59

Version 1.0-00

2.1 Recording times MMI submenu:


RecordingTimes

Under this submenu, the different recording times for the DisturbanceReport are set (the pre-fault time, post-fault time, and limit time). Theserecording times affect the Disturbance Recorder and Event Recorder func-tions. The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:

tRecording = tPre + tFault + tPost, or tPre + tLim, depending on whichcriterion stops the current disturbance recording.

2.2 Binary signals MMI submenu:

ConfigurationDisturbReport

Input n (1-48)

Up to 48 binary signals can be selected from the signal list, where allavailable signals are grouped function by function. The 48 signals can beselected among internal logical signals and binary input signals. Eachselected signal is registered by the Disturbance Recorder, Event Recorder,and Indication functions during a recording.

A user-defined name for each of the signals can be entered. This name cancomprise up to 13 characters.

MMI submenu:


BinarySignals

For each of the 48 signals, it is also possible to select if the signal is to beused as a trigger for the start of the Disturbance Report (TrigOperation),and if the trig should be activated at a logical 1 or 0 level (TrigLevel).

The indications in the Disturbance Summary, that are automaticallyscrolled on the MMI when a disturbance is registered, are also selectedfrom these 48 signals using the Indication Mask.

2.3 Analogue signals MMI-submenu:


AnalogSignals


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 133-XENPage 7 - 60

ed anor-n be

next

w dis-

This MMI submenu is only available when the Disturbance Recorderoption is installed.For each of the 10 analogue signals (five voltages and five currents),Operation = On means that it is recorded by the Disturbance Recorder. Iffewer than 10 signals are selected, the maximum storing capacity in theflash memories for total recording time becomes longer.

Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as triggering condition.The same applies for the current signals. The triggering is independent ofthe setting of Operation and triggers even if Operation = Off.

A user-defined name for each of the signals can be entered. It can consistof up to 13 characters. It is found at:


2.4 Fault locator See “Fault locator”, in document “1MRK 580 138-XEN”, for more infor-mation.

2.5 Sequence number MMI submenu:

ServiceReportDisturbReport

SequenceNo

Normally, this setting option is never used. Each disturbance is assignnumber in the Disturbance Report. The first disturbance each day mally receives SequenceNo = 0. The value of SequenceNo that caread in the Service Report is the number that will be assigned to thedisturbance registered during that day.

In normal use, the sequence number is increased by one for each neturbance until it is reset to zero each midnight.


Version 1.0-00

in

I ma-

a

I

inal

I, a trig

3 Settings during test

3.1 Test mode During testing, the operation of the Disturbance Report is required. Thesetting of this operation is found at the MMI submenu:

TestTest Mode

DisturbReportOperation, DisturbSummary

When TestMode is set to On (Test/Mode/Operation = On), the setting ofthe Disturbance Report parameters have the following impact:

Operation = Off DisturbSummary = Off• Disturbances are not stored.

• LED information is not shown on the MMI and not stored.

• No Disturbance Summary is scrolled on the MMI.

Operation = Off DisturbSummary = On• Disturbances are not stored.

• LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) are shown on the built-MMI, but not stored in the terminal.

• Disturbance summary is automatically scrolled on the built-in MMfor the two latest registered disturbances, until cleared. The infortion is not stored in the terminal.

Operation = On DisturbSummary = Off or On• The Disturbance Report works as in normal mode.

• Disturbances are stored. Data can be read from the built-in MMI,front-connected PC, or SMS.


• Disturbance Summary is automatically scrolled on the built-in MMfor the two latest registered disturbances, until cleared.

• All disturbance data stored during test mode remains in the termwhen returning to normal mode.

3.2 Activation of manual triggering

A Disturbance Report can be manually triggered from the built-in MMfront-connected PC, or SMS. When the trig is activated, the manualsignal is generated. This feature is especially useful for testing.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 133-XENPage 7 - 62

4 Appendix

4.1 Signal list

IN: DESCRIPTION:

DREP-CLRLEDS Clear built-in MMI LEDs, scrolling of Distur-bance Summaries and signal DREP-RECMADE

DREP-INPUT1 Binary signal to be recorded as signal No. 1




































Version 1.0-00

4.2 Setting table














OUT: DESCRIPTION:

DREP-OFF Disturbance Report operation during normal condition is set to Off

DREP-RECSTART Disturbance recording started

DREP-CLEARED All disturbances in the Disturbance Report cleared

DREP-RECMADE Disturbance recording made and stored in flash memory

DREP-MEMUSED Disturbance Recorder memory capacity utilized to 80%

IN: DESCRIPTION:


Disturbance Report:

Operation On, Off Operation of the whole Disturbance Report

RecordingTimes:

tLim (0.5 - 4.0) s Pre-fault recording time

tPost (0.1 - 3.0) s Post-fault recording time

tPre (0.05 - 0.30) s Limit time

Binary/Input 1 - 48:

TrigOperation Off, On On=the signal is used for trigering, Off=the signal is not used for triggering

TrigLevel Trig on 1, Trig on 0 Trig level for the binary signal


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 133-XENPage 7 - 64

IndicationMask Masked, Show Masked=the signal is not automatically scrolled,Show=the signal is automatically scrolled on the MMI in the Disturbance summary

Analog/U1 - U5:

Operation Off, On On=the signal is recorded in the Distur-bance recorderOff=the signal is not recorded

Trig U> Off, On Over trig operation

U> (0 - 200)% of Ur/sqr3 Over trig value

Trig U< Off, On Under trig operation

U< ( 0 - 110)% of Ur/sqr3 Under trig value

Analog/I1 - I5:

Operation Off, On On=the signal is recorded in the Distur-bance recorder

Trig I> Off, On Over trig operation

I> (0 - 5000)% of Ir Over trig value

Trig I< Off, On Under trig operation

I< (0 - 200)% of Ir Under trig value

ServiceReport/DisturbReport/SequenceNo:

SequenceNo (0-255) Sequence no. of the disturbance



Function:

7Event recorder - Station Monitoring System

1MRK 580 139-XEN


1 ApplicationWhen using a front-connected PC or Station Monitoring System (SMS),an event list can be available for each of the recorded disturbances in thedisturbance report. Each list can contain up to 150 time-tagged events.These events are logged during the total recording time, which depends onthe set recording times (pre-fault, post-fault and limit time) and the actualfault time. During this time, the first 150 events for all the 48 selectedbinary signals are logged and time tagged. This list is a useful instrumentfor evaluating a fault and is a complement to the disturbance recorder.

To obtain this event list, the Event recorder function (basic in some termi-nals and optional in others) must be installed.

2 Theory of operationWhen one of the trig conditions for the Disturbance report is activated, theevents are collected by the main processing unit, from the 48 selectedbinary signals. The events can come from both internal logical signals andbinary input channels. The internal signals are time tagged in the mainprocessing module, while the binary input channels are time taggeddirectly on each I/O module. The events are collected during the totalrecording time, tRecording, and they are stored in the Disturbance reportmemory at the end of each recording.

The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event list is theuser-defined name that can be programmed in the terminal.

The time tagging of events emerging from internal logical signals andbinary input channels have a resolution of 1 ms.

3 SettingThe settings of the Event recorder consist of the signal selection and therecording times. It is possible to select up to 48 binary signals, eitherinternal signals or signals coming from binary input channels. These sig-nals coincide with the binary signals recorded by the disturbancerecorder. The disturbance summary indications that are to scroll automat-ically on the built-in, man-machine interface (MMI), can only be selectedfrom these 48 event channels.

The signal selection is found at:


BinarySignalsInput n (1 - 48)

Each of the up to 48 event channels can be selected from the signal list,consisting of all available internal logical signals and all binary inputchannels.

ABB Network Partner ABEvent recorder - Station Monitoring System

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 139-XENPage 7 - 66

For each of the binary input and output signals, a user-defined name canbe programmed at:

ConfigurationSlotnn-XXXX (ex. Slot15-BOM3)

See Disturbance report - Settings (1MRK 580 133-XEN), for more infor-mation.

4 TestingDuring testing, the Event recorder can be switched off if desired. This isfound in the SMS or Substation Control System (SCS).


Function:

yed

de

ne

7Indications 1MRK 580 136-XEN


1 ApplicationThe indications from all the 48 selected binary signals are shown on thebuilt-in man-machine interface (MMI) and on the Station Monitoring Sys-tem (SMS) for each recorded disturbance in the disturbance report. TheLEDs on the front of the terminal display start and trip indications.

2 Theory of operationThe indications shown on the MMI and SMS give an overview of the sta-tus of the 48 event signals during the fault. On the MMI, the indicationsfor each recorded disturbance are presented at:

DisturbReportDisturbances

Disturbance n (1 - 10)Indications

All signals selected can be internally produced signals or emerge frombinary-input channels. Note that the trip signals (TRIP-TRIPL1, TRIP-TRIPL2, TRIP-TRIPL3) and BFP--BUTRIP (from the breaker failureprotection function) are not automatically available, neither on the built-in MMI, nor in SMS. But when any of these four trip signals are indicated,the red MMI LED is automatically activated.

The indications are registered only during the fault time of a recorded dis-turbance, as long as any trigger condition is activated. A part or all ofthese indications can be automatically scrolled on the built-in MMI after adisturbance is recorded, until acknowledged with the C button on theMMI. They are selected with the Indication mask.

The signal name for internal logical signals presented on the screen fol-lows the signal name, which can be found in the signal list in each func-tion description of this user’s guide. Binary input signals are displawith their user-defined names.

The LED indications display this information:

Green LED :• Steady light In service

• Flashing light Internal fail, the INT--FAIL internal signal is high

• Dark No power supply

Yellow LED :• Steady light A disturbance report is triggered

• Flashing light The terminal is in test mode or in configuration mo

Red LED :• Steady light A protection function issued a trip command for o

of the four trip signals previously listed

• Flashing light The terminal is blocked, that is the internal signalTEST-TERMBLCK is high

ABB Network Partner ABIndications

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 136-XENPage 7 - 68

re

3 SettingThe signals to be displayed as indications are selected in the Disturbancereport setting. This can be found on the built-in MMI at:


BinarySignalsInput n (up to 48)

See “Disturbance report - Settings”, in “1MRK 580 133-XEN”, for moinformation.

4 Testing

If TestMode is activated and TestMode/DisturbReport/ is set to ... Then the disturbances ...

Operation = On DisturbSummary = On or Off Are stored as usual in the terminal.

Operation = Off DisurbSummary = On Summary scrolls. No indications. No storage of LED information.

Operation = Off DisturbSummary = Off Are not stored. LED information not stored.


Function:

7Disturbance recorder 1MRK 580 141-XEN


1 ApplicationThe aim of disturbance recording is to provide a means for better under-standing of the behaviour of the power network and related primary andsecondary equipment during and after a disturbance. An analysis of therecorded data provides valuable information that can be used to improveexisting equipment. This information can also be used when planning forand designing new installations.

Most of the built-in disturbance recorders offered by various manufactur-ers operate only in connection with the operation of the protective func-tions, and they have a very limited capacity for recording times and thenumber of recordings.

This is not the case with the disturbance recorders built into the REx 5xxterminals. These disturbance recorders are characterised by great flexibil-ity as far as starting conditions and recording times, and large storagecapacity are concerned. Thus, the disturbance recorders are not dependenton the operation of protective functions, and they can record disturbancesthat were not discovered by protective functions for one reason or another.

The disturbance recording function in the REx 5xx terminals is fully ade-quate for the recording of disturbances for the protected object.

1.1 Recording capacity The recording function can record all analogue inputs in the transformermodule and up to 48 binary signals. To maximise the use of the memory,the number of analogue channels to be recorded is user-selectable by pro-gramming and can be set individually for each analogue input. Therecorded binary signals can be either true binary input signals or internallogical signals created by the protective functions.

1.2 Memory capacity The maximum number of recordings stored in the memory is 10. Sodepending on the set recording times and the recording of the enablednumber of channels, the memory can contain a minimum of six and amaximum of 10 disturbance recordings comprising of both header partand data part. But the header part for the last 10 recordings is alwaysavailable.

1.3 Recording times The recording times for the pre- and post-fault period, tPre and tPost, areuser-programmable with wide-setting ranges.

To avoid uncontrolled recording and subsequent erasing of previousrecordings, in case a trigger should not reset within a reasonable time, alimit time tLim can be set to limit the total duration of a recording.

1.4 Triggers Any of the recorded binary signals can be programmed to act as a trigger.The analogue channels have programmable threshold levels for trigger-ing. Both overlevels and underlevels are available. Manual triggering isalso available. This provides a convenient test possibility.

ABB Network Partner ABDisturbance recorder

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 141-XENPage 7 - 70

1.5 Time tagging The terminal has a built-in, real-time clock and calendar. This function isused for time tagging of the recorded disturbances. The time taggingrefers to the activation of the trigger that starts the disturbance recording.

2 Theory of operationDisturbance recording is based on the continuous collection of networkdata, currents and binary signals, in a cyclic buffer. The buffer operatesaccording to the FIFO principle, old data will be overwritten as new dataarrives when the buffer is full. The size of this buffer is determined by theset pre-fault recording time.

Fig. 1 State transition diagram governing the recording modes.

Upon detection of a fault condition (triggering), the data storage continuesin another part of the memory. The storing goes on as long as the faultcondition prevails - plus a certain additional time. The length of this addi-tional part is called the post-fault time, and it can be set in the disturbancerecorder. The above mentioned two parts form a disturbance recording.The whole memory acts as a cyclic buffer and when it is full, the oldestrecording is overwritten.

The recordings can be retrieved to the PC with RECOM, the data collec-tion software, and analysed and evaluated manually by using the REVALevaluation software, which is also used for printouts of recorded distur-bances. For automatic evaluation of the recordings, the RESDA softwarepackage is available.

(X80141-1)

Pre-fault Fault

Post-fault

tLim

trig-on

trig-off

trig-ontPost

ortLim

(Store recording)

(New recording started)

(All triggers)

(New recording started,Store previous recording)

(Store recording, active triggers must reset)

Disturbance recorderABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 141-XENPage 7 - 71

Version 1.0-00

The recordings can be divided into two parts, the header and the data part.The data part contains the numerical values for the recorded analogue andbinary channels. The header contains clearly written basic information onthe disturbance. A part of this information is also used by REVAL toreproduce the analogue and binary signals in a correct and user-friendlyway. Such information is, primary and secondary instrument transformerratings.

This information is included in the header:

Table 1 is a summary. For detailed information, see the User’s Guide forREVAL (1MRK 501 003-UEN).

Table 1: Contents of the header

Type of informationParameter

Stored in parameter database

Stored with disturbance

General

Station, object & unit ID x -

Date and time - x

Sequence number - x

CT earthing x -

Time synchronisation source x -

Recording times tPre, tPost, tLim - x

Pre-fault Uph-ph, I (RMS) - x

Trig signal and test mode flag - x

Analogue signals

Signal name x -

Primary and secondary instr. transformer rating x -

Undertrig: level and operation x -

Overtrig: level and operation x -

Undertrig status at time of trig - x

Overtrig status at time of trig - x

Instantaneous Uph-0 at time of trig - x

Instantaneous Iph-0 at time of trig - x

Uph-0/Iph-0 (RMS) before trig (pre-fault) - x

Uph-0/Iph-0 (RMS) after trig (fault) - x

Binary signals

Signal name - x

Type of contact (trig level) x -

Trig operation x -

Signal status at time of trig - x

Trig status at time of trig - x


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 141-XENPage 7 - 72

pre-e is theancefault

The calculation of the RMS values takes some time. The minimum timebetween the start of two different recordings must be about 300 ms toobtain correct calculation. If this time is less, the RMS values for the sec-ond disturbance are indicated as 0.

3 DesignThe disturbance recording function is an optional function in the REx 5xxterminals. The processing of analogue signals is handled by a dedicatedDSP (digital signal processor). Other functions are implemented in themain CPU. The memory is shared with other functions.

The numerical signals coming from the A/D conversion module in serialform are converted to parallel form in a dedicated DSP. The analogue trigconditions are also checked in the DSP.

A check of the start conditions is performed by searching for a maximumvalue. This is a positive peak. The function also seeks a minimum value,which is the negative peak.

When this is found, the absolute average value is calculated. If this valueis above the set threshold level for the overfunction on the channel inquestion, an overfunction start on that channel is indicated. The overfunc-tion is indicated with a greater than (>) sign.

Similarly, if the average value is below the set threshold level for under-function on the channel in question, an underfunction start on that channelis indicated. The underfunction is indicated with a less than (<) sign.

The procedure is separately performed for each channel. This method ofchecking the analogue start conditions gives a function that is insensitiveto DC offset in the signal. The operating time for this start is typically inthe range of one cycle, 20 ms in a 50 Hz network.

The numerical data, along with the result of the trigger condition evalua-tion, are transmitted to the main CPU. The main CPU handles these func-tions:

• Evaluation of the manual start condition

• Evaluation of the binary start condition, both for true binary input signals and for internally created logical signals

• Storage of the numerical values for the analogue channels

The numerical data for the analogue channels are stored in a cyclicfault buffer in a RAM. When a trigger is activated, the data storagmoved to another area in the RAM, where the data for the fault andsubsequent post-fault period are stored. Thus, a complete disturbrecording comprises the stored data for the pre-fault, fault, and post-period.

Disturbance recorderABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 141-XENPage 7 - 73

Version 1.0-00

for

ata

-

Thealongr set-

cord-ction

s areeter

l, theuldand.

are

porting

e aream-

The RAM area for temporary storage of recorded data is divided into sub-areas, one for each recording. The size of a subarea is governed by thesum of the set pre-fault (tPre) and maximum post-triggering (tLim) time.There is a sufficient memory capacity for at least four consecutive record-ings with a maximum number of analogue channels recorded and withmaximum time settings. Should no such area be free at the time of a newtriggering, the oldest recording stored in the RAM is overwritten.

When a recording is completed, a post recording processing occurs.

This post-recording processing comprises:

• Merging the data for analogue channels with corresponding databinary signals stored in an event buffer

• Compression of the data, which is performed without losing any daccuracy

• Storing the compressed data in a non-volatile memory (flash memory)

The recorded disturbance is now ready for retrieval and evaluation.recording comprises the stored and time-tagged disturbance data with relevant data from the database for configuration and parameteup.

Some parameters in the header of a recording are stored with the reing, and some are retrieved from the parameter database in connewith a disturbance. Table 1 indicates where the various parameterstored. This means that if a parameter that is retrieved from the paramdatabase was changed between the time of recording and retrievacollected information is not correct in all parts. So, all recordings shobe transferred to the Station Monitoring System (SMS) workstation then deleted in the terminal before any such parameters are changed

4 SettingThe setting parameters specific for the disturbance recording functionavailable in the menu tree under:


OperationRecordingTimesBinarySignalsAnalogSignals

The list of parameters in the appendix attached to the “Disturbance re- Settings”, document no. “1MRK 580 133-XEN”, explains the meanof the abbreviations used in connection with setting ranges.

Remember that values of parameters set elsewhere in the menu trelinked to the information on a recording. Such parameters are, for exple, station and object identifiers, CT and PT ratios.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 141-XENPage 7 - 74

-for-iver

The sequence number of the recordings is a specific parameter for the dis-turbance recorder and is used to identify the different recordings. By com-bining the date and the sequence number for a recording, the recording canbe uniquely identified. The combined setting and service value for thesequence number is found in the menu tree under:

ServReportDisturbReport

SequenceNo

The read value on the man-machine interface (MMI) display is thesequence number that the next recorded disturbance receives. The numberis automatically increased by one for each new recording and is reset tozero at each midnight. The sequence number can also be set manually.

5 TestingEvaluation of the results from the disturbance recording function requiresaccess to an SMS workstation either permanently connected to the termi-nal or temporarily connected to the serial port on the front. These softwarepackages must be installed in the workstation:

Package: For:

SMS-BASE Common functions

RECOM Collection of the disturbance data

REVAL Evaluation and printouts of the recorded data

It could be useful to have a printer for hard copies. The behavior of thedisturbance recording function can be checked when protective functionsof the terminal are tested.

When the terminal is set to operate in test mode, there is a separate settingfor operation of the Disturbance report, which also affects the disturbancerecorder.

A manual trig can be started any time. This results in a snapshot of theactual values of all recorded channels.

Här nedan finns exempel på hur Du använder Stycke(Paragraph)maten i denna mall. Markera all hjälptext och ta bort den innan du skrin din egen text.


Function:

8Index 1MRK 580 175-XEN

Version 1.0-01February 1997 Basic

AA/D-conversion module 2-35A1A2_BS 6-105, 6-108, 6-163, 6-196A1A2_DC 6-105, 6-108, 6-166, 6-198AB_TRAFO 6-105, 6-107, 6-158, 6-194ABC_BC 6-105, 6-107, 6-152, 6-191ABC_LINE 6-105, 6-106, 6-145, 6-188active group 4-5, 7-4active power P 7-17ADM 2-35AND 4-27apparatus control 6-1AR 5-59AR01-CBCLOSED 5-61, 5-82AR01-CBREADY 5-61, 5-82AR01-CLOSECB 5-62, 5-82AR01-INHIBIT 5-61, 5-82AR01-INPROGR 5-62, 5-82AR01-LONGDURA 5-62AR01-OFF 5-61, 5-82AR01-ON 5-61, 5-82AR01-P1PH 5-62, 5-82AR01-P3PH 5-62, 5-82AR01-PLCLOST 5-62, 5-82AR01-READY 5-62, 5-82AR01-SETON 5-62, 5-82AR01-SP1 5-62, 5-82AR01-START 5-61, 5-82AR01-SYNC 5-62, 5-82AR01-TP1 5-62, 5-82AR01-TP2 5-62, 5-82AR01-TP3 5-82AR01-TP4 5-82AR01-TPTRIP 5-62, 5-82AR01-TRSOTF 5-62, 5-82AR01-UNSUC 5-62, 5-82AR01-WAIT 5-62, 5-82AR01-WFMASTER 5-62, 5-82ARCounters 5-60, 7-3ASD 5-89automatic 6-6, 6-47auto-reclosing 5-59, 6-45

Bback-up panel 6-40back-up trip 5-87, 5-91basic features 2-1, 2-8baud rate 3-10BAxx - signal name 6-51, 6-59, 6-62

BAY_CON worksheet 9-4BAYCON 6-9, 6-10, 6-13BAYCONA 6-10, 6-51, 6-62BAYCONB 6-10, 6-52, 6-65BAYCONC 6-10, 6-53, 6-68BAYCOND 6-10, 6-54, 6-71BAYCONE 6-10, 6-55, 6-76BAYCONF 6-10, 6-56, 6-80BAYCONX 6-98BB_ES 6-105, 6-108, 6-169, 6-199BBxx - signal name 6-52, 6-65BCxx - signal name 6-53, 6-68BDxx - signal name 6-54, 6-71BExx - signal name 6-55, 6-76BFP 5-85BFP--BUTRIP 5-96BFP--RETRIPL1 5-96BFP--ST3PH 5-96BFP--STL1 5-96BFxx - signal name 6-56, 6-80BH_CONN 6-105, 6-182, 6-206BH_LINE_A 6-105, 6-178, 6-204BH_LINE_B 6-105, 6-184, 6-207BIM 2-33, 4-15binary in/out module 2-33binary input module 2-33, 4-15binary output module 2-34, 4-16BKxx - signal name 6-61, 6-96BLKCON 6-9, 6-23BLKCONK 6-11, 6-61, 6-96BLKCONL 6-11, 6-61, 6-97block functions 3-14blocking 6-7BLxx - signal name 6-61, 6-97BOM 2-34, 4-16breaker-and-a-half 2-4, 6-110, 6-123breaker-failure protection 5-85breaking capacity 2-24built-in mmi 3-37, 6-41busbar earthing switch 6-108, 6-136bus-coupler bay 6-107, 6-117bus-section breaker 6-108, 6-124bus-section disconnector 6-108, 6-128buttons 3-20

CCAN bus 2-30capacitive voltage transformers 2-19CDxx-signal name 6-217, 6-218

ABB Network Partner ABIndex

Version 1.0-01

1MRK 580 175-XENPage 8 - 2

CMxx-signal name 6-217, 6-218CO 5-61COMBITEST 3-13COMCON 6-9, 6-10, 6-18, 6-57, 6-85, 6-98COMM worksheet 9-3command dialogue 6-215command function 6-211command outputs 6-47command supervision 6-7commissioning 3-12communic. betw. ctrl. terminals 6-213, 6-223configurable logic 4-25configuration 3-11, 3-30configuration mode 3-11contact data 2-24cover 2-36COxx - signal name 6-57, 6-85current transformers 2-19cut-out sizes 2-37CVT 2-19

DDA01-BLOCK 7-25DAnn-HIALARM 7-26DAnn-HIWARN 7-26DAnn-LOWALARM 7-26DAnn-LOWWARN 7-26DAR 5-59data part 7-71DB_BUS_A 6-105, 6-109, 6-169, 6-200DB_BUS_B 6-105, 6-109, 6-175, 6-202DB_LINE 6-105, 6-109, 6-171, 6-201DBLL 5-11, 5-33Dead bus live line 5-11, 5-33Dead line live bus 5-11, 5-33dead-band supervision 7-19default configuration 9-1, 9-34diameter 2-4, 6-110direct current measuring 7-5directionality 7-3DISTREP CLEARED 3-16disturbance overview 7-52disturbance recorder 7-69disturbance report 7-3, 7-51, 7-57disturbance summary 7-52DLLB 5-11, 5-33double breaker 2-4, 2-6, 6-109, 6-123double busbar 6-106double indication 6-222

DREP-CLEARED 7-63DREP-CLRLEDS 7-62DREP-INPUT1 7-62DREP-MEMUSED 7-63DREP-OFF 7-63DREP-RECMADE 7-63DREP-RECSTART 7-63DSP 2-30

Eearthing wire 3-7electrical terminals 2-39energizing check 5-9, 5-31event function 6-221event recorder SMS 7-65EVxx-signal name 6-225, 6-226

Ffault tracing 3-15ferrule 2-39, 3-8fibre optic 3-8filter 2-35flush mounting 2-37, 3-4FreqDiff 5-9, 5-31frequency f 7-17front communication 3-9function blocks 9-6function selector 9-2FUSE-DISC 5-57fuse-failure supervision 5-49FUSE-MCB 5-57FUSE-VTF3PH 5-57FUSE-VTSU 5-57FUSE-VTSZ 5-57

Ggasket 2-36glass fibre 2-21, 3-8GRP--ACTGRP1 4-7

Hhardware design 2-27Hayes-compatible 2-21header 7-71HSAR 5-59HV/Control 2-21hysteresis 7-18

II/O system 4-13I_O worksheet 9-5IAxx - signal name 6-171, 6-201

ABB Network Partner AB Index 1MRK 580 175-XENPage 8 - 3

Version 1.0-01

IBxx - signal name 6-169, 6-200ICxx - signal name 6-175, 6-202identifiers 4-1IExx - signal name 6-158, 6-194IFxx - signal name 6-145, 6-188IGxx - signal name 6-152, 6-191IHxx - signal name 6-163, 6-196IIxx - signal name 6-166, 6-198IJxx - signal name 6-169, 6-199IKxx - signal name 6-182, 6-206ILxx - signal name 6-178, 6-204IMxx - signal name 6-184, 6-207increased measuring accuracy 2-25indications 7-67input resistance 2-22input/output module 2-33, 4-17installation 3-1INT-- CPUFAIL 3-15INT-- CPUWARN 3-15INT-- WARNING 3-15INT--ADC 3-15integrating dead-band 7-19interlocking 6-41, 6-101internal clock 4-1internal events 3-16, 7-49internal time 7-4INT--FAIL 3-15INT--IOyy 3-15introduction 2-1INT--RTC 3-15INT--TSYNC 3-15INV 4-26IOM 2-33, 4-17IOP (I/O position) 4-18IOP1-Szz 4-23IOxx-BINAMEy 4-24IOxx-BIy 4-23IOxx-BONAMEy 4-24IOxx-BOy 4-23IOxx-ERROR 4-23IOxx-POSITION 4-23

Lled indications 7-67limit time 7-54LNT 3-11, 7-47local control panel 6-40logical signals 7-2LON 2-21, 2-31, 3-9, 7-43

LON address 3-73LON Network Tool 3-11LONDefault 7-47loss of power system voltage 5-97LOV--BC 5-103LOV--TRIP 5-103LOV--VTSU 5-103

MmA input module 2-35, 4-17, 7-5main processing module 2-30maintenance 3-17making capacity 2-24man-machine interface module 2-32manual trig 7-56manual updating 6-7mean values 2-24, 7-1, 7-17measuring accuracy 2-25measuring range 7-18mechanical installation 3-1memory 7-51, 7-69menu tree 3-37, 3-43MicroSCADA 2-21MIM 2-35, 4-17, 7-12MIn1-BLOCK 7-14MIn1-ERROR 7-14MIn1-POSITION 7-14MInm-HIALARM 7-14MInm-HIWARN 7-14MInm-INPUTERR 7-14MInm-LOWALARM 7-14MInm-LOWWARN 7-14MInm-RMAXAL 7-14MInm-RMINAL 7-14minute pulse 7-39MMI 3-19MMI module 2-32MMI worksheet 9-3MMI--BLOCKSET 3-9, 4-12mounting angles 2-36, 3-1mounting kits 2-36MPM 2-30multiple command function 6-213

OOCO 5-61operator place 6-2, 6-34optical fibre 2-32optional features 2-1, 2-10OR 4-26


Version 1.0-01

1MRK 580 175-XENPage 8 - 4

PPCxx-BIM_CONN 7-37PCxx-BLOCK 7-37PCxx-BLOCKED 7-37PCxx-INVALID 7-37PCxx-NEW_VAL 7-37PCxx-RESTART 7-37PCxx-TMIT_VAL 7-37PhaseDiff 5-9, 5-31phasors 7-2, 7-24plastic fibre 2-21, 3-8pole discordance 6-46post-fault recording time 7-54power consumption 2-22power supply module 2-32pre-fault recording time 7-54protection with App. Control 6-46PSM 2-32pulse 4-28pulse counter 7-33

QQ0_CON worksheet 9-4Q1_CON worksheet 9-4Q2_CON worksheet 9-4Q8_CON worksheet 9-5Q9_CON worksheet 9-4

Rrack mounting 2-36, 3-1reactive power Q 7-17REC 561 types 2-2receiving 3-1reclosing counters 5-60reclosing programs 5-64recording capacity 7-69recording times 7-54REM worksheet 9-3remote communication 3-10, 7-43remote-control 6-39repair instruction 3-17requirements 2-19reservation 6-4, 6-26restricted settings 4-9retrip 5-87, 5-90RTXP 24 3-13

SSA 7-43sampling frequency 2-35

SAxx - signal name 6-58, 6-88SBxx - signal name 6-59, 6-91SCADA 7-43SCM 2-31screw terminals 2-38SCxx - signal name 6-60, 6-94sealing strip 2-36secondary injection test 3-13self-supervision 3-15SequenceNo 7-57serial communication module 2-31, 3-9service report 7-1ServicePinMsg 7-47SETTING CHANGED 3-16setting group 4-5setting restriction 4-10side-by-side mounting 3-2signal processing module 2-30single breaker 2-4, 2-5, 6-111, 6-117, 6-122single command function 6-211slave number 3-10SMS 7-43socket 2-39, 3-8SPA 2-21, 2-31, 3-9, 7-43SPA address 3-73SPM 2-30SR 4-29station mmi 6-36storage 3-1SWICON 6-11, 6-20SWICONA 6-11, 6-58, 6-88, 6-98SWICONB 6-11, 6-59, 6-91, 6-99SWICONC 6-11, 6-60, 6-94, 6-99SYN1-AUTOOK 5-29, 5-46SYN1-BLOCK 5-29, 5-46SYN1-CB1CLD 5-29SYN1-CB1OPEN 5-29SYN1-CB2CLD 5-29SYN1-CB2OPEN 5-29SYN1-MANOK 5-29, 5-46SYN1-UB1FF 5-29, 5-46SYN1-UB1OK 5-29, 5-46SYN1-UB2FF 5-29SYN1-UB2OK 5-29SYN1-VSUB1 5-29, 5-46SYN1-VSUB2 5-29, 5-46SYN1-VTSU 5-29, 5-46synchro-check 5-9, 5-31, 6-8, 6-42synchronising values 7-2

ABB Network Partner AB Index 1MRK 580 175-XENPage 8 - 5

Version 1.0-01

Ttechnical data 2-22terminal identification 4-1test mode 3-12, 7-61TEST-INPUT 3-12time synchronisation 7-39TIME-MINSYNC 7-41timer 4-27TIME-RTCERR 7-41TIME-SYNCERR 7-41TPX 2-19TPY 2-19transfer busbars 6-106transformer bay 6-107, 6-122transformer input module 2-35trig signals 7-56TRIP-BLOCK 5-7TRIP-EXTL1 5-7TRIP-EXTTRIP 5-7TRIP-GTRIP 5-8tripping logic 5-1TRIP-PSL1 5-7TRIP-PTPTRIP 5-8TRIP-SPTRIP 5-8TRIP-TPTRIP 5-8TRIP-TRIPL1 5-8TRIP-TRSPZ 5-8TRIP-TRTP 5-8TRM 2-35

Vvoltage connector 2-39voltage transformers 2-19

Wwall mounting 2-38, 3-5Windows NT 2-21

XXOR 4-28


Version 1.0-01

1MRK 580 175-XENPage 8 - 6


Function:

I/O

est.

9Default configuration REC 561 1MRK 580 188-XEN


1 IntroductionUse this default configuration as a base when you start the engineeringwork with REC 561. Different users have their own requirements for howthe substation is controlled and monitored. The REC 561 control terminalcan meet these requirements for flexibility of both software and hardware.With the CAP 531 configuration tool, you can connect the different func-tion blocks in the control terminal together in a user-friendly way.

This software must be installed on the same computer to use CAP 531:

• Tool for creating navigator and communication with the REC 561terminal (SMS-BASE)

• Corresponding library for REC 561 for SMS (SM/REC 561)

• Corresponding library for REC 561 for CAP 531 (CAP/REC 561)

In CAP 531, a function selector lets you select the type of includedmodules, type of interlocking modules, and so on.

A diskette that contains the default configuration is available on requThe appendix contains printout of the configuration.

ABB Network Partner ABDefault configuration REC 561

Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 188-XENPage 9 - 2

2 ApplicationThe default configuration consists of type solutions for a double busbarand single, circuit-breaker arrangement that includes three disconnectorsand one earthing switch. Use the copy/past and find/replace commands inCAP 531 to extend the number of apparatuses and bays (option). Connec-tions of optional functions are not in the default configuration, but can befound under the functions respectively in the User’s Guide for REC 561or when the function is connected to the apparatus control function inApparatus Control (1MRK 580 150-XEN).

The configuration is divided into several worksheets, which are com-mented below.

2.1 General For this default configuration, the function selector in the CAP 531 hasthese settings:

The settings in table 1 mean:

• The apparatus control function is activated.• No bays in the terminal have more than 8 apparatuses.• No external selection relays are used.• External synchro-check is used.• The binary input module of type BIM is defined as I/O module 1.

Table 1: Selected functions in the default configuration

Function group Selector Value

AppControlType APCACTIVE 1=ON

AppControlType APCGT8BAYS 0=0 bay > 8 app

AppControlType APCSELSUP 0=None

AppControlType APCSYNC 1=External/None Synchrocheck

I/O-module01 Type_IO1 1=BIM

I/O-module02 Type_IO2 2=BOM

I/O-module03 Type_IO3 0=None











InterlockType ILTYPE1 2=ABC_LINE

Default configuration REC 561ABB Network Partner AB 1MRK 580 188-XENPage 9 - 3

Version 1.0-00

2.

NA and is

re in

forcted

ay-

in forolt-con-MIding

yn-dule

tionom-nlyom-er-us-ays be

• The binary output module of type BOM is defined as I/O module • No other types of I/O modules are defined.• The interlocking module ABC_LINE is selected.

With the above choices, the tool automatically selects the BAYCOapparatus control module for the bay and SWICONB for the breakerSWICONC for other apparatuses. The interlocking module ABC_LINEalso selected.

External fuse failure supervision is assumed, because no options athis default configuration.

2.2 Remote control The REM worksheet consists of Single Command function blockscontrol of the included apparatuses from the gateway function conneto the remote control centre. See also Apparatus Control (1MRK 580 150-XEN).

2.3 Station MMI The MMI worksheet contains function blocks for event handling of boriented signals, for example:

• If the bay is connected to the busbar

• Abnormal status

• Blocking of the whole bay

• Position of remote/station/local switch

Control signals for blocking the whole bay and for switching the baystation/remote are also displayed in this worksheet. Alarm signalsexternal signals (via the binary input module), for example, external vage fuse failure or synchro-check failure, and internal signals are nected to the event function blocks for transferring to the station Mand/or remote gateway. There might be more internal signals, depenon the options installed, for example, the A/D-conversion module.

If the time synchronization is performed by a minute pulse, the time schronization block must be connected to a binary input via an I/O moblock, see the I/O worksheet.

2.4 Communication with other bays

In the COMM worksheet the sending and receiving part of the reservafunction between bays is displayed. The configuration is prepared to cmunicate with ten other bays including a bus-coupler bay. Normally, othe bays, which influence the interlocking conditions, are reserved. Cplete the Multiple Command Function blocks for bay 2 to 10 with intlocking information from these bays in the same way as from the bcoupler bay. If there are no interlocking information to be used from b2 to 10, the Multiple Command Function blocks for these bays candeleted. For more information about the reservation principle see Appara-tus Control (1MRK 580 150-XEN).


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 188-XENPage 9 - 4

1 s

he in

nssta-.

ndter-

derno-tions

theck,ro-

toro-ific

tation

I,aker.

f then iscon-

I, zeroan-ents

The time for cyclic sending of data between control terminals is set to 20 sfor the event functon blocks. The interval time, in corresponding com-mand function blocks for receiving of data, is set a little bit longer — 2in this configuration — to supervise the communication.

2.5 Reservation function The reservation function within the own bay is configured in tBAY_RE worksheet. The solution follows the principle of reservationApparatus Control (1MRK 580 150-XEN).

2.6 Bay control The BAY_CON worksheet contains the bay-oriented, control functioincluding blocking and interlocking functions. To create the abnormal tus signal, connect all corresponding signals together via an OR gate

Here, the VOLT_OP and VOLT_CL input signals are set to FALSE aTRUE, which means that the line voltage is not considered in the inlocking function. You can use the logic in this configuration to consithe voltage value by connecting the limit-supervision block for the alogue inputs and the fuse failure supervision. These functions are opand are not included in this default configuration.

2.7 Circuit breaker control The configuration of circuit breaker control is made according to Q0_CON worksheet. It is configured for use with external synchro-chewhich means use of SWICONB. To use the optional internal synchcheck function, some modifications must be made according to ApparatusControl (1MRK 580 150-XEN), which also describes the connectionsother options, for example, autoreclosing. Trip signals from optional ptection functions are connected via the tripping logic. All breaker specindications, events and commands between the terminal and the sMMI and/or the remote gateway are configured in this worksheet.

In the Event function block for transferring of signals to the station MMthe suppression times for displaying and event handling of the breposition are set to one second to avoid presentation of middle position

2.8 Disconnector control There is one worksheet for each disconnector. The designations oworksheets are Q1_CON, Q2_CON and Q9_CON. The configuratiomade in the same way as for the breaker—without the possibilities to nect synchro-check, autoreclosing, and trip signals.

In the Event function block for transferring of signals to the station MMthe suppression time for displaying the disconnector position is set toto display the middle position. The suppression time for the event hdling of the disconnector position is set to 10 seconds—to avoid evduring the normal run of the disconnector.


Version 1.0-00

2.9 Earthing switch control

The confguration in the Q8_CON worksheet for the earthing switch is thesame as for the disconnector control.

2.10Input/output modules The I_O worksheet contains the configuration of the input/output signals.The FIXD-ON (true) and FIXD_OFF (false) signals are distributed toapplicable function block inputs in their own and other worksheets. Thesesignals are exchanged to other connections, for example, when options orother functions are added. This worksheet also displays the configurationthat connects I/O slots to the I/O modules.


Version 1.0-00

1MRK 580 188-XENPage 9 - 6

3 Appendix

3.1 List of function blocks The REC 561 control terminal contains the function blocks listed in Table2. Depending on selected options, only parts of all function blocks areincluded in a terminal at the same time.

Table 2: List of function blocks

Function block FB description Function type Comment

A001- Logic AND AND Logic AND gate number 1

































